Garmin Software Version 1633 A7

2015-05-27

: Garmin Garmin-Software-Version-1633-A7-720602 garmin-software-version-1633-a7-720602 garmin pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 628 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Embraer Phenom 300
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300
Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
Copyright © 2013 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 1633.A4 or later for the Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300. Some differences
in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200 Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/391.3411 Fax 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd, Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
Tel: 44/0870.8501241 Fax: 44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199 Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
For after-hours emergency, aircraft on ground (AOG) technical support for Garmin panel mount and integrated avionics systems, please
contact Garmin’s AOG Hotline at 913.397.0836.
Web Site Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Prodigy® is a registered trademark of Embraer-Empresa Brasileira de Aeronautica S.A.
Garmin® is a registered trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. WATCH®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are trademarks of Garmin Ltd.
or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International, Inc.; NavData® is a registered trademark of
Jeppesen, Inc.
SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio are provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio, Inc.
AC-U-KWIK® is a registered trademark of Penton Business Media Inc.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the
maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related
to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some jurisdictions
do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
March, 2013 190-01537-00 Rev. B Printed in the U.S.A.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
iii
LIMITED WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY
Within the warranty period, Garmin will, at its sole discretion, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs or
replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts and/or labor incidental to the direct repair of said product. Garmin may,
at its discretion with prior approval, reimburse an authorized Garmin Service Center for associated labor costs incurred for removal and
replacement of the panel mount product installed in an aircraft. The customer shall be responsible for any transportation or other cost. This
warranty does not apply to: (i) cosmetic damage, such as scratches, nicks and dents; (ii) consumable parts, such as batteries, unless product
damage has occurred due to a defect in materials or workmanship; (iii) damage caused by accident, abuse, misuse, water, flood, fire, or
other acts of nature or external causes; (iv) damage caused by service performed by anyone who is not an authorized service provider
of Garmin; or (v) damage to a product that has been modified or altered without the written permission of Garmin. In addition, Garmin
reserves the right to refuse warranty claims against products or services that are obtained and/or used in contravention of the laws of any
country.
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM
STATE TO STATE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER
RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. Some states do not
allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply in every case.
Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace (with a new or newly-overhauled replacement product) the product or offer a full
refund of the purchase price at its sole discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF
WARRANTY.
To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in locating the nearest Service Center, call
Garmin Customer Service at one of the numbers listed below.
Products sold through online auctions are not eligible for warranty coverage or rebates or other special offers from Garmin. Online auction
confirmations are not accepted for warranty verification. To obtain warranty service, an original or copy of the sales receipt from the original
retailer is required. Garmin will not replace missing components from any package purchased through an online auction.
Garmin International Inc.
1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062
Telephone: (913)397-8200
Telephone Toll Free: (888)606-5482
Facsimile: (913)397-8282
Facsimile Toll Free: (800)801-4670
E-mail: orders@garmin.com
avionics@garmin.com
warranty@garmin.com
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Southampton, SO40
9RB, UK
Telephone: ++44 (0) 870-8501243
Telephone Toll Free: ++44 (0) 0808 238 0000
(option 5)
Facsimile: ++44 (0) 238052004
E-mail: avionics.europe@garmin.com
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. Biv
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain avoidance
feature. The terrain avoidance feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight. The
terrain avoidance feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance. Terrain data is obtained from
third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be
relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current
aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used in the system must be updated
regularly in order to ensure that the information remains current. Pilots using any outdated database do so
entirely at their own risk.
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for primary navigation. Basemap data is
intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to
enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Traffic information shown on system displays is provided as an aid in visually acquiring traffic.
Pilots must maneuver the aircraft based only upon ATC guidance or positive visual acquisition of conflicting
traffic.
WARNING
:
Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING
:
Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
WARNING: The Prodigy
®
Touch Integrated Flight Deck 300, as installed in the Embraer Phenom 300 aircraft,
has a very high degree of functional integrity. However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring
and/or self-test capability for all conceivable system failures is not practical. Although unlikely, it may be
possible for erroneous operation to occur without a fault indication shown by the system. It is thus the
responsibility of the pilot to detect such an occurrence by means of cross-checking with all redundant or
correlated information available in the cockpit.
WARNING: For safety reasons, system operational procedures must be learned on the ground.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
v
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible
for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the system utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation
AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the system can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the Prodigy
®
Touch Pilot’s Guide documentation and the Embraer Phenom 300 Airplane Flight Manual. Thoroughly
practice basic operation prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare indications from the
system to all available navigation sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings,
charts, etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
WARNING: The illustrations in this guide are only examples. Never use the system to attempt to penetrate
a thunderstorm. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the
Aeronautical
Information
Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding “by at least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe or giving an
intense radar echo.”
WARNING:
Lamp(s) inside this product may contain mercury (HG) and must be recycled or disposed of
according to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/
aboutGarmin/environment/disposal.jsp.
WARNING:
Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, operating the system within the following
areas could result in loss of reliable attitude and heading indications. North of 72° North latitude at all
longitudes. South of 70° South latitude at all longitudes. North of 65° North latitude between longitude
75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada). North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W.
(Northern Canada). North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia).
South of 55° South latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New
Zealand).
WARNING:
Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a
system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.
CAUTION: The PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is very
sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE
ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an
eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
CAUTION: The system does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by an
authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and
the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. Bvi
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the panel and
displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current system and databases. Depictions of
equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE
: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Operating the system in the vicinity of metal structures or electro magnetic fields can cause sensor
differences that may result in large heading errors during start-up, shut down, or while taxiing. This may
result in heading miscompare or no compare annunciations.
NOTE
: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
vii
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number Revision Date Page Range Description
190-01537-00 A
B
March, 2013
March, 2013
All
Pages 62, 63
Initial production release.
Added missing callout numbers on Figures 2-1 and 2-2.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. Bviii
REVISION INFORMATION
Blank Page
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 System Description ................................................. 1
1.2 System Power-up ..................................................... 4
1.3 Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Controls ............. 6
PFD Controls ................................................................ 6
Touchscreen Controller ................................................ 13
1.4 System Operation .................................................. 32
Normal Display Operation ........................................... 32
Reversionary Display Operation ................................... 32
Touchscreen Controller Failure ..................................... 36
AHRS Operation ......................................................... 36
GPS Receiver Operation .............................................. 37
Annunciations ............................................................ 41
1.5 System Management ............................................ 42
Avionics Settings ........................................................ 42
Crew Profiles .............................................................. 50
Avionics Status ........................................................... 52
SiriusXM Information .................................................. 54
Screen Cleaning .......................................................... 54
1.6 Utilities ................................................................... 55
Timer ......................................................................... 55
Trip Stats ................................................................... 56
1.7 Secure Digital Cards.............................................. 59
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Flight Instruments ................................................. 64
Airspeed Indicator ...................................................... 64
Attitude Indicator ....................................................... 66
Altimeter ................................................................... 69
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) ....................................... 71
Vertical Deviation ....................................................... 72
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) .............................. 74
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) .................................. 78
2.2 Garmin SVT™ (Synthetic Vision Technology) ...... 85
SVT Operation ............................................................ 86
SVT Features .............................................................. 87
Field of View .............................................................. 96
2.3 Supplemental Flight Data .................................... 97
Temperature Displays .................................................. 97
Wind Data ................................................................. 98
Vertical Navigation (VNAV) Indications ......................... 99
2.4 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions ...... 100
Marker Beacon Annunciations.................................... 100
Traffic Annunciations................................................. 100
Terrain Annunciations ............................................... 101
Altitude Alerting ....................................................... 101
Low Altitude Annunciation ........................................ 102
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting .... 102
Radar Altimeter ........................................................ 103
2.5 Abnormal Operations ......................................... 105
Abnormal GPS Conditions ......................................... 105
Unusual Attitudes ..................................................... 106
Garmin SVT Troubleshooting ...................................... 107
SVT Unusual Attitudes ............................................... 107
SECTION 3 ENGINE AND AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
3.1 Engine Indication System (EIS) .......................... 111
Takeoff Data Set Window .......................................... 112
Engine Indications .................................................... 113
Fuel and Electrical Indications .................................... 115
Cabin Pressurization ................................................. 116
Spoiler and Landing Gear .......................................... 117
Flaps and Trim .......................................................... 118
3.2 Synoptics .............................................................. 119
System Status ........................................................... 120
Environmental Control System (ECS) .......................... 121
Electrical .................................................................. 123
Fuel ......................................................................... 124
Ice Protection System ................................................ 125
Engine Maintenance ................................................. 127
3.3 Crew Alerting System (CAS) ............................... 128
CAS Message Prioritization ........................................ 128
3.4 Abnormal Operations ......................................... 129
Engine ..................................................................... 129
Cabin pressurization ................................................. 130
Flaps ....................................................................... 131
Trim ......................................................................... 131
SECTION 4 AUDIO AND CNS
4.1 Overview .............................................................. 133
PFD COM/NAV display and Controls ........................... 133
Touchscreen Controller Audio and CNS Controls .......... 134
4.2 COM Operation .................................................... 136
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation ................... 136
COM Frequency Tuning .............................................. 139
Frequency Spacing .................................................... 146
Automatic Squelch .................................................... 147
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. Bx
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Volume .................................................................... 148
HF COM Transceiver Selection and Activation ..............149
HF COM Volume ....................................................... 150
4.3 NAV Operation ..................................................... 151
NAV Radio Selection and Activation ........................... 151
NAV Receiver Tuning ................................................. 152
Marker Beacon Receiver ............................................ 158
ADF/DME Tuning ...................................................... 159
4.4 Mode S Transponder ........................................... 164
TCAS II Transponder Controls ..................................... 164
TCAS II Transponder Mode Selection ........................... 165
Entering a Transponder Code ..................................... 166
IDENT Function ........................................................ 168
Flight ID Reporting.................................................... 168
4.5 Additional Audio Functions ................................ 169
Mono/Stereo Headsets .............................................. 169
Speaker ................................................................... 169
Intercom .................................................................. 170
Passenger Address (PA) System .................................. 176
Clearance Recorder and Player ................................... 177
Simultaneous COM Operation .................................... 178
Entertainment Inputs ................................................ 179
4.6 Controller Pilot Data Link Communications
(CPDLC) ........................................................................... 180
Connecting to the CPDLC System ............................... 180
Creating a Message .................................................. 183
Responding to an ATC Message ................................. 185
Viewing CPDLC Message Dialogs ............................... 185
Deleting Message Dialogs ......................................... 186
Disconnecting from the CPDLC System ....................... 186
4.7 Abnormal Operation ........................................... 187
Stuck Microphone ..................................................... 187
COM Tuning Failure ................................................... 187
Emergency Mode ...................................................... 187
Audio Controller Fail-Safe Operation .......................... 188
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.1 Introduction ......................................................... 189
Navigation Status Bar ............................................... 191
5.2 Using Map Displays ............................................. 193
Map Settings Sync .................................................... 193
Map Orientation ....................................................... 194
Map Range .............................................................. 196
Map Panning ............................................................ 198
Topography .............................................................. 203
Map Symbols ........................................................... 206
Airways ................................................................... 212
Track Vector ............................................................. 214
Wind Vector ............................................................. 215
Fuel Range Ring ....................................................... 216
Field of View (SVT) .................................................... 217
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc ................................... 218
Obstacles ................................................................. 219
5.3 Waypoints ............................................................. 220
Airports ................................................................... 221
Intersections ............................................................ 227
NDBs ....................................................................... 230
VORs ....................................................................... 233
User Waypoints ........................................................ 236
5.4 Airspaces .............................................................. 244
5.5 Direct-to-Navigation ..........................................248
5.6 Flight Planning ..................................................... 254
Flight Plan Creation .................................................. 255
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan ................ 260
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan ................................. 264
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan .................. 266
Flight Plan Storage ................................................... 273
Flight Plan Editing .................................................... 275
Along Track Offsets ................................................... 278
Parallel Track ............................................................ 279
Activating a Flight Plan Leg ....................................... 282
Inverting a Flight Plan ............................................... 283
Closest Point of FPL .................................................. 285
User-Defined Holding Patterns ................................... 286
5.7 Vertical Navigation ............................................. 289
Altitude Constraints .................................................. 293
5.8 Procedures ...........................................................296
Departures ............................................................... 296
Arrivals ................................................................... 298
Approaches ............................................................. 300
5.9 Trip Planning ........................................................ 307
Weight and Fuel ....................................................... 307
Trip Planning ............................................................ 312
5.10 Navigating a Flight Plan ..................................... 316
5.11 Abnormal Operation ........................................... 342
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
xi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SiriusXM Weather ................................................ 346
Activating Services .................................................... 346
Accessing SiriusXM Weather Products ........................ 347
6.2 Airborne Color Weather Radar .......................... 373
System Description ................................................... 373
Principles of Airborne Weather Radar .......................... 373
NEXRAD and Airborne Weather Radar ....................... 374
Antenna Beam Illumination ....................................... 374
Safe Operating Distance ............................................ 377
Basic Antenna Tilt Setup ............................................ 378
Weather Mapping and Interpretation ......................... 380
Ground Mapping and Interpretation ........................... 394
Additional Radar Displays .......................................... 395
System Status ........................................................... 397
6.3 TAWS-A ................................................................. 399
Displaying TAWS-A Information ................................. 400
TAWS Pane .............................................................. 403
System Status ........................................................... 417
TAWS-A Abnormal Operations ................................... 417
6.4 TCAS II TraffiC ...................................................... 419
TCAS II Alerts ........................................................... 420
Displaying TCAS II Traffic ........................................... 422
Operation ................................................................ 425
System Status ........................................................... 429
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Basic Autopilot Operation .......................................... 432
7.1 AFCS Controls ...................................................... 433
7.2 Flight Director Operation ................................... 435
Activating the Flight Director ..................................... 435
Flight Director Selection ............................................ 436
AFCS Status Box ....................................................... 436
Command Bars ......................................................... 437
Flight Director Modes ................................................ 438
7.3 Vertical Modes ..................................................... 439
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT) ............................................... 440
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS) ....................... 441
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT) .......................................... 441
Vertical Speed Mode (VS) .......................................... 443
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC) ................................. 444
Vertical Navigation Modes (VPTH , ALTV) .................... 445
Glidepath Mode (GP) ................................................ 450
Glideslope Mode (GS) ............................................... 452
Takeoff (TO) and Go Around (GA) Modes .................... 453
7.4 Lateral Modes ...................................................... 454
Roll Hold Mode (ROL) ............................................... 455
Low Bank Mode ....................................................... 455
Heading Select Mode (HDG) ...................................... 456
Navigation Modes (FMS, VOR, LOC, BC) ...................... 457
Approach Modes (FMS, VAPP, LOC) ............................. 459
7.5 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation ............. 461
Flight Control ........................................................... 461
Engaging the Autopilot and Yaw Damper .................... 462
Control Wheel Steering ............................................. 462
Disengaging the Autopilot and Yaw Damper ................ 462
7.6 Example Procedures ............................................464
Departure ................................................................ 464
Intercepting a VOR Radial .......................................... 467
Flying a Flight Plan/FMS Course ................................. 468
Descent ................................................................... 469
Approach ................................................................. 473
Go Around/Missed Approach ..................................... 476
7.7 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts ......................... 478
AFCS CAS Messages ................................................. 478
AFCS Voice Alerts ...................................................... 478
Overspeed Protection ................................................ 479
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 SafeTaxi ................................................................ 482
SafeTaxi Database Information .................................. 484
8.2 ChartView (Optional) .......................................... 486
Chart Selection ......................................................... 487
Day/Night View ........................................................ 489
ChartView Database Information ............................... 491
8.3 FliteCharts ............................................................ 495
Chart Selection ......................................................... 496
Day/Night View ........................................................ 498
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date ............. 500
8.4 Airport Directory ................................................. 503
Airport Directory Database Cycle Number & Revision ... 504
8.5 Satellite Telephone and Datalink Services ....... 506
Registering With Connext .......................................... 506
Contacts .................................................................. 507
Telephone Communication (Optional) ......................... 510
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. Bxii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Text Messaging (SMS) ............................................... 518
WiFi Connections (Optional) ...................................... 527
8.6 SiriusXM Satellite Radio (Optional) .................. 530
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Services ......................... 530
Using SiriusXM Radio ................................................ 532
8.7 Scheduled Messages ........................................... 535
8.8 Electronic Documents ......................................... 539
Installed Documents ................................................. 539
User Documents ....................................................... 539
Viewing Electronic Documents ................................... 540
8.9 Flight Data Logging ............................................ 544
8.10 Checklists ............................................................. 546
8.11 Abnormal Operation ........................................... 549
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts ............................................. 551
Crew Alerting System (CAS) ....................................... 551
CAS Messages .......................................................... 552
Comparator Annunciations ........................................ 558
Reversionary Sensor Annunciations ............................ 559
Prodigy
®
Touch Flight Deck 300 System Annunciations . 560
Prodigy
®
Touch Voice Alerts ....................................... 562
Pilot Profile Import/Export Messages .......................... 577
TAWS-A ALERTS........................................................ 577
TCAS II Alerts and Annunciations ............................... 579
Database Management ................................................ 581
Jeppesen Databases .................................................. 581
Automatic Database Synchronization Feature .............. 586
Garmin Databases .................................................... 587
Glossary .......................................................................... 593
Frequently Asked Questions ........................................ 599
Map Symbols ................................................................. 603
INDEX
Index ................................................................................ I-1
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
1
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This section provides an overview of the Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 as installed in the Phenom
300 aircraft. The Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 is an integrated flight control system that presents
flight instrumentation, position, navigation, communication, and identification information to the flight crew
using flat-panel color displays and Touchscreen Controllers. The system consists of the following Line Replaceable
Units (LRUs):
• GDU 1400W (3) – Each GDU is configured as one of two Primary Flight Displays (PFDs) or one Multi-
function Display (MFD). The GDU 1400W features a 14-inch light emitting diode (LED) backlit widescreen
display with a 1280 x 800 resolution. The unit installed on the left/pilot side is designated as PFD1, and the
one installed on the right/copilot side is designated as PFD2. The unit installed in the center is designated as
the MFD. The displays communicate with each other, the Touchscreen Controllers, and with the on-side GIA
63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) through a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection.
•
GTC 570 (2)
– The Touchscreen Controller provides MFD control, Multi-function Window (MFW) control
on the PFD, in addition to FMS functions, data entry capability, and communications control to the system.
The unit installed on the left/pilot side is designated as GTC1, and the one installed on the right/copilot side is
designated as GTC2. Each touchscreen controller communicates with the on-side PFD in addition to the MFD
using an HDSB connection.
•
GMA 36 (2)
– The Remote Audio Unit integrates navigation/communication radio (NAV/COM) digital audio,
intercom, and marker beacon audio. Each unit is connected to the on-side Touchscreen Controller using an
HSDB interface and to the cross-side IAU using an RS-232 connection as a backup path. Each GMA 36 is also
connected to the Cockpit Voice Recorder (CVR) using a digital/analog connection.
•
GIA 63W
(2) – The Integrated Avionics Units (IAU) function as the main communications hub, linking several
LRUs with each on-side PFD. Each IAU contains a GPS Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS) receiver,
a very high frequency (VHF) communication/navigation/glideslope (COM/NAV/GS) receiver, a flight director
(FD) and system integration microprocessors.
•
GEA 71 (3)
– The Engine Airframe Unit receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors.
This unit communicates with both IAUs using an RS-485 digital interface.
•
GSD 41
(2) – This unit is a data concentrator used to expand the input and output capabilities of the system.
HSDB communications occur among Garmin LRUs. The ARINC 429 protocol connects non-Garmin LRUs as
shown in Figure 1-1.
•
GRS 77
(2) – The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading
information via ARINC 429 protocol to the on-side and cross-side IAU, the on-side PFD, and to the MFD.
An RS-232 backup path connects each AHRS to each IAU. The AHRS contains advanced sensors (including
accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the Magnetometer to obtain magnetic field information,
with the ADC to obtain air data, and with both IAUs to obtain GPS information. AHRS operation is discussed
in System Operation, later in this section.
•
GMU 44
(2) – The Magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends data to the AHRS for processing
to determine aircraft magnetic heading. The magnetometer receives power directly from the AHRS and
communicates with it via an RS-485/422 and RS-232 digital interface.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B2
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
•
GDR 66 (1)
– The VHF Data Link Transciever is a transceiver for sending and receiving Controller Pilot Data
Link Communications (CPDLC) messages by using the Touchscreen Controllers. It also supports analog voice
communications. It communicates with the #1 GSD 41 unit using an RS-485/422 interface.
•
GDL 69A
– The Satellite Data Link Radio Receiver receives weather information, as well as digital audio
entertainment. The Data Link Receiver communicates with the #1 GSD, #2 GSD, and MFD via a HSDB
connection. A subscription to SiriusXM Weather and/or SiriusXM Satellite Radio service is required to enable
the GDL 69A capability.
•
GMC 715
– The AFCS Mode Controller provides AFCS control through an RS-232 digital interface. The unit
is connected to PFD1 and the MFD.
•
GSA 80
(1) and
GSA 81 (3)
– The GSA 80 Servo is used for automatic control of YAS-SAS. The GSA 81 Servos
are used for automatic control of pitch, roll, and yaw. These units interface with each IAU using RS-482/422
connections.
•
GSM 86 (4) –
The GSM 86 Servo Gearboxes are responsible for transferring the output torque of the servo
actuators to the mechanical flight-control surface linkages.
•
GWX 70
(1) – Provides airborne weather and ground mapped radar data to the PFDs and to the MFD. The unit
is connected to the #1 GSD via HSDB connection.
•
GDL 59
(1) – Provides a Wi-Fi datalink and System Data Logging capability. The unit is connected to the
#2 GSD via HSDB, and to the optional GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver using an RS-232 bus and a digital/analog
connection.
•
GSR 56
(1) – The Iridium Transceiver provides voice communications by means of a telephone handset in the
cabin and pilot and copilot headsets in the cockpit. The transceiver can also send and receive short message
service (SMS) text messages. The GSR 56 also receives data link weather products from the Garmin Connext
weather service through the Iridium satellite network. The transceiver can also send and receive data provided
by the GDL 59 through the RS-232 bus.
The Phenom 300 is also equipped with a GFC 700 Automated Flight Control System (AFCS), providing the
flight director (FD), autopilot (AP), manual electric trim, and touch control steering (TCS) functions of the
Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 System.
NOTE: Refer to the Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) Section for details on the GFC 700 AFCS.
Figure 1-1 shows interconnection of the LRUs.
NOTE: For information on optional equipment not shown in Figure 1-1, consult the applicable optional
interface user’s guide. This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with the operation of this
additional equipment
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
3
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GSA 81 (Pitch)
GSA 81 (Roll)
GSA 81 (Yaw)
GSA 80 (YAS-SAS)
GDU 1400W
(PFD1)
#1 GMA 36
(Audio
Processor)
#1 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
VHF COM
GPS/SBAS
VOR/LOC
G/S
Flight
Director
AFCS Mode
Logic
Servo Logic
#2 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)
VHF COM
GPS/SBAS
VOR/LOC
G/S
Flight
Director
AFCS Mode
Logic
Servo Logic
GDU 1400W
(PFD2)
#1 GTC 570
(Touchscreen
Controller)
GDU 1400W
(MFD)
#2 GTC 570
(Touchscreen
Controller)
#2 GEA 71 (Engine
& Airframe)
#1 GSD 41
(Data
Concentrator)
#2 GSD 41
(Data
Concentrator)
#1 Smart Probe
(Air Data)
#2 Smart Probe
(Air Data)
#2 GMA 36
(Audio
Processor)
#1 GRS 77
(Attitude &
Heading)
#2 GRS 77
(Attitude &
Heading)
232 485/422 Digital/Analog Signal
Optional
429 HSDB
Standard
232 485/422 Digital/Analog Signal
429 HSDB
GWX 70
(Weather
Radar)
GMC 715
(AFCS Mode
Controller)
#1 GMU 44
(Magnetometer)
#2 GMU 44
(Magnetometer)
#3 GEA 71 (Engine
& Airframe)
#3 GEA 71 (Engine
& Airframe I/F)
GDR 66
(VHF Data Link
Transceiver)
Non-Garmin Equipment Optional
Garmin Equipment
Garmin Equipment
#1 GEA 71 (Engine
& Airframe)
GDL 69
(SiriusXM Datalink)
MFD
HSDB
Reversionay
Switch
Normal
Mode
MFD Failed
Mode
GDL 59
(Datalink)
GSR 56
(Iridium)
Figure 1-1 Basic System Block Diagram
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B4
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.2 SYSTEM POWER-UP
NOTE: See the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for specific procedures concerning avionics power application
and emergency power supply operation.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for system-specific annunciations and alerts.
The Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly
from electrical busses. The PFDs, MFD, Touchscreen Controllers, and supporting sub-systems include both
power-on and continuous built-in test features that exercise the processors, memory, external inputs, and outputs
to provide safe operation.
During system power-up, the system displays test annunciations, as shown in Figure 1-2. All system annunciations
should be extinguished typically within the first minute of power-up. Upon power-up, annunciator lights on the
AFCS Controller illuminate momentarily.
On the PFDs, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays “AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level”. The AHRS should
display valid attitude and heading fields typically within the first minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself
both while taxiing and during level flight.
When the MFD powers up, the splash screen (Figure 1-3) displays the following information:
• System version
• Copyright
• Checklist name and version
• Land database name and version
• Safe Taxi database information
• Terrain database name and version
• Obstacle database name and version
• Navigation database name, version, and effective dates
• Airport Directory name, version and effective dates
• FliteCharts/ChartView database information
Current database information includes database type, cycle number, or valid operating dates. Review the listed
information for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired).
Pressing the right-most softkey on the MFD acknowledges this information, and the MFD then shows the EIS
(Engine Indication System) Display, the Navigation Map Pane (in Half Mode), and the Traffic Map Pane (in Half
Mode).
When the system has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to determine a position, the system displays the
aircraft’s current position on the Navigation Map Pane.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
5
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Figure 1-4 Touchscreen Controller Home
Screen
Figure 1-2 PFD Power-Up Figure 1-3 MFD Power-Up
Test Annunciation
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B6
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.3 PRODIGY® TOUCH FLIGHT DECK 300 CONTROLS
The Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 controls have been designed to simplify operation of the system and
minimize workload and the time required to access sophisticated functionality. Controls are located on the PFD
bezels, the Touchscreen Controllers, and the AFCS Controller. PFD controls and the Touchscreen Controllers are
discussed in this section. AFCS controls are described in the AFCS section. See the Audio and CNS Section for
more information about NAV/COM controls.
PFD CONTROLS
Figure 1-5 PFD Softkeys in Full Mode and Split Mode
PFD Softkeys (Split Mode)
Display Pane does not
use softkeys
PFD Softkeys (Full Mode)
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
7
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Selection softkeys are located along the bottom of the PFD. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
previously selected. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. There
are three types of softkeys. One selects a simple on/off state, indicated by an annunciator on the softkey label
displayed as green (on) or gray (off). The next type of softkey selects among several options, indicated by the
softkey label changing (with the exception of the Map Range keys) to reflect the name of the chosen option.
The last type of softkey, when pressed displays another set of softkeys available for the selected function. Also,
these softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity. When a softkey function is disabled,
the softkey label is subdued (dimmed).
Figure 1-6 Top Level PFD Softkeys
Softkey Names
(FMS selected
for the CDI)
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (Press)
Selected
Function
On
Subdued
Softkey
(function
unavailable)
Full Mode
PFD CAS Scrolling
Softkeys Shown in
Reversionary Mode
Only
Split or Reversionary Mode
Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be selected to return to the previous level.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B8
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Figure 1-7 Inset Map Settings and CAS Softkeys
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
9
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Figure 1-8 PFD Settings Softkeys
Figure 1-9 Sensor Softkeys
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B10
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Description
Map
Range -
Decreases the Inset Map display range
Map
Range +
Increases the Inset Map display range
Inset Map
Settings
Displays the Inset Map display settings softkeys
Off
Removes the Inset Map from the display
Detail
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter
levels:
All (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR 1: Declutters land data
DCLTR 2: Declutters land and SUA data
Least: Removes everything except for the active flight plan
Weather
Legend
Displays/removes the name of the selected data link weather
provider (SiriusXM, Connext) and the weather product icon and
age box (for enabled weather products).
Traffic
Adds or removes the display of traffic on the Inset Navigation Map.
The softkey annunciator is green when the traffic function is on.
When the traffic function is off, the annunciator is gray.
Topo
Adds or removes the display of map topography on the Inset Map.
The softkey annunciator is green when topography is on. When
topography is off, the annunciator is gray.
Terrain
Adds or removes the display of relative terrain information on the
Inset Navigation Map. The softkey annunciator is green when
topography is on. When topography is off, the annunciator is gray.
NEXRAD
Radar
Displays/removes NEXRAD Inset Map; cycles through regions.
USA: Displays NEXRAD data only for the United States
Canada: Displays NEXRAD data only for Canada
Off: Removes NEXRAD data from the Inset Map
SiriusXM
Lightning
Adds or removes the display of SiriusXM information on the Inset
Navigation Map. The softkey annunciator is green when the
lightning function is on. When the lightning function is off, the
annunciator is gray.
METAR
Adds or removes the display of SiriusXM or Connext METAR data
on the Inset Navigation Map. The softkey annunciator is green
when the METAR data is enabled. When the METAR data is off,
the annunciator is gray.
Traffic
Map
Replaces the Inset Map with a dedicated traffic display. The softkey
annunciator is green when the dedicated traffic display on. When
the Inset Map is on, the softkey annunciator is gray.
PFD
Settings
Displays the PFD settings softkeys.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
11
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Description
Synthetic
Vision
Displays the softkeys for enabling or disabling Synthetic Vision
features.
Pathways
Displays Pathway Boxes on the Synthetic Vision Display.
Synthetic
Terrain
Enables synthetic terrain depiction.
Horizon
Heading
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line.
Airport
Signs
Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm
of the current aircraft position. Airport identifiers are displayed
when the airport is within approximately 9 nm.
PFD Mode
Enables or disables a multi-function Display Pane on the PFD.
FULL: Display Pane is disabled. The PFD display occupies the full
screen.
Split: Display Pane is enabled. The PFD screen is split between
the PFD display and the Display Pane.
Bearing 1
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through NAV1, GPS/
waypoint identifier and GPS-derived distance information, ADF/
frequency, and Off.
Bearing 2
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through NAV2, GPS/
waypoint identifier and GPS-derived distance information, ADF/
frequency, and Off.
Other PFD
Settings
Displays additional PFD settings softkeys.
Wind
Displays the wind option softkeys
Option 1
Headwind/Tailwind and crosswind components.
Option 2
Wind direction arrow and speed.
Option 3
Wind direction arrow with direction and speed.
Off
Information not displayed.
Altitude
Units
Displays softkeys to select altitude unit parameters.
Meters
When enabled, displays altimeter in meters.
IN
Press to display the BARO setting as inches of mercury
HPA
Press to display the BARO setting as hectopacals.
COM1
121.5
Tunes COM1 to the emergency frequency.
OBS
Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only
available with active leg). When OBS is on, the softkey annunciator
is green.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B12
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4
Description
Active
NAV
Cycles through FMS, VOR1, and VOR2 navigation modes on the
CDI.
Sensors
Displays the sensor selection softkeys.
ADC
Settings
Displays the ADC selection softkeys.
ADC 1
Selects the number 1 ADC. The softkey annunciator is green when
selected.
ADC 2
Selects the number 2 ADC. The softkey annunciator is green when
selected.
ADC
Standby
Indicates the standby ADC input is being used by the system.
AHRS
Settings
Displays the AHRS selection softkeys.
AHRS 1
Selects the number 1 AHRS. The softkey annunciator is green when
selected.
AHRS 2
Selects the number 2 AHRS. The softkey annunciator is green when
selected.
AHRS
Standby
Indicates the standby AHRS input is being used by the system.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
13
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLLER
The Touchscreen Controllers are a pedestal-mounted user interface allowing for ease of data entry, MFD/
Display Pane operation, and NAV/COM tuning. The touchscreen uses an infrared grid to determine the
location of touch and allows usage with gloves. Many procedures in this Pilot’s Guide are performed using the
Touchscreen Controller.
Radio tuning can be accomplished using the CNS Bar at the top of the Touchscreen Controller screen (refer
to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information about NAV/COM tuning).
Figure 1-10 GTC 570 Touchscreen Controller
8
6
2
3
1
4
5
9
7
1
CNS Bar Displays/controls COM, NAV, XPDR, and ICS functions
2
Screen Title Displays the title of the current screen
3
Screen Displays set of context sensitive controls and data
4
Button Bar Displays System level buttons (e.g. Home, MSG, Full/Half, Scroll Up/Down, Back, Enter,
Cancel)
5
Label Bar Displays labels to show status and current functions of joystick and knobs
6
Joystick Provides functions as labeled on the screen (e.g. Map Panning, Map Range)
7
Middle Knob Provides functions as labeled on the screen (e.g. COM volume/squelch)
8
Large Right Knob Provides functions as labeled on the screen (e.g. COM Freq/switching, Data Entry)
9
Small Right Knob Provides functions as labeled on the screen (e.g. COM Freq/switching/Hold, Data Entry)
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B14
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The Touchscreen Controller’s functions are arranged by screen. Each screen has a title which appears at the
top of the screen area (and below the CNS bar). The contents of each screen change dynamically in response
to pilot or system input.
All of the Touchscreen Controller’s available functions are accessible from the Home Screen. The Home
Screen may be accessed any time it is not currently displayed by touching the Home button in the Button Bar
below the screen area. Procedures in this Pilot’s Guide generally begin from the Home Screen as a reference
point; however it is not necessary to return to the Home Screen before performing each procedure if the
appropriate screen is already displayed.
Direct To Button Touched
Home Screen
Touch to Return to
Home Screen
Direct To Screen
Figure 1-11 Touchscreen Controller Screen Navigation
Touch to Return to
Previous Screen
As the Touchscreen Controller is used, certain selections will cause another screen to be displayed. To return
to the previous screen, touch the Back or Cancel Button (as applicable) in the Button Bar, or touch the Home
Button to return to the Home Screen. If the Home Screen was the previous screen, pressing either the Back or
Home Button will also return to the Home Screen.
The CNS Bar, positioned above the screen area, is always displayed during system operation and is accessible
at any time. Some functions on the CNS Bar will cause another screen to be displayed (in the screen area below
the CNS Bar); however, touching the Back or Cancel Button will return to the previous screen.
Touch to Access
Intercom Screen
Touch to Access
Audio & Radios
Screen
Touch to Access COM 1
Standby Screen Touch to Access COM 2
Standby Screen
Touch to Access
the Transponder
Screen
Figure 1-12 Accessing Screens with the CNS Bar
Touch to Identify.
IDENT will show
green and pulse.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
15
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The Button Bar, displayed below the screen area, displays the system-level buttons which are context-sensitive.
For example, if scrolling is available on a screen, the Button Bar includes corresponding Up and Down Scroll
Arrow buttons.
Figure 1-13 Button Bar Displays System-Level Buttons
The Button Bar is also where the Home, Cancel, and Back buttons are displayed. If the system issues a
message, the MSG button is shown. Touching this button will display the Messages Screen. The Button Bar
also contains a Full or Half button for controlling the size of display pane on the MFD (discussed later in this
section).
Returns to the Home Screen Selects MFD half-display mode.
Returns to the previous screen Selects MFD full-display mode
Displays the CPDLC Messages
window on Touchscreen
Controller. Flashes when a new
CPDLC message is received.
Scrolls up in a list
Displays the System Messages
window on Touchscreen
Controller. Flashes when a new
system message is issued.
Scrolls down in a list
Displays the Telephone window
on Touchscreen Controller.
Flashes when a new telephone
call is received.
Cancels data entry and returns to the
previous screen
Displays the SMS Text Inbox
window on Touchscreen
Controller. Flashes when a new
CPDLC message is received.
Accepts entered data into the system.
Table 1-1 Button Bar Buttons with Functions
The Label Bar, near the bottom of the Touchscreen Controller and above the Joystick and Knobs displays the
current function of each control as a reference. These functions include Map Range adjustment, Display Pane
selection, radio volume/squelch adjustment, COM radio tuning, and alphanumeric data entry.
Figure 1-14 Label Bar Indicates Context-Sensitive Joystick and Knob Functions
Joystick Functions Middle Knob Functions Large and Small Right
Knob Functions
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B16
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The labels change based on the context of the options being performed. If a Touchscreen Controller Knob
cannot be used because of a failure in a system component (COM, NAV, Audio, etc.), the Label Bar will also
indicate this status; refer to the Audio and CNS section for more information about radio failures.
The Touchscreen Controller recognizes input based on a touch, a gesture (such as sliding a finger), or by
pressing or turning the Knobs or Joystick.
On-screen buttons can be ‘pressed’ by momentarily touching them with a finger and then releasing. It is not
necessary to apply pressure, as the infrared touchscreen surface detects the only the presence and movement
of the finger, not pressure. When touched, the button background is highlighted in blue until the finger is
released. If enabled, an aural ‘click’ sound is also issued to confirm the button has been touched. When
releasing the finger, make sure it released within the boundary of the button, otherwise the input is considered
invalid. If enabled, an aural ‘doink’ is heard to indicate the touch input was not accepted.
NOTE: While the touch screen controller provides a high level of touch recognition accuracy, consider the
following to reduce the probability of touch errors:
• Make sure each button touch results in the expected response.
• Avoid holding anything close to the glass surface while deciding which button to touch, or resting the
hand or fingers on the bezel edges around the glass surface. This can cause interruption of the infrared
beams, leading to inadvertent activation or unresponsive touchscreen controls.
• When selecting a button on a scrollable list, avoid sliding movements which can cause inadvertent
scrolling.
Some adjustments are made using horizontal or vertical sliders. To use, simply touch within the slider box
and slide the finger in the desired slider bar direction, then release the finger. The finger may move outside
of the slider box during adjustment; slider movement stops when either the finger is released or the slider has
reached its maximum travel.
Volume Adjustment Slider
Figure 1-15 Sliders on the Touchscreen Controller
Map Detail Adjustment Slider
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
17
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
When a Touchscreen Controller screen window contains more information than the window can currently
show, a scroll bar and scroll buttons appear. To scroll inside of a window, touch the controller while moving
the finger up or down accordingly. To scroll more quickly, move the finger up or down rapidly in a flicking
motion. Scrolling can also be performed by pressing the Up or Down scroll buttons. If additional scrolling
is required to view all information in the window, each touch of the scroll button will display one ‘page’ of
information.
Some screens provide tabs as a means to group multiple categories of information or buttons. Touch the
desired tab to display its contents and manage settings or information. The selected tab is highlighted.
Selected Tab Highlighted
Other Available Tabs
Scroll Bar
Scroll Arrows
Figure 1-16 Touchscreen Controller with Tabs and Scroll Arrows
Elements on the Touchscreen Controller screens (such as buttons and sliders) appear subdued (dimmed) to
indicate their functions are currently not available.
Touch To Activate
Direct-To
Figure 1-17 Subdued Buttons on Touchscreen Controller
Buttons Subdued Until
Direct-To is Activated
In some cases, the screen area of the Touchscreen controller (including the buttons) may also appear subdued
to indicate functions on that screen are unavailable while the other Touchscreen Controller is controlling a
particular system resource.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B18
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
BUTTON TYPES
Annunciator Buttons operate in an on/off state. An ‘on’ or enabled button displays a green annunciator; an
‘off’ or disabled button displays a gray annunciator. Touch the annunciator button to change its state.
On or Enabled Off or Disabled
Figure 1-18 Touchscreen Controller Annunciator Buttons
Datafield Buttons can be modified based on information the pilot can enter or change, and often contain
light blue alphanumeric text. Touching datafield button will either display a pop-up window from which a
selection can be made, or display a keypad to supply the data. See the Data Entry discussion in this section
for more information.
Figure 1-19 Touchscreen Controller Datafield Buttons
If a system failure causes a button’s function to be inaccessible, a yellow ‘X’ appears over the button.. These
buttons will not respond if touched.
Button Function Not
Available Due to LRU
Failure
Figure 1-20 Failed Buttons on Touchscreen Controller
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
19
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SCREENS
Home Screen
On the Home Screen, the top row of buttons (Map, Traffic, Datalink Weather, and TAWS) are each
associated with a corresponding display that may be presented on a display pane. When one of these
buttons is touched, the selected display pane shows the associated display and the button border on the
Touchscreen Controller is highlighted in light blue to indicate the map associated with the button is selected
for display. When returning to the Home Screen, the selected display pane will show the display associated
with the highlighted button.
Shows Navigation Map Display in the selected Display Pane. Touch button again to access Map Settings Display
on Touchscreen Controller.
Shows Traffic Map Display in the selected Display Pane. Touch button again to access Traffic Map Settings Display
on Touchscreen Controller.
Shows Weather Display in the selected Display Pane. Touch button again to access Map Settings Display on
Touchscreen Controller.
Shows the TAWS Display in the selected Display Pane. Touch button again to access TAWS Settings screen on
Touchscreen Controller.
Accesses Direct-To screen on Touchscreen Controller.
Accesses Active Flight Plan screen on the Touchscreen Controller. A Flight Plan display is shown on the selected
Display Pane.
Accesses Procedures screen on Touchscreen Controller. Additional map displays may be shown as procedures are
selected.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B20
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Accesses Charts screen on Touchscreen Controller. Charts are shown on the selected Display Pane.
Accesses Systems screen on Touchscreen Controller. Systems data can be selected for display on the Touchscreen
Controller, and displayed on the MFD. Also provides means to perform and monitor system tests.
Touch to display the Checklist Screen. The Checklist Screen provides access to the various aircraft checklists.
Accesses Services Menu Screen on Touchscreen Controller. Includes optional voice phone and text messaging
services, SiriusXM Satellite Radio controls.
Weight and Fuel, TOLD (Takeoff and Landing Data) VREF, Trip Planning functions, Minimums, Trip Statistics, Timer,
Scheduled Messages, GPS Status, FLC Profile, Initialization.
Displays the CPDLC (Controller Pilot Data Link Communications) Screen. Provides controls for managing CPDLC
connections, and message management features.
Displays the Speed Bugs Screen on the Touchscreen Controller. Provides for enabling and disabling speed bugs
and setting bug parameters.
Provides information about Airports, Intersections, VORs, NDBs, User Waypoints. Also allows creation of User
Waypoints.
Provides information about the nearest Airports, Intersections, VORs, NDBs, User Waypoints, Airspace, ARTCC facilities,
Flight Service Stations, and Weather reporting stations.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
21
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
aircraft SyStemS Screen
Shows the Status display in Half-Mode in the selected Display Pane. Includes information on various aircraft
systems.
Shows the Environmental Control System synoptic display in the selected Display Pane in Half-Mode. Includes
information on the cabin temperature, oxygen quantities, and cabin pressurization.
Shows the Electrical synoptic display in the selected Display Pane in Half-Mode. Includes information on batteries,
generators, and busses.
Shows the Fuel synoptics display in the selected Display Pane in Half-Mode. Includes the fuel quantities and
weights, statuses of fuel flow, and valve positions.
Shows the Anti Ice synoptic display in the selected Display Pane. Displays anti-ice system status information.
Displays the Engine Settings Screen on the Touchscreen Controller. This screen provides for changing engine thrust
rating and entering takeoff data.
Displays the Landing Field Elevation Screen on the Touchscreen Controller. Allows for manual or FMS entry of field
elevation.
Provides functions accessible to maintenance personnel.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B22
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
ServiceS Screen
Music Screen provides controls for SiriusXM Satellite Radio including channel selection, volume, and muting
settings.
Telephone Screen shows the status of the Iridium satellite telephone connection and provides telephone controls.
SMS Text Messaging Screen provides management of incoming and outgoing SMS (short message service) text
messages.
Contacts Screen provides management of contact information including phone and email addresses. Also provides
quick access to stored contacts via phone, SMS, or email.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
23
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
UtilitieS Screen
Accesses Weight and Fuel screen on the Touchscreen Controller. Provides for input of weight and balance data
and performs calculations.
Accesses the Trip Planning screen on the Touchscreen Controller.
Accesses the Minimums screen on the Touchscreen Controller. Provides controls for the Minimum Descent
Altitude/Decision Height alerting function. Button displays the current minimums altitude and source if provided.
Accesses the Trip Statistics screen on the Touchscreen Controller. Shows information regarding Flight Time,
Departure Time, Odometer, Trip Odometer, Average Ground Speed, and Maximum Ground Speed. Also provides
controls for trip statistic configuration.
Accesses the Timer screen on the Touchscreen Controller. Controls the timer on the PFD.
Used to create custom messages to be displayed one-time or periodically. The Touchscreen Controller displays
these messages on the Messages Screen on the Touchscreen Controller.
Shows the GPS Status display in the selected Display Pane. Touchscreen Controller provides additional RAIM
prediction function, GPS receiver selection, and SBAS selection.
Shows controls for viewing electronic documents on the Touchscreen Controller, and displays documents in the
selected Display Pane.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B24
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Feature temporarily disables touchscreen glass input to allow for manual cleaning. Turn or press any knob on the
Touchscreen Controller to exit Screen Cleaning Mode.
Controls for activating and managing crew profiles.
Avionics Settings and Status, Data Link Services registration and status, Wi-Fi setup.
SetUP Screen
Provides controls for changing system avionics settings, such as, time format, units of measure, airspace alert
settings, and MFD Data Bar Fields.
Displays information on the Touchscreen Controller for installed LRUs, system software, and databases.
Shows the SiriusXM Information Screen on the Touchscreen Controller. Used to activate audio and data services
from SiriusXM Satellite Radio and to verify subscriptions of SiriusXM Weather products.
Used to register with Garmin Flight Data Services (GFDS). Also provides information on current GFDS registration.
Provides controls for selecting available wireless networks, and for storing favorite wireless hotspots.
Displays the CPDLC Screen, giving access to the CPDLC Test Mode.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
25
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
WayPoint info Screen
Accesses airport information including frequencies, weather, procedures, charts, runways, and airport directory
data.
Shows information for a selected intersection including bearing, distance, and location.
Provides VOR information including frequencies and location.
Provides NDB information including frequencies and locations.
Provides location information for User Waypoints including a list of User Waypoints.
Create User Waypoints based on present position or a designated location.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B26
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
neareSt Screen
Displays a list of the nearest airports, with runway, bearing, and distance information.
Displays a list of the nearest intersections with bearing and distance information.
Displays a list of the nearest VORs with bearing, distance, and frequency information.
Displays a list of the nearest NDBs with bearing, distance, and frequency information.
Displays a list of the nearest User Waypoints with bearing and distance information.
Displays information about the nearest airspace and status.
Displays information about the nearest ARTCC facilities including bearing, distance, and frequencies.
Displays the nearest Flight Service Stations with bearing, distance, and frequency information
Displays the nearest weather reporting sources, bearings, distances, and frequencies
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
27
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLLER JOYSTICK AND KNOBS
The functions of the Joystick and Knobs on the Touchscreen Controller are context-sensitive. The Label
Bar, shown above each corresponding control, indicates which function(s) currently apply to each control.
The Joystick may be turned to increase or decrease map range, or to increase or decrease detail on certain
system displays. When the Joystick is pushed, the Map Pointer is activated for Map Panning (push again to
deactivate Map Pointer).
The Middle Knob is turned to increase or decrease the selected audio source volume. If a COM radio is
selected, pushing the Middle Knob activates/deactivates squelch. If a NAV radio is selected (on the Audio &
Radios Screen), pushing the Middle Knob enables NAV audio to be heard for identification.
The Large and Small Right Knobs are used for radio tuning and selection, frequency transfer, and data entry.
Turning the Large Right knob tunes the selected radio frequency in 1 MHz increments; the Small Right Knob
adjusts the frequency in 1 KHz increments. Push the Small Right Knob momentarily to change the selected
COM radio source (COM 1 or COM 2) for tuning. Push and hold the Small Right Knob for 1.5 seconds to
transfer the selected Standby COM frequency to the active COM frequency.
During data entry, turn the Large Right Knob to move the cursor position. Turn the Small Right Knob to
select a character for the highlighted cursor position. Push the Small Right Knob to enter the data (see the
Data Entry discussion later in this section for more information about Data Entry methods.)
CONTROLLING DISPLAY PANES (NORMAL OPERATIONS)
After system power-up, the MFD presents the Navigation Map Pane and the Traffic Map Pane in a side-by-
side format in Half Mode.
In Half Mode operation, the left half of the MFD (excluding the EIS display) is associated with the #1 (or
pilot’s side) Touchscreen Controller; the right portion is associated with the #2 (or co-pilot’s side) Touchscreen
Controller. Each Touchscreen Controller may be used to select and control a display on its respective MFD
half in Half Mode.
When a PFD is operating in Split Mode, the on-side Touchscreen Controller will also control the Display
Pane on the PFD.
The Joystick on each Touchscreen Controller, when moved to the right or left, selects the active pane on
the MFD or applicable PFD. On PFD1 and the left pane on the MFD, the active pane is indicated by a light
blue Pane Title Bar and outline. On PFD2 and the right pane on the MFD, the active pane is indicated by a
magenta Pane Title Bar and outline.
In Half Mode, the #1 and #2 Touchscreen Controllers retain independent settings for their respective
display half being controlled, allowing for greater flexibility and customization. For example, both the left
and right MFD halves may be showing a Navigation Map display, but with different map orientations or
overlay data based on the flight crew preferences on each half.
In normal operations, the system continues operating in Half Mode until Full Mode is selected on either
Touchscreen Controller.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B28
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PFD1 in Split Mode with a
Display Pane
MFD in Half Mode with
Two Display Panes PFD2 in Split Mode with
a Display Pane
Light Blue
Title Bar
Indicates
Display Pane
Selected
Using #1
Touchscreen
Controller
Magenta
Title Bar
Indicates
Display Pane
Selected
Using #2
Touchscreen
Controller
Figure 1-21 Display Pane Control (Normal Operations, PFDs in Split Mode)
#1 Touchscreen
Controller #2 Touchscreen
Controller
EIS Display
Navigation Map Display
(Half Mode)
Navigation Map
Display Currently
Selected on Left
Display Pane
#1 Touchscreen Controller #2 Touchscreen Controller
Touch
to Select
Full Mode
Operation
Multi-Function Display (MFD)
Figure 1-22 MFD and Touchscreen Controllers (Half Mode Operation)
Traffic Map Display
(Half Mode)
Traffic Map
Display
Currently
Selected
on Right
Display
Pane
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
29
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Full Mode is available when a Touchscreen Controller shows a Full Button in the Button Bar. When the
Full Button is touched, the MFD display half for the Touchscreen Controller on which the mode was selected
expands to a full display (Figure 1-23).
The Touchscreen Controller that enabled Full Mode will have the ability to change the selected display
settings while operating in Full Mode. For example, if the #1 Touchscreen Controller enabled the Navigation
Map Display in Full Mode, the #1 Touchscreen Controller can be used to customize the map overlay data or
change the map orientation while operating in Full Mode (accessed using the Map Settings Button.) The #2
Touchscreen Controller displays a diminished (dimmed) screen area if the Map Settings Screen is selected
on this controller to indicate these functions are not currently available using the #2 Touchscreen Controller.
EIS Display
Navigation Map Display
(Full Mode)
Navigation Map
Display Currently
Selected on MFD in
Full Screen Mode
#1 Touchscreen Controller #2 Touchscreen Controller
Touch
to Select
Half Mode
Operation
Multi-Function Display (MFD)
Figure 1-23 MFD and Touchscreen Controllers (Full Mode Operation)
Regardless of which Touchscreen Controller enabled Full Mode, either Touchscreen Controller joystick
may be used to adjust map range or activate the map panning function, when available. The Label Bar on the
Touchscreen Controller will indicate the availability of these functions.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B30
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
To resume Half Mode operation on either Touchscreen Controller, touch the Half Button on the Touchscreen
Controller when it is shown in the Button Bar.
The system also enters Half Mode automatically if the Touchscreen Controller which did not select Full
Mode is used to select another MFD display, or if either Touchscreen Controller selects an MFD display which
can only be presented in Half Mode (such as the aircraft systems displays).
DATA ENTRY
Two methods exist for directly entering alphanumeric data (e.g., waypoint identifiers, barometric minimum
descent altitude) into the system: using the Touchscreen Controller’s alphanumeric keypad, and the large and
small right knob on the bottom of the Touchscreen Controller. In some instances, such as when entering an
identifier, the system will try to predict the desired identifier based on the characters being entered. In this
case, if the desired identifier appears, use the ENTER Button to confirm the entry without entering the rest of
the identifier manually. This can save the pilot from entering all the characters of the identifier.
Besides character-by-character data entry, the system also provides a shortcut for entering waypoint
identifiers. When the cursor is on a field awaiting entry of a waypoint identifier, touching the Find button
accesses four different lists of waypoint identifiers for quick selection: Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan (if active
flight plan waypoints are available), and a Favorite waypoints list. In addition, the system provides the ability
to search by Facility Name or by City. The system will automatically fill in the identifier, facility, and city fields
with the information for the selected waypoint.
Using the Touchscreen Controller keyboard to enter alphanumeric data:
1) Select a Datafield Button the Touchscreen Controller for which data entry is required (i.e. waypoint, radio
frequency, etc.). A keypad will appear, and the Datafield Button will be highlighted in light blue.
2) Touch the desired letters or numbers, one at a time.
3) If an alphabetic keypad is displayed and numbers are desired, touch the 123... Button.
4) If the numeric keypad is displayed and letter are desired, touch the ABC... Button.
5) To accept the entry, touch the Enter Button. Otherwise, touch the Back, Cancel, or Home Button (on the
Button Bar) to exit the datafield without saving the entry.
Figure 1-24 Entering a Waypoint on the Touchscreen Controller’s Alphanumeric Keypads
Touch to use Numeric Buttons Touch to use Alphabetic Buttons
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
31
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
It is not necessary to touch the Enter Button to complete certain data fields for which a specific number
of characters is always required. For example, after entering four digit transponder squawk code, the
system automatically accepts this data 1.5 seconds after the fourth button has been pressed (if the entry has
not been cancelled).
Using the Touchscreen Controller’s large and small right Knob to enter data:
1) Select a datafield button on the Touchscreen Controller for which data entry is required (i.e. waypoint, radio
frequency, etc.). A keypad will appear, and the data field will be highlighted in light blue.
2) Begin entering data by turning the small right Knob to select a character for the first placeholder.
Turning the knob to the right scrolls through the alphabet (where appropriate) toward the letter Z, starting in
the middle at K, and the digits zero through nine. Turning the knob to the left scrolls in the opposite direction.
3) Turn the large right knob to move the cursor to the next placeholder in the field.
4) Repeat, using the small right knob to select a character and the large right knob to move the cursor, until the
field is complete.
5) Press the right knob to confirm entry. Otherwise, touch the Back or Home button to exit the field without
saving the entry.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B32
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.4 SYSTEM OPERATION
The displays are connected via a single Ethernet bus for high-speed communication. As shown in Figure
1-1, each IAU is connected to a single display. This allows the units to share information, enabling true system
integration.
NORMAL DISPLAY OPERATION
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information).
The MFD displays a navigation information, as well as flight plan, weather, traffic and terrain information in
either two half-size display panes or one full-size display pane, depending on the selection made on the GTCs.
The left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System (EIS; see the EAS Section).
The Touchscreen Controller provides radio management, MFD control and data entry, as well as feature
selection and data display for the selected features.
Figure 1-25 Normal Operation
REVERSIONARY DISPLAY OPERATION
NOTE:
The system alerts the pilot when the LRUs are communicating using backup paths. Refer to the
Appendices for further information regarding system-specific alerts.
If a GDU fails or is off-line, the system provides the capability to show a PFD, an EIS display, and a display
pane on another GDU in Reversionary Mode.
The Phenom 300 employs dedicated three-position mode switches for PFD1 and PFD2. These PFD mode
switches allow for placing the GDUs in automatic, manual or split-screen reversionary modes. The Split Mode
selected using these switches is used for viewing the reversionary display in a split screen format, unlike the
Split Mode Softkey on the PFD, which allows for viewing the normal display in a split screen format. The
following discussion illustrates some of the various reversionary mode display combinations.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
33
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AUTO REVERSION
•
PFD1 failure, PFD1 Mode Switch set to AUTO, PFD2 Mode Switch set to AUTO
– MFD enters reversionary
Full Mode and PFD2 continues to operate normally.
Figure 1-26 Automatic Reversionary Mode - PFD1 Failure
•
MFD failure, PFD1 Mode Switch set to AUTO, PFD2 Mode Switch set to AUTO
– PFD1 operates normally
when in Full Mode. If PFD1 is operating in Split Mode, it will switch to Full Mode. PFD2 enters reversionary
mode. If PFD2 is operating in Split Mode, it will switch to reversionary Full Mode.
Figure 1-27 Automatic Reversionary Mode - MFD Failure
•
PFD2 failure
– PFD1 and MFD continue to operate normally.
Figure 1-28 Automatic Reversionary Mode - PFD2 Failure
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B34
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MANUAL REVERSION
•
PFD1 Mode Switch set to REV, PFD2 Mode Switch set to AUTO
– PFD1 and MFD enter reversionary Full
Mode. PFD2 continues to operate normally.
Figure 1-29 Manual Reversionary Mode - PFD1
•
PFD2 Mode Switch set to REV, PFD1 Mode Switch set to AUTO
– PFD2 and MFD enter reversionary Full
Mode. PFD1 continues to operate normally.
Figure 1-30 Manual Reversionary Mode - PFD2
•
PFD1 and PFD2 Mode Switches set to REV
– PFD1, MFD, and PFD2 enter reversionary Full Mode.
Figure 1-31 Manual Reversionary Mode - PFD1 and PFD2
•
PFD1 Mode Switch set to Split, PFD2 Mode Switch set to AUTO
– PFD1 and MFD enter reversionary Split
Mode. PFD2 continues to operate normally.
Figure 1-32 Manual Reversionary Split Mode - PFD1
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
35
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
•
PFD2 Mode Switch set to Split, PFD1 Mode Switch set to AUTO
– PFD2 and MFD enter reversionary Split
Mode. PFD1 continues to operate normally.
Figure 1-33 Manual Reversionary Split Mode - PFD2
•
PFD1 Mode Switch set to REV, PFD2 Mode Switch set to Split
– PFD1 and MFD enter reversionary Full
Mode. PFD2 enters reversionary Split Mode.
Figure 1-34 Manual Reversionary Mode - PFD1 Reversionary Full Mode, PFD2 Reversionary Split Mode
•
PFD2 Mode Switch set to REV, PFD1 Mode Switch set to Split
– PFD2 and MFD enter reversionary Full
Mode. PFD1 enters reversionary Split Mode.
Figure 1-35 Manual Reversionary Mode - PFD2 Reversionary Full Mode, PFD1 Reversionary Split Mode
•
PFD1 and PFD2 Mode Switches set to Split
– PFD1, MFD, and PFD2 enter reversionary Split Mode.
Figure 1-36 Manual Reversionary Split Mode - PFD1 and PFD2
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B36
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
If the MFD is operating in Reversionary Mode (e.g. PFD1 or PFD2 failure), the Touchscreen Controller on the
failed PFD side controls the Reversionary Mode display pane. If PFD1 or PFD2 is in Reversionary Mode, the
on-side Touchscreen Controller controls the Reversionary Mode display pane.
If both PFD1 and PFD2 fail or are off-line, the #1 Touchscreen Controller controls the Reversionary Mode
display pane on the MFD. The #2 Touchscreen Controller’s functions (with the exception of display pane
control) continue to be available in the event of PFD1 and PFD2 failure.
TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLLER FAILURE
If either Touchscreen controller fails or is off-line, the operating Touchscreen Controller controls the display
panes for both PFDs and the MFD. In addition, the single Touchscreen Controller provides audio and CNS
control for both the pilot and copilot.
AHRS OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for specific AHRS alert information.
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.
In addition to using internal sensors, the GRS 77 AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air
data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic
field measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air
data information for attitude determination. Four AHRS modes of operation are available (see Figure 1-37)
and depend upon the combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor
inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts.
AHRS no-GPS
Mode
AHRS coast-on-gyros
until invalid
AHRS Normal
Mode
AHRS no-Mag
Mode
AHRS no-Mag/
no-Air Mode
Heading Invalid Heading Invalid Attitude/Heading Invalid
Air Data Available and Reliable?
Mag Data Available and Reliable? Mag Data AND Air Data
Available and Reliable?
GPS Data Available and Reliable?
Figure 1-37 AHRS Operation
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
37
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GPS INPUT FAILURE
NOTE: In-flight initialization of AHRS, when operating without any valid source of GPS data and at true
air speed values greater than approximately 200 knots, is not guaranteed. Under these rare conditions, it
is possible for in-flight AHRS initialization to take an indefinite amount of time which would result in an
extended period of time where valid AHRS outputs are unavailable.
Two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS. If GPS information from one of the inputs fails, the AHRS uses
the operating GPS input and an alert message is issued to inform the flight crew. If both GPS inputs fail, the
AHRS can continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFDs as long as magnetometer and
airspeed data are available and valid.
MAGNETOMETER FAILURE
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS transitions to one of the reversionary No-Magnetometer modes and
continues to output valid attitude information. However, if the aircraft is airborne, the heading output on the
PFD does become invalid (as indicated by a yellow “X”).
AIR DATA INPUT FAILURE
Failure of the air data input has no affect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS
information. Invalid/unavailable airspeed data in addition to GPS failure results in loss of all attitude and
heading information.
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
Each GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the specified
receiver (GPS 1 for the #1 IAU or GPS 2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the GPS 1 or GPS 2 STATUS Pane
and the GPS Status Screen on the Touchscreen Controller (refer to Figure 1-38).
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has
acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired an SBAS (Satellite Based
Augmentation System) signal. While the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by
obstructions causing one GPS receiver to have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning
the aircraft may result in one of the GPS receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B38
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message by touching the MSG Button on
Touchscreen Controller. If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Screen and compare the information
for GPS 1 and GPS 2. Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
Figure 1-38 GPS Receiver Information
Satellite Signal
Strength Bars
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
Satellite Signal
Information Status
GPS Receiver
Status
Selecting the GPS receiver:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > GPS Status.
2) Touch the GPS 1 annunciator button to select the #1 GPS receiver. The button annunciator will be green when
selected on. The system displays the GPS 1 STATUS Pane.
3) Touch the GPS 2 annunciator button to select the #2 GPS receiver. The button annunciator will be green when
selected on. The system displays the GPS 2 STATUS Pane.
SATELLITE CONSTELLATION DIAGRAM
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a sky view diagram. The sky view is
always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle representing
45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
39
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SATELLITE SIGNAL STATUS
The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution
of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a
circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of laying.
EPU is a statistical error indication and not an actual error measurement.
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to
each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM,
measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and
vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed
below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
GPS RECEIVER STATUS
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active GPS
receiver (GPS 1 or GPS 2) is shown in the right center of the GPS 1 and GPS 2 STATUS Display. When the
receiver is in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital
data (collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that
should be in view. ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been
acquired for computing a solution.
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D navigational GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS (Satellite-Based Augmentation System)
indicates INACTIVE. When acquisition is complete, the solution status indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS
indicates ACTIVE.
GPS SATELLITE SIGNAL STRENGTHS
The GPS 1 and GPS 2 STATUS Display can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due
to poor satellite coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength
bar is displayed for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for
WAAS) below each bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal
bar appearance:
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Light blue bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B40
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SBAS SELECTION
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the WAAS, EGNOS, or MSAS
coverage area, it may be desirable to disable the reception of the applicable SBAS signal (although it is not
recommended). When enabled, the annunciator on the applicable button shows green.
Enabling/Disabling EGNOS, MSAS or WAAS
1) From Home, touch Utilities > GPS Status.
2) Touch the EGNOS, MSAS, or WAAS (any combination) Annunciator Button(s) to enable or disable. A green
annunciation indicates an enabled SBAS selection.
RAIM (RECEIVER AUTONOMOUS INTEGRITY MONITORING) PREDICTION
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected approach
may be outside the SBAS coverage area and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the intended
approach.
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
system automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP”. If RAIM is not available
when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
Predicting RAIM availability:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > GPS Status > Location.
2) Touch the Waypoint Button to enter the location for which RAIM will be predicted. Touch the Present
Position Button to enter the aircraft’s current position as the prediction location.
3) If the Waypoint Button was touched in step 2, enter the waypoint identifier using the alphanumeric buttons.
If the Present Position Button was touched in step 2, proceed to step 5.
4) Touch the Enter Button.
5) The location selected for RAIM prediction is now displayed on the Location Button.
6) Touch the Arrival Time Button.
7) Enter the planned arrival time for the selected location using the numeric buttons
8) Touch the Enter Button. The time is now displayed on the Arrival Time Button.
9) Touch the Arrival Date Button.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
41
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
10) Touch the button for the desired year. If necessary, touch and drag in the window, or use the Up and Down
buttons to display the desired year.
11) Touch the button for the desired month. If necessary, touch and drag in the window, or use the Up and Down
buttons to display the desired month.
12) Touch the button for the desired day. If necessary, touch and drag in the window, or use the Up and Down
buttons to display the desired day. The selected date is now displayed on the Arrival Date Button.
13) Touch the Compute RAIM Button. One of the following will be displayed in the RAIM Status field.
• ‘Computing’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘Available’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘Not Available’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘--------’—RAIM has not been computed for the specified waypoint, time, and date combination
ANNUNCIATIONS
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a yellow ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated with the
failed data (Figure 1-39). Upon system power-up, certain instruments remain invalid as equipment begins to
initialize. All windows should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window remains flagged,
the system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
NOTE: For a detailed description of all annunciations and alerts, refer to Appendix A. Refer to the Airplane
Flight Manual (AFM) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
Figure 1-39 System Failure Annunciations, Reversionary Mode
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B42
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.5 SYSTEM MANAGEMENT
The Touchscreen Controllers allow management of various system parameters, in addition to providing status
and database information for the system.
AVIONICS SETTINGS
Avionics Settings are categorized into 5 Tabs (System, Units, Alerts, MFD Fields, and Audio):
SYSTEM SETTINGS
• Time display format (local 12 hour, local 24 hour, or UTC )
• Time offset
• Flight Director Active Format (Single Cue or Dual Cue)
• GPS CDI range
• COM transceiver channel spacing
• Nearest Airport Runway Surface
• Nearest Airport Minimum Length
NOTE:
The time offset is used to define current local time. UTC (also called GMT or Zulu) date and time are
calculated directly from the GPS satellite signals and cannot be changed.
Setting the Time Format:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the System tab.
3) Touch the Time Format Button (displays currently selected time format in light blue).
4) Touch a time format option button (Local 12hr, Local 24hr, or UTC).
Setting the Time Offset Value:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, from the System Tab.
3) Touch the Time Offset button (currently selected time offset shown in light blue).
4) Input the desired value using the numeric keypad or the large and small right knobs and touch the ENTER
Button.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
43
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Figure 1-40 System Time (Local 24-hr Format)
Figure 1-41 Time Format Settings
Date Time
‘Time Format’
Datafield ‘Time Format’ Options
Setting the Flight Director Active Format:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the System tab.
3) Touch the Flight Director Active Format button to display a list of flight director formats (button displays currently
selected Flight Director Active Format in light blue).
4) Touch either the Single Cue or Dual Cue Buttons.
gPS cDi range
The ‘GPS CDI’ datafield allows the pilot to define the range for the on-screen course deviation indicator
(CDI). The range values represent full range deflection for the CDI to either side. The default setting is
‘AUTO’. At this setting, leaving the departure airport the CDI range is set to 1.0 nm and gradually ramps
up to 2 nm beyond 30 nm from the departure airport. The CDI range is set to 2.0 nautical miles during the
en route phase of flight. Within 30 nm of the destination airport, the CDI range gradually ramps down to
1.0 nm (terminal area). During approach operations, the CDI range ramps down even further to 0.3 nm.
This transition normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF).
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B44
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
If a lower CDI range setting is selected (i.e., 1.0 or 0.3 nm), the higher range settings are not selected
during any phase of flight. For example, if 1.0 nm is selected, the system uses this for en route and terminal
phases and ramps down to 0.3 nm during an approach. Note that the Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits follow the selected CDI range and corresponding flight phases.
Setting the GPS CDI Range:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the System tab.
3) Touch the GPS CDI button (button displays current GPS CDI range in light blue).
4) Touch one of the following GPS CDI Range Buttons: 0.30 NM, 1.00 NM, 2.00 NM, or AUTO.
com cHannel SPacing
NOTE
: 8.33 kHz VHF communication frequency channel spacing is not approved for use in the United States.
Select the 25.0 kHz channel spacing option for use in the United States.
The ‘COM Channel Spacing’ datafield allows the pilot to select 8.33 kHz or 25.0 kHz COM frequency
channel spacing.
Setting COM Channel Spacing:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the System tab.
3) Scroll to and touch the COM Channel Spacing Button (button displays the current spacing setting in light blue).
4) Touch either the 8.33 kHz or 25.0 kHz Buttons.
neareSt airPortS
Nearest airport matching criteria (such as minimum runway length and/or surface type) can be entered to
prevent airports with small runways or runways that are not of appropriate surface from being displayed in
the list as nearest airports . Default settings are zero feet (or meters) for runway length and “HARD/SOFT”
for runway surface type.
Setting the Nearest Airport surface matching criteria:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the System tab.
3) Scroll to and touch the Nearest Airport Runway Surface button (button displays current runway surface selection
in light blue).
4) Touch one of the following runway surface buttons: Any, Hard Only, Hard/Soft, or Water.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
45
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Setting the Nearest Airport Minimum Runway Length matching criteria:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the System tab.
3) Scroll to and touch the Nearest Airport Min Rwy Length button (button displays current length setting in light
blue).
4) Input a minimum runway surface distance using the keypad or the large and small right knobs, then touch Enter
to accept the entry.
Restoring default Avionics Settings:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Touch one of the following tabs: System, Units, Alerts, MFD Fields, or Audio.
3) Scroll as necessary and touch the Restore Default Button..
4) Touch Yes to restore all settings in the selected tab to their default settings, or touch the Cancel Button.
UNITS SETTINGS
• Nav Angle
• Magnetic Variance
• Distance/Speed
• Altitude/Vertical Speed
• Temperature
• Fuel
• Weight
• Position Format
The Units Tab allows for configuration of the measurement units. A button appears next to the current
unit setting only for those units which the flight crew can modify. Measurement units without an associated
button are shown only for informational purposes and cannot be modified by the flight crew.
• Nav angle (magnetic, true)
When set to ‘Magnetic (°)’, magnetic variation is calculated into the displayed value. When ‘True (°T)’
is selected, no magnetic variation is calculated and a ‘T’ is displayed next to the value.
Affects Current Heading, Selected Heading, and Selected Course.
Affects the BRG, DTK, TKE, TRK, and XTK fields.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B46
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• Temperature (Celsius, Fahrenheit)
Affects display cabin temperature readout and temperature deviation from ISA.
• Position Format (HDDD°MM.MM’, HDDD°MM’SS.S”)
Affects all position displays.
Changing unit settings:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Units tab.
3) Scroll if necessary and touch button corresponding to the units to be changed (current units selection displayed
in light blue).
4) Touch a units button from the list.
Figure 1-42 Viewing Unit Data on the Avionics Settings Screen
Button
Indicates
Setting is
Flight Crew
Selectable
Settings
Displayed for
Reference,
Not Flight
Crew
Selectable
ALERTS SETTINGS
• Baro transition alert
• Airspace alert altitude buffer
• Arrival Alert
• Class B/TMA airspace alert
• Class C/TCA airspace alert
• Class D airspace alert
• Restricted airspace alert
• MOA (Military) airspace alert
• Other (ADIZ) airspace alert
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
47
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The Alerts Tab allows configuration of the following alert settings:
• Baro transition alert
• Altitude buffer distance alert
• Arrival alerts
• Airspace alerts
Baro tranSition alert SettingS
Enabling/Disabling the Baro Transition Alert:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Alerts Tab.
3) Touch the Baro Transition Alert Enable Button. Button annunciator is green when alert is enabled, gray when
disabled.
Setting the Baro Transition Alert altitude:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Alerts Tab.
3) Touch the Baro Transition Alert altitude button.
4) Input the desired altitude using the numeric keypad or the large and small right knobs, then touch the ENTER
Button or press the Right Knob.
arrival alert SettingS
Enabling/disabling Arrival Alerts:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Alerts Tab.
3) Touch the Arrival Alert Enable Button. Button annunciator is green when alert is enabled, gray when disabled.
Setting the Arrival Alert distance:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Alerts Tab.
3) Touch the Arrival Alert distance button.
4) Input the desired distance using the numeric keypad or the large and small right knobs, then touch the ENTER
Button or press the Right Knob.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B48
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
airSPace alertS
The Airspace Alerts allow the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the Nearest Airspace alerts or the airspace boundaries depicted on the Navigation Map
pane. It simply enabled/disables the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an airspace.
Alerts for the following airspaces can be turned enabled/disabled:
• Class B/TMA
• Class C/TCA
• Class D
• Restricted
• MOA (Military)
• Other airspaces/ADIZ
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For
example, if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an
alert message is not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected
to enter it, the pilot is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Enabling/disabling an airspace alert:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Alerts Tab.
3) Scroll as necessary and touch the Enable Button nex to any of the following alerts: CLASS B/TMA, CLASS C/
TCA, CLASS D, RESTRICTED, MOA (MILITARY), OTHER/ADIZ. Button annunciator is green when alert is enabled,
gray when disabled.
Setting the altitude buffer distance:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Alerts Tab.
3) Touch the Airspace Alert Alt Buffer altitude button (displays current selection in light blue).
4) Enter the desired altitude buffer using the numeric keypad or the large and small right knobs, then touch the
ENTER Button or press the Right Knob.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
49
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD FIELDS SETTINGS
• MFD Data Bar Field 1
• MFD Data Bar Field 2
• MFD Data Bar Field 3
• MFD Data Bar Field 4
• MFD Data Bar Field 5
• MFD Data Bar Field 6
• MFD Data Bar Field 7
• MFD Data Bar Field 8
The MFD Navigation Status Bar can display up to eight navigation data bar fields. By default, the
Navigation Status Bar displays Ground Speed (GS), Desired Track (DTK), Track (TRK), Estimated Time
Enroute (ETE), Bearing (BRG), Distance (DIS), Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA), and Estimated Time of
Arrival (ETA). The system assigns each data bar field a corresponding number, 1 though 8, as displayed
from left-to-right in the MFD Navigation Status Bar.
Change the information shown in an MFD Data Bar field:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the MFD Fields Tab.
3) Scroll as needed and touch the MFD Data Bar Field Number to be changed (1 through 8); current selection for
each data bar field displayed in light blue.
4) Scroll as needed and touch the button corresponding to the desired data to be shown in the selected MFD Data
Bar Field.
The following data may be selected for display in each of the eight fields of the Navigation Status Bar.
• Bearing (BRG)
• Distance (DIS)
• Desired Track (DTK)
• Endurance (END)
• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
• Fuel On Board (FOB)
• Fuel Over Destination (FOD)
• Ground Speed (GS)
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• True Air Speed (TAS)
• Cross-Track Error (XTK)
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B50
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AUDIO SETTINGS
• Audio Alert Voice
aUDio
From the Audio Tab the audio alert voice gender can be set to male or female.
To change the audio alert voice:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Alerts Tab.
3) Touch the Audio Alert Voice button (current voice gender displayed in light blue).
4) Touch the audio alert voice gender button (Male or Female).
CREW PROFILES
The system automatically stores various settings and selections within crew profiles. These include a wide
range of parameters for both the pilot and copilot including (but not limited to) map settings, avionics settings,
PFD settings, user waypoints, and weight and balance information.
The Crew Profile Screen provides additional capabilities for managing crew profiles. The system can store
up to 25 crew profiles. From here, crew profiles may be added, renamed, activated, copied, or deleted. In
addition, crew profiles can be imported from an SD card, or exported to an SD card on the Crew Profile screen.
By default, ‘DEFAULT PROFILE’ is the active crew profile. This profile cannot be deleted or renamed.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
51
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
After system power-up, the Default Profile is the active crew profile, regardless which Crew Profile was active
before the power cycle. If needed, the flight crew may activate a different crew profile on the Initialization
Screen or the Crew Profile Screen.
Active Crew
Profile
Available
Profiles Stored
on the System
Add a New
Crew Profile
Import a Crew
Profile from an
SD Card
Figure 1-43 Managing Crew Profiles on the Crew Profile Screen
Selected Crew
Profile
Available
Options for
Selected
Crew Profile
Adding a new crew profile:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Crew Profile.
2) Scroll if necessary, and touch the Add Profile Button.
3) Input the name to assign to the crew profile using the keypad or the large and small right knobs, then touch
Enter or press the Right Knob. Crew Profiles may be up to 16 characters long, and cannot share the exact
name of another crew profile.
Activating a crew profile:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Crew Profile.
2) Scroll if necessary, and touch the button for the crew profile to be activated.
3) Touch the Activate Button. When finished, the system displays the name of the selected crew profile in the
‘Active Profile’ window.
Copying an existing crew profile:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Crew Profile.
2) Scroll if necessary, and touch the button for the crew profile to be copied.
3) Touch the Copy Button.
4) Input the name to assign to the copied crew profile using the keypad or the large and small right knobs, then
touch Enter or press the Right Knob. Crew Profiles may be up to 16 characters long, and cannot share the
exact name of another crew profile. The Crew Profile screen displays the name of the copied profile in the list.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B52
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Renaming an existing crew profile:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Crew Profile.
2) Scroll if necessary, and touch the button for the crew profile to be renamed.
3) Touch the Rename Button.
4) Input the new name to assign to the selected crew profile using the keypad or the large and small right knobs,
then touch Enter or press the Right Knob. Crew Profiles may be up to 16 characters long, and cannot share
the exact name of another crew profile. The Crew Profile screen displays the name of the renamed crew profile
in the list.
Deleting a crew profile:
NOTE: The system cannot delete the currently active crew profile. If necessary, activate another crew profile
prior to deletion.
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Crew Profile.
2) Scroll if necessary, and touch the button for the profile to be deleted.
3) Touch the Delete Button.
4) Touch the OK Button to confirm and delete the profile, or touch the Cancel Button.
Importing a crew profile from an SD card:
1) If necessary, insert an SD card containing a crew profile into the top card slot in the MFD.
2) From Home, touch Utilities > Crew Profile.
3) Touch the Import Button.
4) Scroll if necessary, and touch the button for the crew profile to be imported.
Exporting a crew profile to an SD card:
1) If necessary, insert an SD card to store a crew profile into the top card slot in the MFD.
2) From Home, touch Utilities > Crew Profile.
3) Scroll if necessary, and touch the button for the crew profile to be exported from the list.
4) Touch the Export Button.
AVIONICS STATUS
The Avionics Status Screen provides information about installed LRUs, airframe system software, and
databases.
LRU INFO
The LRU Info Tab on the Avionics Status screen displays the status, serial numbers, and software version
numbers for all detected system LRUs. The system displays a green checked box for each active LRUs. A
yellow ‘X’ box indicates a failed LRU. Inform a service center or Garmin dealer a LRU has failed.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
53
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Viewing LRU information:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) If necessary, touch the LRU Info tab.
3) Scroll as needed and touch a LRU button to display a pop-up window with additional information for the
selected LRU.
4) When finished, touch the pop-up window (if displayed), or touch Back or Home.
Figure 1-44 Viewing LRU Info Information on the Touchscreen Controller
LRU Info Tab
Selected
Active LRU
(Touch
to View
Additional
Information)
Failed
LRU
Additional
Information
Shown for
Selected
LRU
AIRFRAME
The Airframe Tab of the Avionics Status screen displays pertinent information about the airframe including
the System ID number, System Software Version number, Configuration ID, Cockpit Reference Guide part
number, and Checklist information.
Viewing airframe information:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) If necessary, touch the Airframe Tab.
3) Scroll as needed to view the airframe information.
DATABASE
The Database Tab of the Avionics Status screen displays pertinent information on all system databases
(PFD1, PFD2, MFD, GTC1, and GTC2).
Viewing database information:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) If necessary, touch the Database Tab.
3) Touch MFD1, PFD1, PFD2, GT1, or GTC2 Buttons to view database information for the selected LRU.
4) Scroll as needed to view the database information for the selected LRU, then touch Back or Home.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B54
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SIRIUSXM INFORMATION
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about SiriusXM Weather products or the
Additional Features Section for information about SiriusXM Satellite Radio.
Viewing SiriusXM Information:
From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > SiriusXM Info
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. The service is activated by providing SiriusXM
Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or
the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM to activate the subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A.
Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an activation signal.
These IDs are located:
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the SiriusXM Information Screen
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
Activating SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio:
1) Position the aircraft so the GDL 69A antenna has an unobstructed view of the sky.
2) From Home touch Utilities > Setup > SiriusXM Info > Start. Touchscreen Controller displays ‘ACTIVATING’.
3) When system indicates activation has completed, touch ‘Lock’ to save the activation changes, or touch ‘Cancel’
to exit without saving changes.
SCREEN CLEANING
Screen Cleaning mode temporary deactivates touch input on the Touchscreen Controller screen to facilitate
cleaning. The screen can be cleaned using a microfiber or soft cotton cloth lightly dampened with clean water.
Do not use chemical cleaning agents, as these may damage the coating on the glass surface.
Cleaning the Touchscreen Controller screen:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Screen Cleaning.
2) The Touchscreen Controller indicates the screen may be cleaned. Clean the screen as needed.
3) Press or turn any knob to return to the Utilities Screen.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
55
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.6 UTILITIES
The Timer and Trip Statistics features provide a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and
a record of the time of departure as well as distance tracking—odometer, trip odometer, and average ground
speeds and maximum ground speeds.
TIMER
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero on a
countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits are zeroed.
Setting the generic timer:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Timer.
2) Touch the Time Button.
3) Input the desired time using the numeric keypad or the Large and Small Right Knobs, then touch the Enter
Button or press the Right Knob.
4) Touch the Start Button. The button changes to ‘Stop’.
5) To stop the timer, touch the Stop Button.
6) To reset the timer, touch the Reset Button.
Figure 1-45 Timer (Touchscreen Controller)
Figure 1-46 Timer (PFD)
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B56
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
TRIP STATS
FLIGHT TIME
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time the aircraft
lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero.
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Touch the Flight Time Start At Button (Figure 1-47).
3) Touch either the Power On or In-Air Button. A green annunciator indicates the selected option.
4) Touch the Accept Button.
Resetting the flight timer:
1) From Home Screen, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Touch the Flight Time Button (light blue text in button displays flight time).
3) Touch the Reset Button to reset the flight timer or touch the Cancel Button.
Figure 1-47 Trip Statistics Options
DEPARTURE TIME
The system records the time at which departure occurs. The departure time is selectable as either from the
time the system was powered-up, or when the aircraft becomes airborne. The displayed departure time can
also be reset to display the current time at the point of reset.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Touch the Departure Time Start At Button.
3) Touch either the Power On or In-Air Button. A green annunciator indicates the selected option.
4) Touch the Accept Button.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
57
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Resetting the departure time:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Touch the ‘Departure Time’ Datafield Button.
3) Touch the Reset Button.
ODOMETER
The Odometer presents a total distance traveled since the last reset.
Setting the odometer automatic reset criterion:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Touch the Odometer Reset Button (Figure 1-47).
3) Touch the Power On, In-Air, or Manually Button. A green annunciator indicates the selected option. Note
manual reset is always available regardless of the option selected for automatic reset.
4) Touch the Accept Button.
Manually resetting the odometer:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Trip Statis.
2) Touch the Odometer distance button (shows current odometer reading in light blue).
3) Touch the Reset Button to reset the odometer, or touch the Cancel Button.
TRIP ODOMETER
The Trip Odometer presents a total distance traveled for the active flight plan since the last reset.
Setting the Trip Odometer automatic reset criterion:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Touch the Trip Odometer Reset Button (Figure 1-47).
3) Touch the Power On, In-Air, or Manually Button. A green annunciator indicates the selected option. Note
manual reset is always available regardless of the option selected for automatic reset.
4) Touch the Accept Button.
Manually resetting the Trip Odometer:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Touch the Trip Odometer distance button (shows current trip odometer reading in light blue.)
3) Touch the Reset Button to reset the trip odometer, or touch the Cancel Button.
HOUR METER
The hour meter shows accummulated engine time. It begins counting when N1 is above 5 percent on either
engine. It stops counting when N1 drops below 5 percent. This is a system timer and is not pilot adjustable.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B58
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AVERAGE GROUND SPEED
Avg Ground Speed presents a ground speed average since the last reset.
Setting the average ground speed automatic reset criterion:
1) From Home Screen, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Scroll to display the ‘Avg Ground Speed’ buttons.
3) Touch the Avg Ground Speed Reset Button.
4) Touch the Power On, In-Air, or Manually Button. A green annunciator indicates the selected option. Note
manual reset is always available regardless of the option selected for automatic reset.
5) Touch the Accept Button.
Manually resetting the Odometer:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Scroll to display the ‘Avg Ground Speed’ buttons.
3) Touch the Avg Ground Speed Button (button displays average ground speed in light blue).
4) Touch the Reset Button to reset the average ground speed, or touch the Cancel Button.
MAXIMUM GROUND SPEED
‘Max Ground Speed’ shows the highest recorded ground speed since the last reset.
Setting the Maximum Ground Speed automatic reset criterion:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Scroll to display the ‘Max Ground Speed’ buttons.
3) Touch the Max Ground Speed Reset Button.
4) Touch the Power On, In-Air, or Manually Button. A green annunciator indicates the selected option. Note
manual reset is always available regardless of the option selected for automatic reset.
5) Touch the Accept Button.
Manually resetting the Maximum Ground Speed:
1) From the Home, touch Utilities > Trip Stats.
2) Scroll to display the ‘Max Ground Speed’ buttons.
3) Touch the Max Ground Speed Button (button displays maximum speed in light blue).
4) Touch the Reset Button to reset the Maximum Ground Speed, or touch the Cancel Button.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
59
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.7 SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
NOTE: DO NOT use the database SD cards for any purpose other than database storage.
NOTE:
Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating databases.
NOTE:
Ensure that the system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
The PFDs and the MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right portion
of the display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for various
databases, system software updates, recording flight data, and storing electronic documents.
Not all SD cards are compatible with the system. Use only SD cards supplied by Garmin or the aircraft
manufacturer.
Install an SD card
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel.
Remove an SD card
Gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch and eject the card.
Figure 1-48 Display Bezel SD Card Slots
SD Card Slots
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B60
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Blank Page
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
61
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: If the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer to the backup
instruments.
NOTE: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and indicators (bug) on
selected flight instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these indicators (bug) and readouts, as
they appear on the display during certain AFCS flight director modes.
Two Primary Flight Displays (PFDs) feature large horizons, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and
course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic,
and weather information are also presented on the PFDs and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on each PFD:
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
– Indicated airspeed
– Airspeed awareness ranges
– Vspeed reference flags
– Mach number
– Airspeed reference and bug
• Groundspeed
• True airspeed
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication
• Altimeter, showing
– Trend vector
– Barometric setting
– Selected Altitude
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath
Indicators
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
• Vertical Navigation (VNAV) indications
• Total Air Temperature (TAT)
• Static Air Temperature (SAT)
• ISA Temperature Deviation
• Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing
– Turn Rate Indicator
– Bearing pointers and information windows
– Navigation source
– Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
– Bearing pointers and information windows
• Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
• Generic Timer
• Wind data
• Radar Altimeter (RA)
• Barometric minimum descent altitude (MDA)
The PFDs also display various alerts and annunciations.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
62
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
20
17
15
14
21
19
18
22
16
12
13
10
23
24
7
5
2
11
25
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
1
3
9
8
1
Airspeed Reference
2
Airspeed Indicator
3
Indicated Airspeed
4
Airspeed Reference Bug
5
Mach Number
6
Current Track Indicator
7
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
8
True Airspeed
9
Ground Speed
10
Softkeys
11
System Time
12
Timer
13
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
14
Heading Bug
15
Navigation Status Box
16
Turn Rate Indicator
17
Barometric Altimeter Setting
18
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
19
Selected Altitude Bug
20
Altimeter
21
Selected Altitude
22
COM Frequency Box
23
AFCS Status Box
24
Slip/Skid Indicator
25
Attitude Indicator
4
6
6
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
63
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
1
Reversionary Sensor Window
2
Traffic Annunciation
3
IAS Comparator Annunciation
4
Vspeed References
5
Selected Heading
6
Wind Data
7
Inset Map
8
DME1 Information Window
9
Static Air Temperature (SAT)
10
Total Air Temperature (TAT)
11
Bearing Information Windows
12
ISA Temperature Deviation
13
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision
Height
14
CAS Window
15
Selected Course
16
Radar Altimeter
17
TAWS Annunciation
18
Current Vertical Speed
19
Glideslope Indicator
1
2
4
3
6
5
8
7
11
9
10
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
64
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for speed criteria and Vspeed values.
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The numeric labels and
major tick marks on the moving tape represent intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving tape
represent intervals of five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 80 knots of airspeed scale viewable at
any time. The indicated airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching
maximum operating speed (VMO/MMO), at which point it turns red along with the Mach number readout.
The Mach number is displayed below the Airspeed Indicator (Figure 2-3) for airspeeds at or above Mach 0.4
or at altitudes of 26,227 feet or higher. The color of the readout is the same as the color of the airspeed pointer.
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator
Indicated
Airspeed
Red Pointer and Mach
Number Showing
Overspeed
Airspeed Indicator
Airspeed
Trend Vector
Airspeed
Reference
Vspeed
References
1.3V
S1
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
Mach
Number
Speeds above the maximum operating speed, VMO or MMO depending on aircraft altitude, appear in the high
speed awareness range, shown on the airspeed tape by a red/white barber pole. An aural overspeed warning
tone is generated if the airspeed exceeds the high airspeed limit. If the indicated airspeed is within the red
range, the airspeed pointer is displayed in red. An aural stall warning is generated if the airspeed falls below
VLSA. An open green circle on the airspeed tape represents 1.3VS1. The green circle is displayed when in the air
below 18,000 feet, and it indicates the stall warning system is functioning correctly.
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to the
tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate of
acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the line
shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses VMO/
MMO, the airspeed and the Mach readouts changes to yellow. If the trend vector crosses the red VLSA range, the
airspeed readout is displayed in yellow. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if any data
needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
65
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The Airspeed Reference is displayed above the Airspeed Indicator in the box indicated by a selection bug
symbol. A bug corresponding to this speed is shown on the tape. If the Airspeed Reference exceeds the range
shown on the tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. See the AFCS Section for more
information about the Airspeed Reference.
Vspeeds can be changed and their flags turned on/off from the Timer/References Window. When active (on),
the Vspeeds are displayed at their respective locations to the right of the airspeed scale. By default, all Vspeed
values are reset and all flags turned off during power up.
Vspeed Flag
Takeoff
V
1
1
V
R
R
V
2
2
V
FS
FS
Landing
V
AP
AP
V
REF
RF
V
AC
AC
V
FS
FS
Table 2-1 Vspeed Flag Labels
Vspeeds are categorized as either takeoff or landing. Takeoff Vspeed flags are automatically turned off when
airspeed reaches 160 knots. The order in which the categories are displayed is determined by whether the
aircraft is on the ground or in the air. If the aircraft is on the ground, the takeoff Vspeeds are displayed at the
top of the Vspeed list. If the aircraft is in the air, the landing Vspeeds are displayed at the top.
Figure 2-4 Vspeed Settings
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
66
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Changing Vspeeds and turning Vspeed flags on/off:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Speed Bugs
2) To turn the Vspeed on or off, touch the On Button.
3) To set or change a Vspeed value, touch the Data Field for the Vspeed, enter a value in the keypad, and touch
Enter.
The icon next to the Vspeed value (Figure 2-5) indicates that the Vspeed is a pilot-entered value.
Figure 2-5 Pilot-Entered Vspeed
Turning all Vspeed flags on/off:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Speed Bugs.
2) To activate all Vspeed flags, touch the All Bugs On Button.
3) To remove all Vspeed flags, touch the the All Bugs Off Button.
Restoring all Vspeed defaults:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Speed Bugs.
2) Touch the Restore All Defaults Button.
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
(Formatted for Single-cue
Command Bars)
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
Figure 2-6 Attitude Indicator
5
6
8
7
2
4
3
9
1
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
67
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚. When the Synthetic Vision System is activated, the pitch scale is reduced to 10˚ up and 7.5˚
down; refer to the Additional Features section.
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. One bar displacement is equal to one ball
displacement on a traditional inclinometer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and moves laterally
away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside the turn) is
indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.
The Attitude Indicator also provides pitch cues to comply with TCAS II Resolution Advisories; see the Hazard
Avoidance Section for details.
Figure 2-7 Slip/Skid Indication
Slip/Skid
Indication
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
68
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The yellow symbolic aircraft on the Attitude Indicator changes appearance based on selection of AFCS flight
director Command Bar format (see the AFCS Section for details). Both PFDs show the same Command Bar
format and Aircraft Symbol. The Command Bar format (single cue or dual cue) may be selected on the GTC
Avionics Settings Screen.
Changing Command Bar and Aircraft Symbol format.
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities >Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Touch the System Tab.
3) Touch the Flight Director Active Format Data Field.
4) Touch desired setting (Single Cue or Dual Cue).
Cross-pointer
Single-cue
Figure 2-8 Flight Director Format Settings
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
69
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ALTIMETER
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The current altitude is displayed in the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the corresponding edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed
in a separate box below the Selected Altitude.
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in 6 seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown if
altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
Setting the Selected Altitude:
Turn the ALT Knob on the GMC 715 AFCS Controller to set the Selected Altitude in 100-ft increments. When
meters are displayed, Selected Altitude is adjusted in 50 meter increments..
If set, the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value is also available for the Selected altitude.
If desired, press the ALT SEL Knob to synchronize the selected altitude with the displayed altitude to the nearest
10 ft.
Figure 2-10 Altimeter (Metric)
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
Current
Altitude
(Meters)
Figure 2-9 Altimeter
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Barometric
Setting Box
Selected
Altitude
Current
Altitude
MDA/DH
Bug
Altitude
Trend
Vector
The altitude tape does not change scale when the altitudes are displayed in meters.
Displaying altitude in meters:
1) Select the PFD Settings Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Select the Other PFD Settings Softkey.
3) Select the Altitude Units Softkey.
4) Select the Meters Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
70
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in
VNAV vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNAV Target
Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
Selecting standard barometric pressure:
Press the BARO Knob to select standard pressure; STD BARO is displayed in the Barometric Setting box.
Figure 2-11 Standard Barometric Altimeter Setting
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Select the PFD Settings Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Select Other PFD Settings
3) Select the Altitude Units Softkey.
4) Select the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
Or, select the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa; see Figure 2-10).
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
71
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
A Baro Transition Alert is provided to alert the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting when crossing
the transition altitude in either direction. This is displayed by the flashing light blue barometric pressure setting
when crossing the transition altitude.
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities >Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Touch the Alerts Tab.
• To turn the alert on or off, touch the Baro Transition Alert Enable Button.
• To set or change the Baro Transition Alert Altitude, touch the Baro Transition Alert Data Field. Enter the
desired altitude on the keypad, and touch Enter.
Figure 2-12 Baro Transition Alert
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed on a fixed scale with labels at 2000 and
4000 fpm and minor tick marks every 1000 fpm. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate
is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 4000 fpm, the pointer appears at the edge of the
tape and the rate appears inside the pointer.
A magenta chevron is displayed on the VSI to indicate the Required Vertical Speed for reaching a VNAV target
altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has generated. See the Flight Management
and AFCS sections for details on VNAV features. Refer to Section 2.3, Supplemental Flight Data, for more
information about VNAV indications on the PFD. The VSI also provides vertical speed guidance during TCAS
II Resolution Advisories; see the Hazard Avoidance section for details.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
72
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL DEVIATION
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) is a magenta chevron indicating the baro-VNAV vertical deviation
when Vertical Navigation (VNAV) is being used (Figure 2-13). The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD
within 1 minute” alert. Full-scale deflection (two dots) on the VDI is 1000 feet. The VDI is removed from the
display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight Management Section for details on VNAV features,
and refer to Section 2.3, Supplemental Flight Data, for more information about VNAV indications on the PFD.
The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-14) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is
tuned in the active NAV field. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on
a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in
place of the diamond.
Glideslope
Indicator
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Vertical
Speed
Pointer
VNAV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Figure 2-14 Glideslope IndicatorFigure 2-13 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicators (VSI and VDI)
The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for FMS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V,
LNAV/VNAV, LPV). When an approach of this type is loaded into the flight plan, FMS is the selected navigation
source, and SBAS is used for vertical approach guidance, the Glidepath Indicator appears as a magenta diamond
(Figure 2-15). If the approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place
of the diamond.
While executing an LNAV/VNAV approach and SBAS is unavailable, baro-VNAV (barometric vertical
navigation) is used for vertical guidance. This occurs due to any of the following conditions:
• SBAS fails or becomes unavailable prior to the FAF
• The aircraft is outside of SBAS coverage
• SBAS is manually disabled on the GPS Status page of the GTC
Baro-VNAV is also the source of vertical approach guidance if the LNAV/VNAV procedure does not support
SBAS vertical guidance.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
73
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
While baro-VNAV is being utilized, the Glidepath Indicator appears as a magenta pentagon (Figure 2-16). If
the approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the pentagon.
Glidepath
Indicator
Figure 2-15 Glidepath Indicator Figure 2-16 Baro-VNAV Glidepath Indicator
Baro-VNAV
Glidepath
Indicator
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
74
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels occur every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and the current
track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond. The HSI also presents turn rate, course deviation,
bearing, and navigation source information.
The HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a sliding
deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (FMS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double line
arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with the
course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
Figure 2-17 Horizontal Situation Indicator (360˚ HSI)
1
10
11
14
12
16
3
4
2
8
9
7
5
1
Turn Rate Indicator
2
Selected Heading
3
Current Track Indicator
4
Navigation Source
5
Lateral Deviation Scale
6
Heading Bug
7
Course Pointer
8
To/From Indicator
9
OBS Mode Active
10
Rotating Compass Card
11
Aircraft Symbol
12
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
13
Flight Phase
14
Selected Course
15
Turn Rate and Heading Trend Vector
16
Current Heading
17
Lubber Line
6
13
17 15
A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI. The current track is represented on the
HSI by a magenta diamond. To the upper left of the HSI, the Selected Heading is shown in light blue; the light
blue bug on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading. The Desired Track (DTK) is shown in
magenta to the upper right of the HSI when the selected navigation source is FMS without OBS mode active.
The Selected Course (CRS) is shown to the upper right of the HSI in green when the selected navigation source
is VOR or LOC and in magenta when the selected navigation source is FMS with OBS mode active.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
75
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Adjusting the selected heading:
Turn the
HDG
Knob to set the Selected Heading on both PFDs.
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
Turn the
CRS
Knob to set the Selected Course (for each PFD).
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station.
Selected
Heading Selected
Course
Figure 2-18 Heading and Course Indications (Magnetic)
Current Heading Heading Bug
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation or
referenced to true north (denoted ‘T’), and are set on the GTC Avionics Setup Screen. When an approach
referenced to true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the
navigation angle setting to ‘True’ at the appropriate time.
Figure 2-19 Heading and Course Indications (True)
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
76
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Changing the navigation angle setting:
1) From the Home Page touch Utilities >Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Touch the Units Tab.
3) Touch the Nav Angle Data Field.
4) Touch the desired setting (Magnetic or True).
Figure 2-20 Navigation Angle Settings
TURN RATE INDICATOR
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than
4 deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 deg/sec
Half-standard
Turn Rate
Standard
Turn Rate
Figure 2-21 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
77
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV, FMS, and ADF
sources by pressing the PFD Settings Softkey then the Bearing 1 or Bearing 2 Softkey. The bearing pointers
are light blue and are single-line (Bearing 1) or double-line (Bearing 2). A pointer symbol is shown in the
information windows to indicate the navigation source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are
visually separated from the CDI by a white ring. Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible
due to data unavailability.
Figure 2-22 HSI with Bearing and Distance Information
Bearing 1
Pointer
Bearing 2
Pointer
Bearing Source 2
Bearing Source 1
Distance to
Bearing Source
Station
Identifier
Frequency
Tuning
Mode
Distance
When a bearing pointer is displayed, its associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information windows (Figure 2-22) are beneath the HSI and displays the following information:
• Bearing source (NAV, FMS, ADF)
• Pointer icon (Bearing 1 = single line, Bearing 2 =
double line)
• Frequency (NAV, ADF)
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, FMS)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
When the NAV radio is tuned to an ILS frequency, the bearing source and bearing pointer are removed
from the HSI. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station
identifier when the station is within range. If FMS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is
displayed in lieu of a frequency.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
78
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and “NO DATA” is displayed in the information window if
the NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR station or if FMS is the bearing source and an active waypoint
is not selected.
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
1) Select the PFD Settings Softkey.
2) Select a Bearing Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window with a NAV source.
3) Select the Bearing Softkey again to change the bearing source to FMS.
4) Select the Bearing Softkey a third time to change the bearing source to ADF.
5) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, select the Bearing Softkey again.
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
Figure 2-23 Course Deviation Indicator
Crosstrack
Error
Navigation
Source
Scale
CDI
Flight
Phase
The CDI can display two sources of navigation, FMS or VOR/LOC. Color indicates the current navigation
source, magenta for FMS and green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPS-
derived distance when coupled to GPS. When navigating using a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI uses the
same angular limits as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while navigating with GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
79
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-24 Navigation Sources
Changing navigation sources:
1) Select the Active NAV Softkey to change from FMS to VOR1 or LOC1.
2) Select the Active NAV Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2.
3) Select the Active NAV Softkey again to return to FMS.
Figure 2-25 Selecting a Navigation Source
LOC1
Selected
VOR2
Selected
FMS
Selected
Active NAV
Softkey
The system automatically switches from FMS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling
accordingly when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active waypoint, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
• The FMS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
FMS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until FMS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (VTF) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source. FMS steering guidance is not
provided after this switch.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
80
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
If the same VOR/LOC navigation source is selected on both PFDs, the navigation source annunciation turns
yellow on both displays if not synchronized. Once the CDIs are synchronized (CDI Synchronization turned
on), they remain synchronized until the selection is changed. When turning on the system for use, it remembers
the last CDI synchronization setting.
FMS CDI SCALING
When FMS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to yellow. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, ‘HDG LEG’ is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
The current FMS CDI scale setting is displayed on the GTC Avionics Settings Screen and the full-scale
deflection setting may also be changed on this screen. If the selected scaling is smaller than the automatic
setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled accordingly and the selected setting is displayed
rather than the flight phase annunciation.
Changing the selected FMS CDI setting:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities >Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Touch the System Tab.
3) Touch the GPS CDI Data Field.
4) Touch desired setting (2.00 NM, 1.00 NM, 0.30 NM, or AUTO).
Figure 2-26 GPS CDI Settings
When set to ‘Auto’ (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-27, Table 2-2).
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
81
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-27 Automatic CDI Scaling
2.0 nm
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
0.3 nm
Missed
Approach
1.0 nm
Approach
1.0 nm
Te rminal
1.0 nm
Te rminal
0.3 nm
Departure
CDI Full-scale Deflection
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF leg
(see Glossary for leg type definitions)
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA leg
• At 30 nm from the departure airport the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm
over a distance of 1.0 nm.
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (Figures 2-28 and 2-29). This transition normally
occurs within 2.0 nm of the Final Approach Fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling automatically
once the approach procedure is active or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
82
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-28 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling Figure 2-29 Typical LNAV/VNAV, LPV and LP Approach CDI Scaling
1.0 nm
2 nm
FAF
0.3 nm
course width
Landing
Threshold
CDI Full-scale Deflection
angle based
on database
information
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
1.0 nm
2 nm
350 ft
angle set
by system
0.3 nm
FAF
CDI Full-scale Deflection
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
-
The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF leg
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA leg
Flight Phase Annunciation* Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
Departure DPRT 0.3 nm
Terminal TERM 1.0 nm
Enroute ENR 2.0 nm
Oceanic OCN 2.0 nm
Approach
(Non-precision) LNAV
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (Figure 2-28)
Approach
(Non-precision with
Vertical Guidance)
LNAV + V
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV) L/VNAV
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (Figure 2-29)
Approach
(LPV) LPV
Approach
(LP) LP
Missed Approach MAPR 0.3 nm
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to yellow.
Table 2-2 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
83
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
OBS MODE
NOTE: VNAV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a FMS
flight plan (FMS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current “active-to” waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. ‘OBS’ is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the “active-to” waypoint on the moving map.
If desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the FMS flight
plan returns to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight path on the moving map retains the modified course line.
Figure 2-30 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
OBS Softkey
OBS Softkey
FMS
Selected
OBS Mode
Enabled
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating an FMS flight plan:
1) Select the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Select the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
84
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. ‘SUSP’ appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label
changes to indicate the suspension is active as shown in Figure 2-31. Selecting the SUSP Softkey, deactivates
the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
Figure 2-31 Suspension of Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
SUSP
Softkey SUSP
Annunciation
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
85
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.2 GARMIN SVT™ (SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY)
WARNING:
Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
Garmin SVT™ (Synthetic Vision Technology) is a visual enhancement to the Vision Flight Deck. SVT depicts
a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of view is 44
degrees to the left and 44 degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary Flight Display (PFD),
or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. The depicted imagery is derived from the aircraft
attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a 4.9 arc-second database of terrain, obstacles, and other
relevant features. The terrain data resolution of 4.9 arc-seconds, meaning that the terrain elevation contours are
stored in squares measuring 4.9 arc-seconds on each side, is required for the operation of SVT. Loss of any of the
required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to be disabled until the required data
is restored.
The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed even
if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid with
lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
The Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS-A) is integrated within SVT to provide visual and auditory
alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the projected flight path. Terrain alerts
are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of TAWS-A terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVT.
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
• Flight Path Marker
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Traffic Display
• Airport Signs
• Runway Display
• Terrain Alerting
• Obstacle Alerting
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
86
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-32 Synthetic Vision Imagery
SVT OPERATION
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch scale increments are reduced to
10 degrees up and 7.5 degrees down.
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Settings Softkey leads into the PFD
function Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the
Attitude Overlays
Softkey displays the SVT feature
softkeys. The softkeys are labeled Pathways, Synthetic
Terrain, Horizon Heading
,
and Airport Signs. The
Back Softkey returns to the previous level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT
feature may be activated. A green annunciator on the softkey label indicates the feature is activated.
Horizon Heading, Airport Signs, and Pathways softkeys are only available when the Synthetic Terrain
Softkey is activated (softkey annunciator is green). After activating the Synthetic Terrain Softkey, the
Horizon Heading, Airport Signs, and Pathways softkeys may be activated in any combination to display
desired features. When system power is cycled, the last selected state (on or off) of the SVT feature softkeys is
remembered.
• Pathways Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• Synthetic Terrain Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• Horizon Heading Softkey enables the display of heading marks and digits on the zero pitch line.
• Airport Signs Softkey enables airport signposts.
Activating and deactivating SVT:
1) Press the PFD Settings Softkey.
2) Press the Attitude Overlays Softkey.
3) Press the Synthetic Terrain Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with each press of the Synthetic
Terrain Softkey.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
87
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Settings Softkey.
2) Press the Attitude Overlays Softkey.
3) Press the Pathways Softkey. The Pathways feature will cycle on or off with each press of the Pathways
Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Settings Softkey.
2) Press the Attitude Overlays Softkey.
3) Press the Horizon Heading Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with each press of the
Horizon Heading Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Settings Softkey.
2) Press the Attitude Overlays Softkey.
3) Press the Airport Signs Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with each press of the Airport
Signs Softkey.
SVT FEATURES
Figure 2-33 SVT on the Primary Flight Display
SVT
Softkeys
Synthetic
Terrain
Flight
Path
Marker
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
Airplane
Symbol
Selected
Altitude
Pathways
Boxes
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
88
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
PATHWAYS
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored
rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box
size represents 700 feet wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During
an approach, the box width is 700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The
height is 200 feet or one half full scale deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the
pathway boxes are displayed is determined by the higher of either the selected altitude or the VNAV altitude
programmed for the active leg in the flight plan (Figure 2-34).
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes
that correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a
green CDI. An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line
drawn on the Inset map or MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
Figure 2-34 Selected and Programmed Selected Altitude
Selected
Altitude
Programmed
Altitudes
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and some LNAV
approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used independent of the
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
89
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the display when the selected
navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the active leg when leg sequencing
is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that would lead to intercepting a leg in
the wrong direction.
DePartUre anD enroUte
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg of
the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the first
active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT field of
view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching the center
of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum of four.
Pathways are displayed along the flight plan route at the highest of either the selected altitude or the
programmed altitude for the leg. Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with
aircraft performance. Flight plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above
the aircraft at the altitude selected or programmed.
DeScent anD aPProacH
Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent (Figures 2-35, 2-36). When the flight
plan includes programmed descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided that
the selected altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
During a Vectors-to-Final (VTF) approach transition, pathways are displayed along the final approach
course inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP). Pathways are shown level at the selected altitude
or at the next programmed crossing altitude, whichever is higher, up to the point along the final approach
course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From
the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept point, the pathways are shown inbound to the
Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral and vertical descent path.
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if FMS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses are not displayed.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
90
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-35 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
TOD
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
miSSeD aPProacH
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
91
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-36 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
Descent displayed
by pathway Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
FAF
MAP
MAHP
Climbs NOT displayed
by pathway
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes.
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
92
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-37 Flight Path Marker Position is Affected by Wind
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
Wind
Vector
ZERO PITCH LINE
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
HORIZON HEADING
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30-degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the Horizon Heading Softkey.
TRAFFIC
WARNING:
Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a
partial symbol.
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVT
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in the Inset map or
MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVT display. For
more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
93
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
AIRPORT SIGNS
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from an
airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until the aircraft
is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the airspeed or
altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the Airport Signs Softkey.
Figure 2-38 Airport Signs
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
Traffic
RUNWAYS
WARNING:
Do not use SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
displayed.
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
94
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Runway
Selected for
Approach
Figure 2-39 Airport Runways
Other
Runway on
Airport
TAWS-A ALERTING
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts. In addition to the yellow terrain shading for a caution alert and the red shading for a warning alert,
TAWS-A alerting will also indicate potential impact points. These potential impact points correspond to
red and/or yellow X symbols on the PFD Inset Map (as shown in Figure 2-41), Navigation Status Pane, and
TAWS-A Pane. Terrain shading will only occur on the synthetic terrain display on the PFD and TAWS-A Pane.
No terrain shading nor potential impact points will be displayed on the PFD inset map or the Navigation
Status Pane. For more detailed information regarding TAWS-A, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVS field of view to the left or right of the aircraft.
TERRAIN
Annunciation
Figure 2-40 Terrain Alert
Potential
Impact
Points
Terrain
Caution
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
95
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols found
on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative
height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude
are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
As with terrain alerting, obstacle alerting is limited to the synthetic terrain display on the PFD and the
TAWS-A Pane.
Figure 2-41 Obstacle
Potential
Impact
Point
Obstacle
Warning TAWS-A
Annunciation
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
96
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FIELD OF VIEW
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V-shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Enabling or Disabling the field of view indication:
1) From the Home Screen on the Touchscreen Controller, touch Map > Map Settings > Map Options.
2) If not already selected, touch the Other Tab.
3) Scroll to display the Field of View Annunciator Button.
4) Touch the Field of View Button to enable or disable the field of view indication. A green annunciator on the
button indicates the field of view is enabled. A gray annunciator indicates the field of view is disabled.
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and Field of View
turned on.
Figure 2-42 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
SVT View on the PFD Field of View on the MFD
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
97
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.3 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFDs also display various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNAV) indications.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAYS
The Total and Static air temperatures (TAT and SAT) are displayed in the lower left of the PFD. ISA Temperature
Deviation is displayed in the lower right of the PFD. These temperatures are displayed in degrees Celsius (°C)
or Fahrenheit (°F) as configured by the installation personnel.
Figure 2-43 TAT, SAT, and ISA
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
98
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
WIND DATA
Wind direction and speed (relative to the aircraft) in knots can be displayed in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
shows “NO WIND DATA”. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways:
Figure 2-44 Wind Data
Option 2Option 1
Option 3 No Data
Displaying wind data:
1) Select the PFD Settings Softkey.
2) Select the Other PFD Settings Softkey.
3) Select the Wind Softkey to display wind data display options.
4) Select one of the Option softkeys to change how wind data is displayed below the Selected Heading:
• Option 1: Wind direction arrows with numeric headwind/tailwind and crosswind components
• Option 2: Wind direction arrow with direction and speed
• Option 3: Wind direction arrow with headwind (H) or tailwind (T) and crosswind (X) speed components
5) To remove the window, select the Off Softkey.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
99
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNAV) INDICATIONS
When a VNAV flight plan has been activated, VNAV indications (VNAV Target Altitude, RSVI, VDI) appear on
the PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management section for details on VNAV features. VNAV indications are removed from the PFD according to
the criteria listed in Table 2-3.
VNAV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
FMS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Figure 2-45 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
Top of
Descent
Message
Criteria
VNAV Indication Removed
Required Vertical
Speed (RSVI)
Vertical
Deviation (VDI)
VNAV Target
Altitude
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change X X X
VNAV cancelled X X X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
Section)
X X X
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNAV Target Altitude X X X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit X X X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed X X
Table 2-3 VNAV Indication Removal Criteria
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
100
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.4 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in yellow, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Figure 2-46 Marker Beacon Annunciations
Inner Marker
Middle MarkerOuter Marker
Altimeter
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATIONS
Traffic is displayed symbolically on the Inset Map (PFD), the Navigation Map Page (MFD), and various
other MFD page maps. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix F for more details about the
Traffic Collision Avoidance System II (TCAS II). When a Traffic Advisory (TA) or Resolution Advisory (RA) is
detected, the following automatically occur:
• The PFD Inset Map is enabled, displaying traffic.
• A flashing black-on-yellow (TA) TRAFFIC annunciation or white-on red (RA) TRAFFIC annunciation appears
to the top left of the Attitude Indicator for five seconds and remains displayed until no TAs or RAs are detected
in the area.
• One or more aural traffic alerts is generated.
• When an RA becomes active, vertical guidance pitch cues will appear on the Attitude Indicator and Vertical
Speed Indicator; see the Hazard Avoidance Section for details about TCAS II.
Traffic
Symbols
Figure 2-47 Traffic Annunciation and Inset Map with Traffic Displayed
PFD TA Annunciation
PFD RA Annunciation
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
101
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
TERRAIN ANNUNCIATIONS
Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class A (TAWS-A) annunciations appear on the PFD to the upper
right of the HSI. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and the Appendix for information on TAWS-A alerts
and annunciations.
Inset Map
Enabled,
Displaying
Traffic When
TA Detected
Figure 2-48 Traffic and Example TAWS-A Annunciations
ALTITUDE ALERTING
Altitude Alerting provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts when approaching the Selected Altitude.
Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The following occur when approaching
the Selected Altitude:
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to black text on a light
blue background and flashes for 5 seconds.
• When the aircraft passes within 200 ft of the Selected Altitude, an aural tone is heard, and the Selected
Altitude changes to light blue text on a black background and flashes for 5 seconds.
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude) an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background and
flashes for 5 seconds.
Figure 2-49 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
Within 1000 ft Within 200 ft Deviation of ±200 ft
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
102
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: The Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available and TAWS-A terrain alerting
is inhibited.
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-yellow ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation appears to the top left of the Altimeter, flashing
for several seconds then remaining displayed until the condition is resolved.
Figure 2-50 Low Altitude on GPS SBAS Approach
Altimeter
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
For altitude awareness, a Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH), based on barometric,
radar, or temperature compensated altitude can be set. When active, the altitude setting is displayed to the
lower left of the Altimeter and with a bug at the corresponding altitude along the Altimeter (once the altitude is
within the visible range of the tape). The following visual annunciations alert the pilot when approaching the
MDA/DH:
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the ‘BARO MIN’, RA MIN, or
‘TEMP COMP’ box appears with the altitude in light blue text. The bug appears on the altitude tape in light
blue once in range.
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn white.
• Once the aircraft reaches the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn yellow and the aural alert, “Minimums
Minimums”, is heard.
Figure 2-51 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations
Light Blue Within 2500 ft Yellow When Altitude ReachedWhite Within 100 ft
Barometric
Minimum
Box
MDA/DH
Bug
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the setting
for the alert. If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA/DH, once it reaches 50 feet above
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
103
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
the MDA/DH, alerting is disabled. The MDA/DH is synchronized on both PFDs. The function is reset (set to
“Off”) when the power is cycled or another approach is activated.
Setting the Baro/Radio Alt Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height and bug:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Minimums > Minimums.
2) Touch Baro, Temp Comp, or Radio Alt (OFF is selected by default.)
• If Temp Comp is selected, touch Temp at Dest. Use the keypad to enter desired temperature, and touch
Enter.
3) Use the keypad to enter the desired altitude from zero to 16,000 feet, and touch Enter.
Figure 2-52 Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height
RADAR ALTIMETER
When the radar height (the aircraft altitude above ground level detected by the radar altimeter) is between
zero and 2500 feet, the current value is displayed in white above the selected course box (Figure 2-53). Display
of radar height becomes more sensitive as the height above ground decreases (Table 2-4).
Figure 2-53 Current Radar Height
Radar Altimeter
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
104
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Radar Height Range Shown to Nearest
0 to 200 feet 5 feet
200 to 1500 feet 10 feet
1500 to 2500 feet 50 feet
Table 2-4 Radar Altimeter Sensitivity
When the radar altimeter is selected as the altitude source for the minimum descent altitude/decision height
alerting function, the radar altimeter numeric display changes to yellow upon descending to at or below this
altitude (Figure 2-54). Refer to the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting discussion in this
section for more information about this function.
Figure 2-54 RA as Altitude Source for MDA/DH
A ground line (Figure 2-55) is shown on the Altimeter to display the aircraft’s height relative to the ground.
If the data becomes invalid, the message ‘RA FAIL’ is displayed in yellow in place of the current radar height
(Figure 2-56).
Figure 2-55 Altimeter Displaying the Ground Line
Ground
Line
Radar Altimeter
Radar Altimeter
Minimums Box
Figure 2-56 Radar Altimeter Invalid Data
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
105
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.5 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
The annunciations listed in Table 2-5 can appear on the PFD when abnormal GPS conditions occur. Refer to
the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation Location Description
GPS LOI Lower left of
HSI
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–FMS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
GPS INTEG OK Lower left of
HSI
Integrity OK–FMS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
DR Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than FMS
position to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan
waypoints
Table 2-5 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
Figure 2-57 Abnormal GPS Condition Annunciations
In Dead Reckoning Mode, the following items on the PFD are shown in yellow:
• CDI (When FMS is the selected navigation source, the CDI does not turn yellow and is simply removed a few
seconds following the appearance of the “GPS LOI” annunciation.)
• Current Track Bug
• Wind Data
• Distances in the Bearing Information windows
• GPS bearing pointers
These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode and they become increasingly
inaccurate over time.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
106
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward the horizon warn of extreme
pitch. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon
line.
Figure 2-58 Pitch Attitude Warnings
Nose Low
Nose High
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter, Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display and
the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from the PFD (and corresponding softkeys are disabled) when the aircraft
experiences unusual attitudes:
• Traffic Annunciations
• Flight Director Command Bars
• Inset Map
• Total Air Temperature (TAT)
• Static Air Temperature (SAT)
• ISA Temperature Deviation
• Wind Data
• System Time
• Generic Timer
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
• Selected Altitude
• VNAV Target Altitude
• Selected Heading
• Selected Course/Desired Track
• PFD Setup Menu
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
107
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
GARMIN SVT TROUBLESHOOTING
Garmin SVT™ is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs.
SVT is disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVT data,
the PFD display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVT becomes disabled without the following data resources:
• Attitude data
• Heading data
• GPS position data
• 4.9 arc-second terrain data
• Obstacle data
• TAWS function is not available, in test mode, or failed
SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when switching
to Reversionary Mode, SVT will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVT PFD display will
be shown in the interim.
SVT UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
During extreme pitch attitudes, the display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or bottom
of the screen to represent earth or sky. The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great
enough to completely fill the display. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during extreme
pitch attitudes.
Blue Band
Figure 2-59 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
108
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Blank Page
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
109
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
SECTION 3 ENGINE AND AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for limitations.
The system offers improved flight operations and reduces crew workload by automatically monitoring critical
system parameters and providing system alerts during all phases of flight using the following:
• The Engine Indication System (EIS) displays electrical, fuel, engine, pressurization, and flight control
information on the left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD).
• Synoptics pages are provided for monitoring the status of the doors, brakes, hydraulics, oxygen, pressurization,
environmental control, electrical, fuel, and de-icing systems.
• The Crew Alerting System (CAS) displays advisories, cautions, and warnings to communicate conditions,
statuses, and system failures. CAS messages are grouped by level of importance and color-coded based on
urgency and appear in a window to the right of the Altimeter on the Primary Flight displays (PFDs). See the
Appendices for a list of possible CAS messages.
In combination with these, aural alerts, additional avionics messages, and master indicators are used to inform
the crew of aberrant flight conditions. The system also provides an improved level of maintenance data for the
ground crew.
Figure 3-1 EICAS (Normal)
CAS
Window
PFD
MFD
EIS
Display
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B110
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
In the event of a display failure, depending on the failed display(s), the operating display(s) may be re-configured
to present Primary Flight Display (PFD) symbology together with condensed EIS and MFD information (refer to
the System Overview for more information about Reversionary Mode).
Figure 3-2 EICAS (Reversionary Mode)
CAS
Window
EIS
Display
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
111
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
3.1 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS)
EIS information is presented using gauges and digital readouts. During normal operating conditions, gauge
pointers and readout text appear in green. When unsafe operating conditions occur, gauge pointers and readouts
change color to indicate caution (yellow) or warning (red). Refer to each indicator description for additional
details on display behavior.
If the time limit for an unsafe condition is exceeded, the color of the pointers and digits may change to denote
an increase in priority level. Parameters out of the range of the readout display a red ‘X’. If sensor data for a
parameter becomes invalid or unavailable, a red “X” is displayed across the indicator and/or readout.
1
Engine Fan Rotation Speed
2
Interstage Turbine
Temperature (ITT)
3
Engine High Pressure
Compressor Rotation Speed
4
Oil Pressure and Temperature
5
Fuel Display
6
Battery Voltmeter
7
Pressurization Display
8
Spoiler Status
9
Landing Gear Status
10
Flap Indicator
11
Trim Indicator
Figure 3-3 EICAS Display (Normal)
11
9
8
7
10
6
5
4
3
2
1
Figure 3-4 EIS Display (Reversionary)
1
2
3
4
5 6
7
8
9
10
11
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B112
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
TAKEOFF DATA SET WINDOW
When the aircraft is parked or is taxiing, the Outside Air Temperature (OAT) for the departure airport can be
set and Automatic Thrust Reserve (ATR) enabled/disabled in the Takeoff Data Set Window.
Figure 3-5 Takeoff Data Set Window
Setting the Outside Air Temperature (OAT):
1) From Home, touch Aircraft Systems > Engine Settings
2) Touch Set Data, then touch OAT.
3) Use the keypad to enter the OAT and touch the Enter button to confirm the new OAT.
4) To confirm the selected takeoff settings, touch the Send Data Button.
Or:
To cancel the operation, touch BACK or Home.
On aircraft electrical power-up, Automatic Thrust Reserve (ATR) is enabled by default. ATR status (defined
in Table 3-1) is shown at the top of the EIS Display (Figure 3-7).
Indication* Description
ATR ATR enabled in both engines
ATR ATR armed in both engines, but inactive
TO - RSV ATR activated in at least one engine
GA - RSV ATR activated in at least one engine in
Go-Around Mode
* When no indication is shown, ATR has not been
enabled or armed in both engines.
Table 3-1 Automatic Thrust Reserve (ATR) Status
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
113
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
Disabling/enabling Automatic Thrust Reserve (ATR):
1) From Home, touch Aircraft Systems > Engine Settings
2) Touch Set Data.
3) Touch the Auto Thrust Reserve Button to enable/disable (green indicates enabled).
4) If desired, change the OAT while the Takeoff Data Set Window is displayed.
5) To confirm the selected takeoff settings touch the Send Data Button,
Or:
To cancel the operation, touch BACK. or Home
ENGINE INDICATIONS
Automatic Thrust
Reserve Status
Commanded
N1 Rating
Engine Fan
Speed
Interstage Turbine
Temperature
Engine High Pressure
Compressor Speed
N1 for Thrust
Rating Max Speed
Current Speed
Control Arc
Thrust Rating
Max Speed
Figure 3-6 Engine and Oil Indications
Thrust Rating
Oil Pressure
Oil Temperature
Ignition Status
Minimum Anti-Ice
N1 Bug
N1 Transient Limit
ITT Transient Limit
ITT Steady State
Limit
The upper portion of the EIS Display is devoted to showing indications for the engines: engine stage
rotation speeds (N1 and N2; shown as percentages), ATR status, thrust rating information, Interstage Turbine
Temperatures (ITT; degrees Celsius, °C), and oil pressure (pounds per square inch, psi) and temperature (°C).
The N1 gauges indicate the engine fan rotation speeds, while the N2 readouts show the engine high pressure
compressor rotation speeds. Both are shown as percentages. Values and limits are obtained from the Full
Authority Digital Engine Controller (FADEC).
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B114
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
On the N1 gauges, the following indications can be displayed:
• Commanded N1 Rating (based on Thrust Lever Angle, TLA, position) – When the current N1 value is below
the commanded rating, a light blue arc is drawn from the current to the commanded N1 value.
• N1 value corresponding to the Thrust Rating Maximum Speed (shown as a light blue T-shaped bug)
• Current Speed Control N1 value (shown as a green arc)
• Minimum Anti-Ice N1 Bug – Indicates which N1 should be commanded for full anti-ice capacity (shown as
a light blue tick mark)
• Engine shutdown (normal operations) – When the engines are shutting down normally, the N1 gauges display
a light blue “OFF” annunciation (Figure 3-8).
Figure 3-7 Engine Shutdown Indication
Interstage Turbine Temperatures (ITT) values and limits are obtained from the Full Authority Digital Engine
Control (FADEC). Ignition status appears below the ‘IGN’ label beside the ITT scales (A, B, AB, or OFF).
THRUST RATING
The thrust rating for the engines is shown at the center top of the EIS Display, above and between the N1
gauges (see Table 3-2 for indications). The maximum value of the speed range (in kt) for the displayed thrust
rating is shown above each N1 gauge. While the aircraft is in the air, the rating can be changed to suit the
conditions for maximum climb or continuous thrust.
Indication Thrust Rating
CRZ Cruise
CLB Max Climb
CON Continuous
TO Takeoff
GA Go Around
Table 3-2 Thrust Rating Indications
Selecting a thrust rating:
1) From Home, touch Aircraft Systems > Engine Settings
2) To choose the continuous thrust rating, select the Continuous Button,
Or:
To choose the Maximum Climb thrust rating, select the Maximum Climb Button.
3) Touch BACK or Home to exit.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
115
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
CURRENT SPEED CONTROL (CSC)
Current Speed Control (CSC), if available, can be activated while the autopilot is engaged and AFCS Altitude
Hold Mode is active. During CSC, the FADEC varies engine thrust to maintain the desired airspeed, within
a certain control range.
When CSC is active, green arcs appear on the N1 gauges, at values corresponding to the current speed
selected (Figure 3-7).
The N1 gauge flashes ‘LIM’ (black text on yellow background) if the CSC maximum authority limit has
been reached for the corresponding engine (Figure 3-9).
Figure 3-8 N1 Current Speed Control Limit
Selecting Current Speed Control (CSC):
1) Enter Altitude Hold Mode (see the AFCS Section for details).
2) Press the CSC Key (on the AFCS Control Unit).
FUEL AND ELECTRICAL INDICATIONS
The fuel display is located beneath the oil indicators and shows the fuel flow in pounds per hour (pph) and
the tank fuel quantity in pounds (lb) for each engine, the total fuel quantity, and the fuel tank temperature in
°C. The factory can also configure the Fuel Display for metric units.
Figure 3-9 Fuel Display
Total Fuel Quantity
Fuel Temperature
Tank Fuel Quantity
Engine Fuel Flow
Voltages for batteries 1 and 2 are shown as readouts below the fuel indications.
Figure 3-10 Electrical Display
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B116
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
CABIN PRESSURIZATION
The Cabin Display shows cabin pressurization information (cabin altitude and rate of change, differential
cabin pressure) is shown along with the Landing Field Elevation (LFE) and oxygen system pressure. The trend
of cabin pressure altitude rate change is indicated by a green arrow beside the rate readout.
The LFE is set automatically based on the destination in the active flight plan by touching the FMS Mode
Button, but can also be adjusted manually by the pilot. Automatically entered values appear in green; if the
value is entered by the pilot, it changes to light blue. Pilot-selected LFE is yellow for 30 seconds when a
difference of >5 feet occurs. A red “X” is displayed if the LFE is out of range or the data source is invalid.
If the landing field elevation is high enough, the indication “HI FIELD” is shown at the top of the Cabin
Display and the cabin altitude caution and warning thresholds are increased to avoid generation of nuisance
alert indications.
High Landing
Field Elevation
Figure 3-11 Cabin Pressure Display
Pressure Altitude
Pressure Differential
Oxygen System Pressure
Pressure Change Rate
Landing Field Elevation
Setting the displayed landing field elevation:
1) From Home, touch Aircraft Systems > Landing Field Elevation.
2) Touch the FMS Button to set the Landing Field Elevation to the value for the destination airport in the current
flight plan.
Or:
Use the Manual button to set the desired elevation using the keypad.
3) To confirm the new Landing Field Elevation value, select the Enter Button.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
117
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
SPOILER AND LANDING GEAR
Spoiler and landing gear statuses are shown using the indications in Tables 3-3 and 3-4, respectively.
Spoiler
Status
Main Landing
Gear
Right-side
Landing Gear
Left-side
Landing Gear
Figure 3-12 Spoiler and
Landing Gear Indications
Indication Description
Invalid information
SPDBRK Spoilers out of takeoff
configuration
FAIL Spoilers failed
CLOSED Spoilers retracted
GND SPLR Ground spoilers deployed
SPDBRK Speedbrakes deployed
STEEP Steep Mode enabled (optional)
Table 3-3 Spoiler Indications
Indication Description
Landing Gear Down
Landing Gear Up
Landing Gear Transitioning
(Normal)
Landing Gear Locked Down
(Abnormal)
Landing Gear Locked Up
(Abnormal)
Landing Gear Transitioning
(Abnormal)
Table 3-4 Landing Gear Position Indications
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B118
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
FLAPS AND TRIM
Flap deflection is normally displayed beneath the trim indications using a rotating pointer and a green readout
indicating the flap lever setting (0, 1, 2, 3, or FULL). A light blue bug marks the selected flap position. When
the flap is in motion, the readout is dashed. If the position data becomes invalid, a red ‘X’ is displayed over
the flap pointer.
Pitch, roll, and yaw trim indications are shown along scales at the bottom of the EIS Display. If the trim
information becomes invalid, the pointers are removed and the readout (for pitch) is displayed with a red “X”.
Flap
Lever
Setting
Flap
Selected
Bug
Flap
Position
Figure 3-13 Flap and Trim Indications
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
119
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
3.2 SYNOPTICS
The Synoptics pages show current conditions of certain aircraft functionalities on aviation system diagrams,
reducing workload by allowing the flight crew to rapidly analyze the situation. Aircraft systems graphically
depicted in the synoptic diagrams include:
• Anti-ice system
• Brake system
• Doors
• Electrical system
• Environmental system
• Fuel system
• Hydraulics system
• Oxygen system
• Pressurization system
Accessing Synoptic Pages:
From Home, touch Aircraft Systems.
Shows System
Status on
Selected Pane
Shows ECS
Synoptic on
Selected Pane
Shows Electrical
Synoptic on
Selected Pane
Shows Ice
Protection
Synoptic on
Selected Pane
Shows Fuel System
Synoptic Display on
Selected Pane
Figure 3-14 Aircraft Systems Screen
Shows
Maintenance
Synoptic on
Selected Pane
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B120
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
SYSTEM STATUS
The Status Synoptics Page is displayed after the power-up splash screen is acknowledged on the MFD. The
aircraft diagram displays open passenger and emergency doors in red and open baggage doors in yellow.
Figure 3-15 System Status Synoptics Page
1
Flight ID
2
Static Air Temperature (SAT)
3
Total Air Temperature (TAT)
4
True Airspeed (TAS)
5
Engine Dispatch Message Box
6
Oxygen
7
Emergency Brake Accumulator Pressure
8
Door Status
9
Electrical Status
10
Hydraulic Pressure
6
7
8
9
10
1 432 5
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
121
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL SYSTEM (ECS)
The Environmental Control System (ECS) Synoptic Page provides information about cockpit and cabin
temperatures as well as status information for valves, fans, heat exchangers, and the Vapor Cycle System.
1
Cockpit Temperature Setting
2
Cabin Temperature Setting
3
Ram Air Valve (RAV)
4
Environmental Control System Valve (ECS) 1
5
Cockpit Duct Temperature Setting
6
Pressure Regulating Shutoff Valve (PRSOV) 1
7
Vapor Cycle System (VCS)
8
Outflow Valve (OFV) Status*
9
Pressure Regulating Shutoff Valve (PRSOV) 2
10
Crossbleed Valve Status (XBV)
11
Cabin Duct Temperature Setting
12
Heat Exchanger Cooling Pack Circuit
13
Environmental Control System Valve (ECS) 2
14
Actual Cabin Temperature
15
Cabin Evaporator Fan
16
Actual Cockpit Temperature
17
Cockpit Evaporator Fan
Figure 3-16 Environmental Control System Synoptics Page
2
1
3
4
6
7
5
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
* Outflow valve (OFV) status is displayed only while the aircraft is parked or taxiing.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B122
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
Lines between icons on the diagram denote ducting. Icons shown in green are operating normally. A white
icon may indicate that a unit is off or not otherwise operating normally (see Table 3-5). A red “X” indicates
failure of a unit.
Unit Icons and Descriptions
Fan
On
Off
Heat Exchanger
On
Off
Vapor Cycle System
On
Off
PRSOV Valve
Crossbleed Valve
Open with flow
Open, no flow
Closed
ECS Valve
Ram Air Valve
Open with flow
Open, no flow
Closed
Table 3-5 Environmental Control System Unit Status Indications
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
123
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
ELECTRICAL
The Electrical Synoptics Page uses a diagram of the aircraft’s electrical system to display the system status. The
generators, ground power supply (GPU), batteries, and buses are shown in green to denote normal operation.
Color of the units changes depending on the condition (Table 3-6). A red “X” over a component indicated
invalid data or a failed unit.
Battery
Figure 3-17 Electrical Synoptics Page
Bus
Generator
Ground Power Unit
Unit Icons and Descriptions
Generator
N2>52%
Bus off
N2<52%
Bus
On
Bus off
Hot Bus
Normal
Abnormal
Battery
Normal
Abnormal
Table 3-6 Electrical System Unit Status Indications
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B124
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
FUEL
The Fuel Synoptics Page displays the status of the fuel tanks and feed system. A red “X” over a component
indicated invalid data or a failed unit.
1
Total Fuel
2
Fuel Used
3
Left Feed Ejector
4
Left DC Pump
5
Left Tank Fuel Quantity
6
Fuel 1 SOV
7
LH Pressure Switch
8
Left Engine Feed Line
9
Fuel Transfer SOV
10
Right Engine Feed Line
11
RH Pressure Switch
12
Fuel 2 SOV
13
Right Tank Fuel Quantity
14
Right DC Pump
15
Right Feed Ejector
Figure 3-18 Fuel Synoptics Page
1
2
4
5
3
6
14
15
7
8
12
11
10
13
9
Unit Icons and Descriptions
Fuel Line
Operating
Not operating
Feed Ejector
Operating
Not operating
Fuel Pressure
Switch
Operating
Not operating
Fuel Shut Off Valve
Open with flow
Open, no flow
In transit
Closed
DC Pump
Operating
Not operating
Fuel Transfer Valve
Open with flow Open, no flow
In transit
Closed
Table 3-7 Fuel System Unit Status Indications
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
125
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
ICE PROTECTION SYSTEM
When the ice protection system is operating normally, all components are shown in green on the system
diagram. Items in white indicate components which are off. A red “X” over a component indicated invalid data
or a failed unit.
1
Windshield Heaters
2
Boot Lines and Valves
3
Anti Ice Valve (AIV) 1
4
Bleed Duct and Skin 1
5
Engine Anti Ice Valve (EAIV) 1 Valve and Bleed Line
6
Pressure Regulating Shut-Off Valve 1 (PRSOV 1)
7
Crossbleed Valve
8
Ice Protection Bleed Duct
9
Pressure Regulating Shut-Off Valve 2 (PRSOV 2)
10
Engine Anti Ice Valve (EAIV) 2 Valve and Bleed Line
11
Bleed Duct and Skin 2
12
Anti Ice Valve (AIV) 2
Figure 3-19 Ice Protection Synoptics Page
1
2
6
5
8
7
4
3
11
12
10
9
2
2
1
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B126
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
Unit Icons and Descriptions
Anti Ice Line
Operating
Not operating
Crossbleed Valve (XBV)
Pressure Regulating Shutoff
Valve (PRSOV)
Open with flow
Open, no flow
Closed
Anti Ice Valve (AIV)
Engine Anti Ice Valve (EAIV)
Open with flow
Open, no flow
Closed
Table 3-8 Ice Protection System Unit Status Indications
The Minimum Anti-Ice N1 Bug (Figure 3-20) appears as a light blue tick mark on the N1 engine gauges. It
indicates which N1 should be commanded to achieve full anti-ice capability. The bug is visible when the landing
gear is extended and wing anti-ice is on, or when an engine or engine bleed air is lost. If the anti-ice capacity is
not fully operational, the message “A-I LO CAPACITY” appears on the Crew Alerting System (CAS).
Figure 3-20 Engine Minimum N1 Anti-Ice Indication
Minimum Anti-Ice
N1 Bug
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
127
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for required actions.
The Engine Maintenance Synoptics Page can only displayed when the aircraft is on the ground and both
engines are off. Maintenance personnel can view status messages for engine dispatch items and the following
engine parameter exceedance peaks and durations recorded by the FADEC for the last engine start-shutdown
cycle:
• Engine fan rotation speed (N1)
• Engine high pressure compressor rotation speed
(N2)
• Inter Turbine Temperature (ITT)
• Main oil temperature and Pressure
• Fuel temperature
If no peaks are detected, the values and times are displayed as dashes. The data is cleared from the display
using the CLEAR E1 and CLEAR E2 buttons on the touch screen controller.
The Engine Maintenance Page also displays ITT and N1 trims loaded in each Engine Data Collection Unit
(EDCU).
Figure 3-21 Engine Maintenance Synoptics Page
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B128
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
3.3 CREW ALERTING SYSTEM (CAS)
NOTE: Aural alerts associated with abnormal conditions and advisories are managed through the audio
panels. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information.
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices Section for more information on the Crew Alerting System (CAS).
When Crew Alerting System (CAS) messages are generated, the CAS Window opens to the right of the Altimeter
(on the PFDs). Up to 14 messages can be displayed; when more than 14 messages accumulate, the CAS Softkey
becomes available. Pressing the CAS Softkey displays softkeys for scrolling up and down through the messages
in the CAS Window.
CAS
Scrolling Softkey
CAS
Window
Softkey Annunciation
(Press to Acknowledge
CAS Message)
Figure 3-22 CAS Display
CAS MESSAGE PRIORITIZATION
NOTE: Information on CAS messages in this pilot’s guide is always superseded by the AFM.
CAS messages are grouped by criticality (warning, caution, advisory) and sorted by order of appearance (most
recent messages on top). The color of the message is based on its urgency and on required action, and the
softkey label changes to display the appropriate annunciation when a CAS message is generated.
• Warning (red) – Immediate crew awareness and action required; accompanied by an aural tone (triple chime
every 3 seconds) and flashing ‘WARNING’ softkey annunciation.
• Caution (yellow) – Immediate crew awareness and possible future corrective action required; accompanied
by an aural tone (single chime every 5 seconds) and flashing ‘CAUTION’ softkey annunciation.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
129
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
• Advisory (white) – Crew awareness required and subsequent action may be required; accompanied by a
flashing ‘ADVISORY’ softkey.
The softkey annunciation flashes and the corresponding aural alert sounds until acknowledged by depressing
the softkey.
Figure 3-23 Softkey Annunciations (MSG Softkey Labels)
A CAS message does not appear more than once at a given time. Warning and caution CAS messages flash
when they are generated, and continue to flash until acknowledged. Advisory CAS messages, flash for 5
seconds or until acknowledged.
Some CAS messages are differentiated as root causes of other failures and should be considered first during
the decision-making process when multiple CAS messages are displayed. These “golden” messages flash until
acknowledged and remain in inverse video after being acknowledged manually.
After the acknowledgment, a message remains displayed at the top of its respective priority group in the CAS
Window until either a newer message of the same priority appears or the condition(s) that caused the alert to
display no longer exist.
3.4 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for corrective pilot actions.
ENGINE
When an engine failure occurs, besides the CAS message corresponding to the failed engine (“E1 FAIL” or “E2
FAIL”), the corresponding N1 gauge displays the annunciation “FAIL” in black text over a yellow background
(Figure 3-24). Detection of an engine fire causes a CAS message corresponding to the engine on fire (“E1 FIRE”
or “E2 FIRE”) in addition to the “FIRE” annunciation to be displayed over the ITT gauge in white text over a
red background (Figure 3-25).
Figure 3-24 Engine Failure Indication Figure 3-25 Engine Fire Indication
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B130
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
CABIN PRESSURIZATION
If the cabin altitude (ALT) reaches a caution level, the readout displays black text on a yellow background.
When a high cabin altitude warning occurs, the readout is displayed with white text on a red background, and
the corresponding CAS message “CAB ALTITUDE HI” is issued.
A cabin pressure change rate (RATE) caution readout is indicated with black text on a yellow background.
If low flow or a cabin leak is detected, the cabin pressure change rate readout displays white text on a red
background and the trend arrow becomes red (Figure 3-26).
Excessive cabin differential pressure (DELTA-P) causes the pressure readout to display a yellow background
and black text; warnings are indicated with red background with white readout text. The CAS message “CAB
DELTA-P FAIL” accompanies this condition.
Low oxygen system pressure (OXY) is indicated by a yellow background and black text. The CAS message
“OXY LO PRES” is also issued.
If the pilot selected landing field elevation (LFE) differs by more than five feet from the FMS LFE value, the
LFE readout is shown as black text with a yellow background for 30 seconds.
A red “X” is displayed in place of any readout on the Cabin Display that is invalid or out of range.
Figure 3-26 Cabin Display with Leak Detected
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
131
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
FLAPS
The following denote abnormal flap conditions:
• Flaps not in position for takeoff – Flap pointer and readout are shown in red with white text (Figures 3-27
and 3-28).
• Flaps have failed or become jammed – Flap pointer and readout are shown in yellow with black text (Figure
3-29)
• Flaps unavailable – Flap pointer is removed and readout is shown in light blue with black text (Figure
3-30)
• Flaps position data invalid – Flap pointer and readout displayed with a red “X”
Figure 3-27 Flaps Retracted
at Takeoff
Figure 3-28 Flaps at FULL
(Landing) Position at Takeoff
Figure 3-29 Flaps Failed Figure 3-30 Flaps Unavailable
TRIM
Aileron or rudder mistrim are denoted with yellow arrows pointing in the direction of mistrim on the Roll and
Yaw Trim indicators (Figure 3-31).
If takeoff configuration has been selected and the pitch trim position is not within the green band on the pitch
trim scale, the pointer and readout turn red with white text (Figure 3-32).
Rudder
Mistrim
Aileron
Mistrim
Figure 3-31 Mistrim Figure 3-32 Pitch Trim
Outside Takeoff Configuration
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B132
ENGINE & AIRFRAME SYSTEMS
Blank Page
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
133
AUDIO AND CNS
SECTION 4 AUDIO AND CNS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Controller, communication
radios, navigation radios, Mode S transponder, and the Controller Pilot Data Link Communications System
(CPDLC). The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description of the Audio and CNS system
interconnection.
The Touchscreen Controller provides primary tuning of the communication transceivers and microphone and
receiver audio selection. The Audio Controller includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and
passengers, a marker beacon receiver, and a COM clearance recorder.
The Mode S transponder is controlled with the Touchscreen Controller. The Transponder Button is located in
the upper right of the touchscreen, right below the XPDR IDENT Button. The Transponder Button displays the
active four-digit code, mode, and reply status (Figure 4-1).
PFD COM/NAV DISPLAY AND CONTROLS
Figure 4-1 COM/NAV Window, Active NAV Window, and Active COM Frequency Box
21
1
Active
NAV Window
– Displays active NAV station ID, frequency, and DME distance.
2
Selected
Source/Frequency Box
– Displays selected communication source and frequency.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
134
AUDIO AND CNS
TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLLER AUDIO AND CNS CONTROLS
Figure 4-2 Touchscreen CNS Bar Controls
4
3
6
7
14
12
1
2
5
8
9
10
13
11
1
MIC
Button – Switches between the #1 COM transceiver and the #2 COM transceiver.
2
COM1
Button – Transfers the standby and active COM1 frequencies.
3
Audio & Radios
Button – Displays/removes the Audio & Radios Screen. The Audio & Radios Screen is
used to control the communication and navigation radios and the Audio settings for the pilot and copilot.
4
Intercom
Button – Displays/removes the Intercom Screen. The Intercom Screen is used to control the
intercom isolation, volume, and squelch settings for the pilot and copilot.
5
STBY Button (COM1)
– Displays/removes the COM1 Standby Screen. The COM1 Standby Screen is used
to enter and transfer COM1 frequencies.
6
COM2
Button– Transfers the standby and active COM2 frequencies.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
135
AUDIO AND CNS
7
Transponder IDENT
Button – Sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). When
selected,the word
IDENT
is displayed in green and pulsates for the duration of the transmission. While
the transponder is replying to an interrogation, an R is displayed on the button.
8
Transponder Code
Button– Displays/removes the Transponder Screen. The Transponder Screen is used to
select the transponder modes and the transponder code using the keypad.
9
STBY Button (COM2)
– Displays/removes the COM2 Standby Screen. The COM2 Standby Screen is used
to enter and transfer COM2 frequencies.
10
MON
Button – Controls which receivers are being explicitly monitored.
11
Function Label
– Indicates middle knob function. Typical: Pilot COM1/COM2 Volume, Push: Squelch
12
Function Label
– Indicates right large and small knob function. Typical Frequency Entry: COM1/COM2
Frequency, Push:1-2, Hold:Typical Data Entry: Data Entry, Push: Enter, Hold:
13
Middle Knob
– Function as labeled (see #12)
14
Large/Small Right Knob
– Function as labeled (see #12). Data Entry: Large knob moves the cursor from field
to field. Small knob edits character by character. Frequency Entry: Large knob increases/decreases MHz;
Small knob increases/decreases kHz. Press the small knob to confirm the frequency. Press and hold to
transfer the standby frequency to the active frequency.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
136
AUDIO AND CNS
4.2 COM OPERATION
COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
NOTE: When turning on the Prodigy Touch for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the
active COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
The COM1 and COM2 Frequencies are shown on the CNS Bar. The COM1, COM2 and COM3 frequencies
are also shown on the Audio & Radios Screen. The COM transceiver can be selected for transmitting on the
Touchscreen Controller. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission, audio from
the other COM radio(s) is muted.
The active COM frequency is displayed in green. The standby frequency of the COM selected for tuning is
light blue. When the standby frequency of the COM selected for tuning is being tuned with the right knobs,
the entire standby frequency button is highlighted in light blue The other standby frequency is white.
Enabling COM3 voice communication:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) If necessary, scroll to find COM3.
3) Touch the Datalink Button.
4) Touch the OK Button in response to “Disable Datalink Mode?”. To cancel the request, touch the Cancel
Button.
Disabling COM3 voice communication:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) If necessary, scroll to find COM3.
3) Touch the COM3 Frequency Button.
4) Touch the Datalink Button to disable COM3 voice communication.
Or:
1) From Home, touch the CPDLC Button to display the CPDLC Screen.
2) Touch the OK Button in response to “Switch Radio to Data Mode?”. To cancel the request, touch the Cancel
Button.
Selecting a COM Radio for transmission:
Touch the MIC Button in the CNS Bar to switch between COM1 and COM2 radios until the desired COM is
selected.
Or:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the desired MIC Button on the Audio & Radios Screen to select the COM radio for transmission.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
137
AUDIO AND CNS
Selecting a COM Radio for monitoring:
Touch the MON Button in the CNS Bar to monitor the COM not selected for transmission.
Or:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the COM1 Button, COM2 Button, or COM3 Button to select the COM radio for monitoring.
Figure 4-3 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmission
Communication
Source/Primary
Frequency
(COM1 selected
for transmission)
CNS Bar
Audio & Radios Screen
COM1 Active Frequency
(selected for transmission) COM2 Primary Frequency
COM1 Standby Frequency COM2 Standby Frequency
COM1 Active Frequency
COM1 Standby Frequency
COM2 Primary Frequency
COM2 Standby Frequency
MIC Button(COM2)
MIC Button (COM1 selected
for transmission)
MIC Button (COM1 selected for transmission)
CNS Bar Symbol Meaning of Symbol
COM1 selected for transmission/monitoring
COM2 selected for transmission/monitoring
HF COM selected for transmission/monitoring
COM3 selected for transmission/monitoring
An additional audio source is manually selected for monitoring
Passenger Address is selected for transmission
CNS Bar MIC/MON Button Symbols
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
138
AUDIO AND CNS
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE INDICATIONS
During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency. During COM signal reception,
a white RX appears by the active COM frequency.
Figure 4-4 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications
Transmit Indicator Receive Indicator
Transmit Indicator
Receive Indicator
Transmit Indicator on PFD
Receive Indicator on PFD
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
139
AUDIO AND CNS
COM FREQUENCY TUNING
NOTE: If an invalid frequency is entered, the invalid digits are ignored and a confirmation window appears.
Selecting a COM1/2 frequency using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) Touch the COM1 STBY Button or COM2 STBY Button in the CNS Bar to display the COM1/COM2 Standby
Screen.
2) Use the keypad to select the frequency.
3) Touch the Enter Button to accept the new frequency as the COM1/COM2 standby frequency; or touch the
XFER Button to accept the new frequency as the COM1/COM2 active frequency and transfer the previously
active frequency to the standby frequency.
Or:
1) Press the small right knob to select the COM desired for tuning (selected standby frequency is light blue).
2) Turn the large and small right knobs to tune the frequency (Large knob increases/decreases MHz; Small knob
increases/decreases kHz).
3) Press the small right knob to enter the new frequency as the standby frequency; or press and hold the small right
knob to transfer the new standby frequency to the active frequency.
Figure 4-5 COM Frequency Tuning Keypad
Frequency selected
for tuning
Frequency Transfer (XFER) Button
Enter Button
Find Button
Knob function labels
Or:
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
140
AUDIO AND CNS
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the COM1/COM2 volume slider, or press the small right knob, to select COM1/COM2 for tuning.
3) Turn the large and small right knobs to select the frequency (Large knob increases/decreases MHz; Small knob
increases/decreases kHz).
4) Press the small right knob to accept the new frequency as the standby frequency; or press and hold the small
right knob to accept the new frequency as the COM1/COM2 active frequency and transfer the previously active
frequency to the standby frequency
Figure 4-6 Audio & Radios Screen - COM1/COM2 Frequency Tuning
COM selected for
tuning (light blue
border)
COM1 Volume Slider
Knob function labels
COM2 Frequency Button
Or:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the COM1/COM2 frequency button to display the COM1/COM2 Standby Screen.
3) Use the keypad to select the desired frequency.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the new frequency as the COM1/COM2 standby frequency; or touch the
XFER Button to accept the new frequency as the COM1/COM2 active frequency and transfer the previously
active frequency to the standby frequency.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
141
AUDIO AND CNS
Selecting a COM3 frequency using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the COM3 volume slider to select COM3 for tuning.
3) Turn the large and small right knobs to select the frequency (Large knob increases/decreases MHz; Small knob
increases/decreases kHz).
4) Press the small right knob to accept the new frequency as the standby frequency; or press and hold the small
right knob to accept the new frequency as the COM1/COM2 active frequency and transfer the previously active
frequency to the standby frequency
Figure 4-7 Audio & Radios Screen - COM3 Frequency Tuning
COM selected for
tuning (light blue
border)
COM3 Volume Slider
Knob function labels
COM3 Frequency Button
Or:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the COM3 frequency button to display the COM3 Standby Screen.
3) Use the keypad to select the desired frequency.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the new frequency as the COM3 standby frequency; or touch the XFER
Button to accept the new frequency as the COM3 active frequency and transfer the previously active frequency
to the standby frequency.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
142
AUDIO AND CNS
Finding and selecting a COM frequency from the CNS Bar:
1) Touch the COM1 STBY Button (CNS Bar) or the COM2 STBY Button (CNS Bar) or the COM3 Frequency Button
to display the COM1/2/3 Standby Screen.
2) Touch the Find Button to display the Find COM Frequency Screen.
3) Touch the tab for the desired type of frequency (Recent, Nearest, Dest, Flight Plan, or Favorite).
4) Scroll the list to find the desired frequency.
5) Touch the frequency button to accept the new frequency as the COM1/COM2/COM3 standby frequency.
Figure 4-8 Find COM Frequency Screen
Select a
tab for the
frequency
category
Selecting
Multiple
accesses
another
level with
selectable
frequencies
Select the
frequency
button to
tune the
standby
frequency
Find
Button
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
143
AUDIO AND CNS
Finding and selecting a COM frequency from the Airport Info Screen:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport to display the Airport Information Screen.
2) If needed, touch the airport button to enter/find the desired airport.
3) Touch the Freqs Tab to display the Airport Frequencies Screen.
4) Scroll the list to find the desired frequency.
5) Touch the frequency button to display the Load Frequency Screen.
6) Touch the location button to load the frequency to COM1/2 Active/Standby or Favorites.
Figure 4-9 Airport Info Screen Tuning
Freqs
Tab
Frequency
Button
Airport
Button
Location
Buttons
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
144
AUDIO AND CNS
Finding and selecting a COM frequency from the Nearest Airport Screen:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > Airport to display the Nearest Airport Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the desired airport.
3) Touch the airport button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
4) Touch the Airport Info Button to display the Airport Information Screen.
5) Touch the Freqs Tab to display the Airport Frequencies Screen.
6) Scroll the list to find the desired frequency.
7) Touch the frequency button to display the Load Frequency Screen.
8) Touch the location button to load the frequency to COM1/2 Active/Standby or Favorites.
Figure 4-10 Nearest Airport Tuning
Airport
Button
Airport Info
Button
Freqs
Tab
Frequency
Button
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
145
AUDIO AND CNS
Finding and selecting a COM frequency from the Nearest Airspace/ARTCC/FSS/Weather Screen:
1) From Home, touch the Nearest > (Airspace or ARTCC or FSS or Weather) to display the Nearest (Airspace
or ARTCC or FSS or Weather) Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the desired frequency.
3) Touch the frequency button to display the Load Frequency Screen.
4) Touch the location button to load the frequency to COM1/2 Active/Standby or Favorites.
Figure 4-11 Nearest Airspace/ARTCC/FSS/Weather Tuning
Frequency
Button
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
146
AUDIO AND CNS
FREQUENCY SPACING
The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing (118.000
to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected,
all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
Figure 4-12 COM Channel Spacing
25-kHz Channel Spacing
8.33-kHz Channel Spacing
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) From Home, touch Utilities >Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Scroll the list to show the COM Channel Spacing button.
3) Touch the COM Channel Spacing button to display the choice of 25.0 kHz or 8.33 kHz.
4) Touch the channel spacing button.
Figure 4-13 Changing COM Frequency Channel Spacing
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
147
AUDIO AND CNS
AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch for the selected transceiver, press the middle
knob. When Automatic Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is
heard over the headsets and speaker, if selected. Pressing the middle knob again enables Automatic Squelch .
When Automatic Squelch is disabled, a white SQ appears next to the active COM frequency.
Figure 4-14 COM Radio Automatic Squelch Disable/Enable
Automatic Squelch Off Indicator
Automatic Squelch Off
Indicator
Automatic Squelch Off Indicator
on PFD
Middle knob - Push to
disable/enable Automatic
Squelch
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
148
AUDIO AND CNS
VOLUME
The selected COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% on the touchscreen controller by
turning the middle knob or by sliding your finger right or left on the COM volume slider. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. Sliding to the right increases
volume, sliding to the left decreases volume. When adjusting volume, the level is displayed in place of the
active frequency in the CNS Bar, and remains for two seconds after the change. When the Audio & Radios
Screen is displayed, the volume changes are not shown in the CNS Bar.
Figure 4-15 COM Volume Level
Selected COM
Volume
COM1 Volume
Middle Knob
- Turn to adjust
COM volume
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
149
AUDIO AND CNS
HF COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
The HF COM Frequencies are shown on the PFD. The HF COM transceiver can be selected for transmitting
on the Touchscreen Controller. During reception of audio from the HF COM radio selected for transmission,
audio from the other COM radio(s) is muted.
Selecting the HF COM Radio for transmission:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the desired MIC Button on the Audio & Radios Screen to select the HF COM radio for transmission.
Selecting the HF COM Radio for monitoring:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the HF Button to select the HF COM radio for monitoring.
CNS Bar
Audio & Radios Screen
MIC Button (HF selected
for transmission)
MIC Button (HF selected for transmission)
Figure 4-16 Selecting the HF COM Radio for Transmission
Communication Source/Primary Frequency
on PFD (HF selected for transmission)
Figure 4-17 HF COM Frequency Displayed on PFD
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
150
AUDIO AND CNS
HF COM VOLUME
The selected HF COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% on the touchscreen controller
by turning the middle knob or by sliding your finger right or left on the COM volume slider. Turning the
knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. Sliding to the right
increases volume, sliding to the left decreases volume.
The volume can also be adjusted on the PFD using the PFD Controller. With the COM/NAV Window
displayed, turn the large right knob to select the VOLUME field. Turn the small right knob to adjust the volume
(Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume).
Figure 4-19 COM Volume Level
Selected HF
COM Volume
Middle Knob
- Turn to adjust
COM volume
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
151
AUDIO AND CNS
4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
The active NAV frequency selected for navigation is shown on the PFD. Active and Standby NAV frequencies
are shown on the Touchscreen Controller.
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by selecting the
Active NAV
Softkey located on the PFD. The NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Selecting the
Active NAV
Softkey once selects NAV1
as the navigation radio. Selecting the
Active NAV
Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio.
Selecting the
Active NAV
Softkey a third time activates FMS mode. Selecting the
Active NAV
Softkey again
cycles back to NAV1.
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• FMS – If FMS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are displayed in white on the Touchscreen Controller.
Figure 4-20 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation
NAV1 Active Frequency
and ID
The NAV Radio is selected by
pressing the
Active NAV
Softkey
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
or ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
152
AUDIO AND CNS
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding buttons on the Touchscreen Controller.
Touching the NAV1 or NAV2 Button selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard
over the headset and the speaker (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
Figure 4-21 Selecting a NAV Radio for Monitoring
NAV1 Standby Frequency
NAV2 Active Frequency/ID
NAV2 Standby Frequency
NAV2 Button
(not selected)
NAV1 Button
(selected for monitoring)
NAV1 Active Frequency/ID
Selecting/deselecting a navigation radio for monitoring:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the NAV1 or NAV2 Button on the Audio & Radios Screen to select/deselect the radio for monitoring.
NAV RECEIVER TUNING
The NAV frequencies are tuned from the Touchscreen Controller.
Figure 4-22 Audio & Radios Screen - NAV Frequency Tuning
NAV selected for
tuning (light blue
border)
NAV1 Volume Slider
Knob function labels
NAV2 Frequency Button
Selecting a NAV frequency using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the NAV1/NAV2 frequency button to select NAV1/NAV2 for tuning, and display the NAV1/NAV2 frequency
tuning screen.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
153
AUDIO AND CNS
3) Use the keypad to select the desired frequency.
4) Touch the Enter Button to enter the new frequency as the NAV1/NAV2 standby frequency; or touch the XFER
Button to enter the new frequency as the NAV1/NAV2 standby frequency and transfer it to the active frequency.
Figure 4-23 NAV Frequency Tuning Window
XFER Button
Enter Button
Find Button
Knob function labels
Or:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Touch the NAV1/NAV2 volume slider to select NAV1/NAV2 for tuning.
3) Turn the large and small right knobs to tune the frequency (Large knob increases/decreases MHz; Small knob
increases/decreases kHz).
4) Press the small right knob to enter the new frequency as the NAV1/NAV2 standby frequency; or press and hold
the small right knob to transfer the new standby frequency to the active frequency.
Finding and selecting a NAV frequency from the Airport Info Screen:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport to display the Airport Information Screen.
2) If needed, touch the airport button to enter/find the desired airport.
3) Touch the Freqs Tab to display the Airport Frequencies Screen.
4) Scroll the list to find the desired frequency.
5) Touch the frequency button to display the Load Frequency Screen.
6) Touch the location button to load the frequency to NAV1/2 Active/Standby or Favorites.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
154
AUDIO AND CNS
Figure 4-24 Airport Info Screen Tuning
Freqs
Tab
Frequency
Button
Airport
Button
Location
buttons
Finding and selecting a NAV frequency from the VOR Info Screen:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > VOR to display the VOR Information Screen.
2) If needed, touch the VOR button to enter/find the desired airport.
3) Touch the frequency button to display the Load Frequency Screen.
4) Touch the location button to load the frequency to NAV1/2 Active/Standby or Favorites.
Figure 4-25 VOR Info Screen Tuning
Frequency
Button
VOR
Button
Location
buttons
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
155
AUDIO AND CNS
Finding and selecting a NAV frequency from the Nearest Airport Screen:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > Airport to display the Nearest Airport Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the desired airport.
3) Touch the airport button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
4) Touch the Airport Info Button to display the Airport Information Screen.
5) Touch the Freqs Tab to display the Airport Frequencies Screen.
6) Scroll the list to find the desired frequency.
7) Touch the frequency button to display the Load Frequency Screen.
8) Touch the location button to load the frequency to NAV1/2 Active/Standby or Favorites.
Location
buttons
Figure 4-26 Nearest Airport Tuning
Airport
Button
Airport Info
Button
Freqs
Tab
Frequency
Button
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
156
AUDIO AND CNS
Finding and selecting a NAV frequency from the Nearest VOR/FSS/Weather Screen:
1) From Home, touch the Nearest > (VOR or FSS or Weather) to display the Nearest (Airspace or FSS or
Weather) Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the desired frequency.
3) Touch the frequency button to display the Load Frequency Screen.
4) Touch the location button to load the frequency to NAV1/2 Active/Standby or Favorites.
Figure 4-27 Nearest VOR/FSS/Weather Tuning
Frequency
Button
Location
Buttons
VOR/LOC ID
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the right of the active
NAV frequency. Pressing the middle knob turns off the Morse code audio only for the selected radio. To turn
off both NAV IDs, select each NAV in turn and press the middle knob to turn the Morse code off.
Figure 4-28 VOR/LOC ID Locations
Morse Code ID
is selected
Station
Identifier
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
157
AUDIO AND CNS
VOLUME
The selected NAV radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% on the touchscreen controller by turning
the middle knob or by sliding your finger right or left on the NAV volume slider. Turning the knob clockwise
increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. Sliding to the right increases volume,
sliding to the left decreases volume.
Figure 4-29 NAV Volume Level
Selected NAV
Volume
Middle knob -
Turn to adjust NAV
volume
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in FMS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode as
the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight Management Section for
details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
• If the current CDI navigation source is FMS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 active
frequency field. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 active frequency field is transferred to
standby.
• If the current CDI navigation source is FMS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
158
AUDIO AND CNS
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft. The receiver detects the three marker tones
– outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter
on the PFD.
Figure 4-30 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD
Outer Marker
Indication Middle Marker
Indication Inner Marker
Indication
Figure 4-31 Marker Beacon Keys
Marker Beacon
High Sense
Button
Marker Beacon
Mute Button
(flashing)
Marker Button
Marker Beacon
Volume Slider
Marker Volume
Knob Label
The Touchscreen Controller provides three different states of marker beacon audio operation; Selected, Muted,
and Deselected. Pressing the
MARKER
Button selects/deselects marker beacon audio. The button annunciator
indicates when marker beacon audio is selected.
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the flashing
MUTE
Button mutes the audio but does not
affect the marker annunciations. The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The flashing
MUTE
Button is also removed during audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker beacon signal is
received.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
159
AUDIO AND CNS
Pressing the High Sense Button switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The High
Sense function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during
an approach. The Low Sense function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while
over a station.
The Marker Beacon volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% on the touchscreen controller by turning
the middle knob or by sliding your finger right or left on the Marker Beacon Volume Slider. Turning the
knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. Sliding to the right
increases volume, sliding to the left decreases volume.
ADF/DME TUNING
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME and bearing information windows (ADF) and
using the ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
The system tunes the ADF receiver (optional) and DME transceiver (optional). The ADF is tuned by entering
the frequency in the ADF standby frequency field of the Audio & Radios Screen on the Touchscreen Controller.
The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic
and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
The following ADF/DME information is displayed on the Touchscreen Controller:
• Active and standby ADF frequencies
• ADF receiver mode
• ADF receiver volume
• DME tuning mode (DME transceiver pairing)
• DME receiver volume
Figure 4-32 ADF/DME Tuning
ADF Control Button
ADF1 Button
ADF Volume Slider
ADF Frequency/Transfer Knob Label
DME Control Button
ADF Volume Knob Label
DME Volume Slider
DME1 Button
The selected ADF/DME volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% on the touchscreen controller by turning
the middle knob or by sliding your finger right or left on the NAV volume slider. Turning the knob clockwise
increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. Sliding to the right increases volume,
sliding to the left decreases volume.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
160
AUDIO AND CNS
ADF TUNING
ADF frequencies in the 190.0-kHz to 1799.5-kHz range are entered in the standby ADF frequency field.
The system does not tune the ADF emergency frequency, 2182.0-kHz.
Selecting an ADF frequency:
1) Touch Audio & Radios to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the ADF.
3) Touch the ADF control button to display the ADF Mode/Tuning Screen.
4) Use the keypad to select the desired frequency.
5) Touch the Enter Button to enter the new frequency as the ADF standby frequency; or touch the XFER Button
to enter the new frequency as the ADF standby frequency and transfer it to the active frequency.
Figure 4-33 ADF Mode/Tuning Screen
XFER Button
Enter Button
Find Button
Knob function labels
Or:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the ADF.
3) Touch the ADF control button to display the ADF Mode/Tuning Screen.
4) Turn the large and small right knobs to tune the frequency (Large knob increases/decreases kHz; Small knob
selects .5 kHz).
5) Press the small right knob to enter the new frequency as the ADF standby frequency; or press and hold the small
right knob to transfer the new standby frequency to the active frequency.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
161
AUDIO AND CNS
Finding and selecting an ADF frequency:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the ADF.
3) Touch the ADF control button to display the ADF Mode/Tuning Screen.
4) Touch the Find Button to display the Find ADF Frequency Screen.
5) Touch the tab for the desired type of frequency (Recent, Nearest, Dest, Flight Plan, or Favorite).
6) Scroll the list to find the desired frequency.
7) Touch the frequency button to enter the new frequency as the ADF standby frequency.
Figure 4-34 Finding an ADF Frequency
Select a
tab for the
frequency
category
Select the
frequency
button to
tune the
standby
frequency
Find
Button
Transferring the active and standby ADF frequencies:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the ADF.
3) Touch the ADF volume slider to select the ADF for transfer.
4) Press and hold the small right knob to transfer the frequencies.
Figure 4-35 ADF Frequency Transfer
ADF Volume slider
ADF Transfer Knob Label
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
162
AUDIO AND CNS
SELECTING ADF RECEIVER MODE
The following modes can be selected: (In all modes NDB audio can be heard by selecting the
ADF1
Button
on the Touchscreen Controller.)
• ANT (Antenna) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees. Best mode for listening to NDB
audio.
• ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB station.
• ADF/BFO (ADF/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB
station and an audible tone confirms signal reception. This mode allows identification of the interrupted
carrier beacon stations used in various parts of the world.
• ANT/BFO (Antenna/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees
while an audible tone is provided when a signal is received. This mode also allows identification of the
interrupted carrier beacon stations and confirms signal reception.
Selecting an ADF receiver mode:
1) Touch Audio & Radios to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the ADF.
3) Touch the ADF control button to display the ADF Mode/Tuning Screen.
4) Touch the ANT, ADF, ADF/BFO, or ANT/BFO Button to select the ADF mode.
Figure 4-36 ADF Mode Selection
ADF Mode Buttons
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
163
AUDIO AND CNS
DME TUNING
NOTE: The system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning and the NAV1
,
NAV2,
or
HOLD
state
prior to shutdown.
The following DME transceiver pairings can be selected:
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
Figure 4-37 DME Mode Selection
DME
Mode
Select
Buttons
DME1
Audio
Select
Button
DME1
Mode
Control
Button
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Touch Audio & Radios to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the DME.
3) Touch the DME mode control button to display the DME Mode Window.
4) Touch the NAV1 Mode, NAV2 Mode, or HOLD Mode Button to select the DME mode.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
164
AUDIO AND CNS
4.4 MODE S TRANSPONDER
The Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities. Selective
addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
• Transmission of the Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) position, velocity, and heading
information periodically without requiring an interrogation.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TCAS II TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
TCAS II transponder mode selection, code entry, Flight ID entry, and IDENT activation are controlled and
displayed on the Touchscreen Controller.
Figure 4-38 Transponder Display and Controls
Transponder Mode Button
Transponder IDENT Button
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
165
AUDIO AND CNS
TCAS II TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Transponder mode selection can be automatic (ALT Mode) or manual (STBY, ON, and ALT Modes) and is
accessed by selecting the
Transponder Mode
Button, then the
Standby
,
On, or
Altitude Reporting Button.
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Touch the Transponder Mode Button to display the Transponder Screen.
2) Touch a XPDR Mode Selection Button to activate the transponder mode.
Figure 4-39 TCAS II Transponder Mode Selection
XPDR Mode Selection
Buttons
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited. TCAS II is switched to Standby Mode, because the
transponder is not capable of supporting TCAS II operation in Standby Mode.
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by touching the
Standby
Button. In Standby, the transponder
does not reply to interrogations, but new codes can be entered. When Standby is selected, a white
STBY
indication appears in the Transponder Mode Button and the transponder code is also white. In all other
modes, these fields appear in green.
Standby Mode
Figure 4-40 Standby Mode
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
166
AUDIO AND CNS
ON MODE (MANUAL)
NOTE: TCAS II is switched to Standby Mode, because the transponder is not capable of supporting TCAS II
operation in ON Mode.
ON Mode can be selected at any time by touching the On Button. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies, but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON Mode, a green ON indication appears in the
Transponder Mode Button.
ON Mode (No
Altitude Reporting)
Figure 4-41 ON Mode
ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)
Altitude Reporting Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude Reporting
Mode may also be selected manually by touching the
Altitude Reporting
Button.
If Altitude Mode is selected, a green ALT indication appears in the Transponder Mode Button, and all
transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure altitude information.
Altitude Reporting Mode
(Mode C Altitude Reporting)
Figure 4-42 Altitude Reporting Mode
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Entering a transponder code with the keypad:
1) Touch the Transponder Code Button to display Transponder Screen.
2) Use the keypad to select the desired code.
3) Touch the Enter Button to enter the new code, or wait approximately two seconds for automatic entry.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
167
AUDIO AND CNS
Figure 4-43 Transponder Code Entry
Transponder Code Entry
Entering a transponder code with the knobs:
1) Touch the Transponder Code Button to display the Transponder Screen.
2) Turn the large right knob one click either way to place the editing cursor on the first digit of the existing code.
3) Turn the small right knob to enter the first digit.
4) Turn the large right knob to move the cursor to the next digit.
5) Turn the small right knob to enter the next digit, repeat steps 4 and 5 until complete.
6) Touch the Enter Button, or push the small right knob, to enter the new code.
Or:
1) Touch the Transponder Mode Button to display the Transponder Screen.
2) Turn the small right knob one click either way to erase the previous code and place the editing cursor on the first
digit.
3) Turn the small right knob to enter the first digit.
4) Turn the large right knob to move the cursor to the next digit.
5) Turn the small right knob to enter the next digit, repeat steps 4 and 5 until complete.
6) Touch the Enter Button, or push the small right knob, to enter the new code.
Pressing the Cancel Button before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the previous code.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
168
AUDIO AND CNS
IDENT FUNCTION
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Button is inoperative.
Selecting the Transponder IDENT Button sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC).
The indication distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen.
When the Transponder IDENT Button is selected, the word IDENT appears on the button and pulsates for the
duration of the identity indication.
Figure 4-44 Transponder IDENT Indication
Transponder IDENT Active
FLIGHT ID REPORTING
NOTE: If the Flight ID is required but the system is not configured for it, contact a Garmin-authorized service
center for configuration.
When the Flight ID must be entered before flight operation, the identifier is placed on the Transponder Screen
on the Touchscreen Controller. The Flight ID field can hold up to eight characters.
Entering a Flight ID:
1) Touch the Transponder Mode Button to display the Transponder Screen.
2) Touch the Flight ID Button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to select the desired flight ID.
4) Touch the Enter Button to enter the new flight ID.
Figure 4-45 Flight ID Entry
Flight ID Button
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
169
AUDIO AND CNS
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO FUNCTIONS
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use in this aircraft.
Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Controller, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both
ears. If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset
hears audio in the left ear only.
SPEAKER
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the
Speaker
Button selects and deselects the
cabin speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot,
traffic, altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
The speaker volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% on the touchscreen controller by turning the
middle knob or by sliding your finger right or left using the Speaker volume slider. Turning the knob clockwise
increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. Sliding to the right increases volume,
sliding to the left decreases volume.
Figure 4-46 Speaker Audio Selection
Speaker Button
Speaker Volume Slider
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
170
AUDIO AND CNS
INTERCOM
The Audio Panel includes an eight-mode intercom system (ICS) and two stereo music inputs for the pilot,
copilot and passengers. The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and aircraft
radios. Each of the three link arrows are selected/deselected by touching the arrow.
Figure 4-47 Intercom Controls
Pilot Volume Button
Pilot/Copilot Link Arrow
Pilot/Passenger Link Arrow
Intercom Button
Copilot/Passenger Link
Arrow
Copilot Volume Button
Passenger Volume
Button
all intercom moDe
In ‘All Intercom’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear each other.
Figure 4-48 All Intercom Mode
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
171
AUDIO AND CNS
coPilot-PaSSenger intercom moDe
In ‘Copilot-Passenger’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear each other. The Copilot and Passengers also hear
each other.
Figure 4-49 Copilot-Passenger Intercom Mode
Pilot-coPilot intercom moDe
In ‘Pilot-Copilot’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear each other. The Passengers hear each other.
Figure 4-50 Pilot-Copilot Intercom Mode
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
172
AUDIO AND CNS
Pilot-PaSSenger intercom moDe
In ‘Pilot-Passenger’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear each other. The Pilot and Passengers also hear each
other.
Figure 4-51 Pilot-Passenger Intercom Mode
all iSolate moDe
In ‘All Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio. The Passengers hear each other.
Figure 4-52 All Isolate Mode
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
173
AUDIO AND CNS
Pilot-PaSSenger/coPilot-PaSSenger intercom moDe
In ‘Pilot-Passenger/Copilot-Passenger’ mode the Passengers hear the pilot, copilot, and each other.
Figure 4-53 Pilot-Passenger/Copilot-Passenger Intercom Mode
Pilot-PaSSenger/Pilot-coPilot intercom moDe
In ‘Pilot-Passenger/Pilot-Copilot’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear each other. The Passengers hear the
Pilot and each other.
Figure 4-54 Pilot-Passenger/Pilot-Copilot Intercom Mode
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
174
AUDIO AND CNS
coPilot-PaSSenger/Pilot-coPilot intercom moDe
In ‘Copilot-Passenger/Pilot-Copilot’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear each other. The Passengers hear the
Copilot and each other.
Figure 4-55 Copilot-Passenger/Pilot-Copilot Intercom Mode
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
The Touchscreen Controller controls the volume and squelch for the pilot and copilot independently.
The selected intercom volume or squelch level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% on the touchscreen controller
by turning the middle knob or by sliding your finger right or left on the slider. Turning the knob clockwise
increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. Sliding to the right increases volume,
sliding to the left decreases volume.
Adjusting intercom volume:
1) Touch the Intercom Button to display the Intercom Screen.
2) Touch the Pilot Volume or Copilot Volume button to display the Pilot or Copilot Intercom Settings Screen.
3) Adjust the volume by using the middle knob or by sliding your finger on the volume slider.
Adjusting intercom squelch:
1) Touch the Intercom Button to display the Intercom Screen.
2) Touch the Pilot Volume or Copilot Volume button to display the Pilot or Copilot Intercom Settings Screen.
3) Touch the Squelch Mode Button to disable Auto Squelch.
4) Adjust the squelch by using the middle knob or by sliding your finger on the squelch slider.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
175
AUDIO AND CNS
Figure 4-56 Intercom Volume/Squelch Controls
Pilot Volume Button
Intercom Button
Copilot Volume Button
Volume
Slider
Squelch
Button
Squelch
Slider
Volume
Knob Label Squelch
Knob Label
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
176
AUDIO AND CNS
PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM
A passenger address system is available for delivering voice messages to the passengers. When the PA Button
is selected on the Touchscreen Controller, the MIC Annunciator is replaced with a green PA, and the active COM
frequency changes to white, indicating that there is no COM selected. The active COM frequency on the PFD
is replaced by a white PA annunciation. A Push-to-Talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA announcements.
The PA Annunciator flashes about once per second while the PTT is depressed.
The PA volume can be adjusted from 0 to 100% on the touchscreen controller by turning the middle knob.
Turning the knob clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume.
Figure 4-57 PA Controls
PA Button
Audio & Radios Button
PA Volume Knob Label
PFD PA Annunciation COM Frequencies
PA Annunciator
Selecting the PA system for transmission:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) Scroll the list to find the PA.
3) Touch the PA Button on the Audio & Radios Screen to select the PA for transmission.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
177
AUDIO AND CNS
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
The Audio Controller contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest block.
Touching the Recorder (Play) Button plays the latest recorded memory block. The Recorder (Stop) Button
is displayed while the audio is playing. When the present memory block has finished playing the Recorder
(Play) Button is displayed again.
Touching the Recorder (Stop) Button during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is
detected during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
Touching the Play Previous Button begins playing the previously recorded memory block. Each subsequent
press of the Play Previous Button selects the previously recorded memory block, if any more exist. Touching
the Play Next Button begins playing the next recorded memory block. Each subsequent press of the Play Next
Button selects the next recorded memory block, if any more exist.
Powering down the system automatically clears all recorded blocks.
Figure 4-58 Recorder Controls
Recorder Button
Stop Play
Audio & Radios Button
Recorder Volume Slider
Audio Playback Controls
Play Next Button
Play Previous Button
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
178
AUDIO AND CNS
SIMULTANEOUS COM OPERATION
The pilot and the copilot can transmit and receive simultaneously over separate COM radios. The selected
COM MIC Annunciator flashes when either pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
If both pilots select the same COM radio, the pilot has priority on COM1 and the copilot has priority on
COM2.
Figure 4-59 Simultaneous COM Operation
COM2 Active Frequency
(selected by copilot for transmission)
COM2
Active
Frequency
MIC Button (COM2 selected for
transmission by copilot)
MIC Button (COM2 selected for
transmission by copilot)
COM1 Active Frequency
(selected by copilot for transmission)
MIC Button (COM1 selected
for transmission by pilot)
MIC Button (COM1 selected for
transmission by pilot)
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
179
AUDIO AND CNS
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
The Audio Controller provides two stereo auxiliary entertainment inputs: MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2. These
inputs are compatible with popular portable entertainment devices such as MP3 and CD players. Two 3.5-mm
stereo phone jacks are installed in convenient locations for audio connection. The headphone outputs of the
entertainment devices are plugged into the MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks.
The pilot, copilot and passengers can select each of the entertainment inputs independently.
Figure 4-60 Entertainment Audio Control
MUSIC1 Button
MUSIC1 Volume Slider
MUSIC2 Button
MUSIC2 Volume Slider
Mute Settings Button (MUSIC1)
Mute Settings Button (MUSIC2)
MUSIC1 Volume Knob label
Selecting/deselecting MUSIC1/2 input:
1) Touch the Audio & Radios Button to display the Audio & Radios Screen.
2) If selecting for the Copilot or Passengers, touch the Copilot Tab or the Pass Tab.
3) Scroll the list to find MUSIC1 or MUSIC2.
4) Touch the MUSIC1 or MUSIC2 Button to select/deselect the MUSIC1/2 input for the selected position (pilot,
copilot, or passengers).
The MUSIC1/2 volume can be adjusted from 0 to 100% on the touchscreen controller by turning the middle
knob or by sliding your finger right or left on the volume slider.
MUSIC MUTING
MUSIC muting occurs when the configured activity (intercom, radio inputs, or aural alerts) is heard.
MUSIC is always soft muted when an interruption occurs from these sources. Soft muting is the gradual
return of MUSIC to its original volume level. The time required for MUSIC volume to return to normal is
between one-half and four seconds.
SIRIUSXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
SiriusXM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver can be connected to both the MUSIC1 and MUSIC2
inputs (optional). Refer to the Additional Features Section for more details on the Data Link Receiver.
Connecting a stereo input to the MUSIC1 jack removes the SiriusXM Radio Audio from that input.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
180
AUDIO AND CNS
4.6 CONTROLLER PILOT DATA LINK COMMUNICATIONS (CPDLC)
The GDR 66 VHF Data Link Transceiver provides the link from the Prodigy Touch Flight Deck 300 to
the Controller Pilot Data Link Communications system (CPDLC). The CPDLC system provides data link
communication between the aircraft and an Air Traffic Control facility. Communication is normally in the form
of text message elements that resemble phraseology used in voice communications with ATC.
Generally, messages are closed with an acknowledgement or acceptance. When a message is acknowledged, the
connection with the ATC facility is not terminated, but kept active for future communication.
Communication hand-off to the next ATC facility is usually performed automatically, but may also be
accomplished manually by the pilot.
CONNECTING TO THE CPDLC SYSTEM
A flight plan must be filed prior to logging on to the CPDLC system. After entering flight plan information in
the required fields and successfully logging on to the system, messages may be sent and received.
Log-on Setup:
1) From the Home Screen, touch CPDLC.
2) If necessary, touch the Status Tab to display the Logon Setup buttons as shown on Figure 4-61.
Figure 4-61 CPDLC Log-On Display Figure 4-62 ATC Facility List
3) Touch the Facility Button. A list of available ATC facilities is displayed as in Figure 4-62.
4) Touch the appropriate ATC facility to which the CPDLC connection will be established. In this case, EDGG will
be selected. The selected facility is now displayed in the Facility field, as seen in Figure 4-63.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
181
AUDIO AND CNS
Figure 4-63 CPDLC Log-On Facility Set Figure 4-64 Entering Flight ID (Tail Number Shown)
5) Touch the Flight ID Button. The Flight ID entry screen is displayed as in Figure 4-64. Enter the Flight ID or
aircraft registration number, whichever is appropriate for the filed flight plan.
6) Touch Enter. The Flight ID number is displayed in the Flight ID field as shown in Figure 4-65.
Figure 4-65 CPDLC Log-On Flight ID Set Figure 4-66 Entering Destination Airport
7) Touch the Destination Airport Button. The Destination Airport entry screen is displayed as in Figure 4-66.
Enter the airport identifier for the destination airport used in the filed flight plan.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
182
AUDIO AND CNS
8) Touch Enter. The airport identifier is displayed in the Destination Airport field as shown in Figure 4-67.
Figure 4-67 CPDLC Log-On Destination Airport Set Figure 4-68 Entering Departure Time
9) The Filed Departure Airport field is prefilled with the airport identifier corresponding to the current aircraft
location, in this case KPUB. If the flight plan was filed using a different airport identifier, touch the Filed Dep
Airport Button and enter the appropriate airport identifier. Touch Enter.
10) Touch the Filed Dep Time Button. The entry screen is displayed as in Figure 4-68. Enter the departure time
used in filing the flight plan.
11) Touch Enter. The confirmation screen is displayed as shown in Figure 4-69.
Figure 4-69 Confirming Departure Time Figure 4-70 Departure Time Set
12) Touch OK. The departure time is displayed in the Filed Dep Time field as shown in Figure 4-70.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
183
AUDIO AND CNS
Performing the system log-on:
1) After performing the previous Logon Setup procedure, verify the Link Status display indicates a link with a
ground station is available. An available link is indicated by a green line between the aircraft symbol and the
ground station antenna symbol, as seen in Figure 4-70.
2) Touch the Logon Button. The Link Status display indicates ‘Connecting’ with an animated dashed green line
between the ground station antenna symbol and the ATC facility symbol, as seen in Figure 4-71. Touching
the Cancel Button will terminate the log-on process. When connection is complete, the display indicates
‘Connected’ with an solid green line between the ground station antenna symbol and the ATC facility symbol,
as seen in Figure 4-72.
Figure 4-71 CPDLC Connecting to ATC Facility Figure 4-72 System is Connected and Active
CREATING A MESSAGE
Creating a message consists of choosing from a pre-determined list of requests, entering the required
information, and sending the request.
1) From the Home Screen, touch CPDLC.
2) Touch the Create Message Button. A list of requests is presented for selection as shown in Figure 4-73.
3) For discussion purposes, ‘Request Level’ is selected in this example by touching the Request Level Button. A
window is displayed for entering further information as shown in Figure 4-74.
Figure 4-73 List of New Message Types Figure 4-74 Select Altitude Entry
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
184
AUDIO AND CNS
4) Touch the Request Level Button. The Altitude Entry display is shown as in Figure 4-75.
Figure 4-75 Altitude Entry Figure 4-76 Reason for Request
5) Select the desired altitude mode by touching the Flight Level or FT (feet) Button. A green annunciator
indicates the selected mode.
6) Using the number keys, enter the altitude to be requested.
7) Touch the Enter Button. The requested altitude is displayed as in Figure 4-76.
8) Touch the Reason Button. A list of pertinent reasons is presented as in Figure 4-77.
Figure 4-77 List of New Message Types Figure 4-78 Enter Requested Altitude
9) In this example, the flight level change request is initiated due to decreased aircraft performance. Touch the
Due to Aircraft Performance Button. The selected reason is displayed as in Figure 4-78.
10) Touch the Send Button.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
185
AUDIO AND CNS
RESPONDING TO AN ATC MESSAGE
Responding to an ATC message consists of choosing from a pre-determined list of responses or
acknowledgements, then sending the response or acknowledgement.
VIEWING CPDLC MESSAGE DIALOGS
The status of a string of messages and responses, or dialog, may be checked and past message dialogs viewed.
When the system power is cycled, the list of message dialogs is deleted.
To view messages:
1) From the Home Screen, touch CPDLC.
2) If necessary, touch the CPDLC Messages Tab. A list of message dialogs is displayed as seen in Figure 4-79.
Figure 4-79 Message Dialog List Figure 4-80 Message Dialog Thread
3) Touch a message dialog box to display the message thread, as seen in Figure 4-80.
Or:
1) Touch the flashing CPDLC Button on the Button Bar.
2) If necessary, touch the CPDLC Messages Tab. A list of message dialogs is displayed.
Figure 4-81 CPDLC Button on the Button Bar
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
186
AUDIO AND CNS
DELETING MESSAGE DIALOGS
While the system deletes the list of message dialogs when power is turned off, individual message dialogs may
also be deleted manually. Message dialogs considered closed may also be deleted.
To delete a single message dialog:
1) From the Home Screen, touch CPDLC.
2) If necessary, touch the CPDLC Messages Tab.
3) Touch the message dialog to be deleted.
4) Touch the Delete Button. A confirmation window is displayed.
5) Touch the OK Button to delete the message dialog.
To delete all closed message dialogs:
1) From the Home Screen, touch CPDLC.
2) Touch the Delete Messages Button. A confirmation window is displayed.
3) Touch the OK Button. All closed message dialogs are deleted.
DISCONNECTING FROM THE CPDLC SYSTEM
A flight plan must be filed prior to logging on to the CPDLC system. After entering flight plan information in
the required fields and successfully logging on to the system, messages may be sent and received.
1) From the Home Screen, touch CPDLC.
2) If necessary, touch the Status Tab.
3) Touch the Logoff Button to disconnect the system.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
187
AUDIO AND CNS
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
Abnormal operation of the Prodigy Touch includes equipment failures of the system components and failure of
associated equipment, including switches and external devices.
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the Touchscreen Controller to advise the pilot of a stuck microphone.
The
MIC
Button Annunciator flashes as long as the PTT Key remains stuck.
Figure 4-82
COM TUNING FAILURE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a yellow X may be shown.
Figure 4-83 COM Tuning Failure
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
EMERGENCY MODE
The emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) can be tuned in COM1 by selecting the emergency mode.
Selecting emergency mode:
1) Select the PFD Settings Softkey on the PFD.
2) Select the Other PFD Settings Softkey on the PFD.
3) Select the COM1 121.5 Softkey on the PFD to tune COM1 to the emergency frequency.
Figure 4-84 COM1 Emergency Mode Active
Emergency Mode Active
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
188
AUDIO AND CNS
AUDIO CONTROLLER FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
If there is a failure of the Audio Controller, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot and copilot’s headsets and
microphones directly to the COM1 transceiver. Audio will not be available on the speaker.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
189
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.1 INTRODUCTION
The Prodigy™ Touch Flight Deck 300 is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance
system. This section of the Pilot’s Guide explains GPS navigation using the Prodigy™ Touch Flight Deck 300.
The most prominent parts of the system are the Primary Flight Display (PFD), the Multi Function Display
(MFD), and the Touchscreen Controllers. The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS
sensors is displayed on these units. See examples in the Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2. Detailed descriptions of GPS
navigation functions are discussed later in this section.
A brief description of the GPS navigation data on the PFD and MFD follows.
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV,
LP, LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)). L/VNAV, LP, and LPV approaches are only available with SBAS. L/VNAV
approaches will be flown as a Baro VNAV approach when SBAS is not available.
The Inset Map is a small version of the Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of the PFD.
When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The Inset Map
is displayed by selecting the Inset Map Settings Softkey. Selecting the Inset Map Settings Softkey again, then
selecting the Off Softkey removes the Inset Map.
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data can be reduced by selecting the Detail Softkey on the
PFD for the Inset Map, and by the Map Detail Slider on the Touchscreen Controller for navigation maps. The
Navigation Map can be oriented three different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), or Heading
Up (HDG UP).
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. Range is indicated in the upper left
quadrant of the range ring shown around the aircraft icon. This indicated range is the range from the aircraft
icon to the range ring, and roughly half the range to the top edge of the displayed map. To change the map range
on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range. To
change the Inset Map range, use the Map Range - and the Map Range + softkeys, or turn the Joystick on the
PFD Controller.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B190
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD
Inset Map
Navigation Status Bar
Navigation Mode
Current Track
Indicator
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Map Display
Active Flight Plan Leg
Navigation Map
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
MFD Data Bar
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
Display Title
Map Range
Flight Plan Leg
Map Orientation
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
191
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NAVIGATION STATUS BAR
The PFD Navigation Status Bar located to the right of the HSI contains two fields displaying the following
information:
PFD Navigation Status Bar
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD -> KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn right to
021˚ in 8 seconds’)
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD within 1
minute’)
The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
Symbol Description Symbol Description
Active Leg Right Holding Pattern
Direct-to Left Holding Pattern
Right Procedure Turn Right DME Arc
Left Procedure Turn Left DME Arc
Vector to Final
The MFD Data Bar located at the top of the MFD contains eight data fields, each displaying one of the
following items:
• Bearing (BRG) • Fuel over Destination (FOD)
• Distance (DIS) • Ground Speed (GS)
• Desired Track (DTK) • Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• Endurance (END) • True Air Speed (TAS)
• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA) • Track Angle Error (TKE)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) • Track (TRK)
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE) • Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
• Fuel on Board (FOB) • Crosstrack Error (XTK)
MFD Navigation Data Bar
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B192
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The navigation information displayed in the eight data fields can be selected on the Touchscreen Controller.
The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, ETE, BRG, DIS, MSA, and ETA.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Data Bar:
1) From Home, touch Utilities>Setup>Avionics Settings to display the Avionics Settings Screen.
2) Touch the MFD Fields Tab to display the MFD Data Bar Field selection list.
3) If necessary, scroll through the data field list to find the desired field.
4) Touch the MFD Data Bar Field Button to display the data options list.
5) If necessary, scroll through the data options list to find the desired option.
6) Touch the desired data option button.
7) Repeat steps 3 - 6 as necessary.
Figure 5-3 MFD Data Bar Field Selection
Data Bar
Field Select
Buttons
MFD Fields
Tab
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
193
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
Map displays are used extensively to provide situational awareness in flight. Most maps can display the following
information:
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.) with
names
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing
to pointer, location of pointer, name, and other
pertinent information)
• Map range
• Wind direction and speed
• Map orientation
• Icons for enabled map features
• Aircraft icon (representing present position)
• Fuel range ring
• Flight plan legs
• User waypoints
• Track vector
• Topography scale
• Topography data
• Obstacle data
The information in this section applies to any displays that show the navigation map.
MAP SETTINGS SYNC
Map settings can be synchronized with with the settings of any display, and will keep them synchronized
when changes are made to the settings. The synchronization can be for the onside or offside independently, or
for all displays.
Enabling/disabling map settings synchronization:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings > Map Settings Sync.
2) Touch the Onside Button or the All Button.
3) Touch the PFD1, MFD Left, PFD2, or MFD Right Button to initially synchronize the onside map settings or all
map settings with the selected display.
Or:
1) Touch the Off Button to disable synchronization.
Figure 5-4 Map Settings Synchronization
Map Settings
Sync Button Onside
Button
Off Button
All Button
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B194
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP ORIENTATION
Maps are shown in one of three different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper left corner of the map.
Figure 5-5 Map Orientation
• North up (NORTH UP) aligns the top of the map display to north.
• Track up (TRK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Heading up (HDG UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading (default setting).
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Orientation Button.
3) Touch the Heading Up, Track Up, or North Up Button to select the navigation map orientation.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
195
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Heading Up Orientation
Figure 5-6 Map Orientation Selection
Orientation
Button
Track Up Button
Heading Up Button
North Up Button
Track Up Orientation North Up Orientation
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B196
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP RANGE
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 250 feet to 1000 nm. Range is indicated in the upper left
quadrant of the range ring shown around the aircraft icon. This indicated range is the range from the aircraft icon
to the range ring, and roughly half the range to the top edge of the displayed map. To change the map range on
any MFD map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range. To
change the Inset Map range, use the Map Range - and the Map Range + softkeys.
Figure 5-7 Map Range
Auto Zoom Off
Auto Zoom On
AUTO ZOOM
Auto zoom allows the system to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on the Touchscreen Controller Map Setup Screen).
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, any map page displaying TAWS/TERRAIN data automatically adjusts
to the smallest map range clearly showing the highest priority alert. If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any
map page capable of displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly
showing the traffic advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom
range based on the active waypoint.
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFD and MFD. Control of the ranges
at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times (set on the
Touchscreen Controller Map Settings Screen). These settings determine the minimum and maximum distance
to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
197
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the Touchscreen Controller Map Settings Screen) determines how long
auto zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(1000 nm).
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 0.75 nm.
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Other Tab to display the options list.
3) Touch the Auto Zoom Button to enable/disable auto zoom.
4) Touch the Auto Zoom Settings Button to display the Auto Zoom Settings Screen.
5) Touch the Auto Zoom Max Look Fwd Button to display the numeric keyboard.
6) Use the keypad to enter the maximum look forward time. Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
7) Repeat steps 5 and 6 for ‘Min Look Fwd’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘Time Out’ (zero to 99 minutes).
Figure 5-8 Auto Zoom Setup
Auto Zoom Button
Auto Zoom Settings Button
Auto Zoom Max Look Fwd
Button
Auto Zoom Min Look Fwd
Button
Auto Zoom Time Out Button
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B198
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP PANNING
The Map Pointer allows the pilot to:
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range by panning the map
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Graphically create user waypoints
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• Review airspace and airway information
• Measure the bearing and distance from the aircraft present position to any location on the navigation map
When the Map Pointer function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map
display, and the Map Pointer Options Screen is displayed on the Touchscreen Controller. A window also appears
at the upper left of the map display showing the latitude/longitude of the pointer, the bearing and distance to
the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the position of the pointer.
Figure 5-9 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
Map Pointer
Map Pointer
Information
Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
199
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
When the Map Pointer is placed on an airport, the name of the airport is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When an airport is highlighted on the map display, pertinent information
is available by pressing the Waypoint Info Button on the Touchscreen Controller.
Airport
Information
Waypoint
Info
Button
Info Tab
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airport
Map Pointer
on Airport
Map Pointer
Information
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint.
2) Touch the Waypoint Info Button to display the waypoint information screen.
3) Press the Joystick to exit the waypoint information screen and remove the Map Pointer from the Navigation
Map.
When the Map Pointer is placed on a NAVAID, the name of the NAVAID is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When a NAVAID is highlighted on the map display, pertinent information
is available by pressing the Waypoint Info Button on the Touchscreen Controller.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B200
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VOR
Information
Waypoint
Info
Button
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on VOR
Map Pointer
on VOR
Map Pointer
Information
When the Map Pointer is placed on a User Waypoint, the name of the User Waypoint is highlighted (even if
the name was not originally displayed on the map). When a User Waypoint is highlighted on the map display,
pertinent information is available by pressing the Waypoint Info Button on the Touchscreen Controller.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
201
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
User
Waypoint
Information
Waypoint
Info
Button
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on User Waypoint
Map Pointer
on User
Waypoint
Map Pointer
Information
When the Map Pointer is on an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information is
shown in a box above and to the right of the Map Pointer. The information includes the name and class of
airspace, the ceiling in feet above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL. When an airspace is selected
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B202
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
on the map display, additional frequency information is also available by pressing the Airspace Info Button on
the Touchscreen Controller.
Airspace
Information
Airspace
Info
Button
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airspace
Map Pointer
on Airspace
Map Pointer
Information
Airspace
Information
Reviewing information for a special use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Touch the Airspace Info Button to display the Airspace Information Screen.
3) Press the Joystick to exit the Airspace Information Screen and remove the Map Pointer from the Navigation
Map.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
203
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TOPOGRAPHY
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures.
Topo
Scale
Button
Navigation Map
Black Background
TOPO Off
Figure 5-14 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
TOPO On
Land Tab
Topo Data
Button
Topo Data
Settings
Button
Topo Data
Button
Displaying/removing topographic data on navigation map displays:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Land Tab, if necessary.
3) Scroll the list to find the Topo Data Button, if necessary.
4) Touch the Topo Data Button to display/remove topographic data on the navigation map.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B204
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-15 PFD Inset Map - Topographic Data
Topo Data Off Topo Disabled Topo Data On Topo Enabled
Displaying/removing topographic data from the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the Inset Map Settings Softkey on the PFD.
2) Press the Topo Softkey to display/remove topographic data on the Inset Map.
3) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top level softkeys.
The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
Selecting a topographical data range:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Land Tab, if necessary.
3) Scroll the list to find the Topo Data Settings Button, if necessary.
4) Touch the Topo Data Settings Button to display the Topo Data Settings Screen.
5) Touch the Topo Data Button to display the Map Topo Range list.
6) Scroll the list if necessary to find the desired range, and touch the range button.
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
205
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - Topo Scale
Displaying/removing the topographic scale:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Land Tab, if necessary.
3) Scroll the list to find the Topo Data Settings Button, if necessary.
4) Touch the Topo Data Settings Button to display the Topo Data Settings Screen.
5) Touch the Topo Scale Button to display/remove the topographic scale.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B206
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP SYMBOLS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the DCLTR Softkey is also discussed.
LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the Land Tab on the Map Options Screen:
Land Symbols Symbol Default
Range (nm)
Maximum
Range (nm)
Topo Data 1000 1000
Obstacle Data See Appendix F 10 25
Roads
Interstate Highway (Freeway) 50 100
International Highway (Freeway) 50 100
US Highway (National Highway) 15 100
State Highway (Local Highway) 7.5 50
Local Road (Local Road) N/A 4 25
Railroad 7.5 25
Large City (> 200,000) 100 1000
Medium City (> 50,000) 50 150
Small City (> 5,000) 25 100
State/Province 400 1000
Rivers and Lakes (River/Lake) 75 100
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
207
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the Aviation Tab of the Map Settings Screen:
Aviation Symbols Symbol Default
Range (nm)
Maximum
Range (nm)
Low Altitude Airways 50 250
High Altitude Airways 50 250
Class B/TMA 50 250
Class C/TCA) 50 150
Class D 10 100
Restricted 50 150
MOA (Millitary) 50 150
Other/ADIZ 50 150
TFR 250 1000
Large Airport
100 250
Medium Airport 50 100
Small Airport 25 50
VOR Waypoint 50 250
INT Waypoint 25 25
NDB Waypoint 25 50
User Waypoint 25 250
SafeTaxi See Additional Features 1.5 4
Runway Extension 7.5 50
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B208
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYMBOL SETUP
All navigation maps can display aviation and land symbols. Aviation and land symbol types (e.g. runway
extensions, railroads) can be removed individually.
Displaying/removing a navigation or land symbol type:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Aviation Tab or Land Tab, if necessary.
3) Scroll the list to find the desired item.
4) Touch the annunciator button to display/remove the symbol type from navigation maps.
Figure 5-17 Map Settings Screen - Individual Items On/Off
Annunciator Button
The range button sets the maximum range at which items appear on the display.
Selecting an Aviation or Land item range:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Aviation Tab or Land Tab, if necessary.
3) Scroll the list to find the desired item.
6) Touch the range button to display the range choices.
7) Touch a range selection button to select the maximum range.
8) Repeat steps 2-6 as necessary.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
209
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-18 Map Settings Screen - Aviation Data Setup
Range
Selection
Button
Range
Button
Figure 5-19 Map Settings Screen - Land Data Setup
Range
Selection
Button
Range
Button
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B210
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP DETAIL
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of map detail. The navigation
map detail level is displayed on the Map Settings Screen on the Touchscreen Controller and on the navigation
map. The PFD Inset Map detail level is shown on the Inset Map and the Detail Softkey.
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map - Map Detail
Detail Indicator
Map Detail
Slider
Figure 5-21 Inset Map - Map Detail
Detail Indicator
Detail Softkey
Adjusting the navigation map detail:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings > Map Detail.
2) Slide up or down on the Map Detail Slider to adjust the navigation map detail.
Adjusting the the PFD Inset Map detail:
1) Press the Inset Map Settings Softkey on the PFD.
2) Press the Detail Softkey as necessary to adjust the Inset Map detail.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
211
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Table 5-3 lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents map items
decluttered for each level of detail.
Item Declutter-1 Declutter-2 Least
NEXRAD X
Lightning Data X
Airports X
Safe Taxi X
Runway Labels X
TFRs X
Restricted X
MOA (Military) X
User Waypoints X X
Latitude/Longitude Grid X X
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway) X X
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway) X X
Class B Airspaces/TMA X X
Class C Airspaces/TCA X X
Class D Airspaces X X
Other Airspaces/ADIZ X X
Obstacles X X
Cities X X X
Roads X X X
Railroads X X X
State/Province Boundaries X X X
Table 5-3 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B212
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AIRWAYS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways (or
Victor Airways) are eight nautical miles wide and start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up to
18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” before the airway number
(hence the name “Victor Airways”) since they run primarily between VORs.
High Altitude Airways (or Jet Routes) start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet MSL
(altitudes above 18,000 feet are called “flight levels” and are described as FL450 for 45,000 feet MSL). Jet
Routes are designated with a “J” before the route number.
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
Figure 5-22 Airways on MFD Navigation Map
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
213
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using the Touchscreen Controller. The airway
range can also be programmed to only display airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific
value.
Displaying/removing airways:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Aviation Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the Low Altitude Airways Button to display/remove the low altitude airways.
4) Touch the High Altitude Airways Button to display/remove the high altitude airways.
Low
Altitude
Airways
Button
Figure 5-23 Map Options Screen - Airways Setup
Range
Selection
Button
Range
Button
High
Altitude
Airways
Button
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
Selecting an airway range:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Aviation Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the low altitude or high altitude range button to display the range selection buttons.
4) Touch a range selection button to select the maximum map display range.The following range items are
configurable on the airways menu.
Airway Type Airway Symbol/Line Highlighted Airway
Information Box
Default
Range (nm)
Maximum
Range (nm)
Low Altitude Airway 50 500
High Altitude Airway 50 500
Table 5-4 Airway Range Information
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B214
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TRACK VECTOR
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid light blue line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable
(30 sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track
vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings. It is always a straight line for
the 2 min, 5 min, 10 min and 20 min settings.
Figure 5-24 Navigation Map - Track Vector
Track Vector
Displaying/removing the track vector:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Other Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the Track Vector Button to display/remove the track vector.
Track
Vector
Button
Figure 5-25 Map Options Screen - Track Vector Setup
Time
Selection
Button
Time
Button
Selecting track vector look-ahead time:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Other Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the time button to display the time selection buttons.
4) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a time selection button to select the look-ahead time.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
215
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
WIND VECTOR
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than
or equal to 1 kt. It is always a straight line for the 2 min, 5 min, 10 min and 20 min settings.
Figure 5-26 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
Wind Vector
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving.
Displaying/removing the wind vector:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Other Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the Wind Vector Button to display/remove the track vector.
Wind
Vector
Button
Figure 5-27 Map Options Screen - Wind Vector Setup
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B216
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL RANGE RING
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows an estimate of the remaining flight distance. A dashed
green circle indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range.
If only reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow circle.
Figure 5-28 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
Range to Reserve Fuel
Time to Reserve Fuel Total Endurance Range
Displaying/removing the fuel range ring:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Other Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the Fuel Rng (Rsv) Button to display/remove the fuel range ring.
Fuel Rng (Rsv)
Button
Figure 5-29 Map Options Screen - Fuel Range Ring Setup
Fuel Reserve Time
Button
Selecting fuel reserve time:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Other Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the fuel reserve time button to display the keypad.
4) Use the keypad to enter the fuel reserve time.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
217
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FIELD OF VIEW (SVT)
The PFD field of view can be represented on the Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a V-shape
in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Figure 5-30 PFD and Navigation Map Field of View Comparison
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
SVT View on the PFD Field of View on the MFD
Displaying/removing the field of view:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Other Tab, if necessary.
3) Scroll to display the Field of View Button.
4) Touch the Field of View Button to display/remove the field of view.
Field of
View
Button
Figure 5-31 Map Settings Screen - Field of View Setup
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B218
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected altitude.
The location will be shown as a light blue arc when the aircraft is actually climbing or descending.
Figure 5-32 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
Range to
Altitude Arc
Displaying/removing the selected altitude intercept arc:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Other Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the Selected Alt Range Arc Button to display/remove the selected altitude intercept arc.
Selected Alt
Range Arc
Button
Figure 5-33 Map Options Screen - Selected Altitude Intercept Arc Setup
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
219
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
OBSTACLES
The navigation map can display the location of obstacles (e.g. towers). The obstacles are shown as red, yellow,
or gray, depending on the height relative to the aircraft AGL altitude. See the Hazard Avoidance section for more
details on symbol and color usage.
Figure 5-34 Navigation Map - Obstacles
Obstacle Data Displayed
when selected by the
Pointer
Obstacle
Displaying/removing obstacles:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Land Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the Obstacle Data Button to display/remove the obstacles.
Obstacle
Data
Button
Figure 5-35 Map Options Screen - Obstacle Setup
Range
Selection
Button
Range
Button
Selecting the obstacle data range:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Land Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the obstacle range button to display the range selection buttons.
4) Touch a range selection button to select the maximum map display range.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B220
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.3 WAYPOINTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be found and tuned from waypoint data, Refer to the Audio
and CNS section for details.
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering the
city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the system.
Figure 5-36 Waypoint Info Screen
Airport Button
INT Button
NDB Button
VOR Button
User Waypoint
Button
Create Waypoint
Button
If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Waypoint Duplicates Screen is displayed when the Enter Button is
touched or the small right knob is pressed.
Duplicates
Found
Message
Figure 5-37 Waypoint Duplicates Screen
Waypoint
Selection
Button
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
221
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AIRPORTS
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Display cannot be changed; the pilot needs to
be aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information
Display Map.
The Airport Information Display displays a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, and
the Airport Information Screen on the Touchscreen Controller allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies, review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be involved in the flight plan.
For airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. See the Audio and CNS Section
for more information on finding and tuning frequencies. After engine startup, the Airport Information Display
defaults to the airport where the aircraft is located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the
destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active
waypoint.
Figure 5-38 Airport Information Display on MFD
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
Airport/Runway
Diagram
Figure 5-39 Airport Information Screen
Info Tab
Selected Airport Button
(Identifier, Name, Symbol)
Airport Bearing, Distance, &
Latitude/Longitude
Waypoint Options Button
Direct-To, Insert in Flight Plan,
Show On Map
Airport City, Region
Airport Elevation,
UTC Offset
Fuel Available, Airport Usage Type
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B222
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Screen:
Usage type: PUBLIC, MILITARY, PRIVATE, or HELIPORT
Fuel Available: AVGAS, JET
Figure 5-40 Airport Frequencies Screen
Freqs Tab
Selected Airport Button
Frequency Identifier
Availability
Frequency Button
Tune COM Active Frequency
Tune COM Standby Frequency
Add to Favorites
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Frequencies Screen:
COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
COM Frequencies: Approach*, Arrival*, ASOS, ATIS, AWOS, Center, Class B*, Class C*, Clearance, Control, CTA*,
Departure*, Gate, Ground, Helicopter, Multicom, Other, Pre-Taxi, Radar, Ramp, Terminal*, TMA*, Tower, TRSA*, Unicom
* May include Additional Information)
NAV Frequencies: ILS, LOC
See the Hazard Avoidance section for the description of the information shown on the Weather Tab. See
the Procedures discussion later in this section about loading procedures from the Proc Tab. See the Additional
Features section for the description of the information shown on the Charts Tab and the Chart NOTAMs Tab.
Figure 5-41 Airport Runways Screen
Runway Information Button
Designation
Length/Width
Surface
Lighting Available
Selected Airport Button
Runways Tab
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Runways Screen:
Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL (for pilot-controlled lighting)
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
223
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-42 Airport Directory Info Screen
Airport Directory
Information
Selected Airport Button
Airport DirectoryTab
The following types of airport directory information are shown (if available):
Airport: Identifier, Site Number, Name, City, State Traffic Pattern Altitudes (TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers Weather: Service Type, Frequency, Phone Number
Hours: Facility, Light, Tower, Beacon Flight Service Station (FSS): Name, Phone Numbers
Location: Sectional, Magnetic Variation Instrument Approaches: Published Approach, Frequency
Frequencies: Type/Frequency NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier, Frequency, Radial, Distance
Transportation: Ground Transportation Type Available Noise: Noise Abatement Procedures
Approach: Facility Name, Frequency, Frequency Parameter Charts: Low Altitude Chart Number
Runway: Headings, Length, Width, Obstructions, Surface Notes: Airport Notes
Obstructions: General Airport Obstructions Pilot Controlled Lighting: High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
Special Operations at Airport Services Available: Category, Specific Service
FBO: Type, Frequencies, Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit Cards,
Phone/Fax Numbers
Selecting an airport for review by identifier:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport.
2) Touch the Info Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the selected airport button to display the keypad.
4) Use the keypad to enter the airport identifier.
5) Touch the Enter Button to accept the identifier and display the airport information on the Touchscreen
Controller.
6) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the Airport Information
Display, if necessary.
Finding and selecting an airport for review by facility name or city name:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport.
2) Touch the Info Tab, if necessary.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B224
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Touch the selected airport button to display the keypad.
4) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
5) Touch the Search Tab to display the Search By Button.
6) If necessary, touch the Search By Button to choose Search by City or Search by Facility.
7) Touch the Facility Name Button or the City Name Button to display the keypad.
8) Use the keypad to enter the name.
9) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry and display the search results.
10) Touch an airport selection button to display the airport information on the Touchscreen Controller.
11) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the Airport Information
Display, if necessary.
Finding and selecting an airport for review by category (Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites):
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport.
2) Touch the Info Tab, if necessary.
3) Touch the selected airport button to display the keypad.
4) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
5) Touch the Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites Tab to display a list of airports in the selected category.
6) Touch an airport selection button to display the airport information on the Touchscreen Controller.
7) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the Airport Information
Display, if necessary.
Selecting a runway:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport.
2) Touch the Runways Tab. to display the runway information buttons.
3) Touch a runway information button to select the runway.
4) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to view the runway on the MFD, if
necessary.
The Nearest Airport Display displays a map of the nearest airport and surrounding area, and the Nearest
Airport Screen on the Touchscreen Controller allows the pilot to view airport information, load frequencies,
review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be involved in the flight plan. For airports with
multiple runways, information for each runway is available. See the Audio and CNS Section for more information
on finding and tuning frequencies.
The Nearest Airports Screen displays a list of up to 25 nearest airports (five entries can be displayed at one
time). If there are more than five they are displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available,
“NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
A dashed white line is drawn on the Nearest Airport Display from the aircraft position to the selected nearest
airport.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
225
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-43 Nearest Airport Display
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Nearest Airport
Figure 5-44 Nearest Airport Screen
Nearest Airport Buttons
(Identifier, Name, Symbol)
Nearest Airport Information
Bearing
Distance
Type of Approach
Length of Runway
Viewing information for a nearest airport:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > Airport.
2) Touch a nearest airport button to display the Waypoint Options Window and highlight the airport on the MFD.
3) Touch the Airport Info Button to display the Airport Information Screen.
4) Touch a Tab to display the desired information on the Touchscreen Controller.
5) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the Nearest Airport Display,
if necessary.
See the Audio and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
The minimum runway length and surface type used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display
on the Nearest Airports Screen are set on the Avionics Settings Screen under the System Tab. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B226
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Touch the System Tab, if necessary.
3) Scroll the list to display the Nearest Airport Runway Surface Button.
4) Touch the Nearest Airport Runway Surface Button to display the surface choices.
5) Touch a surface selection button to set the surface criteria.
Nearest
Airport
Runway
Surface
Button
Figure 5-45 Nearest Airport Runway Surface Selection
Surface
Selection
Button
System
Tab
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Touch the System Tab, if necessary.
3) Scroll the list to display the Nearest Airport Min Rwy Length Button.
4) Touch the Nearest Airport Min Rwy Length Button to display the keypad.
5) Use the keypad to enter the minimum length.
6) Touch the Enter Button to accept the length criteria.
Nearest
Airport
Min Rwy
Length
Button
Figure 5-46 Nearest Airport Runway Length Selection
Runway
Length
Entry
System
Tab
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
227
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Display displays a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding
area, and the Intersection Information Screen on the Touchscreen Controller allows the pilot to view intersection
information.
Figure 5-47 Intersection Information Display
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected
Intersection
Selected Intersection
Figure 5-48 Intersection Information Screen
Selected Intersection Button
(Identifier, Symbol)
Intersection Latitude/Longitude,
Bearing & Distance
Waypoint Options Button
Direct-To, Insert in Flight Plan,
Show On Map
Region
Nearest VOR Identifier
Nearest VOR Radial Nearest VOR Distance
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B228
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting an intersection:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > INT.
2) Touch the selected intersection button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to enter the intersection identifier.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the identifier and display the intersection information on the Touchscreen
Controller.
5) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the Intersection Information
Display, if necessary.
Finding and selecting an intersection by category (Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites):
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > INT.
2) Touch the selected intersection button to display the keypad.
3) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
4) Touch the Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites Tab to display a list of intersections in the selected
category.
5) Touch an intersection selection button to display the intersection information on the Touchscreen Controller.
6) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the Intersection Information
Display, if necessary.
The Nearest Intersecton Display displays a map of the nearest intersection and surrounding area, and the
Nearest Intersection Screen on the Touchscreen Controller allows the pilot to view intersection information, and
intitate a direct-to or insert the intersection in the flight plan.
The Nearest Intersection Screen displays a list of up to 25 nearest intersections (five entries can be displayed at
one time). If there are more than five they are displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest intersections
available, “NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
A dashed white line is drawn on the Nearest Intersection Display from the aircraft position to the selected
nearest intersection.
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
229
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-49 Nearest Intersection Display
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection
Nearest Intersection
Figure 5-50 Nearest Intersection Screen
Nearest Intersection Buttons
(Identifier, Symbol)
Nearest Intersection Information
Bearing
Distance
Viewing information for a nearest intersection:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > INT.
2) Touch a nearest Intersection button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
3) Touch the Show on Map Button to display the Nearest Intersection Display, if necessary.
4) Touch the Intersection Info Button to display the Intersection Information Screen.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B230
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NDBS
The NDB Information Display on the MFD displays a map of the currently selected NDB and surrounding
area, and the NDB Information Screen on the Touchscreen Controller allows the pilot to view NDB information.
Figure 5-51 NDB Information Display
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected NDB Selected NDB
Figure 5-52 NDB Information Screen
Selected NDB Button
(Identifier, Name, Symbol)
NDB Latitude/Longitude,
Bearing & Distance
Waypoint Options Button
Direct-To, Insert in Flight Plan,
Show On Map
City, Region
Nearest Airport
Identifier
Symbol
Bearing/Distance
Frequency Button
Tune ADF1/2 Active/Standby
Add to Favorites
NOTE: Compass locator (LOM, LMM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in
conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker;
when LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
231
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting an NDB:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > NDB.
2) Touch the selected NDB button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to enter the NDB identifier.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the identifier and display the NDB information on the Touchscreen
Controller.
5) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the NDB Information Display,
if necessary.
Finding and selecting an NDB for review by facility name or city name:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > NDB.
2) Touch the selected NDB button to display the keypad.
3) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
4) Touch the Search Tab to display the Search By Button.
5) If necessary, touch the Search By Button to choose Search by City or Search by Facility.
6) Touch the Facility Name Button or the City Name Button to display the keypad.
7) Use the keypad to enter the name.
8) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry and display the search results.
9) Touch an NDB selection button to display the NDB information on the Touchscreen Controller.
10) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the NDB Information Display,
if necessary.
Finding and selecting an NDB by category (Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites):
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > NDB.
2) Touch the selected NDB button to display the keypad.
3) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
4) Touch the Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites Tab to display a list of NDBs in the selected category.
5) Touch an NDB selection button to display the NDB information on the Touchscreen Controller.
6) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the NDB Information Display,
if necessary.
The Nearest NDB Display displays a map of the nearest NDB and surrounding area, and the Nearest NDB
Screen on the Touchscreen Controller allows the pilot to view NDB information, and intitate a direct-to or insert
the NDB in the flight plan.
The Nearest NDB Screen displays a list of up to 25 nearest NDBs (five entries can be displayed at one time).
If there are more than five they are displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest NDBs available, “NONE
WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B232
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
A dashed white line is drawn on the Nearest NDB Display from the aircraft position to the selected nearest
NDB .
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
Figure 5-53 Nearest NDB Display
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
NDB
Nearest NDB
Figure 5-54 Nearest NDB Screen
Nearest NDB Buttons
(Identifier, Name, Symbol)
Nearest NDB Information
Bearing/Distance
NDB Frequency Button
Tune ADF1/2 Active/Standby Frequency
Add to Favorites
Viewing information for a nearest NDB:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > NDB.
2) Touch a nearest NDB button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
3) Touch the Show on Map Button to display the Nearest NDB Display, if necessary.
4) Touch the NDB Info Button to display the NDB Information Screen.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
233
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VORS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since ILS signals
can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information cannot
be viewed on the VOR Information Screen. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is listed as a
VOR-TACAN on the VOR Information Screen and if it includes only DME, it is displayed as VOR-DME.
The VOR Information Display displays a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, and the
VOR Information Screen on the Touchscreen Controller allows the pilot to view VOR information.
Figure 5-55 VOR Information Display
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected VOR Selected VOR
Figure 5-56 VOR Information Screen
Selected VOR Button
(Identifier, Name, Symbol)
VOR Latitude/Longitude,
Bearing & Distance
Waypoint Options Button
Direct-To, Insert in Flight Plan,
Show On Map
City, Region
Nearest Airport
Identifier
Symbol
Bearing/Distance
Frequency Button
Tune NAV1/NAV2 Active/Standby
Add to Favorites
Class, Magnetic Variation, Type
The VOR classes used are: LOW ALTITUDE, HIGH ALTITUDE, and TERMINAL.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B234
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting a VOR:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > VOR.
2) Touch the selected VOR button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to enter the VOR identifier.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the identifier and display the VOR information on the Touchscreen
Controller.
5) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the VOR Information Display,
if necessary.
Finding and selecting a VOR for review by facility name or city name:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > VOR.
2) Touch the selected VOR button to display the keypad.
3) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
4) Touch the Search Tab to display the Search By Button.
5) If necessary, touch the Search By Button to choose Search by City or Search by Facility.
6) Touch the Facility Name Button or the City Name Button to display the keypad.
7) Use the keypad to enter the name.
8) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry and display the search results.
9) Touch a VOR selection button to display the VOR information on the Touchscreen Controller.
10) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the VOR Information Display,
if necessary.
Finding and selecting a VOR by category (Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites):
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > VOR.
2) Touch the selected VOR button to display the keypad.
3) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
4) Touch the Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites Tab to display a list of VORs in the selected category.
5) Touch a VOR selection button to display the VOR information on the Touchscreen Controller.
6) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the VOR Information Display,
if necessary.
The Nearest VOR Display displays a map of the nearest VOR and surrounding area, and the Nearest VOR
Screen on the Touchscreen Controller allows the pilot to view VOR information, intitate a direct-to, insert the
VOR in the flight plan, or tune a NAV frequency.
The Nearest VOR Screen displays a list of up to 25 nearest VORs (five entries can be displayed at one time).
If there are more than five they are displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest VORs available, “NONE
WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
235
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
A dashed white line is drawn on the Nearest VOR Display from the aircraft position to the selected nearest
VOR.
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
Figure 5-57 Nearest VOR Display
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR Nearest VOR
Figure 5-58 Nearest VOR Screen
Nearest VOR Buttons
(Identifier, Name, Symbol)
Nearest VOR Information
Bearing/Distance
VOR Frequency Button
Tune NAV1/2 Active/Standby Frequency
Add to Favorites
Viewing information for a nearest NDB:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > VOR.
2) Touch a nearest VOR button to display the Waypoint Options Window and highlight the VOR.
3) Touch the Show on Map Button to display the Nearest VOR Display, if necessary.
4) Touch the VOR Info Button to display the VOR Information Screen.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B236
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
USER WAYPOINTS
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from
any map display (except PFD Inset Map, Trip Planning, or Procedure) by selecting a position on the map using
the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Screen by referencing a bearing/distance from an existing
waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or latitude and longitude. Once a waypoint has been created,
it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon system power down.
Figure 5-59 User Waypoint Information Display
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected User
Waypoint
Selected User Waypoint
Figure 5-60 User Waypoint Information Screen (defined by latitude/longitude)
Selected User Waypoint Button
(Identifier, Name, Symbol)
Region
Waypoint Options Button
Direct To, Insert in Flight Plan, Edit,
Delete, Delete All, Show On Map
User Waypoint Definition
Location Type (LAT/LON)
Latitude/Longitude
Distance/Bearing from Aircraft
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
237
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-61 User Waypoint Information Screen (defined by radial/distance from waypoint)
Selected User Waypoint Button
(Identifier, Name, Symbol)
Region
Waypoint Options Button
Direct-To, Insert in Flight Plan, Edit,
Delete, Delete All, Show on Map
User Waypoint Definition
Location Type (RAD/DIS)
Reference Waypoint
Radial/Distance from Waypoint
Latitude/Longitude
Bearing/Distance from Aircraft
Figure 5-62 User Waypoint Information Screen (defined by radials from two waypoints)
Selected User Waypoint Button
(Identifier, Name, Symbol)
Region
Waypoint Options Button
Direct-To, Insert in Flight Plan, Edit,
Delete, Delete All, Show on Map
User Waypoint Definition
Location Type (RAD/RAD)
Reference Waypoints
Radials from Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude
Bearing/Distance from Aircraft
Selecting a user waypoint:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > User Waypoint.
2) Touch the selected user waypoint button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to enter the user waypoint identifier.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the identifier and display the user waypoint information on the Touchscreen
Controller.
5) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the User Waypoint Information
Display, if necessary.
Finding and selecting a user waypoint for review by facility name or city name:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > User Waypoint.
2) Touch the selected user waypoint button to display the keypad.
3) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
4) Touch the Search Tab to display the Search By Button.
5) If necessary, touch the Search By Button to choose Search by City or Search by Facility.
6) Touch the Facility Name Button or the City Name Button to display the keypad.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B238
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
7) Use the keypad to enter the name.
8) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry and display the search results.
9) Touch a user waypoint selection button to display the user waypoint information on the Touchscreen
Controller.
10) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the User Waypoint Information
Display, if necessary..
Finding and selecting a user waypoint by category (Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites):
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > User Waypoint.
2) Touch the selected user waypoint button to display the keypad.
3) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
4) Touch the Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or Favorites Tab to display a list of user waypoints in the selected
category.
5) Touch a user waypoint selection button to display the user waypoint information on the Touchscreen
Controller.
6) Touch the Waypoint Options Button, then the Show on Map Button to display the User Waypoint Information
Display, if necessary.
Figure 5-63 Nearest User Waypoint Display
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
User Waypoint
Nearest User Waypoint
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
239
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-64 Nearest User Waypoint Screen
Nearest User Waypoint Buttons
(Identifier, Name, Symbol)
Nearest User Waypoint Information
Bearing/Distance
Viewing information for a nearest user waypoint:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > User.
2) Touch a nearest user waypoint button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
3) Touch the Show on Map Button to display the Nearest User Display on the MFD, if necessary.
4) Touch the User Waypoint Info Button to display the User Waypoint Information Screen.
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Screen in the following ways:
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Screen:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Create Waypoint. The current aircraft position is the default location
of the new waypoint.
2) Touch the user waypoint name button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Touch the Type Button to display the User Waypoint Type Window.
b) Touch the RAD/DIS Button to select the bearing/distance from a waypoint type.
c) Touch the REF Button to display the keypad.
d) Use the keypad and the Enter Button, or the Find function, to select the waypoint.
e) Touch the RAD Button to display the keypad.
f) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the radial.
g) Touch the DIS Button to display the keypad.
h) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the distance.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B240
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-65 Create User Waypoint Screen (defined by bearing/distance from a waypoint)
User Waypoint Name Button
REF Button
Comment Button
Temporary Button
DIS Button
Type Button
RAD Button
Or:
a) Touch the Type Button to display the User Waypoint Type Window.
b) Touch the RAD/RAD Button to select the bearings from two waypoints type.
c) Touch a REF Button to display the keypad.
d) Use the keypad and the Enter Button, or the Find function, to select the waypoint.
e) Touch the corresponding RAD Button to display the keypad.
f) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the radial.
g) Repeat steps c – f for the other reference waypoint and radial.
Figure 5-66 Create User Waypoint Screen (defined by radials from two waypoints)
User Waypoint Name Button
REF Button 1
Comment Button
Temporary Button
RAD Button 1
Type Button
REF Button 2 RAD Button 2
Or:
a) Touch the Type Button to display the User Waypoint Type Window.
b) Touch the LAT/LON Button to select the latitude/longitude type.
c) Touch the LAT/LON Button to display the keypad.
d) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the latitude and longitude.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
241
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-67 Create User Waypoint Screen (defined by latitude/longitude)
User Waypoint Name Button
LAT/LON Button
Comment Button
Temporary Button
Type Button
5) If desired, change the waypoint comment.
a) Touch the Comment Button to display the keypad.
b) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the comment.
6) If desired, touch the Temporary Button to change the waypoint storage method. When the annunciator on
the button is green, the waypoint is only stored until the next power cycle. When the annunciator is gray, the
waypoint is stored until manually erased.
7) Touch the Create Button to accept the new user waypoint.
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and display the Map Pointer Options Screen on the
Touchscreen Controller.
2) Use the Joystick to pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
3) Touch the Create User Waypoint Button. The Create User Waypoint Screen is displayed with the captured
position.
4) Touch the user waypoint name button to display the keypad.
5) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
6) If desired, change the waypoint comment. The comment defaults to the abbreviated latitude/longitude of the
user waypoint.
a) Touch the Comment Button to display the keypad.
b) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the comment.
7) Press the Create Button to create the new waypoint.
8) Press the Joystick to deactivate the panning function and return to the previous display on the Touchscreen
Controller.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B242
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-68 Create User Waypoint Screen (initiated from map page)
User Waypoint Name Button
Comment Button
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
Editing a user waypoint comment:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > User Waypoint.
2) If necessary, touch the WPT List Tab to display the list of user waypoints, and touch the desired user waypoint
selection button.
3) Touch the Waypoint Options Button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit User Waypoint Screen.
5) Touch the Comment Button to display the keypad.
6) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select a user waypoint comment (up to 25 characters).
7) Touch the Save Button to accept the new comment.
8) Touch the YES Button in response to the question “Are you sure you want to modify this waypoint?”.
Editing a user waypoint name:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > User Waypoint.
2) If necessary, touch the WPT List Tab to display the list of user waypoints, and touch the desired user waypoint
selection button.
3) Touch the Waypoint Options Button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit User Waypoint Screen.
5) Touch the user waypoint name button to display the keypad.
6) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
7) Touch the Save Button to accept the new name.
8) Touch the YES Button in response to the question “Are you sure you want to modify this waypoint?”.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
243
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Editing a user waypoint type and location:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > User Waypoint.
2) If necessary, touch the WPT List Tab to display the list of user waypoints, and touch the desired user waypoint
selection button.
3) Touch the Waypoint Options Button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit User Waypoint Screen.
5) Touch the Type Button to display the User Waypoint Type Window.
6) Touch the RAD/DIS Button, the RAD/RAD Button, or the LAT/LON Button to select the waypoint type.
7) Touch the REF Button, the RAD Button, the DIS Button, or the LAT/LON Button, as required, to bring up the
keypad.
8) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the user waypoint location.
9) Touch the Save Button to accept the new type and location.
10) Touch the YES Button in response to the question “Are you sure you want to modify this waypoint?”.
Changing the location of an existing user waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > User Waypoint.
2) If necessary, touch the WPT List Tab to display the list of user waypoints, and touch the desired user waypoint
selection button.
3) Touch the Waypoint Options Button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit User Waypoint Screen.
5) Touch the Type Button to display the User Waypoint Type Window.
6) Touch the P. POS Button to select the aircraft present position as the location.
7) Touch the Save Button to accept the new name.
8) Touch the YES Button in response to the question “Are you sure you want to modify this waypoint?”.
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
Deleting a single user waypoint:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > User Waypoint.
2) If necessary, touch the WPT List Tab to display the list of user waypoints, and touch the desired user waypoint
selection button.
3) Touch the Waypoint Options Button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
4) Touch the Delete Button.
5) Touch the YES Button in response to the question “Would you like to delete the user waypoint XXXXXX?”.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B244
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.4 AIRSPACES
The system can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Interdiction Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR).
Figure 5-69 Airspaces
MOA (Military) Class D Airspace
Class B Airspace
Restricted Area
Class C Airspace Alert Area
ADIZ
Warning Area
The Nearest Airspace Screen and the Message window on the Touchscreen Controller provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
The Alerts Tab on the Avionics Settings Screen allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace alerts
on or off. This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspace Screen or the airspace boundaries depicted
on the Navigation Map Display. It simply turns on/off the alert provided when the aircraft is approaching or near
an airspace.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
245
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Touch the Alerts Tab to display the list of alert settings.
3) Touch the Airspace Alert Alt Buffer Button to display the keypad.
4) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the buffer distance.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Settings.
2) Touch the Alerts Tab to display the list of alert settings.
3) Scroll the list if necessary.
4) Touch the airspace alert enable button to enable/disable the alert.
Figure 5-70 Avionics Settings Screen - Alerts Tab
Alerts Tab
Airspace Alert Alt Buffer Button
- Airspace Altitude Buffer
(Default Settings Shown)
Airspace Alert Enable Button
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected on the Aviation Tab on the Map Settings Screen. See Table
5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace area.
The Nearest Airspace Screen and the Nearest Airspace Display can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the
flight path. The Nearest Airspace Display shows a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area. The Nearest
Airspace Screen displays airspace information. In addition, a selected frequency associated with the airspace can
be loaded from the Nearest Airspace Screen.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B246
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-71 Nearest Airspace Display
Airspace 1
Airspace 2
Airspace 3
Airspace
Status
* Proximity
** Time till
Intercept
Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
Frequencies
- Type
- Avail/Info
Figure 5-72 Nearest Airspace Screen
Controlling
Agency
Airspace
Info Button
Airspace
Name
Type
Frequency
Tuning
Button
*Proximity: Ahead, Inside, Ahead<2nm, Within 2nm
**Time till Intercept: Only if Ahead or Ahead < 2nm
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > Airspace.
2) Touch an airspace info button to display the Airspace Options Window.
3) Touch the Show on Map Button to display the Nearest Airspace Information Display, if necessary.
4) Touch the Details Button to see more information about the airspace.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
247
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
When an airspace alert occurs, the MSG Button on the Touchscreen Controller begins flashing. Touch the
flashing button to view the list of alerts. The following airspace alerts are displayed in the message window:
Message Comments
INSIDE ARSPC
– Inside airspace. The aircraft is inside the airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD
– Airspace ahead –
less than 10 minutes.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace within 10
minutes.
ARSPC NEAR
– Airspace near and
ahead. Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
ARSPC NEAR
– Airspace near
– less than 2 nm. Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
Table 5-6 Airspace Alert Messages
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B248
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by touching the Direct To Button on the Touchscreen Controller,
or by pressing the ¯ Button on the PFD Controller, is quicker to use than a flight plan when needing to navigate
to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the system establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
A vertical navigation (VNAV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
The Direct-to Window on the PFD and the Direct To Screen on the Touchscreen Controller allows selection and
activation of direct-to navigation, and displays selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the Touchscreen
Controller. Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination.
Figure 5-73 Direct To Screen
Nearest Tab
Waypoint Selection Button
- Identifier/Symbol/City
VNAV Altitude Button
Direct-to Point Info
- City/Region
- Bearing/Distance
Waypoint Tab
Flight Plan Tab
Recent Tab
Cancel ¯ Button
VNAV Offset Button
Hold Button
Activate and Insert in Flight Plan
Button
Activate ¯ Button
Course Button
Selecting a waypoint as the direct-to destination by identifier:
1) From Home, touch Direct To.
2) Touch the waypoint selection button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to select the waypoint identifier.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the identifier, and and return to the Direct To Screen.
5) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to.
Finding and selecting a waypoint as the direct-to destination by facility name or city name:
1) From Home, touch Direct To.
2) Touch the waypoint selection button to display the keypad.
3) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
4) Touch the Search Tab to display the Search By Button.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
249
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) If necessary, touch the Search By Button to choose Search by City or Search by Facility.
6) Touch the Facility Name Button or the City Name Button to display the keypad.
7) Use the keypad to select the name.
8) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry and display the search results.
9) Touch a waypoint selection button to choose the waypoint as the direct-to destination, and return to the Direct
To Screen.
10) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to.
Search By
Button
- Name
- Facility
Figure 5-74 Find Waypoint Screen - Search by City Name
Waypoint
Selection
Button
Search Tab
City Name
Button
Selecting a waypoint as the direct-to destination by category (Flight Plan, Nearest, or Recent):
1) From Home, touch Direct To.
2) Touch the Flight Plan Tab, the Nearest Tab, or the Recent Tab, as necessary.
3) Touch a waypoint selection button to choose the waypoint as the direct-to destination, and return to the Direct
To Screen.
4) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to.
Figure 5-75 Direct To Screen - Flight Plan Tab
Flight Plan Tab
Bearing/Distance to Waypoint
Waypoint Selection Button
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B250
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting a waypoint as the direct-to destination from the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan.
2) Touch a waypoint selection button to display the Waypoint Options Screen.
3) Touch the ¯ button to choose the waypoint as the direct-to destination, and return to the Direct To Screen.
4) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to.
Figure 5-76 Waypoint Options Screen
Direct To (¯) Button
Waypoint Selection Button
Selecting the active flight plan waypoint as the direct-to destination:
1) From Home, touch the ¯ Button to choose the active flight plan waypoint as the direct-to destination, and
return to the Direct To Screen.
2) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to.
Or:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan.
2) Touch the ¯ button to choose the active flight plan waypoint as the direct-to destination, and return to the
Direct To Screen.
3) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to.
The direct-to function can be accessed from any waypoint information screen (Airport Information, Intersection
Information, VOR Information, NDB Information, or User Waypoint Information), and from some of the nearest
waypoint screens (Nearest Airport, Nearest Intersection, Nearest VOR, Nearest NDB, Nearest User, or Nearest
Weather) . If the direct-to is initiated from the Active Flight Plan Screen when no waypoint has been selected,
the default waypoint is either the active flight plan waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or no waypoint (Select
Waypoint Button is active). Direct-to requests on waypoint information screens or nearest waypoint screens
defaults to the displayed waypoint.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
251
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the screen containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
2) Touch the Waypoint Options Button.
3) Touch the ¯ button to choose the waypoint as the direct-to destination, and display the Direct To Screen.
4) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > Airport.
2) Touch a nearest airport button to display the Waypoint Options Window and highlight the airport.
3) Touch the ¯ button to choose the waypoint as the direct-to destination, and display the Direct To Screen.
4) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to.
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the map pointer on the navigation map.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
1) From the navigation map display, press the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted, and
the Direct To Button is activated.
4) Touch the Direct To Button to display the Direct To Screen with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
5) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to.
Cancelling a Direct To:
1) From Home, touch Direct To.
2) Touch the Cancel ¯ Button.
3) Touch the YES Button in response to the question “Cancel ¯ XXXXXX”.
Figure 5-77 Cancelling a Direct To
Cancel ¯
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B252
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
When navigating a direct-to, the system sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected.
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) From Home, touch Direct To.
2) Touch the Course Button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to select the course.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the course, and and return to the Direct To Screen.
5) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to using the manually selected course.
Figure 5-78 Direct To - Selecting a Manual Course
Course
Selection
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) From Home, touch Direct To.
2) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to using the direct course.
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint, or
at the specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNAV altitudes prior to
the direct-to destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of the direct-to. All
VNAV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on Vertical Navigation for more
information regarding the use and purpose of VNAV altitudes and offset distances.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
253
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Entering a VNAV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) From Home, touch Direct To.
2) Touch the VNAV Altitude Button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to select the altitude.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the altitude, and and return to the Direct To Screen.
2) Touch the VNAV Offset Button to display the keypad.
3) Touch the (Before) - Button or the (After) + Button, if necessary.
3) Use the keypad to select the offset distance.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the offset distance, and and return to the Direct To Screen.
5) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct-to using the VNAV constraints.
Figure 5-79 Direct To - Setting VNAV Constraints
Altitude/
Offset
Selection
Removing a VNAV constraint:
1) From Home, touch Direct To.
2) Touch the Activate ¯ Button to activate the direct to without the VNAV constraints.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B254
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
Flight planning consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding waypoints along
airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The system allows flight planning
information to be entered from the Touchscreen Controller. The flight plan is displayed on maps using different
line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being flown
(departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Flight Plan Leg Type Symbol
Active non-heading Leg
Active heading Leg
Non-heading Leg in the current flight segment
Heading Leg not in the current flight segment
Non-heading Leg not in the active flight segment
Turn Anticipation Arc
Table 5-7 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 99 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can be
activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the system automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
255
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
There are three places to create, modify, or view a flight plan:
• Active Flight Plan Screen on the Touchscreen Controller (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Flight Plan Catalog Screen on the Touchscreen Controller (create/modify a stored flight plan)
• Active Flight Plan on the MFD (view the active flight plan)
Figure 5-80 Active Flight Plan Screen
Direct To (¯) Button
Departure Identifier Button
PROC Button
VNAV Button
Flight Plan Options Button
Waypoint Selection Button
Bearing/Distance to Waypoint
(default data field types selections)
Active Flight Plan Leg
Enroute Button
VNAV Altitude Button
Flight Plan Name
Figure 5-81 Flight Plan Catalog Screen
Stored Flight Plan Options Button
Number of Available Storage Spots
Destination Airport Identifier/Symbol
Cumulative Flight Plan Distance
Flight Plan Enroute Safe Altitude
Create New Catalog Flight Plan
Button
Number of Flight Plans Stored
Departure Airport Identifier/Symbol
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B256
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-82 Active Flight Plan displayed on MFD
Current VNAV Profile
- Active VNAV WPT ID/Alt
- Time to Top of Descent
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Vertical Speed Required
- Vertical Deviation
Active Flight Plan
Active Flight Plan Info
Active Flight Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Leg
The active flight plan is listed on the Active Flight Plan Screen on the Touchscreen Controller. It is the flight
plan to which the system is currently providing guidance, and is shown on the navigation maps. Stored flight
plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Screen, and are available for activation (becomes the active flight
plan).
Displaying/removing the active flight plan on the navigation map display:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) Touch the Inset Window Tab.
3) Touch the Flight Plan Text Button to display/remove the active flight plan information.
Creating an active flight plan using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan.
2) Touch the Add Waypoint Button to display the keypad.
3) Select the identifier of the departure waypoint. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select a waypoint Identifier.
Or:
Use the right Knobs to select a waypoint identifier.
Or:
a) Touch the Find Button to display the FInd Waypoint Screen.
b) Touch the Nearest, Recent, Flight Plan, or Favorites Tab and select the waypoint from from the list of
waypoints.
Or:
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
257
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
a) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
b) Touch the Search Tab to display the Search By Button.
c) If necessary, touch the Search By Button to choose Search by City or Search by Facility.
d) Touch the Facility Name Button or the City Name Button to display the keypad.
e) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to accept the entry and display the search results.
f) Touch a waypoint selection button to choose the waypoint.
4) Repeat step numbers 2 and 3 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
Creating a stored flight plan using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch the Create New Catalog Flight Plan Button to display the Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen.
4) Touch the Add Waypoint Button to display the keypad.
5) Select the identifier of the departure waypoint. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select a waypoint Identifier.
Or:
Use the right knobs to select a waypoint identifier.
Or:
a) Touch the Find Button to display the FInd Waypoint Screen.
b) Touch the Nearest, Recent, Flight Plan, or Favorites Tab and select the waypoint from from the list of
waypoints.
Or:
a) Touch the Find Button to display the Find Waypoint Screen.
b) Touch the Search Tab to display the Search By Button.
c) If necessary, touch the Search By Button to choose Search by City or Search by Facility.
d) Touch the Facility Name Button or the City Name Button to display the keypad.
e) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to accept the entry and display the search results.
f) Touch a waypoint selection button to choose the waypoint.
6) Repeat step numbers 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B258
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options > Catalog > Create New Catalog Flight Plan >
Flight Plan Options.
3) Touch the Import Button to display the Import Flight Plan Screen.
4) Touch a flight plan selection button to display the flight plan information and activate the Import Button.
5) Touch the Import Button.
7) Touch the OK Button to return to the Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen.
Import
Button
Figure 5-83 Flight Plan Import
Selected
Flight
Plan Info
Flight Plan
Select
Button
Import
Button
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
259
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Exporting a stored Flight Plan to an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card for storing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
3) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
4) Touch a flight plan selection button to display the Catalog Options Window.
5) Touch the Export Button to display the Export Flight Plan Screen.
6) Touch the File Name: Button to rename the exported flight plan using the keypad or right knob, if necessary.
7) Touch the Export Button.
8) Touch the OK Button in response to the “Flight Plan Successfully Exported.” prompt to return to the Flight Plan
Options Screen.
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
Catalog
Button
Figure 5-84 Stored Flight Plan Export
Export
Button
Export
Button
Flight Plan
Selection
Button
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B260
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added to the flight plan. Flight plans are limited to 99
waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints in the flight plan
exceeds 99, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the new waypoint(s)
are not added to the flight plan.
Figure 5-85 Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen
Flight Plan Options Button
Waypoint Options Button
Procedure Options Button
Stored Flight Plan Selected
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Flight Plan Segment Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
Figure 5-86 Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen - Flight Plan Full
Flight Plan Full Message
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a flight plan selection button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen.
5) Touch a waypoint options button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
261
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
6) Touch the Insert Before Button or the Insert After Button to select where the new waypint will be placed in
relation to the selected waypoint. The keypad is displayed.
7) Use the keypad, right knob, or the Find function to select the new waypoint.
8) Touch the Enter Button to accept the waypoint and place it in the flight plan.
Figure 5-87 Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen - Waypoint Options Window
Insert After Button
Insert Before Button
Selected Waypoint
Waypoint Info Button
Remove Waypoint Button
Or:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a flight plan selection button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen.
5) Scroll to the end of the list, if necessary to show the Add Waypoint Button.
6) Touch the Add Waypoint Button to display the keypad is displayed.
7) Use the keypad, right knob, or the Find function to select the new waypoint.
8) Touch the Enter Button to accept the waypoint and place it in the flight plan.
Figure 5-88 Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen - Adding a Waypoint to the end of the Flight Plan
Add Waypoint Button
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B262
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a ‘Duplicates found’
message is shown. Touch the Enter Button and the Waypoint Duplicates Screen is displayed. Touch a
waypoint selection button to select the correct waypoint.
Duplicates
Message
Figure 5-89 Duplicate Waypoints
Waypoint
Selection
Button
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan.
2) Touch a waypoint button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
3) Touch the Insert Before Button or the Insert After Button to select where the new waypoint will be placed
in relation to the selected waypoint. The keypad is displayed.
4) Use the keypad, right knob, or the Find function to select the new waypoint.
5) Touch the Enter Button to accept the waypoint and place it in the flight plan.
Adding waypoints to the active flight plan using the map pointer:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Navigation Map Display and pan to the map location
of the desired waypoint. When the pointer is activated, the Map Pointer Options Screen is displayed on the
Touchscreen Controller. When the pointer highlights a map location that can be added to the active flight plan,
the Insert In Flight Plan Button is activated.
2) Touch the Insert In Flight Plan Button. The Insert Before Waypoint Screen is displayed.
3) Touch the waypoint selection button to select where to insert the new waypoint. The waypoint is inserted into
the active flight plan before the selected waypoint.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
263
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-90 Active Flight Plan Display - Map Pointer Active
Map Pointer
- TOP Highlighted
Active Flight Plan Info
Insert In
Flight Plan
Button
Figure 5-91 Inserting Waypoint in Active Flight Plan
Waypoint
Selection
Button
Figure 5-92 KTOP in Flight Plan
TOP Inserted
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B264
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. An airway can only be loaded if
there is a waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach
procedure. The system also anticipates the desired airway based on the selected waypoint and the flight plan.
Adding an airway to the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan.
2) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a waypoint selection button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
3) Touch the Load Airway Button to display the Airway Selection Screen.
4) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an airway selection button to select the airway and display the Select Exit
Window (the exit points are displayed in alphabetical order, not the order they appear in the airway).
5) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an airway exit point selection button to select the airway exit point and
display the Airway Waypoint Sequence.
6) Touch the Load Airway Button to insert the airway into the active flight plan.
Selected
Airway
Entry Point
Figure 5-93 Adding an Airway to the Active Flight Plan
Airway
Selection
Button
Airway
Exit Point
Selection
Button
Airway
Waypoint
Sequence
Load
Airway
Button
Load
Airway
Button
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
265
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-94 Active Flight Plan Display - V4 Airway Loaded
Inserted Airway Header
- Airway Identifier:
[airway id].[exit wpt id]
(e.g., V4.SLN)
Inserted Airway
Figure 5-95 Active Flight Plan Screen - V4 Airway Loaded
Inserted Airway Header
- Airway Identifier:
[airway id].[exit waypoint id]
(e.g., V4.SLN)
Adding an airway to a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a flight plan selection button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen.
5) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a waypoint selection button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
6) Touch the Load Airway Button to display the Airway Selection Screen.
7) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an airway selection button to select the airway and display the Select Exit
Window.
8) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an airway exit point selection button to select the airway exit point and
display the Airway Waypoint Sequence.
9) Touch the Load Airway Button to insert the airway into the stored flight plan.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B266
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only in the direction MTD-ABB-BNE-DEVAL.
Airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway
waypoints AMANO, VAKOR, LIBRO, NELDA, DIRKA, GZO, KOSET, and SARKI:
• Starting from AMANO, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Starting from SARKI, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Between NELDA and GZO, the airway can be flown in either direction.
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the system database.
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
The system allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
Figure 5-96 Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen - Flight Plan Options
Load Arrival Button
Stored Flight Plan Waypoint List
Stored Flight Plan Name
Load Approach Button
Load Departure Button
DEPARTURE (DP)
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
267
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-97 Departure Selection Screen
Transition Button
Runway Button
Airport Button
Load Button
Departure Button
Departure Waypoint Sequence
Remove Button
Preview Button
Figure 5-98 Departure Display - Preview of the Selected Departure
Departure Airport
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a flight plan selection button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen.
5) Touch the Flight Plan Options Button to display the Flight Plan Options Window.
6) Touch the Load Departure Button to display the Departure Selection Screen.
7) Touch the Departure Button to display the Select Departure Screen with a list of available departures.
8) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a departure selection button to select the departure and return to the
Departure Selection Screen.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B268
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
9) Touch the Transition Button to display the Select Transition Screen with a list of available transitions.
10) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a transition selection button to select the transition and return to the
Departure Selection Screen.
11) Touch the Runway Button to display the Select Runway Screen with a list of available runways.
12) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a runway selection button to select the runway and return to the Departure
Selection Screen.
13) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the preview of the departure.
14) Touch the Load Button to insert the departure into the stored flight plan.
Figure 5-99 Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen - Departure Inserted
Inserted Departure Header
- Departure Identifier: [departure
airport]-[departure runway].
[departure transition].
[departure end point]
(e.g., KMKC-RW01.TIFTO3.TIFTO)
Stored Flight Plan Name
Figure 5-100 Stored Flight Plan Display - Departure Inserted
Departure Airport
Loaded Departure
Departure End Point
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
269
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVAL (STAR)
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Figure 5-101 Arrival Selection Screen
Transition Button
Runway Button
Airport Button
Load Button
Arrival Button
Arrival Waypoint Sequence
Remove Button
Preview Button
Figure 5-102 Arrival Display - Preview of the Selected Arrival
Destination Airport
Preview of
Selected Arrival
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a flight plan selection button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen.
5) Touch the Flight Plan Options Button to display the Flight Plan Options Window.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B270
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
6) Touch the Load Arrival Button to display the Arrival Selection Screen.
7) Touch the Arrival Button to display the Select Arrival Screen with a list of available arrivals.
8) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an arrival selection button to select the arrival and return to the Arrival
Selection Screen.
9) Touch the Transition Button to display the Select Transition Screen with a list of available transitions.
10) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a transition selection button to select the transition and return to the Arrival
Selection Screen.
11) Touch the Runway Button to display the Select Runway Screen with a list of available runways.
12) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a runway selection button to select the runway and return to the Arrival
Selection Screen.
13) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the preview of the arrival.
14) Touch the Load Button to insert the arrival into the stored flight plan.
Figure 5-103 Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen - Arrival Inserted
Inserted Arrival Header
- Arrival Identifier: [destination
airport]-[arrival transition].
[arrival].[arrival runway]
(e.g., KCOS-TBE.DBRY2.ALL)
Stored Flight Plan Name
Figure 5-104 Stored Flight Plan Display - Arrival Inserted
Loaded Arrival
Destination Airport
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
271
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
APPROACH (APPR)
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
Figure 5-105 Approach Selection Screen
Transition Button
Minimums Button
Airport Button
Load & Activate Button
Approach Button
Approach Waypoint Sequence
Remove Button
Load Button
Preview Button
Figure 5-106 Approach Display - Preview of the Selected Approach
Destination Runway
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a flight plan selection button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen.
5) Touch the Flight Plan Options Button to display the Flight Plan Options Window.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B272
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
6) Touch the Load Approach Button to display the Approach Selection Screen.
7) Touch the Approach Button to display the Select Approach Screen with a list of available approaches.
8) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an approach selection button to select the approach and return to the
Approach Selection Screen.
9) Touch the Transition Button to display the Select Transition Screen with a list of available transitions.
10) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a transition selection button to select the transition and return to the
Approach Selection Screen.
11) Touch the Minimums Button to display the Minimums Screen.
12) Touch the Baro Button to activate barometric minimums.
13) Use the keypad to select the minimums altitude.
14) Touch the Enter Button to accept the minimums altitude and return to the Approach Selection Screen.
15) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the preview of the approach.
16) Touch the Load Button to insert the approach into the stored flight plan.
Figure 5-107 Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen - Approach Inserted
Inserted Approach Header
- Approach Identifier: [destination
airport]-[runway and approach type].
(e.g., KCOS-RNAV GPS Y 35R LPV)
Stored Flight Plan Name
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
273
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-108 Stored Flight Plan Display - Approach Inserted
Loaded Approach
FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE
The system can store up to 99 flight plans. The active flight plan is erased when the system is powered off
or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be viewed on the Flight Plan
Catalog Screen.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen. The flight plan information is displayed
showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude information for the stored flight plans.
3) Touch a stored flight plan button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button to display the Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen to view the waypoints in the stored flight
plan.
Figure 5-109 Flight Plan Catalog Screen
Stored Flight Plan Button
Destination Airport Identifier/Symbol
Cumulative Flight Plan Distance
Flight Plan Enroute Safe Altitude
Departure Airport Identifier/Symbol
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B274
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-110 Edit Stored Flight Plan Screen
Flight Plan Options Button
Stored Flight Plan Selected
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Flight Plan Segment Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Screen:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Store Button.
3) Touch the OK Button in response to the question “Store XXXX/XXXX into catalog?”.
ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Activating a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a stored flight plan button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Activate Button.
5) Touch the OK Button in response to “Activate Selected Flight Plan and Replace Current Active Route?”. To
cancel the request, touch the Cancel Button.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a stored flight plan button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Invert and Activate Button.
5) Touch the OK Button in response to “Invert and Activate Selected Flight Plan and Replace Current Active
Route?”. To cancel the request, touch the Cancel Button.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
275
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
COPY A FLIGHT PLAN
The system allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
Copying a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a stored flight plan button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Copy Button.
5) Touch the OK Button in response to “Copy Flight Plan <flight plan name>?” The copied flight plan is placed
at the end of the list of stored flight plans. To cancel the request, touch the Cancel Button.
DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Individual flight plans can be deleted from the system memory.
Deleting a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Touch a stored flight plan button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Delete Button.
5) Touch the OK Button in response to “Delete Flight Plan <flight plan name>?”. The flight plan is deleted, and
any flight plans following it in the list are shifted up. To cancel the request, touch the Cancel Button.
FLIGHT PLAN EDITING
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
The system allows deleting an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the
system.
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Delete Flight Plan Button.
3) Touch the OK Button in response to “Delete all waypoints in flight plan?” The active flight plan is deleted. To
cancel the request, touch the Cancel Button.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B276
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
REMOVING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’
Removing an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a waypoint selection button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
3) Touch the Remove Waypoint Button.
4) Touch the Yes Button in response to “Remove <waypoint name>?” The waypoint is removed. To cancel the
request, touch the No Button.
Removing an entire airway from the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an airway selection button to display the Airway Options Window.
3) Touch the Remove Airway Button.
4) Touch the Yes Button in response to “Remove Airway -<airway name> from flight plan?” The airway is
removed, but the starting and ending waypoints remain in the flight plan. To cancel the request, touch the No
Button.
Removing an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a departure, arrival, or approach selection button to display the Departure,
Arrival, or Approach Options Window.
3) Touch the Remove Departure Button, the Remove Arrival Button, or the Remove Approach Button.
4) Touch the Yes Button in response to “Remove <procedure> -<procedure name> from flight plan?” The
procedure is removed (the departure airport remains when removing a departure). To cancel the request, touch
the No Button.
Removing an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a flight plan options button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button.
5) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a waypoint selection button to display the Waypoint Options Window.
6) Touch the Remove Waypoint Button.
7) Touch the Yes Button in response to “Remove <waypoint name>?” The waypoint is removed. To cancel the
request, touch the No Button.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
277
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a flight plan options button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button.
5) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an airway selection button to display the Airway Options Window.
6) Touch the Remove Airway Button.
7) Touch the Yes Button in response to “Remove <airway name>?” The airway is removed, but the starting and
ending waypoints remain in the flight plan. To cancel the request, touch the No Button.
Removing an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a flight plan options button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Edit Button.
5) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a departure, arrival, or approach selection button to display the Departure,
Arrival, or Approach Options Window.
6) Touch the Remove Departure Button, the Remove Arrival Button, or the Remove Approach Button.
7) Touch the Yes Button in response to “Remove <procedure> -<procedure name> from flight plan?” The
procedure is removed (the departure airport remains when removing a departure). To cancel the request, touch
the No Button.
CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification.
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Rename Button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to select the comment.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the comment, and and return to the Flight Plan Options Screen.
Changing the active flight plan comment using the PFD Controller:
1) On the PFD Controller, press the FPL Button to display the Direct To Window.
2) Turn the large PFD Knob to move the cursor to the comment field, if necessary.
3) Turn the small PFD Knob one click to activate the editing cursor (flashing).
4) Turn the large and small PFD knobs to select the comment (large knob moves the cursor; small knob selects the
character)
5) Press the ENT Key or the small PFD Knob to accept the selection.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B278
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a flight plan options button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Rename Button to display the keypad.
5) Use the keypad to select the comment.
6) Touch the Enter Button to accept the comment, and return to the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN DATA FIELDS
The data fields displayed on the Touchscreen Controller for each flight plan can be changed. The default
settings for the data fields are DTK - Desired Track and DIS - Distance.
Changing the flight plan data fields:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Edit Data Fields Button to display the Flight Plan Data Fields Screen.
3) Touch the Data Field 1 Button or the Data Field 2 Button to display the Select Field Type Screen.
4) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a data field type button to select the field type and return to the Select Field
Type Screen.
5) Touch the other data field button to choose another data field type, or touch the Restore Defaults Button to
return to the default settings.
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
entered from 1 to 99 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
The along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered, but the altitude can be modified. If the
along track offset distance must be changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new
one created with the new offset distance.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
279
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Waypoint
Options
Select
Button
Figure 5-111 Along Track Offset
(After) +
Button
Waypoint
Selected
(Before) -
Button
Along
Track
Waypoint
Button
Along Track Offset
Waypoint Along Track Offset
Waypoint Altitude
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Touch a waypoint options button to display the Waypoint Options Screen.
3) Touch the Along Track Waypoint Button to bring up the Along Track Offset Waypoint Screen.
4) Use the keypad to select the distance in the range of 1 to 99 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Touch the (Before) - Button or (After) - Button to select the offset waypoint direction.
4) Touch the Enter Button to insert the offset waypoint into the active flight plan.
PARALLEL TRACK
The Parallel Track feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the current
flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel course,
and waypoint names have a lower case “-p” placed after the identifier.
Using direct-to, loading an approach, a holding pattern, or editing and activating the flight plan automatically
cancels Parallel Track. Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel
tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B280
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-112 Active Flight Plan Display - Prior to Activating Parallel Track
Active Flight Plan
prior to Parallel Track
Figure 5-113 Parallel Track Screen - Selecting Parallel Track
Offset Distance Button
Offset Direction
Left Button
Right Button Activate Parallel Track Button
Parallel Track Status
Activating parallel track:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options > Parallel Track
2) Touch the Left Button or the Right Button to choose the offset direction.
3) Touch the Offset Distance Button to display the keypad.
4) Use the keypad to select the distance.
5) Touch the Enter Button to accept the distance, and and return to the Parallel Track Screen.
6) Touch the Activate Parallel Track Button to activate the parallel track function.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
281
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-114 Active Flight Plan Display - Parallel Track Active
Parallel Track Waypoints
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- ...
- LAA-p
Activating Parallel Track
affects the active flight
plan from the current
position on (will not affect
an approach)
Parallel Track
Original Track
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled. Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using direct-to or if the
active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure. Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions
results in the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’. If an approach leg is active the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry.
Unavailable
- Invalid
Route
Geometry
Figure 5-115 Parallel Track Unavailable
Unavailable
-Approach
Leg Active
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B282
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type.
Cancelling parallel track:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options > Parallel Track
2) Touch the Cancel Parallel Track Button to cancel the parallel track function.
Figure 5-116 Parallel Track Screen - Cancelling Parallel Track
Cancel Parallel Track Button
Parallel Track Status
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
The system allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).
Activating a flight plan leg:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch the waypoint selection button to select the the destination waypoint for
the desired leg. The Waypoint Options Window is displayed.
3) Touch the Activate Leg to Waypoint Button.
4) Touch the OK Button in response to “Activate Leg?” The new active flight plan leg is activated. To cancel the
request, touch the Cancel Button.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
283
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Waypoint
Selection
Button
Figure 5-117 Active Flight Plan Screen - Activating a Flight Plan Leg
OK Button
Activate
Leg to
Waypoint
Button
Selected Leg
Destination
Waypoint
Cancel
Button
Current
Active
Flight Plan
Leg
New Active
Flight Plan
Leg
INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Invert Button
3) Touch the Yes Button in response to “Invert active flight plan?” The active flight plan leg is inverted. To cancel
the request, touch the No Button.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Catalog Button to display the Flight Plan Catalog Screen.
3) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a flight plan selection button to display the Catalog Options Window.
4) Touch the Invert and Activate Button.
7) Touch the OK Button in response to “Invert and Activate Selected Flight Plan and Replace Current Active
Route?” The stored flight is inverted and becomes the active flight plan. The stored flight plan is not modifed.
To cancel the request, touch the Cancel Button.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B284
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS
The system allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan
Page Screen. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and the “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
Airway
Expanded
Figure 5-118 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
Airway
Collapsed
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an airway selection button to display the Airway Options Window.
3) Touch the Collapse All Button or the Expand All Button to collapse/expand all airways and return to the
Active Flight Plan Screen.
Figure 5-119 Active Flight Plan Screen -Collapsing Expanding Airways
Expand All Button
Collapse All Button
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
285
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a selected
waypoint, and allows creation of a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen
reference waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Closest Point of Flight Plan Button to display the Closest Point of Flight Plan Screen
3) Touch the From waypoint button to display the keypad.
4) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the “From” waypoint.
5) Touch the Insert Point into Flight Plan Button to add the calculated waypoint into the flight plan. The name
for the new waypoint is derived from the identifier of the From waypoint.
Figure 5-120 Closest Point of FPL
From Waypoint Button
Calculated Bearing/Distance
and Latitude/Longitude of the
Closest Point of Flight Plan
Figure 5-121 Closest Point of FPL inserted in Active Flight Plan
Inserted Flight Plan Waypoint
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B286
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, or at the aircraft present position.
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch the waypoint selection button to select the the waypoint at which to define
the holding pattern. The Waypoint Options Window is displayed.
3) Touch the Hold at Waypoint Button. The Hold at Waypoint Window is displayed.
4) Touch the Turn Direction Button, and touch the Right Button or the Left Button to select the turn direction.
5) Touch the Course Direction Button, and touch the Inbound Button or the Outbound Button to select the
course direction.
6) Touch the Hold Entry Course Button to display the keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the
entry angle.
7) Touch the Leg Length Mode Button, and touch the Distance Button or the Time Button to select the length
mode.
8) Touch the Leg Time Button or the Leg Distance Button to display the keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter
Button to select the length of the leg.
9) Touch the Expect Further Clearance Button to display the keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter Button to
select the time for a reminder.
10) Touch the Create Button to add the hold into the flight plan.
Waypoint
Selection
Button
Hold at
Waypoint
Button
Figure 5-122 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
Leg Length Mode Button
(Time or Distance)
Expect Further Clearance Button
Turn Direction Button
Hold at Present Position Button
Hold Location Information
Cancel Hold Button
Leg Time or Leg Distance Button
Hold Entry Course Button
Course Direction Button
(Inbound or Outbound)
Show on Map Button
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
287
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options
2) Touch the Hold at P.POS Button. The Hold at Waypoint Window is displayed.
3) Touch the Turn Direction Button, and touch the Right Button or the Left Button to select the turn direction.
4) Touch the Course Direction Button, and touch the Inbound Button or the Outbound Button to select the
course direction.
5) Touch the Hold Entry Course Button to display the keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the
entry angle.
6) Touch the Leg Length Mode Button, and touch the Distance Button or the Time Button to select the length
mode.
7) Touch the Leg Time Button or the Leg Distance Button to display the keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter
Button to select the length of the leg.
8) Touch the Expect Further Clearance Button to display the keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter Button to
select the time for a reminder.
9) Touch the Create Button to add the hold into the flight plan.
Hold at P.POS Button
Figure 5-123 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at the Aircraft Present Position
Leg Length Mode Button
(Time or Distance)
Expect Further Clearance Button
Turn Direction Button
Hold at Present Position Button
Hold Location Information
Cancel Hold Button
Leg Time or Leg Distance Button
Hold Entry Course Button
Course Direction Button
(Inbound or Outbound)
Show on Map Button
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B288
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing a user-defined hold:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch the hold waypoint selection button. The Waypoint Options Window is
displayed.
3) Touch the Remove Hold Button.
4) Touch the OK Button in response to “Remove Holding Pattern?” The holding pattern is removed. To cancel the
request, touch the Cancel Button.
Figure 5-124 Removing a User Defined Holding Pattern
Remove Hold Button
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
289
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
NOTE: The system supports vertical navigation for all lateral leg types except for CA, CI, FA, FM, HA, HM, PI,
VA, VD, VI, VR, and VM. Vertical constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
The system Vertical Navigation (VNAV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute and
teminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a
direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a
linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
NOTE: Making course changes greater than 90° during a descent with vertical guidance may cause excessive
and rapid movement of the vertical deviation indicator and SVS Pathways.
The system updates vertical path guidance continuously using ground speed and the calculated distance to
the Bottom of Descent (BOD). Due to turn anticipation guidance (turn-smoothing), distance to the BOD can be
affected by course changes greater than approximately 5 degrees. Ground speed can be affected by factors such as
shifts in wind direction, aircraft power management, pitch angle, and course changes. Abrupt and/or substantial
changes to either the distance to the BOD, ground speed, or both can cause similarly abrupt/substantial changes
in vertical path guidance.
Because of turn-smoothing, changes to both distance to the BOD and ground speed tend to be more extreme
when the BOD is also a waypoint that marks a large course change. These speed and distance changes will be
accounted for in the computed required vertical path and reflected in the vertical guidance indications.
VNAV
Enabled
Button
-VNAV Enabled
Figure 5-125 VNAV Profile Screen - Enable/Disable VNAV
VNAV
Enabled
Button
-VNAV
Disabled
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B290
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-126 Active Flight Plan Display - VNAV Enabled
Current Vertical
Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
VNAV Altitude
Contraint
Figure 5-127 Active Flight Plan Display - VNAV Disabled
Current Vertical
Navigation Profile
Disabled (fields dashed)
VNAV Altitude
Contraint
Enabling/Disabling VNAV guidance:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > VNAV
2) Touch the VNAV Enabled Button to enable/disable vertical navigation.
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and time
to top of descent/bottom of descent (TIME TO TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
and Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TIME TO
TOD items displayed in the CURRENT VNAV PROFILE box are dashed. VNAV remains disabled until manually
enabled. Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
291
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The system allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Selecting the VNAV ¯ Softkey on the VNAV Profile Screen
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNAV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the ¯ Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass flight plan
waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent (TOD)
point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
Figure 5-128 VNAV Profile Screen - Vertical Navigation Profile Modification
VNAV ¯ Button
Flight Path Angle Button
Vertical Speed Target Button
Figure 5-129 Selecting the VNAV Direct To Waypoint
VNAV Waypoint Selection Button
Activating a vertical navigation direct to:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > VNAV
2) Touch the VNAV ¯ Button to display the Select VNAV Direct To Screen with a list of possible Vertical
navigation direct to choices.
3) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a VNAV waypoint selection button.
4) Touch the Activate Button in response to “Activate Vertical ¯: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX” to initiate the
vertical navigation direct to. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint. To
cancel the request, touch the Cancel Button.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B292
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-130 Active Flight Plan Display - VNAV Direct To Not Active
Current Vertical
Navigation Profile
- Prior to VNAV Direct To
Figure 5-131 Active Flight Plan Display - VNAV Direct To Active
Current Vertical
Navigation Profile
- After VNAV Direct To
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) on the VNAV Profile Scteen.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > VNAV
2) Touch the Vertical Speed Target Button or the Flight Path Angle Button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad and the Enter Button to select the vertical speed target or the flight path angle.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
293
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
The system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database. The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures
that call for “Cross at” altitudes. If the procedure states “Expect to cross at,” then the altitude is not in the
database. In this case the altitude may be entered manually.
Figure 5-132 Active Flight Plan Screen - Waypoint Altitude Constraints
White Text with Altitude
Restriction Bars
White Text
Cross AT or ABOVE 5,000 ft
Cross AT or BELOW 3,000 ft
Cross AT 2,300 ft
Altitude Constraint Examples Displayed Text Examples
Light Blue Text
Light Blue Text with
Pencil Icon
5
OOO
FT
23
OO
FT
3
OOO
FT
White Text Light Blue Text Light Blue Subdued Text
Altitude calculated by the system estimating
the altitude of the aircraft as it passes over
the navigation point, or altitude retrieved
from the navigation database. The altitude is
provided as a reference and is not designated
to be used in determining vertical speed and
deviation guidance.
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude does not match the published
altitude in navigation database or no
published altitude exists. The pencil icon
indicates manual designation or manual
data entry.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.
Table 5-8 Altitude Constraint Color Coding
Altitudes associated with arrival and approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system
automatically uses the altitudes loaded with the arrival or approach for giving vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Note that these altitudes are displayed as blue text up to, but not including, the FAF. The FAF is
always a “reference only” altitude and cannot be designated, unless the selected approach does not provide
vertical guidance. In this case, the FAF altitude can be designated.
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated”. The altitude is now
displayed only as a reference. It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed altitudes may change
due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude to a non-designated
altitude.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B294
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Designating the current waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a VNAV ALT button to display the VNAV Altitude Window.
3) Touch the Enter Button to designate the current altitude to be used for vertical guidance. The altitude is now
shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
Figure 5-133 Active Flight Plan Screen - Waypoint Altitude Designation
VNAV ALT Button
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered to the nearest foot mean sea level (MSL) or flight level to the
nearest hundred feet. An altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports.
When a database altitude restriction is displayed, the system allows entry of a different altitude when creating
a waypoint, effectively overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude
restriction of type “AT or ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the
restriction to define the vertical profile.
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (e.g., ILS or GPS
SBAS approach)
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF.
Selecting and designating a new waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a VNAV ALT button to display the VNAV Altitude Window.
3) If necessary, touch the Flight Level Button or the MSL Button to choose the altitude entry type.
4) Use the keypad to select a new VNAV altitude and touch the Enter Button to designate the new altitude to be
used for vertical guidance. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
295
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event
an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral
waypoint, the system displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude
can be provided. The system also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been
edited.
Removing an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a VNAV ALT button to display the VNAV Altitude Window.
3) Touch the Remove VNAV ALT Button. A ‘Remove VNAV altitude?’ window is displayed.
4) Touch the OK Button. The altitude is now shown in white, indicating it is not usable for vertical guidance. To
cancel the request, touch the Cancel Button.
Figure 5-134 Active Flight Plan Screen - Deleting Altitude Constraints
Manually Entered Constraint
Database Constraint
Removing an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a VNAV ALT button to display the VNAV Altitude Window.
3) Touch the Remove VNAV ALT Button. A ‘Remove VNAV altitude?’ window is displayed.
4) Touch the OK Button. The altitude is now shown in white, indicating it is not usable for vertical guidance. To
cancel the request, touch the Cancel Button.
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan
2) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a VNAV ALT button to display the VNAV Altitude Window.
3) Touch the Remove VNAV ALT Button. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNAV altitude of nnnnnFT?’
confirmation window is displayed.
4) Touch the Revert Button. The altitude is now the database altitude and is shown in light blue, indicating it is
usable for vertical guidance.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B296
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.8 PROCEDURES
The system can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using the
Touchscreen Controller.
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the departure and arrival airport are already
loaded, the procedure selection screen defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “Load” or “Load & Activate” is given. “Loading”
adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This
allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the procedure to the end of the flight plan but
immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in the approach.
Departure
Button
Figure 5-135 Loading Procedures on the Touchscreen Controller
Arrival
Button
Approach
Button
DEPARTURES
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch PROC
2) Touch the Departure Button to display the Departure Selection Screen.
3) If necessary, touch the Airport Button to display the keypad and use it to select the departure airport.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the departure airport.
5) If necessary, touch the Departure Button to display the Select Departure Screen with a list of available
departures.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
297
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
6) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a departure selection button to select the departure.
7) If necessary, touch the Transition Button to display the Select Transition Screen with a list of available transitions.
8) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a transition selection button to select the transition.
9) If necessary, touch the Runway Button to display the Select Runway Screen with a list of available runways.
10) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a runway selection button to select the runway and return to the Departure
Selection Screen.
11) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the preview of the departure.
12) Touch the Load Button to insert the departure into the active flight plan.
Runway
Selection
Button
Figure 5-136 Loading a Departure into the Active Flight Plan
Departure
Sequence
Loaded
Departure
Load
Button
Departure
Selection
Button
Airport
Button
Transition
Selection
Button
Departure
Button
Transition
Button
Runway
Button
Remove
Button
Preview
Button
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B298
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing available procedures at an airport:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport
2) If necessary, touch the Airport Selection Button to display the keypad and use it to select the airport.
3) Touch the PROC Tab to display the Airport Procedures Screen.
4) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a procedure selection button. The procedure selection screen is displayed
on the Touchscreen Controller for the selected procedure.
5) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the procedure.
6) Touch the Back Button to return to the Airport Procedures Screen to view another procedure.
7) Repeat steps 4 through 6 as necessary.
REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing a departure from the active flight plan using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch PROC
2) Touch the Departure Button to display the Departure Selection Screen.
3) Touch the Remove Button. A ‘Remove departure?’ window is displayed.
4) Touch the Yes Button. The departure is removed from the active flight plan. To cancel the request, touch the
No Button.
ARRIVALS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch PROC
2) Touch the Arrival Button to display the Arrival Selection Screen.
3) If necessary, touch the Airport Button to display the keypad and use it to select the arrival airport.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the arrival airport.
5) If necessary, touch the Arrival Button to display the Select Arrival Screen with a list of available arrivals.
6) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an arrival selection button to select the arrival.
7) If necessary, touch the Transition Button to display the Select Transition Screen with a list of available transitions.
8) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a transition selection button to select the transition.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
299
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
9) If necessary, touch the Runway Button to display the Select Runway Screen with a list of available runways.
10) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a runway selection button to select the runway and return to the Arrival
Selection Screen.
11) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the preview of the arrival.
12) Touch the Load Button to insert the arrival into the active flight plan.
Transition
Selection
Button
Figure 5-137 Loading an Arrival into the Active Flight Plan
Arrival
Sequence
Loaded
Arrival
Load
Button
Arrival
Selection
Button
Airport
Button
Runway
Selection
Button
Arrival
Button
Transition
Button
Runway
Button
Remove
Button
Preview
Button
Viewing available procedures at an airport:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport
2) If necessary, touch the Airport Selection Button to display the keypad and use it to select the airport.
3) Touch the PROC Tab to display the Airport Procedures Screen.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B300
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a procedure selection button. The procedure selection screen is displayed
on the Touchscreen Controller for the selected procedure
5) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the procedure.
6) Touch the Back Button to return to the Airport Procedures Screen to view another procedure.
7) Repeat steps 4 through 6 as necessary.
REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch PROC
2) Touch the Arrival Button to display the Arrival Selection Screen.
3) Touch the Remove Button. A ‘Remove arrival?’ window is displayed.
4) Touch the Yes Button. The arrival is removed from the active flight plan. To cancel the request, touch the No
Button.
APPROACHES
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “Load” or “Load & Activate” is given. “Loading” adds
the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows
continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the procedure to the end of the flight plan
but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in the approach.
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
The SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LP, and LPV approaches according to the published
chart. LNAV+V is a standard LNAV approach with advisory vertical guidance provided for assistance in
maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed
on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. In all cases where
LNAV+V is indicated by the system during an approach, LNAV minima are used. The active approach type
is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
301
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HSI Annunciation Description Example on HSI
LNAV GPS approach using published LNAV
minima
Approach Type
- LNAV
- LNAV+V
- L/VNAV
- LP
- LPV
LNAV+V GPS approach using published LNAV
minima. Advisory vertical guidance is
provided
L/VNAV
(available only if
SBAS available)
GPS approach using published LNAV/
VNAV minima (downgrades to Baro
VNAV if SBAS unavailable)
LP
(available only if
SBAS available)
GPS approach using published LP
minima (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS
unavailable)
LPV
(available only if
SBAS available)
GPS approach using published LPV
minima
Table 5-9 Approach Types
LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch PROC
2) Touch the Approach Button to display the Approach Selection Screen.
3) If necessary, touch the Airport Button to display the keypad and use it to select the approach airport.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the approach airport.
5) If necessary, touch the Approach Button to display the Select Approach Screen with a list of available
approaches.
6) Scroll the list if necessary and touch an arrival selection button to select the arrival.
7) If necessary, touch the Transition Button to display the Select Transition Screen with a list of available transitions.
8) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a transition selection button to select the transition.
9) If necessary, touch the Runway Button to display the Select Runway Screen with a list of available runways.
10) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a runway selection button to select the runway and return to the Arrival
Selection Screen.
11) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the preview of the approach.
12) Touch the Load Button to insert the approach into the active flight plan.
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED
FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B302
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Transition
Selection
Button
Figure 5-138 Loading an Approach into the Active Flight Plan
Approach
Sequence
Loaded
Approach
Load
Button
Approach
Selection
Button
Airport
Button
Mininums
Button
Approach
Button
Transition
Button
Minimums
Button
Remove
Button
Load &
Activate
Button
Preview
Button
Viewing available procedures at an airport:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport
2) If necessary, touch the Airport Selection Button to display the keypad and use it to select the airport.
3) Touch the PROC Tab to display the Airport Procedures Screen.
4) Scroll the list if necessary and touch a procedure selection button. The procedure selection screen is displayed
on the Touchscreen Controller for the selected procedure
5) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the procedure.
6) Touch the Back Button to return to the Airport Procedures Screen to view another procedure.
7) Repeat steps 4 through 6 as necessary.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
303
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Airport Information Screen:
1) From Home, touch Waypoint Info > Airport
2) If necessary, touch the Airport Selection Button to display the keypad and use it to select the destination airport.
3) Touch the PROC Tab to display the Airport Procedures Screen.
4) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch an approach selection button. The Approach Selection Screen is displayed
on the Touchscreen Controller for the selected approach.
5) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the preview of the approach.
6) Edit the approach, if required.
7) Touch the Load Button to insert the approach into the active flight plan.
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Screen:
1) From Home, touch Nearest > Airport
2) If necessary, scroll the list to find the airport and touch the airport selection button to display the Waypoint
Options Window for the selected airport. If the airport is not listed, touch any airport selection button to display
the Waypoint Options Window.
3) Touch the Airport Info Button to display the Airport Information Screen. If in the previous step, the airport was
not listed, touch the airport button and use the keypad to select the destination airport.
4) Touch the PROC Tab to display the Airport Procedures Screen.
5) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch an approach selection button. The Approach Selection Screen is displayed
on the Touchscreen Controller for the selected approach.
6) Touch the Preview Button, then the Show on Map Button to show the preview of the approach.
7) Edit the approach, if required.
8) Touch the Load Button to insert the approach into the active flight plan.
ACTIVATING AN APPROACH
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Screen.
Activating a previously loaded approach using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch PROC
2) Touch the Activate Approach Button to activate the approach.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B304
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-139 Activating an Approach on the Touchscreen Controller
Activate Approach
Button
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’, which makes the inbound
course to the FAF waypoint active.
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch PROC
2) Touch the Activate Vectors To Final Button to activate vectors to final.
Figure 5-140 Activating Vectors to Final on the Touchscreen Controller
Activate Vectors
To Final Button
REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan using the Touchscreen Controller:
1) From Home, touch PROC
2) Touch the Approach Button to display the Approach Selection Screen.
3) Touch the Remove Button. A ‘Remove approach?’ window is displayed.
4) Touch the OK Button. The approach is removed from the active flight plan. To cancel the request, touch the
Cancel Button.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
305
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MISSED APPROACH
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
1) From Home, touch PROC
2) Touch the Activate Missed Approach Button to activate the missed approach. The aircraft automatically
sequences to the MAHP.
Or:
Press the Go-Around Button.
Figure 5-141 Activating a Missed Approach on the Touchscreen Controller
Activate Missed
Approach Button
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE
A temperature compensated altitude can be computed and used at the FAF of a loaded approach. A
temperature compensated altitude is displayed with a snowflake ( ) icon.
Enabling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From Home, touch Flight Plan > Flight Plan Options.
2) Touch the Temp Compensation Button to display the Temp Compensation Screen.
3) Touch the Temp Compensation Annunciator Button to enable/disable temperature compensation.
4) Touch the <airport> Temp Button to display the numeric keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter Button to
select the temperature at the <airport>. The compensated altitude is computed and shown in the flight plan.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B306
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Temp
Compensation
Button
Figure 5-142 Flight Plan Options Screen - Temperature Compensation
Temp
Compensation
Annunciator
Button
<airport>
Temp Button
FAF Altitude
and
Compensated
Altitude
COURSE TO ALTITUDE
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘1426ft’) is not
part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the required altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP
is exceeded. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (1,426 feet) after crossing
the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 1,426 feet
reached. After reaching 1,426 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case LYMES).
If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the
published fix (LYMES) to begin the missed approach procedure. The altitude constraint value defaults to
400 feet AGL when there is no Course to Altitude defined in the published procedure.
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, the procedure dictates a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would be appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if
the aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
Figure 5-143 Course to Altitude
Course to Altitude Leg
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
307
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.9 TRIP PLANNING
The system allows the pilot to enter values for weight and fuel planning. The pilot can also view trip planning
information, fuel information, and other information for a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic
data, or based on manually entered data.
WEIGHT AND FUEL
Weight planning is done on the Weight and Fuel Screen by entering data on each of the tabs. The basic
operating weight is shown on the Operating Weight Tab and is calculated by adding the basic empty weight to
the pilot and stores weight.
Figure 5-159 Weight and Fuel Screen - Operating Weight Tab
Operating Weight
Tab Pilot(s) & Stores Weight
Button
Basic Empty Weight
Basic Operating Weight
Set Empty Weight
Button
Calculating basic operating weight:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Weight and Fuel.
2) Touch the Set Empty Weight Button to display the keypad.
3) Use the keypad to enter the basic empty weight.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry, and return to the Weight and Fuel Screen.
5) Touch the Pilot(s) & Stores weight button to display the keypad.
6) Use the keypad to enter the pilot and stores weight.
7) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry, and return to the Weight and Fuel Screen.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B308
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Total passenger weight is calculated by multiplying the number of passengers by the average passenger weight.
Zero Fuel Weight is calculated by adding the basic operating weight, total passenger weight, and cargo weight.
Figure 5-160 Weight and Fuel Screen - Payload Tab
Payload
Tab
Number of Passengers
Button
Basic Operating Weight
Cargo Weight
Button
Zero Fuel Weight
Total Passenger Weight
Average Passenger Weight
Button
Calculating zero fuel weight:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Weight and Fuel.
2) Touch the Payload Tab to display the zero fuel weight calculation.
3) Touch the number of passengers button to display the keypad.
4) Use the keypad to enter the number of passengers.
5) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry, and return to the Weight and Fuel Screen.
6) Touch the average passenger weight button to display the keypad.
7) Use the keypad to enter the average passenger weight.
8) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry, and return to the Weight and Fuel Screen.
9) Touch the cargo weight button to display the keypad.
10) Use the keypad to enter the cargo weight.
11) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry, and return to the Weight and Fuel Screen.
Aircraft weight is calculated by adding the zero fuel weight to the fuel on board weight. Both the fuel on
board and aircraft weight decrement as fuel is burned, providing the current value for each.
Figure 5-161 Weight and Fuel Screen - Fuel Tab
Fuel
Tab
Fuel On Board
Button
Zero Fuel Weight
FOB SYNC Button
Aircraft Weight
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
309
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Calculating aircraft weight:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Weight and Fuel.
2) Touch the Fuel Tab to display the aircraft weight calculation.
3) Touch the fuel on board button to display the keypad.
4) Use the keypad to enter the fuel on board.
5) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry, and return to the Weight and Fuel Screen.
Or:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Weight and Fuel.
2) Touch the Fuel Tab to display the aircraft weight calculation.
3) Touch the FOB SYNC Button to insert the fuel weight from the fuel sensors.
Ramp weight is calculated by adding the zero fuel weight to the initialized fuel on board weight. Takeoff
weight is calculated by subtracting the taxi fuel weight from the ramp weight.
Figure 5-162 Weight and Fuel Screen - Takeoff Tab
Takeoff
Tab
Initialized Fuel On Board
Zero Fuel Weight
Taxi Fuel Weight Button
Ramp Weight
Takeoff Weight
Calculating takeoff weight:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Weight and Fuel.
2) Touch the Takeoff Tab to display the takeoff weight calculation.
3) Touch the taxi fuel weight button to display the keypad.
4) Use the keypad to enter the taxi fuel weight.
5) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry, and return to the Weight and Fuel Screen.
When the aircraft is in the air and a destination waypoint has been entered, the fuel calculations can be
completed.
• Estimated landing weight = zero fuel weight + estimated landing fuel weight.
• Estimated landing fuel weight = fuel on board weight - (fuel flow x ETE)
• Excess fuel weight = estimated landing fuel weight - fuel reserves weight
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B310
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-163 Weight and Fuel Screen - Landing Tab
Landing
Tab
Estimated Landing Weight
Fuel Reserves Weight
Button
Estimated Landing Fuel
Excess Fuel
If the aircraft is on the ground or a destination waypoint has not been entered, the following fields display
invalid values consisting of four dashes:
• Estimated landing weight
• Estimated landing fuel weight
• Excess fuel weight
Figure 5-164 Weight and Fuel Screen - Landing Tab with Invalid Fields
Estimated Landing Weight
Estimated Landing Fuel
Excess Fuel
Entering fuel reserve:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Weight and Fuel.
2) Touch the Landing Tab to display the landing weight and fuel calculations.
3) Touch the fuel reserves weight button to display the keypad.
4) Use the keypad to enter the fuel reserves weight.
5) Touch the Enter Button to accept the entry, and return to the Weight and Fuel Screen.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
311
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
WEIGHT CAUTION AND WARNING CONDITIONS
If the zero fuel weight is greater than the maximum allowable zero fuel weight, then the zero fuel weight is
displayed in amber.
If the aircraft weight is greater than the maximum allowable takeoff weight, then the takeoff weight is displayed
in amber.
If the estimated landing weight is greater than the maximum allowable landing weight, then the estimated
landing weight is displayed in amber.
If the estimated landing fuel weight is positive, but less than or equal to the fuel reserves weight, the following
values are displayed in amber:
• Estimated landing fuel weight
• Excess fuel weight
If the estimated landing fuel weight is zero or negative, then the following values are displayed in red:
• Estimated landing fuel weight
• Excess fuel weight
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B312
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TRIP PLANNING
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Screen
on the Touchscreen Controller. To access the Trip Planning Screen, start at Home, touch Utilities, then Weight
and Fuel.
Figure 5-144 Trip Planning Screen - Manual Mode
Trip Route Button
Input Data (sensor/pilot)
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel On Board
- Fuel Flow
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Manual Entry Button
Selected Route Segment
Figure 5-145 Trip Planning Display
Trip Statistics
Desired Track -
Distance -
Estimated Time Enroute -
Estimated Time of Arrival -
Enroute Safe Altitude -
Sunrise Time (local) -
Sunset Time (local) -
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
Fuel Statistics
- Efficiency
- Total Endurance
- Remaining Fuel
- Remaining Endurance
- Fuel Required
- Total Range
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
Selected Route Segment
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic mode) or on pilot inputs (manual entry
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
• Departure time (Depart Time) - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations
are from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated airspeed (Cal Airspeed) - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary source
of information is GPS ground speed.
• Indicated altitude (Indicated Alt) - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source
of information is GPS altitude.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
313
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TRIP STATISTICS
The trip statistics are calculated based on the trip route selected and the trip planning inputs.
Trip Route Mode Trip Route Button Description
Stored Flight Plan -
Cumulative Mode
Waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected
flight plan.
Stored Flight Plan -
Leg Mode Waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
Active Flight Plan -
Remaining Mode
The ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft or a
selected waypoint, and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
Active Flight Plan -
Leg Mode
The ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft or a
selected waypoint, and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
selected leg
Waypoint Mode Manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan,
these default to the endpoints of the active leg).
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track (DTK) - DTK is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints.
It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance (DIS) - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
- If a stored flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure time all of the ETEs of the
legs up to the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the last
leg of the flight plan was selected.
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current
leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to
and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the
last leg of the flight plan was selected.
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes
and are the local time at the destination.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B314
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL STATISTICS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (EFFICIENCY) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (TOTAL ENDUR) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (REM FUEL) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (REM ENDUR) - This value is calculated by taking the time
of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel required for trip (FUEL REQ) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
• Total range at entered fuel flow (TOTAL RANGE) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
• Density altitude (DENSITY ALT)
• True airspeed (TRUE AIRSPEED)
Selecting the Stored Flight Plan - Cumulative trip route mode:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Planning
2) Touch the Trip Route Button to display the Input Selection Window.
3) Touch the Select from Flight Plan Button to display the Select Flight Plan Screen.
4) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a stored flight plan button to display the Select Flight Plan Leg Screen.
5) Touch the Cumulative Flight Plan Button to select the mode and return to the Trip Planning Screen.
Selecting the Stored Flight Plan - Leg trip route mode:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Planning
2) Touch the Trip Route Button to display the Input Selection Window.
3) Touch the Select from Flight Plan Button to display the Select Flight Plan Screen.
4) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a stored flight plan button to display the Select Flight Plan Leg Screen.
5) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a flight plan leg selection button to select the mode and return to the Trip
Planning Screen.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
315
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting the Active Flight Plan - Remaining trip route mode:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Planning
2) Touch the Trip Route Button to display the Input Selection Window.
3) Touch the Select from Flight Plan Button to display the Select Flight Plan Screen.
4) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch the active flight plan button to display the Select Flight Plan Leg Screen.
5) Touch the Remaining Flight Plan Button to select the mode and return to the Trip Planning Screen.
Selecting the Active Flight Plan - Leg trip route mode:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Planning
2) Touch the Trip Route Button to display the Input Selection Window.
3) Touch the Select from Flight Plan Button to display the Select Flight Plan Screen.
4) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch the active flight plan button to display the Select Flight Plan Leg Screen.
5) Scroll the list, if necessary, and touch a flight plan leg selection button to select the mode and return to the Trip
Planning Screen.
Selecting the waypoints trip route mode:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Planning
2) Touch the Trip Route Button to display the Input Selection Window.
3) Touch the Select Starting and Ending Waypoints Button to display the Select Starting and Ending Locations
Window.
4) Touch the starting waypoint button to display the Select Starting Location Window.
5) Touch the Present Position Button to use the present position of the aircraft and return to the Select Starting
and Ending Locations Window.
Or:
6) Touch the Waypoint Button to select a waypoint using the keypad and return to the Select Starting and Ending
Locations Window.
7) Touch the ending waypoint button to to select a waypoint using the keypad and return to the Select Starting
and Ending Locations Window.
8) Touch the Accept Button to select the mode and return to the Trip Planning Screen.
When the manual entry mode is selected, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot,
in addition to flight plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Trip Planning
2) Touch the Manual Entry Button to enable the manual entry data field buttons.
3) Touch an input data field button and use the keypad to select the value.
4) Touch the Enter Button to accept the value and return to the Trip Planning Screen.
5) Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each of the data fields.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B316
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.10 NAVIGATING A FLIGHT PLAN
The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the SBAS capable GPS system while the
system provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in much the
same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
NOTE: The following example flight plan is for instructional purposes only. All database information depicted
should be considered not current.
The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO3 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY2 arrival with the transition at TBE. The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12,000 feet, an
LPV (WAAS) approach selected for runway 35R, and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach Point
(MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.
1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO3 departure, the airways, and the DBRY2 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-146 indicating the
active departure leg.
After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.
2) Figure 5-146 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.
Figure 5-146 Assigned Heading of 240º
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
317
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-147.
Figure 5-147 Assigned Heading of 290º
4) Enter V4 into the flight plan.
a) From Home on the Touchscreen Controller, touch the Flight Plan Button to display the Active Flight Plan
Screen as shown in Figure 5-148.
Figure 5-148 Begin Adding V4 to the Active Flight Plan
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B318
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
b) The desired entry point for V4 (TOP) must be entered. Touch the desired waypoint selection button (SLN) shown
in Figure 5-149 to display the Waypoint Options Window.
Figure 5-149 Selecting the Insertion Point
c) Touch the Insert Before Button shown in Figure 5-150 to display the keypad.
Figure 5-150 Entering V4 Entry Point
d) Use the keypad to select the desired entry point for V4, Topeka VOR (TOP), as shown in Figure 5-151.
Figure 5-151 Selecting V4 Entry Point
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
319
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
e) Touch the Enter Button. TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-152.
Figure 5-152 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan
f) Touch the desired waypoint selection button (TOP) to display the Waypoint Options Window (Figure 5-153).
Figure 153 Begin Selecting the Airway
g) Touch the Load Airway Button to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-154.
Figure 5-154 List of Available Airways for TOP
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B320
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
h) Touch the V4 Button to select the airway, and to display the list of available exit points for V4. Scroll the list to
find SLN (Figure 5-155).
Figure 5-155 List of Available Exits for V4
i) Touch the SLN Button to select the Salina VOR (SLN). The selected airway entry, exit, and waypoint sequence
are displayed as shown in Figure 5-156.
Figure 5-156 Ready to Load V4
j) Touch the Load Airway Button. V4 is loaded into the Active Flight Plan.
Figure 5-157 V4 Loaded
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
321
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Touch the ULNAZ Button to display the Waypoint Options Window as shown in Figure 5-158.
Figure 5-158 Activating V4 Leg
b) Touch the Activate Leg to Waypoint Button. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-159.
Figure 5-159 Comfirm Active Leg
c) Touch the OK Button to activate the leg (Figure 5-160).
Figure 5-160 V4 Leg is Active
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B322
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
d) Note in Figure 5-161, the magenta arrow in the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4
is now the active flight plan leg. Note the phase of flight remained in Terminal (TERM) mode up to this point
because a departure leg was active. Since a leg after the departure is now active, the current CDI flight phase is
ENR (Enroute) and CDI scaling has changed to 2.0 nm.
Figure 5-161 V4 Now Active Leg
6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When crosstrack distance is less than 2.0 nm, the XTK disappears from
the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
323
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-162.
Figure 5-162 Turn on to Active Leg
8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) is intercepted. Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box
as seen in Figure 5-163.
Figure 5-163 Turn to Intercept V244
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B324
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
9) As seen in Figure 5-164, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.
Figure 5-164 V244 Now Active Leg
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
325
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 is intercepted. See Figure 5-165.
Figure 5-165 WIZGE to LAA Leg Active
11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises
to expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
a) From Home, touch the Direct To Button.
b) Touch the Flight Plan Tab, and scroll the list to find OPSHN.
c) Touch the OPSHN Button. The Direct To Screen is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-166.
Figure 5-166 Direct To OPSHN
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B326
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
d) Touch the VNAV Altitude Button to display the keypad to select the VNAV altitude as shown in Figure 5-167.
Figure 5-167 Enter VNAV Altitude
e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is selected as requested by ATC.
f) Touch the Enter Button to accept the altitude value and return to the Direct To Screen.
g) Touch the VNAV Offset Button to display the keypad to select the offset distance as shown in Figure 5-168.
Figure 5-168 Enter VNAV Offset Distance
h) An offset, or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude of three miles prior to OPSHN is
selected. In other words, the system gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives at an altitude of 10,000 feet
three miles prior to OPSHN.
i) Touch the Enter Button to accept the offset distance and return to the Direct To Screen.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
327
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
j) Press the Activate ¯ OPSHN Button to activate the direct to.
Note, in Figure 5-169, the magenta arrow indicating the direct-to OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN.
The preceding offset waypoint indicates the offset distance and altitude that were previously entered. The
remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival procedure have no database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are
displayed. Keep the CDI centered and maintain a track along the magenta line to OPSHN.
Note the Direct-to waypoint is within the loaded arrival procedure, therefore, phase of flight scaling for the CDI
changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
Figure 5-169 Direct To Active
12) The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN. The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R, so it is
selected.
a) From Home, touch the PROC Button. to display the Procedures Screen (Figure 5-170).
Figure 5-170 Procedures Screen
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B328
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
b) Touch the Approach Button to display the Approach Selection Screen with KCOS selected as the destination
airport as shown in Figure 5-171.
Figure 5-171 Approach Selection Screen
c) Touch the Approach Button. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed as in Figure
5-172.
Figure 5-172 List of Available Approaches
d) Scroll the list to select the LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-173.
Figure 5-173 RNAV 35R LPV Approach Shown
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
329
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
e) Touch the RNAV GPS Y 35R LPV Button. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed
as in Figure 5-174.
Figure 5-174 Select Transition Screen - List of Available Transitions
f) Touch the HABUK iaf Button to select it as the transition and return to the Approach Selection Screen as shown
in Figure 5-175.
Figure 5-175 Approach Selected
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B330
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
g) If necessary, touch the Minimums Button to select the minimum descent altitude (Figure 5-176). Touch the
Minimums Button again, if necessary, then touch the Baro Button. Select the altitude using the keypad.
Figure 5-176 Selecting the Minimums
h) If necessary, touch the Enter Button to accept the minimum descent altitude and return to the Approach
Selection Screen (Figure 5-177).
Figure 5-177 Minimums Set
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
331
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
i) Touch the Load Button. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as seen in Figure 5-178.
Figure 5-178 Loaded Approach
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B332
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-179. The
altitudes loaded from the database are displayed as light blue text, indicating these values are “designated” for
use in computing vertical deviation guidance.
Note: To no longer use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance, perform the
following:
a) Touch the altitude button (e.g. 8100FT).
b) Touch the Remove VNAV ALT Button.
c) Touch the OK Button in response to the “Remove VNAV altitude?” prompt.
After making the altitude “non-designated”, it is displayed as white text (Figure 5-180).
Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF cannot be
designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values are always displayed as white text, as in Figure 5-178.
Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using the WAAS GPS
altitude source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.
Figure 5-179 FALUR Designated for Vertical Guidance
Figure 5-180 FALUR Not Designated for Vertical Guidance
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
333
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust the speed, or steepness of the upcoming
descent. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -3.0 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to
maintain the -3.0 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.
a) From Home, touch Flight Plan > VNAV to display the VNAV Profile Screen as shown in Figure 5-181.
b) Touch the Vertical Speed Target Button to adjust the vertical speed, or touch the Flight Path Angle Button
to adjust the FPA. Touching either button will display the keypad to select the desired value.
Note the information now displayed in the ‘CURRENT VNAV PROFILE’ box (Figure 5-182). Also, note the offset
waypoint (orange box) and gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent
(TOD). In this example, vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a -2.5 degree FPA descent to an
altitude of 10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.
Figure 5-181 Adjusting the Descent
Figure 5-182 Adjusting the Descent
c) Touch the Enter Button to accept the selected value.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B334
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
15) As seen in Figure 5-183, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reach the
selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are
now displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-184. When the aircraft is within one minute of the TOD, it is
annunciated as shown in Figure 5-184, and an aural alert ‘Vertical track’ will be heard.
Figure 5-183 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
(RVSI)
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
Figure 5-184 VDI & RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent (TOD)
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
335
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established by placing the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-185 .
Figure 5-185 VDI & RVSI Showing Correctly Established Descent
Align Actual Vertical Speed
with
Required Vertical Speed
Keep Vertical Deviation
Indicator Centered
17) When the aircraft is one minute from the bottom of descent (BOD) it is annunciated as shown in Figure 5-186.
Upon reaching the offset waypoint for OPSHN, the aircraft is at 10,000 feet.
Figure 5-186 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN Offset Waypoint
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B336
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated on the PFD as seen
in Figure 5-187. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius to intercept the
magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.
Figure 5-187 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
337
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5-188. The magenta arrow
in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.
Figure 5-188 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg
20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to FSHER (see Figure 5-189). At a point 31 nm from the
destination airport, the phase of flight scaling for the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by
displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
Figure 5-189 Awaiting Vectors to Final
After FSHER, you receive a radar vector to the final approach. Annunciations for the upcoming turn and descent,
as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight progresses.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B338
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
21) Establish the course provided. When the course is established, activate Vectors To Final.
a) From Home, touch PROC.
b) Touch the Activate Vectors to Final Button.
Figure 5-190 Activating Vectors To Final
c) The active leg is now the established course direct to CEGIX faf (see Figure 5-191). The flight phase changes
to LPV on the HSI indicating the current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach type is LPV. CDI
scaling changes accordingly and is used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer
displayed and the VDI changes to the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-190) when the final approach
course becomes active.
The descent continues through the FAF (CEGIX) using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope
indicator, to obtain an altitude “AT” 8,100 feet at the FAF. Note the altitude restriction lines over and under (At)
the altitude in the ‘ALT’ field in Figure 5-191.
Figure 5-191 Vectors To Final Approach is Now Active
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
339
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Note: In circumstances where it is required to manually activate the approach procedure, perform the following
steps:
a) From Home, touch PROC.
b) Touch the Activate Approach Button (see Figure 5-190).
22) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to the Missed Approach
Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-192.
Figure 5-192 Descending to the Missed Approach Point
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B340
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
23) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Select the
SUSP
Softkey on the PFD to resume automatic waypoint sequencing
through the missed approach procedure.
A direct-to is initiated to WABOP. The aircraft is climbing to reach 9,000 feet at the Missed Approach Hold Point
(MAHP). The CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on the HSI.
Figure 5-193 Missed Approach Active
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
341
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
24) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 9,000 feet at ADANE. A holding pattern is established at the
MAHP (ADANE) as shown in Figure 5-194.
Figure 5-194 Establishing the Holding Pattern
25) The aircraft maintains 9,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-195.
Figure 5-195 Hold Established
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B342
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.11 ABNORMAL OPERATION
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the system
stops using GPS.
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the system detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the system
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the system in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the system through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compound the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
DR Mode is indicated on the system by the the letters ‘DR’ prominently displayed in yellow on the HSI below
and to the left of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-196. The CDI deviation bar is removed.
Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’ alert message appears on the GTC. Normal navigation using GPS/
SBAS source data resumes automatically once a valid GPS solution is restored.
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and is
displayed as yellow text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information.
Also, while the system is in DR Mode, the autopilot will not be coupled. TAWS is disabled. Additionally, the
accuracy of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts
continue to function, but with degraded accuracy.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
343
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-196 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Yellow
Distance & ETE
Navigation Data Bar
All data except Active
Leg, TAS, and DTK are
in yellow
Dead Reckoning
Annunciaion
Bearing Pointer/
Distance
Current Track
Indicator
Ground Speed
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B344
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Blank Page
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
345
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Hazard avoidance features available for the Embraer Prodigy Touch are designed to aid situational awareness
and provide advisory information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain,
and air traffic.
Weather
• GDL 69A SiriusXM Weather (Subscription Optional)
• GWX 70 Airborne Color Weather Radar
Terrain Avoidance
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System Class-A (TAWS-A)
Traffic
• ACSS TCAS 3000SP™ Traffic Alert and Collision and Avoidance System II (TCAS II)
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
346
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SIRIUSXM WEATHER
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
The GDL 69/69A is a remote-mounted satellite data link receiver. It provides SiriusXM Weather data to the
system. The displays show graphical weather information and the associated text. The GDL 69A can also receive
SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services. Both weather data and audio entertainment programming
operate in the S-band frequency range to provide continuous reception capabilities at any altitude throughout
North America.
SiriusXM services require subscriptions. For more information on specific subscription packages, visit www.
siriusxm.com.
ACTIVATING SERVICES
Before SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio can be used, the services must be activated by
providing SiriusXM’s customer service the coded IDs unique to the installed GDL 69/69A. SiriusXM Satellite
Radio (audio) and SiriusXM Weather (data) services each have coded IDs. The Data and Audio Radio IDs must
be provided to activate the weather service and entertainment subscriptions, respectively. These IDs are in the
following locations:
• The SiriusXM Info Screen on the Touchscreen Controller (Figure 6-1)
• The label on the back of the GDL 69/69A data link receiver
• The GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit.
Contact the installer if the Audio and Data Radio IDs cannot be located.
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal to enable the system to receive weather data and/or
entertainment programming.
Establishing a SiriusXM Weather Data account:
1) From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > SiriusXM Info.
2) Note the ID shown in the Data Radio Window as seen in Figure 6-1.
3) Contact SiriusXM customer service through the telephone number listed on its website, www.siriusxm.com.
Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM customer service.
Activating SiriusXM Weather services:
1) Position the aircraft so the GDL 69/69A antenna has an unobstructed view of the sky, away from buildings.
2) From Home, touch Utilities > Setup > SiriusXM Info.
3) Touch the Start Button in the Activation Window (Figure 6-1). The Activation Window shows ‘ACTIVATING’
while processing the activation.
4) In the Weather Products Window, scroll as needed to view available weather products. Available weather
products appear as white text; unavailable weather products appear in gray (diminished) text. It may take
several minutes before all subscribed-to weather products become available.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
347
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
5) When the available weather products match all the weather products in the SiriusXM weather subscription,
touch the Lock Button to save the activation changes, or touch the Cancel, Back, or Home Buttons to exit
without saving changes.
Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather)
Audio Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Entertainment)
Weather Products
(Available Products
for Service
Class Indicated
in White, Not
Available are
Diminished)
Start Service
Activation
Figure 6-1 SiriusXM Info Screen
Service Class of
SiriusXM Weather
Subscription
ACCESSING SIRIUSXM WEATHER PRODUCTS
The SiriusXM Weather Pane is the principal map pane for viewing SiriusXM Weather information (Figure
6-2). This is the only map pane capable of showing information for all available SiriusXM Weather products.
Viewing the SiriusXM Weather Pane:
1) From Home, touch the Weather Button. Button is highlighted and becomes the Weather Selection Button.
The selected pane shows a weather pane. If a weather pane other than ‘SiriusXM WEATHER’ is shown (such as
‘WEATHER RADAR’ in the pane title), continue with the procedure to view the SiriusXM Weather Pane.
2) Touch the Weather Selection Button.
3) Touch the SiriusXM Weather Button. Button is highlighted and becomes the SiriusXM Settings Button.
The system shows the SiriusXM Weather Pane.
The system provides the ability to select a map orientation for the SiriusXM Weather Pane for a the selected
display pane location. In addition to the Heading Up, Track Up, and North Up display options, the system can
also synchronize the SiriusXM Weather Pane orientation to the Navigation Map Pane orientation.
Selecting a map orientation for the SiriusXM Weather Pane:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Weather Settings.
2) Touch the Orientation Button to change the selected map orientation (displayed in light blue)
3) Touch the desired map orientation button (Heading Up, Track Up, North Up, Sync To Nav Map).
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
348
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD
Weather
Product Symbol
Weather
Product Age
in Minutes
SiriusXM Weather Pane in Full Mode
Figure 6-2 Viewing SiriusXM Weather
Products on the SiriusXM Weather Pane
Enable/Disable a
Background
Weather
Product
Enable/Disable
Weather
Product
Overlay(s)
Touchscreen Controller (SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen)
View the Legends
for Enabled
Weather Products
Dashes Indicate
Weather Product
Expired
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
349
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
For each enabled SiriusXM Weather product, the system displays a weather product icon and product age.
The product age is the elapsed time (in minutes) since the weather data provider compiled the weather product
on the ground. The product age display does not indicate the age of the information contained within the
weather product, which can be significantly older than the displayed weather product age.
The SiriusXM Weather service broadcasts weather products at specific intervals (defined in the Broadcast
Rate column in Table 6-1). If for any reason, a product is not broadcast within the Expiration Time intervals
(see Table 6-1), the system removes the expired data from the display, and shows dashes instead of the product
age. This ensures the displayed information is consistent with what is currently being transmitted by the
SiriusXM Weather service. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age
changes to yellow. If data for a weather product is not available for any reason, the system displays ‘N/A’ next
to the weather product symbol instead of the product age.
Table 6-1 shows the weather product symbols, the expiration times and the broadcast rates. The broadcast
rate represents how often the SiriusXM Weather service transmits new signals that may or may not contain
updated weather products. It does not represent the rate at which the weather information is updated or when
the Data Link Receiver receives new data. SiriusXM and its weather data suppliers define and control the data
update intervals, which are subject to change.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
350
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SiriusXM Weather Product Product
Symbol
Expiration Time
(Minutes) Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD) 30 5 (U.S.)
10 (Canada)
Cloud Tops 60 15
Echo Tops 30 7.5
SiriusXM Lightning 30 5
Storm Cell Movement 30 12
SIGMETs 60 12
AIRMETs 60 12
Meteorological Aerodrome Reports
(METARs) 90 12
City Forecast 60 12
Surface Analysis 60 12
Freezing Levels 60 12
Winds Aloft 60 12
County Warnings 60 5
Cyclone (Hurricane) Warnings
(CYCLONE) 60 12
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD) 90 22
Pilot Weather Reports
(PIREPs) 90 12
Air Reports (AIREPs) 90 12
Turbulence 180 12
No Radar Coverage no product image 30 5
Temporary Flight Restrictions
(TFRs) no product image 60 12
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
(TAFs) no product image 60 12
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
351
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Table 6-2 shows which SiriusXM Weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific
maps.
SiriusXM Weather Product
PFD Inset Navigation Map
Navigation Map Panes
SiriusXM Weather Pane
NEXRAD + + +
No Radar Coverage (Displayed
with NEXRAD)
+ + +
Cloud Tops +
Echo Tops +
SiriusXM Lightning + + +
Storm Cell Movement + + +
SIGMETs/AIRMETs +
METARs + + +
City Forecast +
Surface Analysis +
Freezing Levels +
Winds Aloft + +
County Warnings +
Cyclone Warnings +
Icing Potential +
PIREPs +
AIREPs +
Turbulence +
TFRs + + +
TAFs +
Table 6-2 Weather Product Display Maps
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
352
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Softkeys control which weather products are shown on the PFD Inset Navigation Map. The Touchscreen
Controller controls the display of weather information on other map display panes such as the Navigation
Map and SiriusXM Weather Panes. When most weather products are enabled for display, the corresponding
button annunciator or softkey annunciator changes from gray (disabled) to green (enabled). For the NEXRAD
weather product, pressing the NEXRAD Softkey cycles through the various coverage sources (USA, Canada,
or Off), indicated by light blue text on the Softkey. On the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen, touching the
Nexrad Button allows the selection of those coverage sources, with the current selection shown in light blue
on the Nexrad Button.
The Map Settings Screen on the Touchscreen Controller controls the maximum map range at which the
system displays a weather product on a map; selecting a map range higher than this range will declutter the
weather product from the map.
The SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen controls the enabling/disabling of weather products for the
SiriusXM Weather Pane The Map Settings Screen controls the enabling/disabling of weather products for the
Navigation Map Panes.
Enabling/Disabling the display of SiriusXM Weather Products on Navigation Map Panes:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Scroll through the list to view the available weather products.
4) Touch a weather product annunciator button to enable/disable the selected weather product. Button annunciator
is green when a weather product is enabled, or gray when disabled.
Figure 6-3 Map Settings Screen
(Sensor Tab Selected)
Weather Product
Map Range
Settings
Selecting maximum map range to show SiriusXM Weather products:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Scroll to the list to view the weather products.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
353
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
4) To select the maximum map range to display Graphical METARs or SiriusXM Lightning, touch the range button
next to the weather product. Then scroll through the list and touch the desired map range above which the
product will be removed, or touch Auto Range to select the maximum map range available to display that
weather product.
5) To select the maximum map range to display NEXRAD Data, touch the NEXRAD Data Settings Button, followed
by the NEXRAD Data range button. Then scroll through the list and touch the desired map range above which
the product will be removed, or touch ‘Auto Range’ to select the maximum map range to display the NEXRAD
weather product.
Weather information displayed on maps other than the SiriusXM Weather Pane use settings based on those
selected on the Map Settings Screen.
The SiriusXM Settings Screen on the Touchscreen Controller can display a legend for each weather product
currently enabled on the SiriusXM Weather Pane.
Viewing legends for weather products enabled on the SiriusXM WEATHER Pane:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings
2) Touch the Legend Button. The Weather Legends Window appears on the Touchscreen Controller.
3) Scroll as needed to view the weather legends for the enabled weather products.
4) To remove the Weather Legends Window, touch Back or Home.
The system displays additional information about the following weather products by panning over the product
on the map with the map pointer.
• Echo Tops
• Storm Cell Movement
• SIGMETs
• AIRMETs
• METARs
• County Warnings
• TFRs
• PIREPSs
• AIREPs
To enable the Map Pointer for panning, press the Joystick, then move the Joystick to position the Map
Pointer over the desired product. To stop panning, press the Joystick again, or touch the Back Button on the
Touchscreen Controller. Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase map range, counter-clockwise to decrease
map range. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
354
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-4 Panning on the SiriusXM Weather Pane
Airport with
METAR Flag
Selected with
Map Pointer
Raw METAR Text
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
355
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain, echo tops, turbulence,
or icing data.
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm. In addition to a wide array of services, the NEXRAD
network provides important information about severe weather and air traffic safety.
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each site may arrive
at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images--gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
information during the next designated broadcast time for the NEXRAD weather product.
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather product should never be used as a
basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
Figure 6-5 NEXRAD Weather Product on the SiriusXM Weather Pane
No Radar Coverage
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
356
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Showing NEXRAD weather information on PFD Inset Navigation Map (FULL Mode PFD):
1) Press the Inset Map Settings Softkey.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey to cycle through following coverage modes: Off (disables NEXRAD information),
USA, Canada (softkey label changes to indicate the selected coverage option with each softkey press).
3) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top-level PFD Softkeys.
Displaying NEXRAD weather information (Navigation Map panes)
1) From Home, Touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Scroll as needed and touch the NEXRAD Data Button to enable/disable the display of the NEXRAD weather
product.
4) To change the coverage mode of the NEXRAD weather product displayed on the Navigation Map Pane, touch the
NEXRAD Data Settings Button. The NEXRAD Data Coverage Button displays the currently selected coverage
area in light blue text (‘USA’ or ‘Canada’).
a) Touch the NEXRAD Data Coverage Button.
b) Touch either the USA or Canada Button.
5) When finished changing NEXRAD settings for the Navigation Maps, touch Back or Home.
Displaying NEXRAD weather information (SiriusXM Weather Pane)
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Find the Nexrad Button in the Background window. Light blue text inside the button indicates the currently
selected coverage mode (‘Off’, ‘USA’ or ‘Canada’).
3) To change the selected coverage mode, touch the Nexrad Button, then touch one of the following buttons: Off
(removes NEXRAD information from the pane), USA, or Canada.
The display shows composite data from all available NEXRAD radar sites in the selected coverage area
(either United States or Canada.) This data is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual
radar sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded to indicate the strength of the radar returns. All
weather product legends can be viewed on the Touchscreen Controller. For the NEXRAD legend (Figure 6-6),
touch the Legend Button when NEXRAD is enabled for display on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen.
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-6 NEXRAD Legend
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
357
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either the NEXRAD or Echo Tops weather products
are enabled for display. Areas where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently
available, or outside of the selected coverage source area, or is not being collected are indicated in a gray shade
of purple (Figure 6-6).
reflectivity
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected
back to
the radar receiver (
designated by the
letter Z)
. The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
neXraD limitationS
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD
site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the
highest
level of NEXRAD data
sampled within the area.
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
neXraD limitationS (canaDa)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed regardless of actual precipitation
type.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
358
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ECHO TOPS
NOTE: When the Echo Tops product is enabled on the SiriusXM Weather Pane, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data
are removed.
The Echo Tops weather product (Figure 6-7) shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest
radar echo. The highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the
highest altitude at which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
Figure 6-7 Echo Tops Weather Product
No Radar Coverage
Enabling/Disabling Echo Tops information:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Touch the Echo Tops Button in the Background Window.
Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display the Echo Tops legend when it
Echo Tops is enabled. Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, only
one of these products may be displayed at a time. When Echo Tops is enabled, the system disables NEXRAD
and Cloud Tops information.
Figure 6-8 Echo Tops Legend
No Radar Coverage
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently selected, not available, or is not
being collected are indicated in gray shade of purple (Figures 6-7, 6-8).
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
359
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CLOUD TOPS
NOTE: The Cloud Tops and Echo Tops weather products cannot be displayed at the same time on the
SiriusXM Weather Pane.
The Cloud Tops weather product (Figure 6-9) depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite
imagery. When the Cloud Tops background is enabled, the system disables Echo Tops data.
Figure 6-9 Cloud Tops Weather Product
Enabling/Disabling Cloud Tops information:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Touch the Cloud Tops Button in the Background window.
Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.
Figure 6-10 Cloud Tops Legend
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
360
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIRIUSXM LIGHTNING
The SiriusXM Lightning weather product (Figure 6-11) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground
lightning strikes. A strike icon represents a strike has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The system
does not display the exact location of lightning strikes.
Figure 6-11 SiriusXM Lightning Weather Product
Lightning
Strikes
Enabling/Disabling SiriusXM Lightning information (SiriusXM Weather Pane):
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Touch the Lightning Button in the Overlays Window.
Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.
Figure 6-12 SiriusXM Lightning Legend
Displaying SiriusXM Lightning information (Navigation Map Panes):
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
4) Scroll as needed and touch the SiriusXM Lightning Button.
Displaying SiriusXM Lightning information (PFD Inset Navigation Map):
1) If the Traffic Inset Map is displayed, press the Traffic Map Softkey to disable the Traffic Inset Map.
2) Press the Inset Map Settings Softkey.
3) Press the SiriusXM Lightning Softkey to enable/disable display lightning information.
4) Press the Back Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
361
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
STORM CELL MOVEMENT
The Cell Movement map overlay (Figure 6-13) shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified
by the ground-based system. Yellow squares represent cells, with short orange arrows indicating the direction
of cell movement.
Figure 6-13 Storm Cell Movement Weather Product
Storm Cells
Enabling/Disabling Storm Cell Movement Information SiriusXM Weather Pane)
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Touch the Storm Cell Movement Button in the Overlays window.
Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.
Figure 6-14 Cell Movement Legend
Displaying Storm Cell Movement Information (Navigation Map Pane)
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Scroll as needed and touch the NEXRAD Data Settings Button.
4) Touch the Storm Cell Movement Button. When button annunciator is green, the system will show the Storm
Cell Movement with the NEXRAD weather product when NEXRAD is enabled.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
362
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
The National Weather Services issues SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs
(AIRmen’s METeorological Information) for potentially hazardous weather. The service issues a Convective
SIGMET for hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition occurring
at a localized geographical position.
Figure 6-15 AIRMET and SIGMET Weather Products
Convective
SIGMET
Selected with
Map Pointer
AIRMET
Enabling/Disabling AIRMET and SIGMET information:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Scroll as needed and touch the AIRMETs and/or SIGMETs Buttons in the Overlays window.
3) To view the text of a AIRMET or SIGMET, press the Joystick and move the map pointer with the Joystick over
the SIGMET or AIRMET border or icon until it is highlighted.
5) Touch the AIRMET/SIGMET Button to show the AIRMET / SIGMET Information Screen with the selected
AIRMET or SIGMET.
6) Scroll as needed to view full text of the report, then touch the Back or Home buttons.
Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.
Figure 6-16 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
363
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
METARS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database coverage area.
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) describe observed weather conditions at airports and
reporting stations. METARs are generally updated hourly, but may be updated more frequently if conditions
warrant. METARs typically contain information about the temperature, dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud
cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also contain information on precipitation
amounts, lightning, and other critical data. METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
Figure 6-17 Panning on the SiriusXM Weather Pane
Airport with
METAR Flag
Selected with
Map Pointer
Full METAR Text
Showing METAR text (SiriusXM Weather Pane):
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Touch the METARs Button in the Overlays window. The system displays METAR flags at available reporting
stations when METARs are enabled (button annunciator is green).
3) To view METAR text, press the Joystick and move the map pointer with the Joystick over a METAR reporting
station.
Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for weather
product(s) enabled on the SiriusXM Weather Pane. Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch
Back or Home.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
364
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Showing METAR text (Navigation Map Panes):
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Scroll as needed and touch the Graphical METARs Button.
Textual METAR information is also available on the Airport Information screens on the Touchscreen
Controllers. When viewing the Airport Information screen for an airport, touch the Weather Tab and scroll
as needed to view the METAR text.
The graphical METAR flag color shown on the maps is determined by the information in the METAR text.
The system displays a gray METAR flag when the METAR text does not contain adequate information.
Figure 6-18 METAR Legend
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed navigation database
coverage area.
The Surface Analysis and City Forecast weather products are available for current and forecast weather
conditions. Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
Figure 6-19 Current Surface Analysis Weather Product
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
365
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Scroll as needed in the Overlays window and touch the Surface Conditions Button.
3) If needed, touch the Surface Conditions forecast period button (to the right of the Surface Conditions Button)
and select from Current, 12 Hours, 24 Hours, 36 hours, or 48 Hours forecast periods from the pop-up
selection window.
Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.
Figure 6-20 Surface Analysis and City Forecast Legend
FREEZING LEVELS
Freezing Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at which the first
isotherm is found (Figure 6-21). When no information is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that
altitude has not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display.
Figure 6-21 Freezing Level Weather Product
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
366
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Scroll as needed in the Overlays window and touch the Freezing Level Button.
Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.
Figure 6-22 Freezing Level Legend
WINDS ALOFT
The Winds Aloft weather product (Figure 6-23) shows the predicted wind speed and direction at the
surface and at selected altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments from the surface up to
42,000 feet MSL.
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Scroll as needed in the Overlays window and touch the Winds Aloft Button.
3) To change the selected winds aloft altitude, touch the Winds Aloft altitude button and select the desired winds
aloft altitude from Surface to 42,000 feet MSL from the pop-up window.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
367
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Winds Aloft Overlay at 12,000 Feet
Selected Winds
Aloft Altitude
SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen
Data Age
(US and
Canada)
Touch to Enable/
Disable Winds
Aloft Overlay
Selects Winds Aloft
Altitude (Surface
Currently Selected)
Figure 6-23 Displaying Winds Aloft Information
Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.
Figure 6-24 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
368
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
COUNTY WARNINGS
The County Warnings weather product (Figure 6-25) provides specific public awareness and protection
weather warnings from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on severe
thunderstorms, tornadoes, and flood conditions.
Figure 6-25 County Warnings Weather Product
Flood Warning
Selected with
Map Pointer
Displaying County Warning information:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Scroll as needed in the Overlays window and touch the County Warnings Button.
3) To view additional information (such as county name), press the Joystick to activate the map pointer and
move the Joystick to highlight a County Warning. County Warning information appears in a box near the map
pointer.
4) When finished, press the Joystick to deactivate the map pointer.
Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.
Figure 6-26 County Warnings Legend
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
369
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CYCLONE WARNINGS
The Cyclone weather product shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical storms, and
their projected tracks.
Figure 6-27 Cyclone (Hurricane) Weather Product
Cyclone with
Track Information
Enabling/Disabling cyclone (hurricane) weather product:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Scroll as needed in the Overlays window and touch the Cyclone Warnings Button.
Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.
Figure 6-28 Cyclone Legend
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
370
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ICING (CIP & SLD)
NOTE: Icing data cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD weather product.
Current Icing Product (CIP) data (Figure 6-29) shows a graphical view of the icing environment. Icing
severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft type). The
CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the conditions at the time of the analysis.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
Displaying Icing data:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Scroll as needed in the Overlays window and touch the Current Icing Potential Button.
3) Touch the Current Icing Potential altitude button (to the right of the Current Icing Potential annunciator
Button) and scroll to and touch the desired altitude button (from 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet.)
Figure 6-29 Current Icing Potential Overlay at 21,000 Feet
SLD Threat
Area
Current
Icing
Potential Selected Current
Icing Potential
Altitude
Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.
Figure 6-30 Icing Potential Legend
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
371
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TURBULENCE
NOTE: The Turbulence weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD weather product.
The Turbulence weather product (Figure 6-31) identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude
air mass associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between
21,000 and 45,000 feet. Turbulence data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
Displaying Turbulence data:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Scroll in the the Overlays window and touch the Turbulence Button.
3) Touch the Turbulence altitude button (to the right of the Turbulence annunciator button) and touch to select
an altitude from which to display turbulence data (from 1,000 feet up to 45,000 feet).
Figure 6-31 Turbulence Weather Product at 33,000 Feet
Selected
Turbulence
Altitude
Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.
Figure 6-32 Turbulence Legend
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
372
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PIREPS AND AIREPS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) (Figure 6-33) provide weather observations collected from pilots. When
significant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit
PIREPs. A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions,
wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). AIREPs are used almost exclusively by commercial airlines.
Figure 6-33 AIREPs and PIREPs on the SiriusXM Weather Pane
Urgent PIREP
Selected with
Map Pointer
PIREP
AIREP
Displaying PIREP or AIREP data:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > SiriusXM Weather > SiriusXM Settings.
2) Scroll in the Overlays window as needed and touch the AIREPs or PIREPs Buttons.
3) To view PIREP/AIREP text, push the joystick to activate the map pointer and move the pointer with the Joystick
until the selected report is highlighted, then touch the PIREP Info or AIREP Info Button.
4) Scroll as needed through the report text, then touch Back or Home.
Touch the Legend Button on the SiriusXM Weather Settings Screen to display weather legend(s) for enabled
weather product(s). Scroll as necessary to view the information, then touch Back or Home.
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
Figure 6-34 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
373
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.2 AIRBORNE COLOR WEATHER RADAR
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The Garmin GWX 70 Airborne Color Weather Radar is a solid-state pulsed-Doppler radar with forty watts of
output power. It combines excellent range and adjustable scanning profiles with high-definition target displays.
The effective pulse length is 27.31 microseconds (µs), and the system optimizes the pulse length to maximize
resolution at each range setting. This reduces the targets smearing together on the displays for better target
definition at close range.
The Embraer Phenom 300 uses a 12-inch phased array antenna that is fully stabilized to accommodate 30º
of pitch and roll.
To focus radar scanning on specific areas, Sector Scanning offers pilot-adjustable horizontal scan angles of
20º, 40º, 60º, or a full 90º scan. A vertical scanning function helps to analyze storm tops, gradients, and cell
buildup activity at various altitudes.
Radar features include:
• Extended Sensitivity Time Constant (STC) logic that automatically correlates distance of the return echo with
intensity, so cells do not suddenly appear to get larger as they get closer.
• Turbulence Detection (optional) presents areas of turbulence associated with precipitation using the color
magenta.
• WATCH® (Weather ATtenuated Color Highlight) helps identify possible shadowing effects of short-range cell
activity, identifying areas where radar return signals are weakened or attenuated by intense precipitation (or
large areas of lesser precipitation) and may not fully depict the weather occurring behind a storm.
• Weather Alert that looks ahead for intense cell activity in the 80-320 nm range, even if these ranges beyond
the currently selected map range.
• Altitude-Compensated Tilt (ACT) management which automatically adjusts the antenna tilt as the aircraft
altitude changes.
• Ground Clutter Suppression (GCS) (optional) removes ground clutter from the displays.
PRINCIPLES OF AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR
The term RADAR is an acronym for RAdio Detecting And Ranging. Pulsed radar locates targets by transmitting
a microwave pulse beam that, upon encountering a target, is reflected back to the radar receiver as a return echo.
The microwave pulses are focused and radiated by the antenna, with the most intense energy in the center of
the beam and decreasing intensity near the edge. The same antenna is used for both transmitting and receiving.
Radar detection is a two-way process that requires 12.36 µs for the transmitted microwave pulses to travel out
and back for each nautical mile of target range. It takes 123.6 µs for a transmitted pulse to make the round trip
if a target is ten nautical miles away.
The GWX 70, as installed on the Phenom 300, has the capability to detect the velocity of precipitation moving
toward or away from the radar antenna. As the radar pulse beam strikes a moving object, the frequency of
the returned echo shifts in relation to the speed at which the object is moving. This effect is analogous to the
audible pitch change observed when an emergency vehicle’s siren gets closer or moves away. Doppler radar
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
374
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
employs this effect to detect areas of precipitation moving at a high rate of speed (indicative of turbulence), and
to determine when an object, such as the ground, is stationary. The system can use this information to suppress
the display of ground clutter.
Airborne weather radar should be used to avoid severe weather. The decision to fly into an area of radar
targets depends on target intensity, spacing between the targets, aircraft capabilities, and crew experience.
Airborne weather radar detects rain or hail, not clouds or mist. The display may indicate clear areas between
intense returns, but this does not necessarily mean it is safe to fly between them. In addition, Doppler radar
measurement of precipitation velocity only occurs when rain or hail is moving along the radar beam and either
toward or away from the antenna. This system cannot detect clear air turbulence.
Airborne weather radar has other capabilities beyond weather detection. It also has the ability to detect and
provide distance to cities, mountains, coastlines, rivers, lakes, and oceans.
NEXRAD AND AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR
Both Airborne Weather Radar and NEXRAD measure weather reflectivity in decibels (dB). A decibel is a
logarithmic expression of the ratio of two quantities. Airborne Weather Radar measures the ratio of power
against the gain of the antenna, while NEXRAD measures the energy reflected back to the radar, or the radar
reflectivity ratio.
Both systems use colors to identify the different echo intensities, but the colors are not interchangeable.
Airborne color radar values from the GWX 70 not be confused with NEXRAD radar values.
ANTENNA BEAM ILLUMINATION
The radar beam is much like the beam of a spotlight. The further the beam travels, the wider it becomes.
The radar is only capable of seeing what is inside the boundaries of the beam. The figure below depicts a radar
beam’s characteristics. The figure illustrates vertical dimensions of the radar beam, although the same holds
true for the horizontal dimensions. In other words, the beam is as wide as it is tall. Note that it is possible to
miss areas of precipitation on the radar display because of the antenna tilt setting. With the antenna tilt set to
zero in this illustration, the beam overshoots the precipitation at 15 nautical miles.
Figure 6-35 Radar Beam from a 12 inch Antenna
0
80
Altitude (x1000 ft.)
300 45 60 75 90
Range (nautical miles)
Half Power at Beam Sidelobes
Antenna at Zero Tilt
18,000 ft.
18,000 ft.
Max Power at Beam Center
15
8°
The curvature of the earth can also be a factor in missing areas of precipitation, especially at range settings of
150 nautical miles or more. Here the beam overshoots the precipitation at less than 320 nautical miles.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
375
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
320 nm
Figure 6-36 Radar Beam in Relation to the Curvature of the Earth
RADAR SIGNAL ATTENUATION
The phenomenon of radar signal attenuation affects the operation of weather radar. When the radar signal
is transmitted, it is progressively absorbed and scattered, making the signal weaker. This weakening, or
attenuation, is caused by two primary sources, distance and precipitation.
Attenuation because of distance is due to the fact that the radar energy leaving the antenna is inversely
proportional to the square of the distance. The reflected radar energy from a target 40 miles away that fills
the radar beam is one fourth the energy reflected from an equivalent target 20 miles away. This would appear
to the operator that the storm is gaining intensity as the aircraft gets closer. Internal signal processing within
the GWX 70 system compensates for much of this distance attenuation.
Attenuation due to precipitation is not as predictable as distance attenuation. It is also more intense. As the
radar signal passes through moisture, a portion of the radar energy is reflected back to the antenna. However,
much of the energy is absorbed. If precipitation is very heavy, or covers a large area, the signal may not
reach completely through the area of precipitation. The weather radar system cannot distinguish between an
attenuated signal and an area of no precipitation. If the signal has been fully attenuated, the radar displays
a radar shadow. This appears as an end to the precipitation when, in fact, the heavy rain may extend much
further. A cell containing heavy precipitation may block another cell located behind the first, preventing it
from being displayed on the radar. Never fly into these shadowed areas and never assume that all of the heavy
precipitation is being displayed unless another cell or a ground target can be seen beyond the heavy cell. The
WATCH® feature of the GWX 70 Weather Radar system can help to identify these shadowed areas. Areas
in question appear as shadowed or gray on the radar display. Proper use of the antenna tilt control can also
help detect radar shadows.
Attenuation can also be due to poor maintenance or degradation of the radome. Even the smallest amount
of wear and scratching, pitting, and pinholes on the radome surface can cause damage and system inefficiency.
RADAR SIGNAL REFLECTIVITY
PreciPitation
Precipitation or objects more dense than water, such as the surface of the earth or solid structures, are
detected by the weather radar. The weather radar does not detect clouds, thunderstorms, or turbulence
directly. It detects precipitation associated with clouds, thunderstorms, and turbulence. The best radar
signal reflectors are raindrops, wet snow, or wet hail. The larger the raindrop, the better the reflectivity. The
size of the precipitation droplet is the most important factor in radar reflectivity. Because large drops in a
small concentrated area are characteristic of a severe thunderstorm, the radar displays the storm as a strong
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
376
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
return. Ice crystals, dry snow, and dry hail have low levels of reflectivity as shown in the illustration, and
often not displayed by the radar. Additionally, a cloud that contains only small raindrops, such as fog or
drizzle, does not reflect enough radar energy to produce a measurable target return.
Figure 6-37 Precipitation Type and Reflectivity
groUnD retUrnS
The intensity of ground target returns depends upon the angle at which the radar beam strikes the
ground target (Angle of Incidence) and the reflective properties of that target. The gain can be adjusted so
shorelines, rivers, lakes, and cities are well defined. Increasing the gain too much causes the display to fill
in between targets, thus obscuring some landmarks.
Cities normally provide a strong return signal. While large buildings and structures provide good returns,
small buildings can be shadowed from the radar beam by the taller buildings. As the aircraft approaches
and shorter ranges are selected, details become more noticeable as the highly reflective regular lines and
edges of the city become more defined.
Bodies of water such as lakes, rivers, and oceans are not good reflectors and normally do not provide good
returns. The energy is reflected in a forward scatter angle with inadequate energy being returned. They
can appear as dark areas on the display. However, rough or choppy water is a better reflector and provides
stronger returns from the downwind sides of the waves.
Mountains also provide strong return signals to the antenna, but also block the areas behind. However,
over mountainous terrain, the radar beam can be reflected back and forth in the mountain passes or off
canyon walls, using up all or most of the radar energy. In this case, no return signal is received from this
area, causing the display to show a dark spot which could indicate a pass where no pass exists.
angle of inciDence
The angle at which the radar beam strikes the target is called the Angle of Incidence. The figure illustrates
the incident angle (‘A’). This directly affects the detectable range, the area of illumination, and the intensity
of the displayed target returns. A large incident angle gives the radar system a smaller detectable range and
lower display intensity due to minimized reflection of the radar energy.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
377
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-38 Angle of Incidence
A smaller incident angle gives the radar a larger detectable range of operation and the target display shows
a higher intensity. Since more radar energy is reflected back to the antenna with a low incident angle, the
resulting detectable range is increased for mountainous terrain.
SAFE OPERATING DISTANCE
The following information establishes a minimum safe distance from the antenna for personnel near
operating weather radar. The minimum safe distance is based on the FCC’s exposure limit at 9.3 to 9.5 GHz for
general population/uncontrolled environments, which is 1 mW/cm2. See Advisory Circular 20-68B for more
information on safe distance determination.
MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE EXPOSURE LEVEL (MPEL)
The zone in which the radiation level exceeds the US Government standard of 1 mW/cm2 is the semicircular
area of at least 11 feet from the 12-inch antenna. All personnel must remain outside of this zone. With a
scanning or rotating beam, the averaged power density at the MPEL boundary is significantly reduced.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
378
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
11’ for 12”
antenna
MPEL
Boundary
Figure 6-39 MPEL Boundary
BASIC ANTENNA TILT SETUP
The following discussion is a simple method for setting up the weather radar antenna tilt for most situations.
It is not to be considered an all encompassing setup that works in all situations, but this method does provide
good overall parameters for the monitoring of threats. Ultimately, it is desired to have the antenna tilted so that
the bottom of the radar beam is four degrees below parallel with the ground. The following example explains
one way of achieving this.
With the aircraft flying level, adjust the antenna tilt so ground returns are displayed at a distance that equals
the aircraft’s current altitude (AGL) divided by 1,000. For example, if the aircraft is at 14,000 feet, adjust the
tilt so the front edge of ground returns are displayed at 14 nautical miles. Note this antenna tilt angle setting.
Now, raise the antenna tilt 6 degrees above this setting. The bottom of the radar beam is now angled down 4º
from parallel with the ground.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
379
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PRACTICAL APPLICATION USING THE BASIC TILT SETUP
With the antenna tilt set as previously described, any displayed target return should be scrutinized when
flying at altitudes between 2,000 and 30,000 feet AGL. If the displayed target advances on the screen to
within 5 nautical miles of the aircraft, avoid it. This may be either weather or ground returns that are 2,000
feet or less below the aircraft. Raising the antenna tilt 4 degrees can help separate ground returns from
weather returns in relatively flat terrain. This aligns the bottom of the radar beam parallel with the ground.
Return the antenna tilt to the previous setting after a few sweeps.
If the aircraft is above 29,000 feet, be cautious of any target return that gets to within 30 nautical miles.
This is likely a thunderstorm that has a top high enough that the aircraft cannot fly over it safely.
If the aircraft altitude is 15,000 feet or lower, setting the displayed range to 60 miles may be more helpful.
Closely monitor anything that enters the display.
Also, after setting up the antenna tilt angle as described previously, ground returns can be monitored for
possible threats. The relationship between antenna tilt angle, altitude, and distance is one degree of tilt equals
100 feet of altitude for every one nautical mile.
Vertical Change of Radar Beam (feet)
Change in Antenna Tilt
10 nm
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
1000
2000
3000
4000
-1°
0°
-2°
-3°
-4°
+1°
+2°
+3°
+4°
Figure 6-40 Vertical Change in Radar Beam per Nautical Mile
Therefore, with the antenna tilt set so that the bottom of the beam is four degrees below parallel with
the ground, a target return at 10 nm is approximately 4,000 feet below the aircraft; at 20 nm, 8,000 feet;
at 50 nm, 20,000 feet. In other words, at this tilt setting, a ground return (such as a mountain peak) being
displayed at 10 nm would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of 4,000 feet. A ground target return
being displayed at 5 nm would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of 2,000 feet. This setup provides
a good starting point for practical use of the GWX 70. There are many other factors to consider in order to
become proficient at using weather radar in all situations.
ALTITUDE COMPENSATED TILT (ACT)
The Altitude Compensated Tilt feature of the GWX 70 enables the system to automatically adjust the
antenna beam tilt angle setting based on changes of the aircraft’s altitude. For example, if the ACT feature
is enabled and the aircraft climbs, the system compensates by adjusting the tilt downward. As the aircraft
descends with ACT enabled, the system adjusts the antenna tilt upward. The system uses the ground as a
reference for adjusting the antenna tilt angle setting with ACT enabled.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
380
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WEATHER MAPPING AND INTERPRETATION
WEATHER DISPLAY INTERPRETATION
When evaluating various target returns on the weather radar display, the colors denote precipitation
intensity and rates shown in the table.
Weather Mode Color Intensity (in dBz)
Approximate
Precipitation Rate (in/
hr.)
Black < 23 dBZ < .01.
Green 23 dBZ to < 33 dBZ .01 - 0.1.
Yellow 33 dBZ to < 41 dBZ 0.1 - 0.5
Red 41 dBZ and greater greater than 0.5
Table 6-3 Precipitation Intensity Levels
In addition, when Turbulence Detection feature is enabled on the Touchscreen Controller, the system uses
the color magenta to show areas of rain or hail which likely contain turbulence.
tHUnDerStormS
Updrafts and downdrafts in thunderstorms carry water through the cloud. The more severe the drafts, the
greater the number and size of the precipitation droplets. With this in mind, the following interpretations
can be made from what is displayed on the weather radar. Avoid these areas by an extra wide margin.
• In areas where the displayed target intensity is red or magenta (indicating large amounts of precipitation),
the turbulence is considered severe.
• Areas that show steep color gradients (intense color changes) over thin bands or short distances suggest
irregular rainfall rate and strong turbulence.
• Areas that show red or magenta are associated with hail or turbulence, as well as heavy precipitation.
Vertical scanning and antenna tilt management may be necessary to identify areas of maximum intensity.
Along squall lines (multiple cells or clusters of cells in a line) individual cells may be in different stages
of development. Areas between closely spaced, intense targets may contain developing clouds not having
enough moisture to produce a return. However, these areas could have strong updrafts or downdrafts.
Targets showing wide areas of green are generally precipitation without severe turbulence.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
381
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Irregularities in the target return may also indicate turbulence, appearing as hooks, fingers, or scalloped
edges. These irregularities may be present in green areas with no yellow, red, or magenta areas and should
be treated as highly dangerous areas. Avoid these areas as if they are red or magenta.
Figure 6-41 Cell Irregularities
Steep Gradient
Squall Line
Hook or Finger Scalloped Edge
Thunderstorm development is rapid. A course may become blocked within a short time. When displaying
shorter ranges, periodically select a longer range to see if problems are developing further out. That can
help prevent getting trapped in a blind alley or an area that is closed at one end by convective weather.
Figure 6-42 The Blind Alley - Horizontal Scan
In areas of multiple heavy cells, use the Vertical Scan feature along with antenna tilt management to
examine the areas. Remember to avoid shadowed areas behind targets.
Figure 6-43 The Blind Alley
The Blind Alley at Close Range The Large Storm Behind
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
382
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
tornaDoeS
There are no conclusive radar target return characteristics which identify a tornado. However, tornadoes
may be present if the following characteristics are observed:
• A narrow, finger-like portion extends and in a short time curls into a hook and closes on itself.
• A hook, which may be in the general shape of the numeral 6 (numeral 9 in the southern hemisphere),
especially if bright and projecting from the southwest quadrant (northeast quadrant in the southern
hemisphere) of a major thunderstorm.
• V-shaped notches.
• Doughnut shapes.
These shapes do not always indicate tornadoes, and tornado returns are not limited to these characteristics.
Confirmed radar observations of tornadoes most often have not shown shapes different from those of a
normal thunderstorm display.
Hail
Hail results from updrafts carrying water high enough to freeze. Therefore, the higher the top of a
thunderstorm, the greater the probability that it contains hail. Vertically scanning the target return can
give the radar top of a thunderstorm that contains hail. Radar top is the top of a storm cell as detected by
radar. It is not the actual top, or true top of the storm. The actual top of a storm cell is seen with the eyes
in clear air and may be much higher than the radar top. The actual top does not indicate the top of the
hazardous area.
Hail can fall below the minimum reflectivity threshold for radar detection. It can have a film of water on
its surface, making its reflective characteristics similar to a very large water droplet. Because of this film of
water, and because hail stones usually are larger than water droplets, thunderstorms with large amounts
of wet hail return stronger signals than those with rain. Some hail shafts are extremely narrow (100 yards
or less) and make poor radar targets. In the upper regions of a cell where ice particles are dry (no liquid
coating), target returns are less intense.
Hail shafts are associated with the same radar target return characteristics as tornados. U-shaped cloud
edges three to seven miles across can also indicate hail. These target returns appear quite suddenly along
any edge of the cell outline. They also change in intensity and shape in a matter of seconds, making vigilant
monitoring essential.
TESTING THE WEATHER RADAR
The weather radar provides a Test Mode which activates the radar antenna sweep movement and generates
a test pattern on the selected display pane. The test pattern should display a green filled arc from the first
range marker to the second, a yellow arc from the second range marker to the third, and a red arc from the
third range marker to the forth. Each arc should have a uniform color and shape. The test pattern is available
in both Horizontal and Vertical scan modes.
Testing the Weather Radar:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Radar On Button to enable the weather radar and settings buttons. Button annunciator
is green when radar is on, and gray when off.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
383
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
3) Touch the Display Mode Button.
4) Touch the Test Button. Radar antenna begins sweep and test pattern appears on the selected display pane.
5) Touch the Scan Button to view the scan mode selections.
6) Touch the Vertical or Horizontal Button Buttons to view the scan in a Vertical or Horizontal scan mode,
respectively.
OPERATION IN WEATHER MODE
WARNING: Begin transmitting only when it is safe to do so. When transmitting while the aircraft is on the
ground, no personnel or objects should be within 11 feet of the antenna.
CAUTION: In Standby mode, the antenna is parked at the center line. It is always a good idea to put the
radar in Standby mode before taxiing the aircraft to prevent the antenna from bouncing on the bottom stop
and possibly causing damage to the radar assembly.
When the weather radar system is in the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically switches
to Standby mode on landing.
In Reversionary modes, the weather radar system continues to operate as long as at least one Touchscreen
Controller is operating. If both Touchscreen Controllers fail, the radar system automatically switches to
Standby Mode and cannot be controlled.
Figure 6-44 Weather Radar Pane with a Horizontal Scan
Radar Mode
Radar Legend
Radar Feature
Status Indications
Bearing Line
Scan Line
Tilt and Bearing
Settings
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
384
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Showing Weather Radar Information on the Weather Radar Pane:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) Touch the Radar On Button. Radar options are enabled when button annunciator is green, off when gray.
3) Touch the Display Mode Button.
4) Touch the Weather Button. If the aircraft is airborne, the radar begins transmitting.
5) If the aircraft is on the ground, the Touchscreen Controller displays a prompt shown in the figure below to
confirm radar activation. Touch the OK Button to begin transmitting, or touch the Cancel Button to return to
the Weather Radar Settings screen.
Figure 6-45 Confirm Activating Radar while on Ground
4) Turn the Joystick to select the desired map range.
5) The system displays a horizontal scan. To change to a vertical scan, refer to the following procedure, “Vertically
scanning a storm cell.”
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
385
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Vertically scanning a storm cell:
NOTE: Vertical scanning of a storm cell should be done with the aircraft wings level to avoid constant
adjustment of the Bearing Line.
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) While on a Horizontal Scan view, touch the Bearing Line Button if necessary to show the Bearing Line on the
Weather Radar Pane.
2) Press the Joystick. This enables the Joystick to set the Bearing Line position and displays a bearing and tilt
Joystick legend.
3) Push the Joystick left or right to place the Bearing Line on the desired storm cell or other area to be vertically
scanned. When finished, press the Joystick again to disable the bearing line adjustment Joystick function.
Bearing Line
Scan Line
Tilt and Bearing
Settings
Joystick Legend
Figure 6-46 Weather Radar Pane with a
Horizontal Scan
4) Touch the Scan Button.
5) Touch the Vertical Button. The Weather Radar display shows a vertical scan.
6) Push the Joystick left or right as needed to move the bearing line a few degrees left or right.
7) Turn the Joystick to adjust the range as needed.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
386
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
8) To select a new area to be vertically scanned, return to the Horizontal scan mode.
a) Touch the Scan Button.
b) Touch the Horizontal Button.
c) Return to Step 2 of this procedure.
Figure 6-47 Weather Radar Display with Vertical Scan Mode
Selected
aDjUSting antenna tilt angle
In order to make an accurate interpretation of a storm cell, the radar beam should be pointed at the wet
part of the weather cell to record the proper rainfall intensity (color level). The ideal aiming point is just
below the freezing level of the storm. The best way to find this point is to use the Vertical Scan feature. The
antenna tilt angle can be centered on the strongest return area in the vertical scan to get a more accurate
view of the coverage and intensity of the target in the horizontal scan.
Adjusting antenna tilt on the Weather Radar Display in Horizontal Scan Mode:
1) Push the Joystick to activate the tilt adjustment function of the Joystick. The Weather Radar displays a
bearing and tilt Joystick legend.
2) Use the Joystick to adjust the antenna tilt angle.
3) Press the Joystick again to disable the tilt adjustment function of the Joystick and remove the legend.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
387
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
altitUDe comPenSateD tilt (act) angle aDjUStment
The Attitude Compensated Tilt feature enables automatic management of the antenna tilt angle as the
aircraft altitude changes. With ACT enabled, the antenna beam position remains centered at the set position
for the current map range. The system automatically decreases the tilt angle as the aircraft climbs, and
increases the tilt angle as the aircraft descends. ACT is available in the Horizontal Scan Mode when the
system is operating in Weather Mode and GPS altitude is available.
Enabling/Disabling Altitude Compensated Tilt (ACT):
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) Touch the Altitude Comp Tilt Button. Feature is enabled when button annunciator is green, disabled when
gray.
Adjusting antenna tilt on the Weather Radar Display in Vertical Scan Mode:
1) While in Vertical Scan Mode, press the Joystick to activate the tilt adjustment function of the Joystick and
display the Tilt Line on the Weather Radar Display.
2) Use the Joystick to adjust the tilt angle.
3) Press the Joystick to disable the tilt adjustment function of the Joystick.
The selected tilt angle applies when Horizontal Scan Mode is enabled again.
Figure 6-48 Adjusting Tilt During Vertical Scan
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
388
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
aDjUSting gain
WARNING: Changing the gain in weather mode causes precipitation intensity to be displayed as a color
not representative of the true intensity. Remember to return the gain setting to Calibrated for viewing the
actual intensity of precipitation.
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) If the Calibrated Gain button annunciator is green (enabled), touch the Calibrated Gain Button to disable
Calibrated Gain. Calibrated Gain Button annunciator is gray when disabled.
3) Touch and slide the Gain slider as shown in Figure 6-50.
Or:
Touch the + pointer to increase gain, or - pointer to decrease gain. Each touch increases or decreases the gain
by one increment. A gray bar across the slider bar serves as a reference to the calibrated gain setting position.
4) To return to the calibrated gain setting, touch the Calibrated Gain Button.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
389
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Weather Radar Pane with Calibrated Gain Setting
Calibrated Gain
Enabled Manual Gain
Adjustment
Unavailable
when Calibrated
Gain is Enabled
Touchscreen Controller with Calibrated Gain Setting
Enabled
Figure 6-49 Calibrated Gain
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
390
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Weather Radar Pane set Above Calibrated Gain Setting
Calibrated Gain
Disabled
Current Manual
Gain Setting
Reference to
Calibrated Gain
Setting Position
Touchscreen Controller with Manual Gain
Adjustment Enabled
Figure 6-50 Manual Gain
Sector Scan
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) While in Horizontal Scan Mode, touch the Bearing Line Button if necessary to show the Bearing Line on the
Weather Radar display/.
2) Press the Joystick to enable bearing pointer adjustment.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
391
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
3) Move the Joystick left or right to place the Bearing Line in the desired position. The location of the Bearing
Line becomes the center point of the Sector Scan.
4) Touch the Sector Scan Button.
5) Touch a button to select a 20˚, 40˚, 60˚, or touch the FULL Button to resume a 90˚ degree scan.
6) If desired, readjust the Bearing Line as discussed previously to change the center of the Sector Scan.
7) Press the Joystick again to remove the bearing selection function of the Joystick. The bearing reference is reset
to 0º.
Figure 6-51 Weather Radar Pane on a 60 Degree Sector Scan
antenna StaBilization
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) To activate or deactivate the antenna stabilization, touch the Stabilizer Button. Antenna stabilization is
enabled when button annunciator is green; stabilization is disabled when button annunciator is gray. The
system indicates the current stabilization condition in the upper right of the Weather Radar Pane.
tUrBUlence Detection
The Turbulence Detection feature assists in identifying of areas of turbulence associated with precipitation
using the color magenta during a horizontal scan. These magenta areas represent precipitation moving at a
high rate of speed either toward or away from the radar antenna, using Doppler radar measurements. This
feature cannot detect areas of Clear Air Turbulence. Turbulence Detection is unavailable while performing
a vertical scan.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
392
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling Turbulence Detection during a Horizontal Scan:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) To activate or deactivate the turbulence detection feature, touch the Turbulence Detection Button.
Turbulence detection is enabled when button annunciator is green; turbulence detection is disabled when
button annunciator is gray. The system indicates the current turbulence detection condition in the upper right
of the Weather Radar Display.
WeatHer attenUateD color HigHligHt (WatcH
®
)
WATCH® identifies deceptively strong or unknown intensity parts of a storm. While in horizontal
scan mode, this feature may assist the crew in determining areas of possible inaccuracies in displayed
intensity due to weakening of the radar energy. This weakening is known as attenuation. The radar energy
weakens as it passes through areas of intense precipitation, large areas of lesser precipitation, and distance.
Imperfections in the with the radome attenuate the radar energy. All these factors have an effect on the
return intensity. The more energy that dissipates, the lesser the displayed intensity of the return. Accuracy
of the displayed intensity of returns located in the shaded areas are suspect. Make maneuvering decisions
with this information in mind. Proper antenna tilt management should still be employed to determine the
extent of attenuation in a shaded area.
Enabling/Disabling WATCH display feature:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) To activate or deactivate the WATCH feature, touch the WX Watch Button. WATCH is enabled when button
annunciator is green; WATCH is disabled when button annunciator is gray.
Figure 6-52 Horizontal Scan with WATCH
®
Enabled
Areas of
Attenuated Signal
Shown in Gray
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
393
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WeatHer alert
The Weather Alert feature indicates the presence of heavy precipitation between the ranges of 80 and 320
nm regardless of the currently displayed range. Weather Alert targets appear as red bands along the outer
range ring at the approximate azimuth of the detected returns.
When the system detects a Weather Alert target within ±10° of the aircraft heading, the Touchscreen
Controller may also display a WX Alert system message on the Notifications Screen. The WX Alert system
message is enabled/disabled on the Weather Radar Settings Screen.
If the antenna tilt adjustment is too low, ground returns may cause Weather Alert targets or WX Alert
system messages to appear. The optional Ground Clutter Suppression feature, discussed later in this
section, may reduce the occurrence of ground returns appearing as Weather Alert targets.
Figure 6-53 Weather Alerts on the Weather Radar Pane
Weather Alert Indicates
Possible Severe
Weather Ahead
Enabling/Disabling WX Alert System Message:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) To enable or disable the WX Alert system message, touch the WX Alert Button. WX Alert system messages are
enabled when button annunciator is green, and disabled when annunciator is gray.
Figure 6-54 WX Alert System Message on the Notifications Screen
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
394
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
removing groUnD clUtter
NOTE: The ground clutter suppression feature is optional.
The system can distinguish between reflected ground returns (such as terrain features and buildings) and
airborne weather phenomena when operating in Weather display mode. Ground clutter may increase when
using a low antenna tilt angle, or when approaching mountainous terrain.
When Ground Clutter suppression is enabled, the system removes ground clutter from the display.
Enabling/Disabling Ground Clutter Suppression:
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) To enable or disable the ground clutter suppression feature, touch the GND Cluttter Suppression Button.
Ground clutter suppression is enabled when button annunciator is green; ground clutter suppression is disabled
when annunciator is gray.
GROUND MAPPING AND INTERPRETATION
A secondary use of the weather radar system is for the presentation of terrain. This can be a useful tool for
verifying aircraft position. A picture of the ground is represented much like a topographical map that can be
used as a supplement to the navigation map.
Ground Map mode uses a different gain range than Weather mode. Different colors are also used to represent
the intensity levels. The displayed intensity of ground target returns are defined in the table below. Use of
the Gain and Tilt controls help improve contrast so that specific ground targets can be recognized more easily.
As previously discussed, the type and orientation of the target in relation to the aircraft affects the intensity
displayed.
When the weather radar system is in either the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically
switches to Standby mode upon landing.
Ground Map
Mode Color Intensity
Black
0 dB
Light blue
> 0 dB to < 13 dB
Yellow
at least 13 dB to less than 21 dB
Magenta
at least 21 dB to less than 29 dB
Blue
29 dB and greater
Table 6-4 Ground Target Return Intensity Levels
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
395
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Operation in Ground Map Mode
1) From Home, touch Weather > Weather Selection > WX RADAR > WX RADAR Settings.
2) Touch the Display Mode Button.
3) Touch the Ground Button to place the radar in Ground Map mode.
4) Press the Joystick to activate the antenna tilt selection function.
5) Use the Joystick to select the desired antenna tilt angle.
7) When ground returns are shown at the desired distance, press the Joystick to disable the tilt adjustment
function of the Joystick.
ADDITIONAL RADAR DISPLAYS
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed simultaneously on the on the Navigation Map
Pane with weather radar information.
The Weather Radar Pane is the principal map pane for viewing weather radar information. Weather Radar
information is also available as an overlay on the Navigation Map Pane.
Enabling/Disabling display of Weather Radar information on the Navigation Maps Pane:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Touch the Weather Radar Button to enable or disable the display of weather radar information.
4) If necessary, touch the Weather Radar Settings Button to access the Weather Radar Settings screen.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
396
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Map Settings Screen with Weather Radar on
Navigation Maps Enabled Weather Radar Settings for the Navigation
Maps
Weather Radar information shown on the Navigation Map Pane
Radar Mode
Antenna Tilt
Direction and
Angle
Selected Radar
Range
Figure 6-55 Displaying Weather Radar Information on the Navigation Map Pane
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
397
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM STATUS
The system displays the radar mode annunciation in the upper left corner of the Weather Radar Display.
Additional information may be displayed in the center of the Weather Radar Pane as a banner annunciation.
Radar Mode
Annunciation
Center Banner
Annunciation
Radar Feature
Status
Annunciations
Figure 6-56 Radar System Status on the Weather Radar Pane
Radar Mode Radar Mode Annunciation Box Center Banner Annunciation
Standby STANDBY STANDBY
Weather WEATHER None
Ground Mapping GROUND MAPPING None
Off OFF OFF
Radar Failed* FAIL RADAR FAIL
* See Table 6-7 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-5 Radar Modes on the Weather Radar Pane
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
398
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The system displays the status of the weather radar features in the upper-right corner of the Weather Radar
Pane.
Radar Antenna Feature Status Description
STAB ON Antenna stabilization is selected on.
STAB OFF Antenna stabilization is selected off.
STAB INOP The radar is not receiving pitch and roll information. The antenna
stabilization feature is inoperative.
ALTITUDE COMP TILT ON The altitude-compensated tilt feature is selected on.
ALTITUDE COMP TILT OFF The altitude-compensated tilt feature is selected off.
GND CLTR SUPPRESS ON The optional ground clutter supersession feature is selected on.
GND CLTR SUPPRESS OFF The optional ground clutter supersession feature is selected off.
GND CLTR SUPPRESS INACTIVE The radar scan is not receiving any ground clutter data to suppress.
GND CLTR SUPPRESS UNAVAILABLE The radar is missing data needed to suppresses ground clutter.
TURB DETECTION ON The optional turbulence detection feature is selected on.
TURB DETECTION OFF The optional turbulence detection feature is selected off.
TURB DETECTION INACTIVE
The optional turbulence detection is inactive when map range is greater
than 160 nm, or radar is in a mode which cannot support turbulence
detection.
TURB DETECTION UNAVAILABLE The optional turbulence detection feature is missing data necessary to
detect turbulence.
Table 6-6 Antenna Stabilization Annunciations on the Weather Radar Pane
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown as a banner in the center of the Weather
Radar Pane.
Weather Radar
Pane Center Banner
Annunciation
Description
BAD CONFIG The radar configuration is invalid. The radar should be serviced.
RDR FAULT The radar unit is reporting a fault. The radar should be serviced.
RADAR FAIL The system is not receiving valid data from the radar unit. The system
should be serviced.
Table 6-7 Abnormal Radar Status Annunciations on the Weather Radar Pane
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
399
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.3 TAWS-A
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain avoidance. TAWS is intended only to enhance
situational awareness.
NOTE: Government agencies provide data for the TAWS databases. Garmin accurately processes and cross-
validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
NOTE: Terrain information is not available when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database
coverage area.
TAWS-A (Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class A) provides increased situational awareness and aids
in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). TAWS-A provides visual annunciations and voice alerts when
terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. The displayed alerts and warnings
are advisory in nature only.
TAWS-A satisfies TSO-C151b Class A and TSO-92c requirements for certification.
TAWS-A requires the following components:
• A valid terrain and obstacle database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
• Valid flap and landing gear status inputs
• A valid radar altimeter
TAWS-A uses terrain and obstacle information from government sources. Terrain information is based on
terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be shown
if available in the database. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content, per
TSO-C151b. However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data
may be inaccurate.
TAWS-A uses information from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude, along with
additional altitude input from the radar altimeter. GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS
altitude is then converted to a height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean seal level
(MSL) calculated geometrically. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not
subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices. GSL altitude does
not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. Therefore, GSL altitude provides a highly accurate
and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-A are referenced to mean sea level (MSL). Using the GPS
position and GSL altitude, TAWS-A displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the
position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and
“predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS-A
can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
400
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAWS-A incorporates radar altimeter input with the GSL altitude to provide a more accurate position reference
when at lower altitudes for certain alert types, and to retain a level of ground proximity warning capability in the
unlikely event of a terrain or obstacle database failure.
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter setting
to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions seldom
match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where pressure,
temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read from the
altimeter) to differ from the GPS-GSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s true altitude differing from
the baro-corrected altitude.
TAWS-A provides the following alert types:
• Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) Alerting, which consists of:
• Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) / Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC) Alerting
• Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) / Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) Alerting
• Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)
• Ground Proximity Warning System (GPWS) Alerting, which consists of:
• Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) Alerting
• Excessive Closure Rate (ECR) to Terrain Alerting
• Flight Into Terrain (FIT) Alerting
• Negative Climb Rate (NCR) after takeoff Alerting
• Excessive below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation (GSD) Alerting
• Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO) Alerting
DISPLAYING TAWS-A INFORMATION
TAWS-A uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-57 and Tables 6-8 and 6-9 are used to represent
terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points.
Figure 6-57 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-A
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
401
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Obstacle Location
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Table 6-8 TAWS-A Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Potential Impact
Point Symbol Alert Type Example Annunciation
Warning
Caution
Table 6-9 TAWS-A Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types
The system shows TAWS-A information on the TAWS Pane, the navigation map panes, and on the PFD Inset
Navigation Map.
Enabling/disabling relative terrain information (navigation map panes):
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Touch the Relative Terrain Button to display/remove relative terrain information on the selected navigation
map pane.
Enabling/Disabling obstacle information (Navigation Map Pane and PFD Inset Navigation Map)
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings
2) If necessary, touch the Land Tab.
3) Scroll to and touch the Obstacle Data Button.
The system can overlay relative terrain and obstacle information on the PFD Inset Navigation Map. If the
Inset Map is currently displaying the traffic map (Traffic Map Softkey annunciator is green), the traffic map must
first be disabled in order to view the PFD Inset Navigation Map.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
402
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling relative terrain and obstacle information (PFD Inset Navigation Map)
1) Press the Inset Map Settings Softkey.
2) Press the Terrain Softkey.
When enabling TAWS-A relative terrain information on maps other than the TAWS Pane, an icon indicates
the feature is enabled. A legend for TAWS-A terrain colors will accompany the icon on the navigation map
panes (Figure 6-58). The legend is shown without the terrain icon on the TAWS Pane.
Figure 6-58 Terrain Icon and Legend
The Map Settings Screen on the Touchscreen Controller enables adjustment of map range settings above
which the system declutters terrain and obstacle data from the display. If the crew selects a map range larger
than the map range setting, the system removes the information from the map. For relative terrain information,
the enable/disable function applies only to the display panes, while the range setting also affects the PFD Inset
Map.
The system can display terrain data independently from obstacle data; however, the system will display
obstacles for which cautions or warnings exist when terrain is enabled for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.
Maps besides the TAWS Pane use settings based on those selected for the navigation maps. The maximum
display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the navigation maps.
If the maximum range for obstacle display on the navigation maps is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Selecting a relative terrain display range on the navigation maps:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Touch the Relative Terrain Settings Button.
4) Touch the Map Settings Button.
6) Touch the Map Terrain Range Button (displays current terrain map range in light blue)
7) Scroll in the list of ranges and touch a range button to select the maximum map range at which the system
shows terrain information.
8) When finished, touch Back or Home.
Selecting an obstacle display range on the navigation maps:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Land Tab.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
403
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
3) Touch the Obstacle Data Range Button (displays current obstacle range in light blue).
4) Scroll in the list of ranges and touch a range button to select the maximum map range at which the system
shows obstacle information.
TAWS PANE
The TAWS Pane shows terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point information in relation to the aircraft’s
current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. It is the principal map pane for viewing TAWS information.
The flight crew can also enable/disable the display of aviation data on the TAWS Pane such as the following
items:
• Airports
• NDBs
• VORs
• Intersections
If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically adjusts the map
range if necessary to emphasize the display of the potential impact point(s).
Aircraft orientation on the TAWS pane is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. A box on the
map range arc indicates the selected map range. Turn the Joystick clockwise to increase the map range, or
counter-clockwise to decrease the map range.
Showing the TAWS Pane:
From Home, touch the TAWS Button.
Enabling/disabling aviation data on the TAWS Pane:
1) From Home, touch TAWS > TAWS Settings.
2) Touch the Show Aviation Data Button to display/remove aviation data on the TAWS Pane.
Figure 6-59 TAWS Pane
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Map Orientation Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
TAWS-A
Annunciations
Yellow Lighted
Obstacles (Between
100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft
Altitude)
TAWS Pane Map
Range
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
404
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAWS-A ALERTS
The system issues TAWS-A alerts when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-A
software algorithms. TAWS-A alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or
both. When an alert is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued.
Table 6-10 shows TAWS-A alert types with corresponding annunciations and aural messages.
When the system issues an alert, annunciations appear on the PFDs, the TAWS Pane (if displayed), and on
the Touchscreen Controllers. The PFD shows the annunciation to the left of the Altimeter. The TAWS Pane
shows the alert in the lower-left corner of the pane. In addition, a pop-up alert appears on each Touchscreen
Controller. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
• Touch the TAWS Button (displays the TAWS Pane).
• Touch the Inhibit TAWS Button to inhibit TAWS-A alerting.
• Touch the OK Button acknowledge the alert and return to the previous screen on the Touchscreen Controller.
Acknowledging the alert on either Touchscreen Controller acknowledges the alert for the TAWS-A system.
PFD Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-60 TAWS-A Alert Annunciations
TAWS Pane Alert
Annunciation
Touchscreen
Controller Pop-Up
Alert Annunciation
Touch to show
TAWS Pane
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
405
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Alert Type PFD/TAWS Pane
Annunciation Touchscreen Controller
Pop-Up Alert Aural Message
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC) “Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI) “Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI) “Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR) “<whoop> <whoop> Pull Up”
Excessive Closure Rate Warning (ECR) “<whoop> <whoop> Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC) “Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI) “Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC) “Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI) “Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
Premature Descent Alert Caution (PDA) “Too Low, Terrain”
Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR) “Sink Rate”
Excessive Closure Rate Caution (ECR) “Terrain, Terrain”
Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR) “Don’t Sink”
Flight Into Terrain High Speed Caution
(FIT) “Too Low, Terrain”
Flight Into Terrain Gear Caution (FIT) “Too Low, Gear”
Flight Into Terrain Flaps Caution (FIT) “Too Low, Flaps”
Flight Into Terrain Takeoff Caution (FIT) “Too Low, Terrain”
Glide Slope Deviation Caution (GSD)
(depends on approach type) or or
“Glideslope”
or
“Glidepath”
Altitude Voice Callout (VCO) None None “Five-Hundred”, “Four-Hundred”, “Three-Hun-
dred”, “Two-Hundred”, “One-Hundred”
Table 6-10 TAWS-A Alerts Summary
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
406
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide notification when the aircraft is
determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain a rate that is calculated to be excessive relative to height
above terrain. Figure 6-61 shows the parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
10000
11000
12000
Descent Rate (FPM)
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Caution: “SINK RATE”
Warning: “PULL UP”
Figure 6-61 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE (FLTA)
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of TAWS-A compares the projected flight path as
derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases. The system
issues aural and visual FLTA alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of
the projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the
ground speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest
runway along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes
narrower until the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-62. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TAWS Pane.
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
407
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS Pane. The alert is annunciated when the
projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-62.
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Distance From Runway (NM)
Required Terrain Clearance (FT)
RTC Level (FT) RTC Descending (FT)
Figure 6-62 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
Distance From Runway (NM)
Required Terrain Clearance (FT)
FLTA alerts are automatically disabled when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination runway
elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-63).
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
Figure 6-63 PDA Alerting Threshold
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Height Above Destination (Feet)
Distance to Destination (NM)
PDA ALERTING AREA
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
408
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
INHIBITING FLTA AND PDA ALERTS
NOTE: The ‘Inhibit TAWS’ function only inhibits FLTA and PDA alerts. Alerting for GPWS alerts (EDR, ECR,
NCR, FIT) and GSD is controlled independently from FLTA and PDA alerts.
FLTA and PDA visual annunciations and voice alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used
when inhibiting alerts; they should be enabled when appropriate. When PDA and FLTA alerts are inhibited,
the alert annunciation ‘TAWS INH’ is shown on the PFDs and on the TAWS Pane.
Figure 6-64 TAWS FLTA and PDA Alerting
Inhibited Annunciation
Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-A FLTA and PDA alerting:
1) From Home, touch TAWS > TAWS Settings.
2) Touch the TAWS Inhibit Button. When the annunciator on the button is green, TAWS-A alerting is inhibited.
When the button annunciator is gray, TAWS-A alerting is enabled.
Or:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
2) Touch the Relative Terrain Settings Button.
3) Touch the TAWS Inhibit Button. TAWS-A alerting is inhibited when the button annunciator is green, enabled
when gray.
Inhibiting TAWS-A alerting while an alert is occurring:
Touch the Inhibit TAWS Button on the Terrain Alert pop-up window on either Touchscreen Controller.
If TAWS-A FLTA alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS
approach, the system may show a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation on the PFDs next to the Altimeter if the current
aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight
Instruments Section for details.
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide suitable notification when the
aircraft is determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain at an excessive speed. Figure 6-65 shows the
parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
409
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
0
1000
2000
3000
4000
5000
6000
7000
8000
9000
10000
11000
12000
Descent Rate (FPM)
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Caution: “SINK RATE”
Warning: “PULL UP”
Figure 6-65 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
EXCESSIVE CLOSURE RATE ALERT
The Excessive Closure Rate (ECR) alert provides suitable notification when the aircraft is determined to
be closing upon terrain at an excessive speed for a given aircraft gear and flap configuration.
Figures 6-136 and 6-137 show the ECR alerting criteria for flaps in the landing configuration and for all
other flight phases respectively.
ECR alerts are automatically disabled when the aircraft is 5 nm from the nearest airport, except when FLTA
is not available (causing the TAWS N/A or TAWS FAIL annunciation to be displayed), in which case ECR
alerting will remain active until landing.
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Closure Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-66 Excessive Closure Rate Alert Criteria (Flaps Up or Takeoff Configuration)
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
410
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Closure Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-67 Excessive Closure Rate Alert Criteria (Flaps in Landing Configuration)
FLIGHT INTO TERRAIN ALERT
Flight Into Terrain (FIT) alerts occur when the aircraft is too low with respect to terrain based on landing
gear status, flap position, and groundspeed. FIT caution alerts are issued when flight conditions meet the
criteria shown in Figure 6-68.
Figure 6-68 Flight Into Terrain Caution Alert Criteria
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Altitude Change Rate (FPM)
* Flap position will not trigger alert if Flap Override option is enabled; see discussion below.
*
*
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
411
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
To reduce nuisance FIT alerts on approaches where flap extension is not desired (or is intentionally delayed),
the pilot may override FIT alerting based on the flap position, while all other FIT alerting remains in effect.
PFD Flap Override Annunciation
Figure 6-69 Overriding Flaps
Configuration-Based FIT Alerts
TAWS Pane
Flap Override
Annunciation
“Too Low - Flaps”
Warning Inhibited when
Flap Override Button is
Enabled
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
412
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Overriding Flaps-based FIT alerting:
1) From Home, touch TAWS > TAWS Settings.
2) Touch the Flap Override button. FIT alerts based on flap position are overridden (disabled) when button
annunciator is green, available when gray.
When the Flaps Override option is enabled, the annunciation ‘FLAP OVR’ is annunciated on the PFDs
and on the TAWS Pane (Figure 6-69). If GPWS alerts are also inhibited (which include FIT), the ‘FLAP OVR’
annunciation is not shown.
FIT alerts also occur during takeoff or go-around if the aircraft’s height above ground level (as determined
by the radar altimeter) is too close to rising terrain. The system displays a ‘TERRAIN’ caution or warning
annunciation on the PFDs, and a ‘TOO LOW - TERRAIN’ pop-up annunciation on the Touchscreen
Controllers. The system also issues a “Too Low, Terrain” voice alert.
Figure 6-70 FIT Alerting After Takeoff
Radio Altitude Loss (Feet)
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The system displays a ‘TERRAIN’ caution annunciation on the PFDs, and a ‘DON’T SINK’ pop-up annunciation
on the Touchscreen Controllers. The system also generates a “Don’t Sink” voice alert.
NCR alerting for TAWS-A is only active when departing from an airport and when the following conditions
are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 5 nm or less
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
413
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
• Landing gear or flaps are configured for takeoff
NCR alerts can be triggered by either altitude loss (Figure 6-71) or sink rate (6-72).
Figure 6-71 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
“DON’T SINK”
Figure 6-72 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
0 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6500 7000
Sink Rate (FPM)
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
“DON’T SINK”
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
414
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
inHiBiting gPWS alertS (eDr, ecr, fit, anD ncr)
NOTE: The ‘Inhibit GPWS’ function only affects GPWS alerts (EDR, ECR, NCR, and FIT). Alerting for FLTA,
PDA, and GSD is controlled independently from the GPWS alerts listed below.
EDR, ECR, FIT, and NCR alerts can be manually inhibited as a group. Discretion should be used when
inhibiting alerts, and the GPWS system should be enabled when appropriate. When these alerts are inhibited,
the status annunciation ‘GPWS INH’ is shown on the PFDs and on the TAWS Pane (Figure 6-73).
PFD GPWS Inhibit Annunciation
Figure 6-73 Inhibiting GPWS Alerts
TAWS Pane
GPWS Inhibit
Annunciation
Inhibiting/enabling GPWS alerting:
1) From Home, touch TAWS > TAWS Settings.
2) Touch the GPWS Inhibit button. Button annunciator is green when GPWS alerts are inhibited, gray when
alerting is enabled.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
415
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EXCESSIVE BELOW GLIDESLOPE/GLIDEPATH DEVIATION ALERT
A Glideslope Deviation or Glidepath Deviation (GSD) caution alert is issued when the system detects
that the aircraft is significantly below the glidepath for the selected approach in relation to the aircraft’s height
above terrain (Figure 6-74).
Radio Altitude (Feet)
Number of Dots Below Glideslope/Glidepath
Figure 6-74 Excessive Below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation Alert Criteria
“GLIDESLOPE”
or
“GLIDEPATH”
GSD alerting is only active after departure and the following conditions are met:
• An ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, or LNAV+V approach is active and vertical navigation indications are being
displayed.
• Aircraft is below 1000 feet AGL
• Gear is in the landing configuration.
When a GSD caution alert occurs on an ILS approach, the system displays a ‘GLIDESLOPE’ annunciation
on the PFDs and Touchscreen Controllers and provides a “Glideslope” voice alert. If a GSD caution alert
occurs on an LPV, LNAV/VNAV, or LNAV+V approach, the system displays a ‘GLIDEPATH’ annunciation and
provides a “Glidepath” voice alert (Figure 6-75).
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
416
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
inHiBiting gSD alertS
NOTE: GSD alerting may only be inhibited while a GSD alert is occurring. GSD alerts are inhibited
independently from all other FLTA, PDA, and GPWS alerts.
GSD Alerts may be inhibited on either Touchscreen Controller.
PFD Glideslope Annunciation
Figure 6-75 GSD Alerts on PFD and Touchscreen Controller
Inhibiting an active GSD Pop-Up alert:
1) Touch the Inhibit GS/GP Button.
2) Touch the OK Button to confirm and inhibit Glideslope and Glidepath alerts, or touch Cancel.
Inhibiting an active GSD Alert (TAWS Settings Screen):
1) From Home, touch TAWS > TAWS Settings.
2) Touch the Glideslope Inhibit or Glidepath Inhibit Button (button name dependent type of alert occurring).
GSD alerting is inhibited when button annunciator is green, enabled when gray.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
417
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ALTITUDE VOICE CALLOUT (VCO)
TAWS-A provides voice alerts as the aircraft descends, beginning at 500 feet above the terrain, as determined
by the radar altimeter (if greater than 5 nm from the nearest airport) or 500 feet above the nearest runway
threshold elevation (if less than 5 nm from the nearest airport). Upon descent to this altitude, TAWS-A issues
a “Five-hundred” voice alert. This system also issues voice alerts corresponding to 400, 300, 200, and 100
feet. There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany the aural message(s). VCO alerts
cannot be inhibited.
SYSTEM STATUS
During power-up, TAWS-A conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerts. The system test
can also be manually initiated. The system issues a voice alert when the test has concluded. TAWS-A System
Testing is disabled when ground speed exceeds 30 knots. TAWS-A terrain alerts will not be issued while a test
is in progress.
Alert Type PFD/TAWS Pane
Annunciation
TAWS Pane
Center Banner
Annunciation
Voice Alert
TAWS System Fail TAWS FAIL “TAWS System Failure”
GPWS System Fail None “GPWS System Failure”
System Test in progress TAWS TEST None
System Test pass None None “TAWS System Test OK”
Table 6-11 TAWS-A System Test Status Annunciations
Manually testing the TAWS-A System:
1) From Home, touch TAWS > TAWS Settings.
2) Touch the Test TAWS Button.
Or:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Touch the Relative Terrain Settings Button.
4) Touch the Test TAWS Button.
TAWS-A ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
The TAWS-A system continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, flap and
landing gear position, altitude inputs, and GPS accuracy and position.
If any alerts are unavailable due to an abnormal condition, the system displays annunciation(s) on the PFDs
and on the TAWS Pane. In addition, the system generates voice alert(s), provided the audio alerting system is
available.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
418
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Conditions which may be automatically recoverable (such as a excessive vertical position error) are typically
accompanied by a ‘TAWS N/A’ annunciation and “TAWS Not Available” voice alert. While the aircraft is in the
air, if the condition(s) which caused the ‘TAWS N/A’ annunciation are no longer applicable, the system issues a
“TAWS Available” voice alert.
Alert Cause(s) PFD/TAWS Pane
Annunciation(s)
TAWS Pane Center Banner
Annunciation
Voice Alert(s)
TAWS Alert
Types
Not
Available
No GPS Position NO GPS POSITION “TAWS Not
Available”
PDA, FLTA,
GSD, VCO
Excessive vertical position
error None “TAWS Not
Available” PDA, FLTA
LRU software mismatch,
TAWS configuration
mismatch, or audio
alerting system failed or
is unavailable, or GPS and
barometric altitude invalid or
unavailable
and TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System
Failure” and “GPWS
System Failure”
All Alerts
Unavailable
Vertical Speed and Barometric
Altitude invalid or unavailable
and
None
“TAWS Not
Available” and
“GPWS System
Failure”
All alerts
unavailable
Radar altimeter is invalid or
unavailable None
“GPWS System
Failure”
EDR, ECR,
NCR, FIT, GSD,
VCO*
TAWS Database Mismatch or
Failure TAWS FAIL “TAWS System
Failure”
PDA, FLTA
Terrain elevation from
database unavailable or
Aircraft is outside of terrain/
obstacle coverage area for
the installed database
“TAWS Not
Available”
PDA, FLTA,
Terrain or Obstacle databases
from the MFD unavailable
or invalid. System operating
with PFD databases
None
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE None
Not applicable
* Alert fails if GPS position and terrain database elevation is also unavailable.
Table 6-12 TAWS-A Abnormal Conditions and Alert Failures
If the aircraft bank angle exceeds 30˚, TAWS-A will disable ECR alerts. ECR alert availability returns when
the bank angle is reduced for at least eight seconds.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
419
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.4 TCAS II TRAFFIC
WARNING:
Traffic information shown on system displays is provided as an aid in visually acquiring
traffic. Traffic avoidance maneuvers are based upon TCAS II Resolution Advisories , ATC guidance, or
positive visual acquisition of conflicting traffic.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the displays.
NOTE: Refer to the documentation from the manufacturer for a complete discussion of the TCAS II system.
The ACSS TCAS 3000SP is a Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System II (TCAS II) device. It monitors
the airspace and detects the presence of other aircraft in the vicinity equipped with operating Mode A, C, and S
transponders. It also provides traffic advisory (TA) and resolution advisory (RA) alerts to the flight crew. The
system displays traffic information using the symbology shown below.
Traffic Symbol Description
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Resolution Advisory (RA)
Resolution Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-13 TCAS II Traffic Symbol Description
Non-Threat Traffic, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an intruding aircraft is at greater than
±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond 5 nm.
A Proximity Advisory indicates that the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range,
but is still not considered a threat.
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft closing to within 20-48
seconds of a potential collision area. A Traffic Advisory beyond the selected display range is indicated by a half
TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
A Resolution Advisory (RA) alerts the crew to an intruding aircraft that is closing to within 15 to 35 seconds
of a potential collision area. RAs include vertical guidance maneuvers designed to increase or maintain vertical
separation from intruding aircraft. An RA beyond the selected map display range (off scale) is indicated by a
half RA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
420
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TCAS II ALERTS
NOTE: Refer to TCAS II manufacturer’s documentation for information on the types of resolution advisories
and voice alerts generated by the TCAS II system.
When the TCAS II system issues a TA or RA, the following occur:
• The TCAS II unit issues a voice alert.
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears at the bottom right of the airspeed indicator on the PFDs, flashes for 5
seconds, and remains displayed until no TAs or RAs are detected in the area. RA ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciations
are white text with red backgrounds; TA ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciations are black text with yellow backgrounds. If
a TA and RA occur simultaneously, only the RA ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation is shown.
• If the PFD is operating in FULL mode, the PFD automatically displays an inset map. If no inset map was
enabled prior to the TA or RA, the system displays the PFD Inset Traffic Map. If the PFD Inset Navigation Map
was enabled prior to the TA or RA, the system displays the PFD Inset Navigation Map with the traffic overlay
enabled.
• During an RA only, voice alert(s) from the TCAS II unit provide vertical guidance to resolve the traffic conflict.
The Vertical Speed Indicator displays a range of vertical speeds to fly to or avoid as applicable (Figure 6-76).
Additional voice alerts occur to denote changes in the RA status or when the aircraft is clear of the conflict.
Figure 6-76 Traffic Annunciation with Resolution Advisory (PFD in FULL Mode)
Inset Traffic Map
Displays When TA
or RA is Detected
No-Fly Vertical
Speed Range
Fly-To Vertical
Speed Range
RA Annunciation
TA Annunciation
No-Fly Pitch Cue
Fly-To Pitch
Cue
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
421
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
RESOLUTION ADVISORIES
NOTE: Refer to TCAS II manufacturer’s documentation for information on the types of resolution advisories
and voice alerts generated by the TCAS II system.
During an RA, vertical guidance indications appear on the Attitude Indicator and Vertical Speed Indicator
of the PFDs to provide visual pitch cues for the flight crew to use in order to achieve (or maintain) vertical
separation from intruding traffic (Figure 6-77).
The Attitude Indicator depicts a range of pitch attitudes to avoid using one or two no-fly pitch cues positioned
on the pitch ladder. The no-fly pitch cues are indicated by red open trapezoid-shaped areas encompassing
the range of pitch attitudes to be avoided during an RA. If an RA requires a change in existing pitch attitude,
a green rectangular fly-to pitch cue appears above or below the no-fly pitch cue to indicate a recommended
pitch attitude. If multiple intruding aircraft limit available pitch travel in both directions, two no-fly pitch
cues appear on the pitch ladder, indicating the appropriate pitch attitude is between the two no-fly pitch cues.
While an RA is occurring, the Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) shows vertical speeds required to resolve
the traffic conflict. A red vertical bar appears on the VSI scale to indicate the range of vertical speeds to be
avoided during the RA. If the current aircraft vertical speed is within this red range, the pointer on the VSI
appears red. The vertical speed readout appears in white when shown within the red VSI range. When an
RA directs the flight crew to fly to (or maintain) a vertical speed range, a green vertical bar appears on the VSI
scale at the recommended vertical speed range.
The system removes the pitch cues on the Attitude Indicator and vertical bars on the Vertical Speed Indicator
when the RA condition has been resolved. The TCAS II system issues a voice alert when the aircraft is clear
of the RA conflict.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
422
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Climb
Increase Climb
Maintain, Don’t Climb Maintain, Don’t Descend
Maintain, Don’t Climb and Don’t Descend
Descend
Figure 6-77 Example Resolution Advisory Displays
DISPLAYING TCAS II TRAFFIC
TRAFFIC MAP PANE
The Traffic Map Pane shows surrounding traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and altitude,
without basemap clutter. It is the principal map pane for viewing traffic information. Aircraft orientation
is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Range rings indicate map ranges. Turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the map range, or clockwise to increase the range.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
423
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The traffic operating mode and altitude display mode appear in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map
Pane.
To show the Traffic Map Pane, touch the Traffic Button on the Home Screen of the Touchscreen Controller.
In addition, when the PFD is operating in Split Mode, pressing the Traffic Softkey also displays the Traffic
Map Pane on the PFD.
Figure 6-78 Traffic Map Pane (MFD in Full Mode)
Map Orientation
Traffic Display
Range Rings
Altitude
Mode
Operating
Mode
No-Bearing
Traffic Advisory,
4.0 nm,
300’ Above,
Descending
Non-Threat
Traffic, Altitude
Not Reported
Proximity
Advisory, 900’
Above, Level
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2200’
Above,
Descending
Traffic Advisory,
200’ Above,
Level
Off-Scale Traffic
Advisory, 600’
Below, Level
Traffic Softkey also
displays Traffic Map
Pane when PFD is in
Split Mode
Figure 6-79 Using the Traffic Softkey to show Traffic Map
Pane (PFD in Split Mode)
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
The system can overlay traffic information on the Navigation Map Pane as well as the PFD Inset Navigation
Map. Traffic information is also available on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) display is
enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
424
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling display of traffic information (Navigation Map Pane):
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Touch the Traffic Button to enable/disable the traffic overlay on the Navigation Map Pane.
When the display of traffic is enabled on maps other than the Traffic Map Pane, the system shows a traffic
status icon in the lower right corner of the map (Figure 6-80).
Non-Threat
Traffic, Altitude
Not Reported
TA Off Scale Banner
Annunciation
Non-Bearing Traffic
Advisory Banner
Annunciation
Traffic
Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing
Figure 6-80 TCAS II Traffic on Navigation Map Pane
Traffic
Enabled Icon
Proximity
Advisory
Displaying/removing the PFD Inset Traffic Map (available when PFD is in Full Mode)
Press the Traffic Inset Softkey to display/remove the PFD Traffic Inset Map.
Enables/Disables PFD
Inset Traffic Map
Figure 6-81 Displaying the PFD Inset Traffic Map
PFD Inset Traffic Map
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
425
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
OPERATION
The Traffic Settings screen on the Touchscreen Controller provides controls for selecting the traffic system
mode, selecting the altitude ranges of traffic to display, and controlling whether the system displays relative or
absolute altitude of traffic.
Figure 6-82 Testing the Traffic System (Traffic Settings Screen)
Traffic System Test
in Progress
Testing the Traffic System:
1) From Home, touch Traffic > Traffic Settings.
2) Turn the Joystick as necessary to set the Traffic Map Pane range so the outer ring indicates ‘6 NM’. This will
allow the system to show all traffic symbols in the traffic test pattern.
3) Touch the Test Button. Button annunciator is green while test is in progress. If system test is successful, the
traffic maps show a test pattern of traffic symbols, the PFDs show pitch cues and vertical speed ranges indicating
not to climb or descend greater than 2000 feet per minute, and the TCAS II system issues a voice alert indicating
the system test has passed. If the test fails, the traffic system issues the voice alert indicating the system test
has failed, and the system enters Standby mode.
Or:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor tab.
3) Touch the Traffic Settings Button.
4) Touch the Test Button. Button annunciator is green while test is in progress. If system test is successful, the
traffic maps show a test pattern of traffic symbols, the PFDs show pitch cues and vertical speed ranges indicating
not to climb or descend greater than 2000 feet per minute, and the TCAS II system issues a voice alert indicating
the system test has passed. If the test fails, the traffic system issues the voice alert indicating the system test
has failed, and the system enters Standby mode.
Selecting a TCAS II Mode (Traffic Settings Screen):
1) From Home, touch Traffic > Traffic Settings.
2) In the Operating Mode Window, touch one of the following buttons:
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
426
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• TA/RA: Display traffic information and issues RA vertical guidance when applicable to resolve traffic
conflicts.
• TA Only: Displays traffic information without RA vertical guidance. RA traffic will be classified and displayed
as TA traffic in this mode.
• Standby: Traffic system enters Standby Mode and does not interrogate or display traffic.
The TCAS II modes can also be selected on the Transponder Screen. Selecting the Standby mode on the
Transponder screen also selects the Standby mode for the active transponder; selecting the TA/RA or TA Only
modes on this screen will cause the transponder to operate in Altitude Reporting mode, if it is not already
selected. Refer to the Audio & CNS section for more information about transponder modes.
Selecting a TCAS II Mode (Transponder Screen):
1) In the CNS Bar, touch the transponder settings button.
2) Touch the TCAS Mode Button (current mode displayed in light blue)
3) Touch one of the following buttons: TA/RA, TA Only, or Standby.
Accesses
Transponder Screen
Current TCAS II
Mode
Selected TCAS II
Mode
Selects/Displays
TCAS II Mode
Selected TCAS II mode
causes Transponder to
use Altitude Reporting
mode
TA/RA mode
selected
Figure 6-83 Selecting a TCAS II Mode on the Transponder Screen
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
427
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
altitUDe range
The altitude range selection features allows flight crew to select the volume of airspace in which non-
threat and proximity traffic is displayed. Note the system will still show RAs and TAs occurring outside of
these limits regardless of the selected altitude range.
Changing the altitude range:
1) From Home, touch Traffic > Traffic Settings.
2) Touch one of the following Altitude Range Buttons:
• Unrestricted: All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
• Above: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during the climb phase of flight.
• Normal: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
• Below: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
Changing the display of Intruding Traffic Altitude:
1) From Home, touch Traffic > Traffic Settings.
2) If desired, touch the Relative Button to display the altitude of intruding aircraft relative to own aircraft altitude.
3) If desired, touch the Absolute Button to display the absolute altitude of intruding aircraft. The system may
revert to displaying relative altitude after 30 seconds if the TCAS II system is providing altitude which is not
corrected for the local barometric pressure setting.
Selects the
Altitude Range of
Intruding Traffic
to Display
Displays other aircraft
altitude relative to own
altitude
Displays absolute
altitude of other aircraft
Figure 6-84 Selecting Altitude Range and Altitude Mode for
displaying traffic
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
428
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/disabling display of traffic information on the Navigation Map Pane:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Touch the Traffic Button to enable/disable overlay of traffic information.
Displaying/removing the Traffic Inset Map on the PFD:
Press the Traffic Inset Softkey to show or hide the PFD Traffic Inset Map.
Enabling/disabling display of traffic information on the PFD Inset Navigation Map
1) Press the Inset Map Settings Softkey.
2) Press the Traffic Softkey to enable/disable the overlay of traffic information on the map.
Customizing the display of traffic on the Navigation Map Panes:
1) From Home, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If necessary, touch the Sensor Tab.
3) Touch the Traffic Settings Button.
4) Touch the Map Settings Button.
5) To change the map range above which the system removes traffic symbols from the display, touch the Symbols
Button, then scroll to and touch to select maximum map range to show traffic symbols.
6) Touch the Labels Annunciator Button to enable/disable the display of labels on traffic (such as altitude).
7) To change the map range at which the system removes traffic labels from the display, touch the Labels range
button, then scroll to and touch to select the maximum map range to show traffic labels.
8) When finished, touch the Back or Home Button.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
429
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper right corner of the Traffic Map Pane
Mode PFD Mode
Annunciation
Traffic Map Pane Mode
Annunciation
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
TCAS II System Test In
Progress None
TEST
(‘TEST MODE’ also shown in white on
top center of pane)
Traffic Advisory and
Resolution Advisory
(TA/RA)
None TA/RA
Traffic Advisory Only
(TA Only) TA ONLY
TCAS II Standby o Or:
*
STANDBY
(shown in white in center of pane on
ground, yellow in the air)
TCAS II Failed** FAIL
* Annunciation appears in yellow while in the air.
** See Table 6-15 for additional failure annunciations.
Table 6-14 TCAS II Modes
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Pane.
Traffic Map Pane
Annunciation Description
NO DATA Data is not being received from the TCAS II unit
DATA FAILED Data is being received from the TCAS II unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED Incorrect data format received from the TCAS II unit
Table 6-15 TCAS II Failure Annunciations
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
430
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation Description
RA OFF SCALE
A Resolution Advisory is outside the selected display
range*. Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within
the selected display range
TA OFF SCALE
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
RA X.X ± XX <UP>
or <DN>
System cannot determine bearing of Resolution Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend <UP> for climbing
<DN> for descending traffic.
TA X.X ± XX <UP> or
<DN>
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend <UP> for climbing
or <DN> for descending traffic.
TRFC FAIL TCAS II unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
NO TCAS DATA Data is not being received from the TCAS II unit
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Pane
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Pane
Table 6-16 TCAS II Traffic Status Annunciations
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
431
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NOTE: The approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) always supersedes the information in this Pilot’s Guide.
NOTE: A failure of the primary (#1) GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) results in loss of the flight
director. Any IAU failure results in loss of the autopilot and manual electric trim.
The GFC 700 is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS), fully integrated within the avionics
architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram to support this system description.
GFC 700 AFCS functionality is distributed across the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDU 1400W Primary Flight Displays (2) (PFD)
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units (2)
• GMC 715 AFCS Control Unit
• GSA 81 AFCS Servos (3)
• GSM 85A Servo Gearboxes (3)
• GSA 80 AFCS Servo (1)
The GFC 700 AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
• Flight Director (FD) — The GFC 700 flight director function can be coupled to either the pilot-side or
copilot-side PFD data. The CPL Key selects the PFD source for the Flight Director. Commands for the selected
flight director source are displayed on both PFDs. The flight director provides:
– Vertical/lateral mode selection and processing
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
– Pitch and roll commands to the autopilot
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch and roll servos. It provides automatic flight
control in response to flight director steering commands, Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)
attitude and rate information, and airspeed.
• Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo provides Dutch roll damping and turn coordination in response to yaw
rate, roll angle, lateral acceleration, and airspeed.
• Manual Electric Pitch Trim (MEPT) — The pitch trim system provides manual electric pitch trim capability.
• Automatic Pitch Trim (APT)/Mach Trim (MT) — The pitch trim system provides automatic pitch trim
when the autopilot is engaged and Mach trim when the autopilot is not engaged.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
432
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
BASIC AUTOPILOT OPERATION
This section provides an overview for autopilot engagement and disengagement. A more detailed description
follows in Section 7.5.
• Autopilot Engagement — The autopilot may be engaged by pushing the AP Key on the AFCS Control Unit.
Annunciations regarding the engagement are indicated on the PFDs.
• Autopilot Engagement with Flight Director Off — Upon engagement, the autopilot will be set to hold the
current attitude of the airplane, if the flight director was not previously on. In this case, ‘PIT’ and ‘ROL’ will be
annunciated.
• Autopilot Engagement with Flight Director On — If the flight director is on, the autopilot will smoothly
pitch and roll the airplane to capture the FD command bars. The prior flight directore modes remain unchanged.
• Autopilot Disengagement — The most common way to disconnect the autopilot is to press and release the
AP DISC Switch, which is located on each control wheel. An autopilot disconnect tone will be heard and
annunciated on the PFDs. Other ways to disconnect the autopilot include:
– Pressing the AP Key on the AFCS Control Unit
– Pressing the GA Switch (located on the throttle handle)
– Operating the MEPT Switch (located on each control wheel)
– Pulling the autopilot circuit breaker
In the event of unexpected autopilot behavior, pressing and holding the AP DISC Switch will disconnect the
autopilot and remove all power to the servos.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
433
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 AFCS CONTROLS
The AFCS Control Unit is positioned above the MFD, and has the following controls:
1
10
FD Keys Activate/deactivate the selected flight director (pilot- or copilot-side) in default
vertical and lateral modes
Press the other FD Key to toggle the corresponding PFD’s Command Bars off/on
2
NAV Key Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
3
HDG Key Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
4
AP Key Engages/disengages the autopilot
5
YD Key Engages/disengages the yaw damper
6
ALT Key Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
7
VNV Key Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
8
VS Key Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
9
FLC Key Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
11
20
CRS Knobs Adjust the Selected Course (while in VOR, LOC, or OBS Mode) in 1° increments on
the Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) of the corresponding PFD
Press to re-center the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) and return course pointer
directly TO the bearing of the active waypoint/station
12
SPD SEL Knob Adjusts the Airspeed Reference and bug in 1-kt (0.01 M) increments
Press to toggle the Airspeed Reference units from IAS to Mach
13
UP/DN Wheel Adjusts the Vertical Speed Reference and bug in 100-fpm increments
14
ALT SEL Knob Adjusts the Selected Altitude and bug in 100-ft increments (a finer resolution of 10
feet is available under approach conditions)
15
CSC Key Selects/deselects Current Speed Control (if available) when Altitude Hold Mode is
active
16
CPL Key Selects the PFD data source (pilot-side or copilot-side) for the Flight Director.
When the flight director source is switched, the modes revert to default. An arrow
in the AFCS Status Box indicates the active FD source (pilot- or copilot-side).
17
HDG SEL
Knob
Adjusts the Selected Heading and bug in 1° increments on the HSI (both PFDs)
Press to synchronize the Selected Heading to the current heading on the pilot-side PFD
18
APR Key Selects/deselects Approach Mode
19
BANK Key Manually selects/deselects Low Bank Mode
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
434
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
18 17 14 13 12 1120
Figure 7-1 GMC 715 AFCS Control Unit
1619 15
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
The following AFCS controls are located separately from the AFCS Control Unit:
AP DISC Switch
(Autopilot
Disconnect)
Disengages the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director and interrupts pitch trim
operation
An AP DISC Switch is located on each control wheel.
This switch may be used to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute
the associated aural alert.
CWS Button
(Control Wheel
Steering)
While pressed, allows manual control of the aircraft while the autopilot is engaged and
synchronizes the flight director’s Command Bars with the current aircraft pitch (if not
in Glideslope or Glidepath Mode) and roll (if in Roll Hold Mode)
A CWS Button is located on each control wheel.
Upon release of the CWS Button, the flight director may establish new pitch and
roll references, depending on the current vertical and lateral modes. CWS operation
details are discussed in the respective mode sections of this manual.
GA Switch
(Go Around)
Disengages the autopilot, if engaged, and selects flight director Takeoff Mode (on
ground) or Go Around Mode (in air)
This switch also activates the missed approach when the selected navigation source
is GPS or when the navigation source is VOR/LOC and a valid frequency has been
tuned.
The GA Switch is located on the throttle handle.
MEPT Switch
(Manual Electric
Pitch Trim)
Used to command manual electric pitch trim
An MEPT Switch is located on each control wheel.
The pilot side MEPT Switch has priority over the copilot side MEPT Switch.
This composite switch is split into left and right sides. The left switch is the
ARM contact and the right switch controls the DN (forward) and UP (rearward)
contacts. Manual trim commands are generated only when both sides of the switch
are operated simultaneously. Pushing either MEPT Switch disengages the autopilot,
if engaged, but does not affect yaw damper operation.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
435
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.2 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFDs.
With the flight director active, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (±20°) and roll (25°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to values
established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR
An initial press of a key listed in Table 7-1 activates the flight director in the listed modes.
Control Pressed Modes Selected
Lateral Vertical
FD Key (pilot-side)* Roll Hold (default) ROL Pitch Hold (default) PIT
FD Key (copilot-
side)* Roll Hold (default) ROL Pitch Hold (default) PIT
AP Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Pitch Hold (default) PIT
CWS Button Roll Hold (default) ROL Pitch Hold (default) PIT
GA Switch Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
ROL
ROL
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
TO
GA
ALT Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Altitude Hold ALT
VS Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Vertical Speed VS
VNV Key Roll Hold (default) ROL Vertical Path
Tracking** VPTH
NAV Key Navigation***
FMS
VOR
LOC
BC
Pitch Hold (default) PIT
APR Key Approach***
FMS
VOR
LOC
Pitch Hold (default) PIT
HDG Key Heading Select HDG Pitch Hold (default) PIT
*Subsequent presses of the FD Key will toggle the flight director on/off on its respective
side. However, pressing the FD Key for the inactive flight director only removes the
Command Bars from the corresponding display. The FD Keys are disabled when the
autopilot is engaged.
** Valid VNAV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
***The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active FMS
course before
NAV
or
APR
Key press activates flight director.
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
436
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT DIRECTOR SELECTION
The GFC 700 flight director can be coupled to either the pilot-side or copilot-side PFD data using the CPL
Key. When the pilot-side or copilot-side data source is changed, the vertical and lateral modes revert to default.
The autopilot follows the selected flight director only, indicated by an arrow pointing toward either the pilot or
copilot side, in the center of the AFCS Status Box.
The currently active flight director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the displays
by pressing the active FD Key again. Pressing the FD Key for the inactive flight director only removes the
Command Bars from the corresponding display. The FD key for the selected flight director is disabled when
the autopilot is engaged.
Figure 7-2 Flight Director Selection Indications
Pilot-side Flight Director SelectedCopilot-side Flight Director Selected
AFCS STATUS BOX
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFDs when the flight director is active. Flight
director selection and autopilot and yaw damper statuses are shown in the center of the AFCS Status Box.
Lateral flight director modes are displayed on the left and vertical modes on the right. Armed modes are
displayed in white. Active modes are displayed in magenta when using FMS navigation, or green when using
other navigation sources.
Lateral Modes
Active
Armed Vertical Modes
Active
Selected
Altitude
Command
Bars
Figure 7-3 PFD AFCS Display
Yaw
Damper
Status
Autopilot
Status
Flight Director
Indicator Arrow
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
437
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
COMMAND BARS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed in magenta on the PFDs as single cue or
dual cue. The aircraft symbol (in yellow) changes to accommodate the Command Bar format; the Command
Bars do not override the aircraft symbol. The single cue Command Bars (Figure 7-4) move together vertically to
indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll commands. Command Bars displayed as a cross
pointer (Figure 7-5) move independently to indicate pitch (horizontal bar) and roll (vertical bar) commands.
Both PFDs show the same Command Bar format.
NOTE: Dual cue command bars are not available when SVS is installed.
Aircraft Symbol
Command Bars
Figure 7-5 Dual Cue Command Bars
Figure 7-4 Single Cue Command Bars
Aircraft Symbol
Command Bars
Changing the selected Flight Director format:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities >Setup > Avionics Settings.
3) Touch the System Tab.
4) Touch the Flight Director Active Format Data Field.
5) Touch desired setting (Single Cue or Dual Cue).
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
438
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Figure 7-6 Flight Director Format Settings
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll modes(s).
Under normal operation when the control for the active flight director mode is pressed, the flight director
reverts to the default modes(s) for the axis(es). Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated
by the white armed mode annunciation moving to the green or magenta active mode field and flashing for 10
seconds.
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight
director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, FMS, SBAS) required to compute
commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically rolls the wings level and then enters Roll Hold
Mode, or maintains the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The flashing
annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If after 10
seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.
Figure 7-7 Loss of VOR Signal
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
439
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.3 VERTICAL MODES
Table 7-2 lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode reference is
displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes.
The UP/DN Wheel can be used to change the vertical mode reference while operating under Pitch Hold, Vertical
Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode. Increments of change and acceptable ranges of values for each of these
references using the UP/DN Wheel are also listed in the table.
Vertical Mode Description Control Annunciation Reference
Range
Reference
Change
Increment
Pitch Hold
Holds aircraft pitch attitude; may
be used to climb/descend to the
Selected Altitude
(default) PIT -15° to +20° 0.5°
Selected Altitude Capture Captures the Selected Altitude * ALTS
Altitude Hold Holds current Altitude Reference ALT Key ALT nnnnn fT
Vertical Speed
Holds aircraft vertical speed; may
be used to climb/descend to the
Selected Altitude
VS Key VS nnnn fpm -2000 to
+1500 fpm 100 fpm
Flight Level Change
Holds aircraft airspeed while
aircraft is climbing/descending to
the Selected Altitude
FLC Key FLC nnn kT
80 to 200 kts
(350)
80 to 210 kts
(400)
1 kt
Vertical Path Tracking Captures and tracks descent legs
of an active vertical profile
VNV
Key VPTH
VNAV Target Altitude Capture Captures the Vertical Navigation
(VNAV) Target Altitude ** ALTV
Glidepath
Captures and tracks the SBAS
or baro-VNAV glidepath on
approach APR
Key
GP
Glideslope Captures and tracks the ILS
glideslope on approach GS
Takeoff
Commands a constant pitch angle
and wings level on the ground in
preparation for takeoff GA
Switch
TO 8°
Go Around Commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level GA 7°
* ALTS is armed automatically when PIT, VS, FLC, TO, or GA is active, and under VPTH when the Selected Altitude is to be
captured instead of the VNAV Target Altitude.
** ALTV is armed automatically under VPTH when the VNAV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of the Selected Altitude.
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
440
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated as the active pitch mode by the green annunciation ‘PIT’. This mode may be used for
climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is
automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The pitch
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude
exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to the
nose-up/down limit.
CHANGING THE PITCH REFERENCE
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by:
• Using the
UP/ DN
Wheel
• By pressing the
CWS
Button, hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new pitch reference, then releasing the
CWS
Button
Figure 7-8 Pitch Hold Mode
Selected
Altitude
Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
441
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
• Pitch Hold
• Vertical Speed
• Flight Level Change
• Takeoff/Go Around (if the Selected Altitude is at
least 400 feet above the current aircraft altitude)
• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude is to
be captured instead of the VNAV Target Altitude)
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed (see Figure 7-2 for
example). The ALT SEL Knob is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected
Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed (Figure 7-8). This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 5 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation.
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the
white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 5 seconds to indicate the
automatic transition.
Flash up to Five
Seconds, Indicating
Automatic Transition
Figure 7-9 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
CHANGING THE SELECTED ALTITUDE
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in Selected Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
Use of the ALT SEL Knob to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is active
causes the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the
new Selected Altitude.
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
If Altitude Hold Mode is activated by pressing the
ALT
Key; the flight director maintains the current aircraft
altitude (to the nearest 10 feet). Altitude Hold Mode active is indicated by an ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS
Status Box.
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in either of the following modes:
• Selected Altitude Capture
• VNV Target Altitude Capture
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
442
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
The transition to Altitude Hold Mode automatically occurs when the altitude error is less than 50 feet. In
this case, the Selected or VNV Target Altitude becomes the flight director’s altitude reference. The active mode
annunciation ‘ALT’ appears if the transition was made from VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode.
CHANGING THE ALTITUDE REFERENCE
NOTE: Turning the ALT SEL Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the
flight director’s altitude reference, and does not cancel the mode.
With the
CWS
Button pressed, the aircraft can be hand-flown to a new altitude reference. When the
CWS
Button is released at the desired altitude, the new altitude is established as the altitude reference.
CURRENT SPEED CONTROL (IF AVAILABLE)
Current Speed Control (if available) can be engaged if the autopilot is engaged and Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)
or VNV Target Altitude Capture (ALTV) Mode is active. When the CSC Key is pressed, the Full Authority
Digital Engine Control (FADEC) varies engine thrust to maintain the desired Airspeed Reference (green Airspeed
Reference Bug), within a certain control range.
NOTE: For CSC engagement and disengagement detailed conditions, see the approved Pilot’s Operating
Handbook (POH).
Figure 7-10 Altitude Hold Mode
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Selected
Altitude
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Current Speed
Control Active
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude Reference
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
Airspeed
Reference
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
443
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference (shown above
the Vertical Speed Indicator). Current aircraft vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical
Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical Speed Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent
to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically
armed when Vertical Speed Mode is selected.
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the
VS
Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS Status
Box. The Vertical Speed Reference is displayed above the Vertical Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference
Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is shown on the indicator.
CHANGING THE VERTICAL SPEED REFERENCE
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown above the Vertical Speed Indicator) may be changed by:
• Using the
UP/DN
Wheel
• Pressing the
CWS
Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Vertical Speed Reference, then releasing
the
CWS
Button
Figure 7-11 Vertical Speed Mode
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode
Armed
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug
Selected
Altitude Vertical
Speed
Reference
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
444
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE MODE (FLC)
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.
Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the
FLC
Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference (in IAS or Mach) while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above
the Altimeter). When Flight Level Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected
Altitude, airspeed, Mach, and altitude.
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Flight Level Change Mode
is indicated by a green ‘FLC’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed Reference is displayed
directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a cyan Airspeed Reference Bug corresponding to the Airspeed
Reference along the tape.
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding
to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference. The flight director
maintains the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not
allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.
Figure 7-12 Flight Level Change Mode
Flight Level Change
Mode Active
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode
Armed
Command Bars Indicate Climb
to Attain Selected Altitude
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
Airspeed
Reference
CHANGING THE AIRSPEED REFERENCE (FLC MODE)
The Airspeed Reference (shown above the Airspeed Indicator) may be adjusted by:
• Using the
SPD SEL
Knob
• Pressing the
CWS
Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Airspeed Reference, then releasing the
CWS
Button
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
445
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
During climb, the Airspeed Reference units automatically change from IAS to Mach when either the altitude
or the airspeed listed in Table 7-3 are attained. For descent, the units switch back at the specified altitude
or airspeed. The system determines aircraft climb or descent by the relationship between the current and
Selected altitudes.
Airspeed Reference Units Unit Type Changes At:
Default Units Change To: Altitude Airspeed
Climb IAS Mach > 31,500 ft > M 0.55
Descent Mach IAS < 30,500 ft < 250 kt
Table 7-3 FLC Mode Unit Changes
Airspeed Reference units can be manually toggled between IAS and Mach units by pressing the SPD SEL
Knob. When the FLC Airspeed Reference is displayed in Mach, the Airspeed Reference Bug is displayed
on the Airspeed Indicator at the IAS corresponding to the selected Mach target speed and the current Mach
number is shown below the Airspeed Indicator.
The Airspeed Reference Bug can be set at all times (to be used as a visual reference) except when CSC is
engaged. In CSC mode the Airspeed Reference Bug is fixed and set at the airspeed existing at the time of CSC
engagement. While the bug can be set during these modes it is only being controlled when in FLC mode,
when CSC is engaged, etc.
VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODES (VPTH , ALTV)
NOTE: VNAV is disabled when parallel track or dead reckoning mode is active.
NOTE: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
Vertical Navigation (VNAV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations when
VNAV flight planning is available. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on VNAV flight
plans. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
• The selected navigation source is FMS.
• A VNAV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.
• VNAV is enabled.
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
• The VNAV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.
• Parallel track is not active.
The flight director may be armed for VNAV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNAV flight
control modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon
reaching the last waypoint in the VNAV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and
cancels any armed VNAV modes.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
446
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VERTICAL PATH TRACKING MODE (VPTH)
NOTE: If another pitch mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path
Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The
autopilot guides the aircraft back to the descent path upon release of the CWS Button.
When a vertical profile (VNAV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope Mode
is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable, the
appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNAV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the
Selected Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
Figure 7-13 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within 5 minutes of descent path interception by:
• Pressing the VNV Key
• Adjusting the Selected Altitude
If acknowledgment is not received within 1 minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the Navigation Status
Box and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNAV indications (VNAV Target Altitude, vertical deviation, and
vertical speed required) appear on the PFDs in magenta (Figure 7-14).
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
447
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Figure 7-14 Vertical Path Capture
Vertical Path Tracking
Armed and flashing
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Terminal
Phase
of Flight
FMS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Selected
Altitude
VNAV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile (Figure 7-15). An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed as
appropriate.
Figure 7-15 Vertical Path Tracking Mode
Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
FMS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
VNAV Target Altitude
Capture Armed
Vertical Path
Tracking Active
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indication
VNAV
Target
Altitude
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
448
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
If the Altimeter’s barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path (without
commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNAV vertical
deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft to re-
establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNAV Target Altitude,
the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
aUtomatic reverSion to PitcH HolD moDe
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director to
revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in the
vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by flight plan
changes that affect the vertical profile.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
Unless VNAV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
non-PatH DeScentS
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNAV flight control is selected. If the VS or FLC Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode
is selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode
to allow profile re-capture.
Figure 7-16 Flight Level Change VNV Non-Path Descent
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
449
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
VNAV TARGET ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTV)
NOTE: Armed VNAV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated) whenever VNAV Target Altitude
Capture Mode is armed.
VNAV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNAV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected
Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNAV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNAV Target
Altitudes are shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded
from a database (see the FMS Navigation Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1 minute”
is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNAV Target Altitude is displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator (see Figure 7-14).
As the aircraft nears the VNAV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNAV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the magenta
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT” annunciation.
The VNAV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains
displayed above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) is removed once
VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
At 50 feet from the VNAV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNAV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active,
the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes magenta for 10 seconds to
indicate the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing
upcoming descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
Figure 7-17 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
cHanging tHe vnav target altitUDe
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
Changing the current VNAV Target Altitude while VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes
the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude capture
mode are armed in preparation to capture the new VNAV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude, depending
on which altitude is to be intercepted first.
VNAV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the Flight Management
Section for details).
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
450
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GLIDEPATH MODE (GP)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glidepath Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
guides the aircraft back to the glidepath upon release of the CWS Button.
Glidepath Mode is used to track the SBAS or baro-VNAV glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is
annunciated in white in the AFCS Status Box.
Selecting Glidepath Mode:
1) Ensure a FMS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that FMS is the selected navigation source (use the Active Nav Softkey to cycle through navigation
sources).
3) Press the APR Key.
NOTE: Some RNAV (FMS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized
approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V are considered Nonprecision Approaches (NPA) and
are flown to an MDA even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided.
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical descent angle) with the autopilot coupled, the
aircraft will not level off at the MDA even if the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.
Figure 7-18 Glidepath Mode Armed
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
• A GPS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V) is loaded into the active flight plan.
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF).
• Vertical deviation is valid.
• The CDI is at less than full scale deviation
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
451
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Figure 7-19 Glidepath Mode
Command Bars Indicate
Descent on Glidepath
Glidepath
Mode Active
Glidepath
Indicator
LNAV/VNAV
Approach
Active
FMS is Selected
Navigation
Source
FMS Approach
Mode Active
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
452
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glideslope Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
guides the aircraft back to the glideslope upon release of the CWS Button.
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director
mode.
Selecting Glideslope Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the Active Nav Softkey to cycle through navigation
sources).
3) Press the APR Key.
Or:
1) Ensure that FMS is the selected navigation source (use the Active Nav Softkey to cycle through navigation
sources).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
Figure 7-20 Glideslope Mode Armed
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the glideslope,
the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to intercept and track the glideslope.
Figure 7- 21 Glideslope Mode
NAV1 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source
Command Bars Indicate Descent
on Localizer/Glideslope Path Glideslope
Indicator
Approach
Mode Active Glideslope
Mode Active
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
453
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
TAKEOFF (TO) AND GO AROUND (GA) MODES
In Go Around and Takeoff modes, the flight director commands a constant set pitch attitude. The
TO/GA
Switch
is used to select both modes. The mode entered by the flight director depends on whether the aircraft
is on the ground. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when the aircraft is at least 400 feet
below the Selected Altitude at the time Takeoff or Go Around Mode is selected. When Takeoff or Go Around
mode is activated, the lateral mode is annunciated as ‘ROL’.
Takeoff Mode provides an attitude reference during rotation and takeoff. This mode can be selected only
while on the ground by pushing the TO/GA Switch. The flight director Command Bars assume a wings-level,
pitch-up attitude. Autopilot engagement while Takeoff Mode is active is inhibited while the aircraft is on the
ground.
Pressing the TO/GA Switch while in the air activates the flight director in a wings-level, pitch-up attitude,
allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around. Selecting Go Around Mode disengages the
autopilot; however, subsequent autopilot engagement is allowed. Attempts to modify the aircraft attitude (i.e.,
with the
CWS
Button) result in reversion to Pitch Hold Mode.
Figure 7-22 Takeoff and Go Around Modes
Command Bars Indicate Climb
Go Around
Mode Active Takeoff
Mode Active
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
454
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.4 LATERAL MODES
The following table relates each GFC 700 lateral mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer to the
vertical modes section for information regarding Takeoff and Go Around mode.
Lateral Mode Description Control Annunciation
Maximum Roll
Command
Limit
Roll Hold
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
depending on the commanded
bank angle
(default) ROL 30˚
Low Bank Limits the maximum
commanded roll angle BANK Key *15˚
Heading Select ** Captures and tracks the
Selected Heading HDG Key HDG 30˚
Navigation, FMS **
Captures and tracks the
selected navigation source
(FMS, VOR, LOC) NAV Key
FMS 30˚
Navigation, VOR Enroute Capture/Track ** VOR 25˚ Capture
10˚ Track
Navigation, LOC Capture/Track
(No Glideslope) LOC 25˚ Capture
10˚ Track
Navigation, Backcourse Arm/Capture/Track
Captures and tracks a
localizer signal for backcourse
approaches
BC 25˚ Capture
10˚ Track
Approach, FMS
Captures and tracks the
selected navigation source
(FMS, VOR, LOC)
APR Key
FMS 30˚
Approach, VOR Capture/Track VAPP 25˚ Capture
10˚ Track
Approach, LOC Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode automatically armed) LOC 25˚ Capture
10˚ Track
* No annunciation appears in the AFCS Status Box. The acceptable bank angle range is indicated in green along the Roll
Scale of the Attitude Indicator.
** The Heading, Navigation FMS and Navigation VOR mode maximum roll command limit will be limited to the Low Bank
mode value if it is engaged.
The GFC 700 limits turn rate to 3 degrees per second (standard rate turn).
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes
The CWS Button does not change lateral references for Heading Select, Navigation, Backcourse, or Approach
modes. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading/Course upon release of the CWS Button.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
455
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls the wings level.
When the flight director is activated, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is annunciated as
‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle conditions listed
in Table 7-4.
Figure 7-23 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
Bank Angle Flight Director Response
< 6° Rolls wings level
6° to 30° Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
> 30° Limits bank to 30°
Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses
CHANGING THE ROLL REFERENCE
The roll reference can be changed by pressing the
CWS
Button, establishing the desired bank angle, then
releasing the
CWS
Button.
LOW BANK MODE
When in Low Bank Mode, the flight director limits the maximum commanded roll angle to 15°. Low bank
arc limits are displayed in green along the Roll Scale. Low Bank Mode can be manually selected/deselected by
pressing the BANK Key while in Heading Select or Navigation Modes (FMS and VOR).
Figure 7-24 Low Bank Mode Limits
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
456
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains
the Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a light blue bug on the HSI and in the box to the
upper left of the HSI.
CHANGING THE SELECTED HEADING
NOTE: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob. Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the
aircraft does not change the Selected Heading. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading
upon release of the CWS Button.
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the Bug is turned
more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading changes
of more than 340° at a time result in turn reversals.
Figure 7-25 Heading Select Mode
Command Bars Track
Selected Heading
Selected
Heading Bug
Selected
Heading
Pitch Mode
Active
Heading Select
Mode Active
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
457
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NAVIGATION MODES (FMS, VOR, LOC, BC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active FMS course for the
flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
NOTE: When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director gives commands to capture the active leg at
approximately a 45° angle to the track between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director
does not give commands fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (FMS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows FMS roll steering commands when FMS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering commands
from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision FMS and LOC
approaches where glideslope capture is not required.
Backcourse Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The mode may be selected
by pressing the NAV Key. When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front
course. The flight director creates roll steering commands from the Selected Course and deviation.
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the selected
mode is armed. If the CDI is less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when the NAV Key
is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active roll mode.
Figure 7-26 FMS Navigation Mode Armed
When the CDI has automatically switched from FMS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, FMS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing FMS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed when the automatic navigation source switch takes place. If the APR Key is pressed prior to the
automatic navigation source switch, LOC Navigation Mode is armed.
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
• Navigation source manually switched (with the Active Nav Softkey)
• During a LOC/ILS approach, the FAF is crossed while in FMS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from FMS to LOC.
CHANGING THE SELECTED COURSE
If the navigation source is VOR or LOC, or OBS Mode has been enabled when using FMS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob corresponding to the selected flight director (CRS1 for the pilot
side, CRS2 for the copilot side).
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
458
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in
Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or FMS flight plan) when
the CWS Button is released.
FMS Navigation
Mode Active Pitch Mode
Active
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode
Armed
Figure 7-27 FMS Navigation Mode
Command Bars Indicate Left
Turn to Track FMS Course and Climb
to Intercept Selected Altitude
FMS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Selected
Course
Figure 7-28 Navigation Backcourse Mode
LOC2 is Selected Navigation Source Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
Backcourse
Mode Active
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
459
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
APPROACH MODES (FMS, VAPP, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active FMS course for the
flight director to enter Approach Mode.
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the
selected navigation source (FMS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected
navigation receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when
the CDI is greater than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the
active lateral mode). If the CDI is less than one dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key
is pressed.
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode .
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the Active Nav Softkey to cycle through navigation
sources if necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
When FMS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
Selecting FMS Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a FMS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that FMS is the selected navigation source (use the Active Nav Softkey to cycle through navigation
sources if necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
Figure 7-29 Navigation/Approach Mode Armed
LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC Approach
Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the difference
between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
Selecting LOC Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the Active Nav Softkey to cycle through navigation
sources if necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
460
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Or:
1) Ensure that FMS is the selected navigation source (use the Active Nav Softkey to cycle through navigation
sources if necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated
• Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
• During a LOC/ILS approach, FMS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from FMS to LOC
CHANGING THE SELECTED COURSE
If the navigation source is VOR or LOC, or OBS Mode has been enabled when using FMS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob corresponding to the selected flight director (CRS1 for the pilot
side, CRS2 for the copilot side).
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in
Approach Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or FMS flight plan) when the
CWS Button is released.
INTERCEPTING AND FLYING A DME ARC
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that FMS
Navigation Mode is engaged, FMS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is
the active flight plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on FMS.
Thus, even if the APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides vectors
to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically
intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms FMS Navigation
Mode. The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of the
arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects FMS Navigation
Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
461
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.5 AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
The autopilot and yaw damper operate the flight control surface servos to provide automatic flight control. The
autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands received from the flight director. Pitch
autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim actuator to relieve any sustained effort required by the pitch
servo.
The yaw damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies and coordinates turns. It can operate independently of the
autopilot and may be used during normal hand-flight maneuvers. Yaw rate commands are limited by the yaw
damper.
FLIGHT CONTROL
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos based on the active flight director modes. Yaw damping
is provided by the yaw servo. Servo motor control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo
gearboxes are equipped with slip-clutches that allow the servos to be overridden in case of an emergency.
PITCH AXIS AND TRIM
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during upsets and flight
director maneuvers. Flight director pitch commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with pitch
damper control, and sent to the pitch servo motor.
When the autopilot is engaged, the automatic pitch trim (APT) function commands the pitch trim actuator
to reduce the average pitch servo effort. When the autopilot is not engaged and airspeed is within a certain
range, the pitch trim system provides Mach trim (MT).
Manual electric pitch trim (MEPT) functionality is available at any time via the pilot and copilot MEPT
Switches. Manual trim commands are generated only when both halves of the MEPT Switch are operated
simultaneously. Operating the MEPT Switches when the autopilot is engaged will cause the autopilot to
disconnect. Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
The pilot side MEPT Switch has priority over the copilot side MEPT Switch.
ROLL AXIS
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during upsets and flight director
maneuvers. The flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper
control, and sent to the roll servo motor.
YAW AXIS
The yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s natural Dutch roll response. It also
uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns. Yaw damper operation is independent of autopilot engagement.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
462
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER
NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/disengagement. Use
the CWS Button to disengage the pitch and roll servos while the autopilot remains active.
When the
AP
Key is pressed, the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director (if not already active) are activated.
The flight director engages in Pitch and Roll Hold Modes when initially activated. When the YD Key is pressed,
the system engages the yaw damper independently of the autopilot. Autopilot and yaw damper status are
displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated by green ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciations,
respectively.
Figure 7-30 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Engaged
Autopilot
Engaged
CONTROL WHEEL STEERING
During autopilot operation, the aircraft may be hand-flown without disengaging the autopilot. Pressing and
holding the
CWS
Button disengages the pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and allows the
aircraft to be hand-flown. At the same time, the flight director is synchronized to the aircraft attitude during
the maneuver. Pitch trim operation is interrupted during CWS activity; yaw damper engagement is unaffected.
The ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily replaced by ‘CWS’ in white for the duration of CWS maneuvers.
Figure 7-31 TCS Annunciation
Touch Control Steering
DISENGAGING THE AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER
NOTE: Pressing the AP Key does not disengage the yaw damper.
Manual autopilot disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing red ‘AP’ annunciation and an autopilot
disconnect aural alert, “Autopilot”. The autopilot is manually disengaged by pushing the
AP
Key on the
AFCS Control Unit, the
GA
Switch, the
MEPT
Switches, or the
AP DISC
Switch (also disengages the yaw
damper, if engaged). Pressing the YD Key disengages the yaw damper independently of the autopilot. The ‘YD’
annunciation is removed upon disengagement.
After manual disengagement, the autopilot disconnect aural alert and flashing ‘AP’ annunciation may be
cancelled by pushing the
AP DISC
Switch.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
463
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Figure 7-32 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red and white ‘AP’ annunciation and the autopilot
disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC Switch. Automatic
autopilot disengagement occurs due to:
• System failure
• Invalid sensor data
• Stall warning (YD also disengages)
• Inability to compute default flight director modes
(FD also disengages automatically)
Automatic yaw damper disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘YD’ annunciation. The
yaw damper automatically disengages when autopilot disengagement is caused by failure in a parameter also
affecting the yaw damper. This means the yaw damper can remain operational in some cases where the autopilot
automatically disengages. A localized failure in the yaw damper system or invalid sensor data also cause yaw
damper disengagement.
Figure 7-33 Automatic Autopilot and Yaw Damper Disengagement
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
464
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.6 EXAMPLE PROCEDURES
NOTE: The following example flight plan and diagrams (not to be used for navigation) in this section are
for instructional purposes only and should be considered not current. Numbered portions of accompanying
diagrams correspond to numbered procedure steps.
This section provides a scenario-based set of procedures showing various GFC 700 AFCS modes used during a
flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Charles B. Wheeler Downtown Airport (KMKC), enroute to Colorado
Springs Airport (KCOS). After departure, the aircraft climbs to 12,000 ft and airway V4 is intercepted, following
ATC vectors.
Airway V4 is flown to Salina VOR (SLN) using VOR navigation, then airway V244 is flown using FMS Navigation.
The ILS approach for runway 35L and LPV (WAAS) approach for runway 35R are shown and a missed approach
is executed.
Figure 7-34 Flight Plan Overview
0
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
0
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
KMKC
Lamar
VOR
(LAA)
0
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
KCOS
V 244
V 4
V 244
0
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
Topeka
VOR
(TOP)
DEPARTURE
Climbing to the Selected Altitude and flying an assigned heading:
1) Before takeoff:
a) Use the ALT SEL Knob to set the Selected Altitude to 12,000 feet.
b) Push the GA Switch to activate Takeoff Mode. The flight director Command Bars establish a pitch up attitude
to follow.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
465
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
c) Press the
AP
Key to engage the autopilot in a climb, holding the pitch angle commanded in Takeoff Mode and
wings level.
2) In this example, Vertical Speed Mode is used to capture the Selected Altitude (Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or
Flight Level Change Mode may be used).
a) Press the VS Key to activate Vertical Speed and Roll Hold modes and arm Selected Altitude Capture Mode.
The Vertical Speed Reference may be adjusted after Vertical Speed Mode is selected using the UP/DN Wheel or
pushing the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new Vertical Speed Reference.
3) Use the
HDG
Knob to set the Selected Heading, complying with ATC vectors to intercept Airway V4.
Press the HDG Key to activate Heading Select Mode while the autopilot is engaged in the climb. The autopilot
follows the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
4) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds; the autopilot
transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
466
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Figure 7-35 Departure
Selected Altitude of 12,000 MSL
1
2
3
4
HDG Mode
VS Mode
ALT Mode
TO Mode
TO Mode
KMKC
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
467
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
INTERCEPTING A VOR RADIAL
During climb-out, the autopilot continues to fly the aircraft in Heading Select Mode. Airway V4 to Salina
VOR (SLN) should now be intercepted. Since the enroute flight plan waypoints correspond to VORs, flight
director Navigation Mode using either VOR or FMS as the navigation source may be used. In this scenario, VOR
Navigation Mode is used for navigation to the first VOR waypoint in the flight plan.
Intercepting a VOR radial:
1) Arm VOR Navigation Mode:
a) Tune the VOR frequency.
b) Press the Active Nav Softkey to set the navigation source to VOR.
c) Use the CRS1 or CRS2 Knob to set the Selected Course to the desired value, 255°. Note that at this point, the
flight director is still in Heading Select Mode and the autopilot continues to fly the Selected Heading, 290°.
d) Press the
NAV
Key. This arms VOR Navigation Mode and the white ‘VOR’ annunciation appears below the active
lateral mode.
2) As the aircraft nears the Selected Course, the flight director transitions from Heading Select to VOR Navigation
Mode and the ‘VOR’ annunciation flashes green. The autopilot begins turning to intercept the Selected
Course.
3) The autopilot continues the turn until the aircraft is established on the Selected Course.
0
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
HDG Mode, VOR Armed
VOR NAV Mode
V 4
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
1
2
3
Hdg
290
o
255
o
Figure 7-36 Intercepting a VOR Radial
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
468
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLYING A FLIGHT PLAN/FMS COURSE
NOTE: Changing the navigation source cancels Navigation Mode and causes the flight director to revert to
Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level).
As the aircraft closes on Salina VOR, FMS is used to navigate the next leg, airway V244. The aircraft is
currently tracking inbound on Airway V4.
Flying a FMS flight plan:
1) Transition from VOR to FMS Navigation Mode:
a) Press the
Active Nav
Softkey until FMS is the selected navigation source.
b) Press the
NAV
Key to activate FMS Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft along the active flight
plan leg.
2) Following the flight plan, the autopilot continues to steer the aircraft under FMS guidance. Note that in FMS
Navigation Mode, course changes defined by the flight plan are automatically made without pilot action
required.
Figure 7-37 Transition to GPS Flight Plan
0
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
VOR NAV Mode
GPS NAV Mode
V 244
1
2
V 4
076
o
075
o
260
o
0
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
33
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
469
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
DESCENT
While flying the arrival procedure, the aircraft is cleared for descent in preparation for the approach to KCOS.
Three methods are presented for descent:
• Flight Level Change descent – Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the Selected Altitude at a
constant airspeed. This descent method does not account for flight plan waypoint altitude constraints.
• Vertical Path Tracking descent – Vertical Path Tracking Mode is used to follow the vertical descent path
defined in the FMS flight plan. Altitude constraints correspond to waypoints in the flight plan. Before VNAV
flight control can provide vertical profile guidance, a VNAV flight plan must be entered and enabled.
• Non-path descent in a VNAV scenario – A VNAV flight plan is entered and enabled, however Pitch Hold,
Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the VNAV Target Altitude prior to
reaching the planned TOD. Flight Level Change Mode is used in the example.
Flight Level Change descent:
1) Select Flight Level Change Mode:
a) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude to 10,000 feet.
b) Press the
FLC
Key to activate Flight Level Change Mode. The annunciation ‘FLC’ appears next to the
Airspeed Reference, which defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed
automatically.
2) Use the UP/DN Wheel or push the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft to adjust the commanded airspeed
while maintaining the same power, or reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode while the
autopilot maintains the current airspeed.
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
470
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Figure 7-38 FLC Descent
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
Selected Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode
FLC Mode
ALT Mode
1
2
3
Vertical Path Tracking descent to VNAV Target Altitude:
1) Select coupled VNAV:
a) Press the
VNV
Key to arm Vertical Path Tracking Mode. The white annunciation ‘VPTH’ appears.
b) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude 75 feet below the flight plan’s VNAV Target Altitude of
10,000 feet.
If the Selected Altitude is not at least 75 feet below the VNAV Target Altitude, the flight director captures the
Selected Altitude rather than the VNAV Target Altitude once Vertical Path Tracking Mode becomes active (ALTS
is armed rather than ALTV).
c) If Vertical Path Tracking Mode is armed more than 5 minutes prior to descent path capture, acknowledgment is
required for the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode. To proceed with
descent path capture if the white ‘VPTH’ annunciation begins flashing, do one of the following
• Press the VNV Key
• Turn the ALT SEL Knob to adjust the Selected Altitude
If the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
2) When the top of descent (TOD) is reached, the flight director transitions to Vertical Path Tracking Mode and
begins the descent to the VNAV Target Altitude. Intention to capture the VNAV Target Altitude is indicated by
the white ‘ALTV’ annunciation.
3) As the aircraft nears the VNAV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNAV Target Altitude Capture
Mode, indicated by the magenta ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
471
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
The magenta ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNAV Target
Altitude; the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
Figure 7-39 VPTH Descent
3 nm
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL ALT Mode
VPTH Mode
Selected Altitude (set below VNAV Target Altitude)
1
2
3
TOD
BOD
ALT Mode
Along-track Offset, 3 nm before OPSHN
Non-path descent using Flight Level Change Mode:
1) Using Flight Level Change Mode, command a non-path descent to an intermediate altitude above the next
VNAV flight plan altitude.:
a) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the current aircraft altitude to an altitude (in this case,
9,400 feet) at which to level off between VNAV flight plan altitudes.
b) Press the FLC Key before the planned TOD during an altitude hold while VPTH is armed. The Airspeed Reference
defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Vertical Path Tracking and Selected Altitude Capture Mode are armed
automatically.
2) Reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode. The autopilot maintains the Airspeed Reference.
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft. After leveling off, reset selected altitude at
or below 9,000 ft.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
472
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
4) When the next TOD is reached, Vertical Path Tracking becomes active (may require acknowledgment to allow
descent path capture).
5) As the aircraft nears the VNAV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNAV Target Altitude Capture
Mode, indicated by the magenta ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
The magenta ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNAV Target
Altitude; the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
Figure 7-40 Non-path Descent
OPSHN
3 nm HABUK
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
VNAV Target Altitude of 9,000 MSL ALT Mode
Planned Descent Path
Selected Altitude of 9,400 MSL
ALT Mode
VPTH Mode
1
2
3
FLC Mode
4
VPTH Mode
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude
5
TOD
Planned
TOD
BOD
BOD
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
473
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
APPROACH
Flying an ILS approach:
1) Transition from FMS Navigation Mode to Heading Select Mode.
a) Select the Runway 35L ILS approach for KCOS and select ‘VECTORS’ for the transition. Load and activate the
approach into the flight plan.
b) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading after getting vectors from ATC.
c) Press the HDG Key. The autopilot turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
d) Use Heading Select Mode to comply with ATC vectors as requested.
2) Arm LOC Approach and Glideslope modes.
a) Ensure the appropriate localizer frequency is tuned.
b) Press the APR Key when cleared for approach to arm Approach and Glideslope modes. ‘LOC’ and ‘GS’ appear
in white as armed mode annunciations.
c)
The navigation source automatically switches to LOC. After this switch occurs, the localizer signal can be captured
and the flight director determine when to begin the turn to intercept the final approach course. The flight director
now provides guidance to the missed approach point.
3) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the ILS approach:
• Push the AP DISC Switch at the decision height and land the aircraft.
• Use the
GA Switch
to execute a missed approach.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
474
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
HDG Mode
LOC APR/
GS Mode
PETEY
1
2
3
GPS NAV Mode
KCOS
PYNON
Figure 7-41 ILS Approach to KCOS
Flying a RNAV FMS approach with vertical guidance:
1) Arm flight director modes for a RNAV FMS approach with vertical guidance:
a) Make sure the navigation source is set to FMS (use Active Nav Softkey to change navigation source).
b) Select the Runway 35R LPV approach for KCOS. Load and activate the approach into the flight plan.
2) Press the APR Key once clearance for approach has been received. FMS Approach Mode is activated and
Glidepath Mode is armed.
3) Once the glidepath is captured, Glidepath Mode becomes active. The flight director now provides guidance to
the missed approach point.
4) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the approach:
• Push the AP DISC Switch at the decision height and land the aircraft.
• Use the
GA Switch
to execute a missed approach.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
475
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
4
GPS APR/
GP Mode
FA
LUR
1
2
3
GPS NAV Mode
KCOS
HABUK
PYNON
CEGI
X
Figure 7-42 LPV Approach to KCOS
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
476
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GO AROUND/MISSED APPROACH
NOTE: As a result of calculations performed by the system while flying the holding pattern, the display may
re-size automatically and the aircraft may not precisely track the holding pattern as depicted on the PFD and
MFD.
Flying a missed approach:
1) Push the GA Switch at the Decision height and apply go-around power to execute a missed approach. The
flight director Command Bars establish a nose-up climb to follow. If flying an ILS or LOC approach the CDI also
switches to FMS as the navigation source.
Note that when the
GA Switch
is pushed, the missed approach is activated and the autopilot disconnects,
indicated by the ‘AP’ annunciation flashing yellow for 5 seconds and the autopilot disconnect aural alert.
Flashes 5 sec
2) Start the climb to the prescribed altitude in the published Missed Approach Procedure.
a) Press the
AP
Key to re-engage the autopilot.
b) Press the
NAV
Key to have the autopilot fly to the hold.
3) Use the
ALT SEL Kno
b to set a Selected Altitude to hold.
To hold the current airspeed during the climb, press the FLC Key.
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
477
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
4) The autopilot flies the holding pattern after the missed approach is activated. Annunciations are displayed in
the Navigation Status Box.
Figure 7-43 Go Around/Missed Approach
3
4
1
2
KCOS
MOGAL
GA Mode
GPS NAV Mode
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
478
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.7 AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
AFCS CAS MESSAGES
Crew Alerting System (CAS) messages related to the AFCS are listed in Table 7-5. CAS messages appear on
the PFDs in the window to the right of the Altimeter. Refer to the EAS Section for details.
CAS Message Description
AP FAIL Loss of AP function
AUTO PTRIM FAIL Auto pitch trim failure; other pitch trim functions still available
AP PITCH MISTRIM Airplane mistrimmed in pitch axis when AP is engaged
AP ROLL MISTRIM Airplane mistrimmed in roll axis when AP is engaged
YD FAIL Loss of yaw damper function
YD MISTRIM Airplane mistrimmed in yaw axis when YD is engaged
PTRIM NML FAIL Loss of normally-operating pitch trim actuator
PTRIM BKP FAIL Loss of backup pitch trim actuator
PTRIM SW1 FAIL Failure of pilot pitch trim switch
PTRIM SW2 FAIL Failure of copilot pitch trim switch
Table 7-5 AFCS CAS Messages
AFCS VOICE ALERTS
The voice alerts listed in Table 7-6 relate to the AFCS; for a complete list of voice alerts, see Appendix A.
Voice Alert Description
“Autopilot” Warning – Autopilot is disengaged
Single alert for manual AP disengagement
Continuous alert for automatic AP disengagement; cancelled with AP DISC Switch
“Flight Director” Single warning – Flight director has reverted to a default mode
“Trim, Trim, Trim” Continuous advisory (stops after 6 seconds) – MEPT Switch malfunction
Table 7-6 AFCS Voice Alerts
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
479
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director and pitch commands are limited for overspeed protection.
Overspeed protection is provided in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and maintain the mode
reference for the selected vertical mode without exceeding the certified maximum autopilot airspeed.
When an autopilot overspeed condition occurs, a flashing yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation appears above the
Airspeed Indicator and the voice alert “High Speed” is generated. Engine power should be reduced and/or the
pitch reference adjusted to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is
resolved.
Figure 7-45 Overspeed Annunciation
Airspeed
Indicator
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B
480
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Blank Page
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
481
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: Regardless of the availability of SafeTaxi
®
, ChartView, or FliteCharts
®
, it may be necessary to carry
another source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the Vision Flight Deck include the following:
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
• ChartView and FliteCharts® electronic charts
• Airport Directory (AOPA or AC-U-KWIK)
• Iridium satellite telephone
• Data Link Services
• SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
• Scheduler
• Electronic Documents
• Flight Data Logging
• Electronic Checklists
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the United
States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the airport layout
can be seen.
FliteCharts and optional ChartView provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic charts
offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be configured
in the system, but not both.
The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory offer detailed information for a selected airport, such as available
services, hours of operation, and lodging options.
Telephone and Data Link Services are optional subscription services offered through Garmin Flight Data Services
and Iridium Satellite LLC. Voice and SMS messaging communications are through the Iridium Satellite Network.
Data communications are through Iridium Data Services, or a wireless network (Wi-Fi) when the aircraft is on the
ground. Incorporated in this feature set is a System Data Logging function which records aircraft system parameters
specified by the aircraft manufacturer. This data is then uploaded to Garmin Flight Data Services through one of the
data communications options.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver handles
more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment choices and
longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as Switch
fuel tanks, Change oil, or Altimeter-Transponder Check in the Messages display on the Touchscreen Controller.
The Electronic Document function allows viewing of electronic documents on PFD and/or MFD displays.
Optional electronic checklists help to quickly find the proper procedure on the ground or during flight.
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card. Approximately
1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B482
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 SAFETAXI
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range on the
Navigation Map or the Inset Map on the PFD. The maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable.
When viewing at ranges close enough to show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying
letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other
prominent features. Resolution is greater at lower map ranges. When the aircraft’s current position is within the
SafeTaxi view, the airplane symbol on the airport provides enhanced position awareness.
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
Any map display that show the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of displays where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map
• Inset Map (PFD)
• Weather Datalink
• Airport Information
• Intersection Information
• NDB Information
• VOR Information
• User Waypoint Information
• Trip Planning
• Nearest
• Active Flight Plan
• Stored Flight Plan
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Charlie approaching a designated Airport Hot Spot
boundary on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features
such as runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
Airport
Features
Taxiway
Identification
Airport Hot
Spot Outline
Figure 8-1 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Display
Aircraft
Position
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
483
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Enabling/Disabling SafeTaxi:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If not already selected, touch the Aviation Tab.
3) If necessary, scroll to display the SafeTaxi Annunciator Button.
4) Touch the SafeTaxi Button to enable or disable the display of SafeTaxi on the Navigation and Inset maps. A
green annunciator on the button indicates SafeTaxi is enabled.
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Map > Map Settings.
2) If not already selected, touch the Aviation Tab.
3) If necessary, scroll to display the SafeTaxi Range Button.
4) Touch the SafeTaxi Range Button. A selection of ranges is displayed.
5) Touch the desired range. In Figure 8-2, 4 NM has been selected. With this setting, SafeTaxi will be displayed
on the Navigation Map for range settings up to, and including 4 NM.
Figure 8-2 SafeTaxi Map Settings
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B484
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SAFETAXI DATABASE INFORMATION
The SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is available for use after the expiration date. When
turning on the system, the MFD Power-up Display indicates the expiration date and status of the database.
Figure 8-3 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database
SafeTaxi Database
Power-up Page Display Definition
Normal operation. SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle.
SafeTaxi database has expired.
Database card contains no SafeTaxi data.
Table 8-1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can be viewed by
selecting the MFD1, PFD1, and PFD2 Databases Screen.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
485
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Viewing SafeTaxi database information:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) If not already selected, touch the Database Tab.
3) Touch the desired button (PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1).
4) Scroll to view the SafeTaxi database information, as shown in Figure 8-4.
Figure 8-4 MFD SafeTaxi Database Information
The SafeTaxi database cycle number shown in the figure, 12S3, is deciphered as follows:
12 – Indicates the year 2012
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi
3 – Indicates the third issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year
The SafeTaxi ‘Effective’ date 3–MAY–2012 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The SafeTaxi
‘Expires’ date 26–JUL–2012 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
The ‘Effective’ date is the beginning date for this database cycle. The ‘Effective’ date appears in yellow when
the current date is before the effective date (Figure 8-5). The ‘Expires’ date is the revision date for the next
database cycle. The ‘Expires’ date appears in yellow when expired. ‘Not Available’ indicates the SafeTaxi
database is not available on the database card or no database card is inserted. An expired SafeTaxi database is
not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
Refer to Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.
Figure 8-5 SafeTaxi Database Status
Current Date is before Effective Date SafeTaxi Database has Expired SafeTaxi Database Not Installed
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B486
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.2 CHARTVIEW (OPTIONAL)
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in
full color with high-resolution. The Display Pane depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the
planview of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes (Figure 8-6) are not considered within the chart
boundaries. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol
is removed from the display.
Figure 8-6 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey shading is for
illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or Display Pane. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of this
information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft
symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to
the off-scale area.
Figure 8-6 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
Off-Scale
Area
Off-Scale
Areas
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams
• Chart NOTAMs
NOTE
: Only NOTAMs applicable to specific information conveyed on the displayed Jeppesen chart are
available. There may be other NOTAMs available pertaining to the flight that may not be displayed. Contact
Jeppesen for more information regarding Jeppesen database-published NOTAMs.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
487
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHART SELECTION
When a flight plan is active, or when flying direct-to a destination, the initial set of charts made available
pertain to the departure airport. After departing the airport environment, the initial chart set made available
pertains to the destination airport. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination,
the initial chart set is made available for the nearest airport.
Selecting Charts using the Charts Screen:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Charts.
2) The airport for which charts will be displayed is shown at the top of the Charts Screen. Touch the Airport Button
to enter another airport.
3) Touch the Info Tab to display the airport information selection buttons for the selected airport (Figure 8-7).
• Departure Tab to display a list of possible departures for the selected airport.
• Arrival Tab to display a list of possible arrivals for the selected airport.
• Approach Tab to display a list of possible approaches for the selected airport.
4) Touch the desired information button in any of these lists to display the applicable chart on the selected Display
Pane.
Figure 8-7 Airport Diagram Selection Figure 8-8 Airport Diagram View Options
5) Touch the Charts Options Button to select the desired display option for the selected chart (Figure 8-8).
6) Touch All to display the complete Airport Diagram. Fit Width displays the full width of the Airport Diagram. Plan
displays only the diagram portion of the chart. Minimums displays only the approach minimums on an approach
chart. Profile displays only the descent profile on the approach chart. Header displays the chart heading. Only
appropriate views are available for the selected chart.
7) Touch Back to return to the Charts Screen.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B488
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting Airport Diagrams from the Nearest Airports Screen:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Nearest > Airport.
2) Touch the desired airport button. KCOS is selected in this example. The Waypoint Options buttons are
displayed as shown in Figure 8-9.
Figure 8-9 Airport Diagram Selection
3) Touch the Airport Chart Button. The Info Tab selections are displayed on the Touchscreen Controller (Figure
8-9) and the Airport Diagram is displayed on the selected Display Pane (Figure 8-10).
Figure 8-10 Airport Chart for Selected Airport
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within the
boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears. If the
Chart Scale Box displays a banner ‘NOT TO SCALE’, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The Aircraft Not Shown
Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
489
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When no terminal procedure chart is available for the nearest airport or the selected airport, the banner
‘CHART NOT AVAILABLE’ appears on the screen. The ‘CHART NOT AVAILABLE’ banner does not refer to
the Jeppesen subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a
selected airport.
Figure 8-11 Chart Not Available Banner
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
‘UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART’ is then displayed.
Figure 8-12 Unable To Display Chart Banner
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment.
Selecting Day, Night, or Auto View:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Charts > Charts Options.
2) Touch the Light Mode Button (Figure 8-8).
3) Touch the Day, Night, or Auto button (Figure 8-13). The selection is annunciated on the Light Mode Button.
When Auto is selected, the display will change to the appropriate day or night setting, dependent on ambient
lighting.
Figure 8-13 Selecting Day/Night View
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B490
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Touch the Threshold button (Figure 8-14). The Auto Light Mode Threshold window is displayed.
Select Chart Options Adjust Threshold Setting
Figure 8-14 Setting Day/Night Switching Threshold
5) Move the slider left or right to set the desired threshold. Setting the Threshold Level percentage to the same
percentage shown as the Current MFD Backlight Level will cause the Day/Night view to switch at the current
backlight setting. Adjusting the Threshold Level setting larger than the Current MFD Backlight Level will cause
the display to remain in Night Mode longer. Adjusting the Threshold Level setting smaller than the Current MFD
Backlight Level will cause the display to change to Day Mode sooner.
Figure 8-15 Airport Diagram, Day View
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
491
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-16 Airport Diagram, Night View
CHARTVIEW DATABASE INFORMATION
The ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from
the cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no
longer available for viewing. When turning on the system, the MFD Power-up Display shows the current status
of the ChartView database. See the following table for the various ChartView Power-up Display annunciations
and the definition of each.
Figure 8-17 Power-up Page, ChartView Database
ChartView Database
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B492
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Power-up Display Definition
Blank Line. System is not configured for ChartView. Contact a Garmin-
authorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is installed.
Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database.
Normal operation. ChartView database is valid and within current
cycle.
ChartView database is within 1 week after expiration date. A new cycle
is available for update.
ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date, but still
within the 70 day viewing period.
ChartView database has timed out. Database is beyond 70 days after
expiration date. ChartView database is no longer available for viewing.
System time is not available. GPS satellite data is unknown or the
system has not yet locked onto satellites. Check database cycle number
for effectivity.
System is verifying chart database when new cycle is installed for the
first time.
After verifying, chart database is found to be corrupt. ChartView is not
available.
Table 8-2 ChartView Annunciations and Definitions
The ChartView status information can be found on the MFD1, PFD1, PFD2, GTC1, and GTC2 Databases
Screen (Figure 8-18). The ‘Expires’ date is the revision date for the next database cycle. The ‘Expires’ date
appears in yellow when expired. ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days after the ChartView ‘Expires’ date is
reached. This is shown as the ‘Disables’ date. When the disables date is reached, the date is displayed in yellow.
Also, the Charts Button on the Home Screen appears subdued and is disabled until a new issue of ChartView
is installed.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
493
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Viewing ChartView database information:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) Touch the Database Tab.
3) Touch the button corresponding to the display (MFD1, PFD1, PFD2, GTC1, or GTC2) for which the database
information will be viewed.
4) Scroll to display the ChartView database information as shown in Figure 8-18.
Figure 8-18 MFD ChartView Database Information
The ChartView database cycle number shown in Figure 8-18, 1218, is deciphered as follows:
12 – Indicates the year 2012
18 – Indicates the eightenth issue of the ChartView database for the year
The ‘Expires’ date 16–SEP–2012 is the date that this database should be replaced with the next issue.
The ‘Disables’ date 25–NOV–2012 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
The ChartView database is obtained directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B494
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Example database currency conditions are shown in Figure 8-19. The ‘Expires’ date, in yellow, is the revision
date for the next database cycle. The ‘Disables’ date, in yellow, is the date that this database cycle is no longer
viewable. ‘Not Available’ indicates no ChartView data is available on the database card or no database card is
inserted.
Figure 8-19 ChartView Database Status
ChartView Database has expired,
but is not Disabled ChartView Database is Disabled ChartView Database Not Installed
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
495
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.3 FLITECHARTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area
depicted on some charts.
Figure 8-20 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on
the published chart. These off-scale areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the
depicted geographical position of this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic
position. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is
relative to the chart planview, not to the off-scale area.
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams
Figure 8-20 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
Off-Scale
Area
Off-Scale
Areas
Off-Scale
Area
Off-Scale
Areas
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B496
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
CHART SELECTION
When a flight plan is active, or when flying direct-to a destination, the initial set of charts made available
pertains to the departure airport. After departing the airport environment, the initial chart set made available
pertains to the destination airport. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination,
the initial chart set is made available for the nearest airport.
Selecting Charts using the Charts Screen:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Charts.
2) The airport for which charts will be displayed is shown at the top of the Charts Screen. Touch the Airport Button
to enter another airport.
3) Touch the Info Tab to display the airport information selection buttons for the selected airport (Figure 8-21).
• Departure Tab to display a list of possible departures for the selected airport.
• Arrival Tab to display a list of possible arrivals for the selected airport.
• Approach Tab to display a list of possible approaches for the selected airport.
4) Touch the desired information button in any of these lists to display the applicable chart on the selected Display
Pane.
Figure 8-21 Airport Diagram Selection Figure 8-22 Airport Diagram Viewing Options
5) Touch the Charts Options Button to display the viewing options available for the selected chart (Figure 8-22).
6) Touch Fit Width to display the full width of the chart.
7) Touch Back to return to the Charts Screen.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
497
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Selecting Airport Diagrams from the Nearest Airports Screen:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Nearest > Airport.
2) Touch the desired airport button. KCOS is selected in Figure 8-23. The Waypoint Options buttons are now
displayed.
Figure 8-23 Airport Diagram Selection
3) Touch the Airport Chart Button. The Info Tab selections are displayed on the Touchscreen Controller (Figure
8-23) and the Airport Diagram is displayed on the selected Display Pane (Figure 8-24).
Figure 8-24 Airport Chart for Selected Airport
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within the
boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears. If the
Chart Scale Box displays a banner ‘NOT TO SCALE’, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The Aircraft Not Shown
Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B498
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When no terminal procedure chart is available for the nearest airport or the selected airport, the banner
‘CHART NOT AVAILABLE’ appears on the screen. The ‘CHART NOT AVAILABLE’ banner does not refer to
the Jeppesen subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a
selected airport.
Figure 8-25 Chart Not Available Banner
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
‘UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART’ is then displayed.
Figure 8-26 Unable To Display Chart Banner
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment.
Selecting Day, Night, or Auto View:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Charts > Charts Options.
2) Touch the Light Mode Button (Figure 8-28).
3) Touch the Day, Night, or Auto button. The selection is annunciated on the Light Mode Button. When Auto
is selected, the display will change to the appropriate day or night setting, dependent on ambient lighting.
Figure 8-27 Selecting Day/Night View
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
499
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Touch the Threshold button (Figure 8-28). The Auto Light Mode Threshold window is displayed.
Select Chart Options Adjust Threshold Setting
Figure 8-28 Setting Day/Night Switching Threshold
5) Move the slider left or right to set the desired threshold. Setting the Threshold Level percentage to the same
percentage shown as the Current MFD Backlight Level will cause the Day/Night view to switch at the current
backlight setting. Adjusting the Threshold Level setting larger than the Current MFD Backlight Level will cause
the display to remain in Night Mode longer. Adjusting the Threshold Level setting smaller than the Current MFD
Backlight Level will cause the display to change to Day Mode sooner.
Figure 8-29 Airport Diagram, Day View
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B500
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Figure 8-30 Airport Diagram, Night View
FLITECHARTS CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the cycle
expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts is disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no longer
available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the system, the MFD Power-up Display
shows the current status of the FliteCharts database. See the following table for the various FliteCharts Power-
up Display annunciations and the definition of each.
Figure 8-31 Power-up Display, FliteCharts Database
FliteCharts Database
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
501
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Power-up Display Definition
Blank Line. System is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact a Garmin-
authorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is installed.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the FliteCharts
database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within the
180 day viewing period.
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.
Table 8-3 FliteCharts Annunciations and Definitions
‘FliteCharts Expires’ plus a date in white, indicates the chart database is current. ‘Chart data is out of date!’
in yellow, indicates charts are still viewable, but approaching the disable date.
When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates that the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
FliteCharts status information can be found on the MFD1, PFD1, PFD2, GTC1, and GTC2 Databases Screen
(Figure 8-32). The ‘Expires’ date is the revision date for the next database cycle. The ‘Expires’ date appears in
yellow when expired.
FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts ‘Expires’ date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the ‘Disables’ date. When the disables date is attained, the date is
displayed in yellow. Also, Charts Button on the Home Screen then appears subdued and is disabled until a
new issue of FliteCharts is installed.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B502
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Viewing FliteCharts database information:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) Touch the Database Tab.
3) Touch the button corresponding to the display (MFD1, PFD1, PFD2, GTC1, or GTC2) for which the database
information will be viewed.
4) Scroll to display the FliteCharts database information as shown in Figure 8-32.
Figure 8-32 MFD FliteCharts Database Information
The FliteCharts database cycle number shown in the figure, 1208, is deciphered as follows:
12 – Indicates the year 2012
08 – Indicates the eighth issue of the FliteCharts database for the year
The FliteCharts ‘Expires’ date 16–JUN–12 is the last date that this database is current.
The ‘Disables’ date 25–NOV–12 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
The FliteCharts database is obtained from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.
Example database currency conditions are shown in Figure 8-33. The ‘Expires’ date, in yellow, is the revision
date for the next database cycle. The ‘Disables’ date, in yellow, is the date that this database cycle is no longer
viewable. ‘Not Available’ indicates no FliteCharts data is available on the database card or no database card is
inserted.
Figure 8-33 FliteCharts Database Status
FliteCharts Database has expired,
but is not Disabled FliteCharts Database is Disabled FliteCharts Database Not Installed
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
503
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.4 AIRPORT DIRECTORY
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases offer detailed
information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more for various airports. This
information is viewed on the Airport Directory Info Screen as shown in Figure 8-35.
Selecting the Airport Directory Info Screen:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Nearest > Airports.
2) A list of the nearest airports to the aircraft present position is displayed, beginning with the closest. Touch the
desired airport, in this case KCOS. The Waypoint Options buttons are displayed as shown in Figure 8-34.
3) Touch the Airport Info Button to display the Airport Directory Info Screen.
4) Touch the AOPA Tab to display the Airport Directory information for the selected airport as shown in Figure
8-35.
Figure 8-35 AOPA Airport Directory InformationFigure 8-34 Nearest Airport Selection
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B504
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AIRPORT DIRECTORY DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER & REVISION
The Airport Directory database is revised every 56 days. Check fly.garmin.com for the current database. The
Airport Directory is always available for use after the expiration date. When turning on the system, the Power-
up Display indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or not available.
Figure 8-36 Power-up Page, Airport Directory Database
Airport Database
Power-up Display Definition
Normal operation. Airport Directory database is valid and within
current cycle.
Airport Directory database has expired.
Database card contains no Airport Directory data.
Table 8-4 Airport Directory Annunciation Definitions
The Airport Directory ‘Region’, ‘Version’, ‘Cycle’, ‘Effective’ date and ‘Expires’ date of the database cycle can
also be found on the Touchscreen Controller, as seen in Figure 8-37.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
505
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Viewing Airport Directory database information:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) Touch the Database Tab.
3) Touch the button corresponding to the display (MFD1, PFD1, PFD2, GTC1, or GTC2) for which the database information
will be viewed.
4) Scroll to display the Airport Directory database information as shown in Figure 8-37.
Figure 8-37 MFD Airport Directory Database Information
The Airport Directory database cycle number shown in the figure, 12D3, is deciphered as follows:
12 – Indicates the year 2012
D – Indicates the data is for Airport Directory
3 – Indicates the third issue of the Airport Directory database for the year
The Airport Directory ‘Effective’ date 31–MAY–2012 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The
Airport Directory ‘Expires’ date 26–JUL–2012 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
The ‘Effective’ date appears in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The ‘Expires’ date
appears in yellow when expired (Table 8-4). ‘Not Available’ appears in the ‘Region’ field if Airport Directory
data is not available on the database card. An expired Airport Directory database is not disabled and will
continue to function indefinitely.
Current Date is before Effective Date
Figure 8-38 Airport Directory Airport Database Status
Airport Directory Database has Expired Airport Directory Database Not Installed
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B506
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.5 SATELLITE TELEPHONE AND DATALINK SERVICES
NOTE
: Separate accounts must be established to access the Iridium satellite network for voice and Garmin
Flight Data Services for data transmission of maintenance reports.
The optional GDL 59 Data Link provides an aircraft systems data logger for communication of potential
maintenance issues and, while the aircraft is on the ground, a high speed (IEEE 802.11g) Wi-Fi data link between
the aircraft and a ground computer network. The GDL 59 can also be paired with an optional GSR 56 Iridium
Transceiver providing an airborne low speed data link, Iridium Satellite Telephone service and SMS text messaging.
REGISTERING WITH CONNEXT
A subscriber account must be established prior to using the Iridium Satellite System. Before setting up an
Iridium account, obtain the System ID and serial number of the Iridium Transceiver (GSR1) by performing the
following procedure. Contact Garmin International Aviation Product Services at 1-866-739-5687 in the United
States or 913-397-8200, ext. 1135.
Registering the system for data link services:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) If necessary, touch the Airframe Tab. Note the System ID number as seen in Figure 8-39. This number will be
needed when contacting Garmin Connext Services to establish the account.
Figure 8-39 System ID Number Figure 8-40 Iridium Transceiver Serial Number (GSR1)
3) Touch the LRU Info Tab. Scroll to view ‘GSR1’ and note the serial number (Figure 8-40), which will also be
needed when contacting Garmin Flight Data Services.
4) Contact Garmin International Aviation Product Services to establish an account and receive an access code.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
507
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
5) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Connext Registration > Register (Figure 8-41).
Figure 8-42 Entering the Access CodeFigure 8-41 Connext Registration Display
6) Enter the access code as shown in Figure 8-42.
7) Touch the Enter Button.
CONTACTS
Names, telephone numbers, and email addresses may be entered and stored. These contacts may be used
to place telephone calls or send email and text messages.
Creating a new contact:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Contacts.
2) The Contacts Screen is displayed as shown in Figure 8-44.
Figure 8-44 Contact ListFigure 8-43 Services Menu
3) Touch New Contact... at the top of the list (Figure 8-44).
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B508
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Touch Name, shown in Figure 8-45. The Contact Name entry screen is displayed.
Figure 8-46 Enter NameFigure 8-45 Enter New Contact Information
5) Enter the name of the new contact as the example shows in Figure 8-46.
6) Touch Enter.
7) Touch Telephone Number. The Telephone Number entry screen is displayed.
Figure 8-48 Enter Telephone NumberFigure 8-47 Select Telephone Number
8) Enter the telephone number of the new contact as the example shows in Figure 8-48.
9) Touch Enter.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
509
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
10) Touch Email Address. The Email Address entry screen is displayed.
Figure 8-50 Enter Email AddressFigure 8-49 Select Email Address
11) Enter the email address of the new contact as the example shows in Figure 8-50.
12) Touch Enter.
13) Touch Create. The new contact is created and appears in the list of contacts as shown in Figure 8-52.
Figure 8-52 Enter Email AddressFigure 8-51 New Contact Info Complete
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B510
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION (OPTIONAL)
The pilot or copilot can place and answer calls on the Iridium satellite network.
Viewing the Telephone Status:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Telephone.
2) The Telephone Screen is displayed as shown in Figure 8-54.
Figure 8-54 Telephone Status InformationFigure 8-53 Telephone Service Selection
The Telephone Screen, as shown in Figure 8-54, gives a graphical representation of the current disposition
of voice and/or data transmissions.
ENABLE/DISABLE THE IRIDIUM SYSTEM CONNECTION
Connection with the Iridium Satellite System may be turned on or off by using the page menu.
To enable/disable the Iridium system connection:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Telephone.
2) Touch the Iridium #1 Button to display the Iridium #1 Transceiver Screen, as shown in Figure 8-55.
3) Touch the Disable Iridium Transmission Annunciator Button to disable (green annunciator an in Figure
8-56) the transceiver. Touch the button again to enable (gray annunciator) the transceiver.
Figure 8-56 Iridium Transceiver DisabledFigure 8-55 Iridium Transceiver Enabled
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
511
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
INCOMING CALLS
Incoming voice calls from an external telephone phone through the Iridium Satellite Network , or the cabin
telephone, are annunciated by a flashing TEL Button on the GTC Button Bar, as shown in Figure 8-57, and
an “Incoming Call” voice alert. Incoming external calls can be answered by either the cockpit or cabin phone.
To answer a call from the cockpit:
1) Touch the flashing TEL Button. The Notifications Screen is displayed as in Figure 8-58.
2) Touch the Answer Button. The call is now connected as indicated in Figure 8-60. Touching the Ignore Button
extinguishes the new call annunciation and the call remains disconnected. Touching Telephone will display
the Telephone Screen as shown in Figure 8-59.
Figure 8-58 Telephone Notification SelectedFigure 8-57 Incoming Call Notification
Figure 8-60 Ending the Connected CallFigure 8-59 Incoming Call on Telephone Screen
3) When the call is finished, touch End Call (Figure 8-60) to disconnect the call.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B512
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
OUTGOING CALLS
Voice calls can be made from the cockpit or the cabin to an external telephone through the Iridium Satellite
Network. Calls are made from the cabin are made using the cabin handset.
To make an external call from the cockpit:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Telephone.
2) Touch the Cockpit Phone Button. The Cockpit Phone Screen is displayed as shown in Figure 8-61.
3) Touch Dial. The phone number entry screen is displayed as shown in Figure 8-62.
Figure 8-62 Telephone Number EntryFigure 8-61 Cockpit Telephone Status
5) Using the number keys, enter the phone number. Touch Find to select a phone number from the Contact List.
The International dialing sequence is necessary to place a call from the cockpit to an external phone: Country
Code + City/Area Code (if any) + Telephone Number. The following country codes may be used when calling
other satellite telephone systems.
Satellite System Country Code
Inmarsat 870
ICO 8810 or 8811
Ellipso 8812 or 8813
Iridium 8816 or 8817
Globalstar 8818 or 8819
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
513
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
6) Touch Enter. The system now begins establishing a connection as indicated in Figure 8-63. The system will
indicate a completed connection, as shown in Figure 8-64, when the telephone to which the call is made is
answered.
Figure 8-64 Telephone ConnectedFigure 8-63 Establishing a Connection
To end a call:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Telephone.
2) Touch the Cockpit Phone Button. The Cockpit Phone Screen is displayed as shown in Figure 8-65.
3) Touch End Call.
Figure 8-66 System is Idle After Ending CallFigure 8-65 Ending the Call
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B514
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
MAKING A CALL TO THE CABIN
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Telephone.
2) Touch the Cockpit Phone Button. The Cockpit Phone Screen is displayed as shown in Figure 8-65.
2) Touch Call Cabin. A display similar to Figure 8-67 will be shown.
Figure 8-68 Cabin Telephone ConnectedFigure 8-67 Connecting to the Cabin Telephone
3) When the cabin phone is answered, the connection is indicated as seen in Figure 8-68.
PLACING THE COCKPIT PHONE ON HOLD
A call connected to the cockpit phone can be placed on hold from the Telephone Screen. The cabin phone
cannot be placed on hold using the Touchscreen Controller, however, the cabin handset may used to place a
cabin call on hold.
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Telephone.
2) Touch the Cockpit Phone Button. The Cockpit Phone Screen is displayed as in Figure 8-69.
3) Touch Hold. The Telephone Screen indicates the call is on hold as in Figure 8-70.
Figure 8-70 Hold ActivatedFigure 8-69 Selecting the Cockpit Phone for Hold
4) Touch Hold again to return to the call.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
515
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TRANSFERRING A CALL FROM THE COCKPIT
From the cockpit phone, an external call can be transferred to the cabin phone, or a call with the cabin
phone can be transferred to an external phone.
Transferring a call:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Telephone.
2) Touch the Cockpit Phone Button. The Cockpit Phone Screen is displayed as in Figure 8-72.
3) Touch the Transfer to Cabin or Transfer to Iridium Button. When the cockpit phone is connected to an
external call, the Transfer to Cabin Button is displayed. When the cockpit phone is connected to the cabin
phone, the Transfer to Iridium Button is displayed. In this example, the call is transfered to the cabin phone
by selecting the Transfer to Cabin Button. The Telephone Screen indicates a connection is being established
with the cabin phone as in Figure 8-73.
4) When the cabin phone is answered, the transfer is completed as shown in Figure 8-74.
Figure 8-72 Transfer Call to Cabin PhoneFigure 8-71 Cockpit Phone Connected to Iridium Call
Figure 8-74 Transfer to Cabin Phone CompleteFigure 8-73 Connecting Call to Cabin Phone
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B516
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
MAKING A CONFERENCE CALL FROM THE COCKPIT
The cabin or an external phone can be added to a call already in progress.
Adding another phone to an active call:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Telephone.
2) Touch the Cockpit Phone Button. In this example, the cabin phone is conferenced in with an external call
connected to the cockpit phone. The Cockpit Button is touched, displaying the Cockpit Phone Screen as in
Figure 8-76.
3) Touch the Conference with Cabin or Conference with Iridium Button. When the cockpit phone is
connected to an external call, the Conference with Cabin Button is displayed. When the cockpit phone is
connected to the cabin phone, the Conference with Iridium Button is displayed. In this example, the call is
conferenced with the cabin phone by selecting the Conference with Cabin Button. The Telephone Screen
indicates a connection is being established with the cabin phone as in Figure 8-77.
4) When the cabin phone is answered, the conference call is completed as shown in Figure 8-78.
Figure 8-76 Conferencing in Cabin PhoneFigure 8-75 Cockpit Phone Connected to Iridium Call
Figure 8-78 Cabin Phone Conference CompleteFigure 8-77 Connecting to Cabin Phone
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
517
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
MANAGING TELEPHONE AUDIO
NOTE
: The Push-to-Talk switch is not utilized for telephone communication. The microphone is active
whenever a call is connected and telephone audio is enabled.
When an incoming call is received, or an outgoing call is made, telephone audio (which includes headset
and microphone) is automatically enabled for either the pilot or copilot, depending on which Touchscreen
Controller was used to make or answer the call. If the pilot or copilot wishes to join an existing call, the
telephone audio must be enabled manually on the appropriate Touchscreen Controller. When the call is
ended, telephone audio is automatically disabled. The green Pilot Audio Annunciator Button in Figure
8-79 indicates the enabled pilot audio on the pilot-side Touchscreen Controller. The copilot-side controller
will, likewise, indicate a green Copilot Audio Annunciator Button. Pilot and copilot telephone audio can be
enabled and disabled manually by performing the following steps.
To enable/disable telephone audio and adjust volume:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Telephone.
2) Touch the Cockpit Phone Button. The Cockpit Phone Screen is displayed as shown in Figure 8-79.
Figure 8-79 Conferencing in Cabin Phone
3) Touch the Pilot Audio or Copilot Audio Annunciator Button to disable telephone audio, including microphone
(gray annunciator).
4) Touch the Annunciator Button again to enable telephone audio, including microphone (green annunciator).
5) Touch and move the Volume Slider on the appropriate Touchscreen Controller to adjust the telephone volume.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B518
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TEXT MESSAGING (SMS)
The pilot or copilot can send and receive text messages on the Iridium satellite network. Messages may be
sent to an email address or text message capable cellular telephone. Message length is limited to 160 characters,
including the email address.
VIEWING A TEXT MESSAGE WHEN RECEIVED
1) Touch the flashing SMS Button as shown in Figure 8-80. The SMS Text Inbox Tab is automatically selected
and the newly received text message is shown at the top of the list, as in Figure 8-81.
Figure 8-81 New Text Message at Top of ListFigure 8-80 New SMS Text Message Annunciation
2) Touch the desired message to display its contents as seen in Figure 8-82.
Figure 8-82 New Text Message Contents
3) If desired, touch Reply to create a reply to the message.
4) Touch Delete to delete the message from the list.
5) Touching Save Contact saves the contact information in the system contact list.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
519
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
REPLY TO A TEXT MESSAGE
While viewing the text message content, touch the REPLY Button.
Or:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > SMS Text (Figure 8-83).
Figure 8-84 Touch Desired MessageFigure 8-83 SMS Text Services Selection
2) Touch the desired text message in the Inbox list as in Figure 8-84. If necessary, scroll to the desired message.
The text message is displayed as in Figure 8-85.
3) Touch the REPLY Button. The Opened SMS Text Message Screen is displayed as shown in Figure 8-86.
Figure 8-86 New Reply Message ScreenFigure 8-85 Message Content
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B520
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Touch the ‘Message’ Window to display the alphanumeric buttons.
Figure 8-88 Reply MessageFigure 8-87 Message Content
5) Enter the reply text as seen in Figure 8-87.
6) Touch the Enter Button. The reply message is displayed as in Figure 8-88.
7) Touch the Send Button. The SMS Message Replied To Screen is displayed as seen in Figure 8-89.
Figure 8-89 Reply Message Sent
8) If desired, touch the Reply Again Button to resend the reply.
9) Touch Delete to delete the message from the list.
10) Touching Save Contact saves the contact information in the system contact list.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
521
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SENDING A TEXT MESSAGE
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > SMS Text.
Figure 8-91 Select OptionsFigure 8-90 SMS Text Services Selection
2) Touch the Options Button as seen in Figure 8-91. The available options are displayed as in Figure 8-92.
3) Touch the Draft New Message Button. The SMS Text Message Draft Screen is displayed as shown in Figure
8-93. The Draft New Message option is also available from within the Drafts and Outbox Tabs.
Figure 8-93 Touch ‘To’ WindowFigure 8-92 Select Draft New Message
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B522
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Touch the ‘To’ Window. A selection screen is displayed like in Figure 8-94. If the text message is to be sent to
SMS compatible telephone, touch the Phone Button. If the message is to be sent to an email address, touch
Email.
Figure 8-95 Enter Number or AddressFigure 8-94 Select Message Destination
Numeric Buttons
are displayed when
the Phone Button is
touched
Alpha Buttons are
displayed when the
Email Button is
touched
5) Enter the telephone number or email address as seen in Figure 8-95. The number or address may be obtained
from the Contacts by touching the Find Button.
6) Touch the Enter Button. The number or address is now displayed as in Figure 8-96.
7) Touch the ‘Message’ Window. The alphanumeric buttons are displayed as in Figure 8-97.
Figure 8-97 Reply MessageFigure 8-96 Touch Message Window
8) Enter the message text.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
523
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
9) Touch the Enter Button. The message text is displayed in the ‘Message’ Window as shown in Figure 8-98.
Figure 8-98 Message Ready to Send
10) Touch the Send Button.
TEXT MESSAGE BOXES
Received text messages reside in the Inbox as ‘Read’ or ‘Unread’ messages. The Outbox contains ‘Sent” and
‘Unsent’ text messages. Saved messages that are meant to be sent later are stored as Drafts.
View Inbox messages:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > SMS Text.
2) Touch the Inbox Tab. A list of received messages is displayed as in Figure 8-99. The Inbox Tab is selected by
default when accessing the SMS Text Messaging Screen.
Figure 8-99 SMS Text Inbox
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B524
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
View Draft messages:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > SMS Text.
2) Touch the Draft Tab. A list of draft messages is displayed as in Figure 8-100, provided messages have been
previously saved.
3) Touch a message to access the Send or Delete Buttons.
Figure 8-100 SMS Text Drafts
View Outbox messages:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > SMS Text.
2) Touch the Outbox Tab. A list of sent or unsent messages is displayed as in Figure 8-101.
3) Touch a message to access the Send Again, Delete, and Save Contact Buttons.
Figure 8-101 SMS Text Outbox
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
525
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
MANAGING TEXT MESSAGES
The following table illustrates the various message status icons.
Message Symbol Description
Received text message that has not been opened
Received text message that has been opened
A reply has been sent for this text message
Saved text message, draft not sent
System is sending text message
Text message has been sent
System failed to send text message
Table 8-5 Text Message Symbols
The viewed messages in the Inbox, Outbox, or Drafts may be listed according to the date/time the message
was sent or received or by message address.
Viewing messages sorted by message date/time:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > SMS Text.
2) Touch the Options Tab. The ‘Sort Messages By’ selections are displayed as in Figure 8-102.
Figure 8-102 Message Sort Options
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B526
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
3) Touch the Time Button. A green annunciator indicates an active selection.
4) Touch the Back Button to return to the previously selected message box.
Viewing messages sorted by address:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > SMS Text.
2) Touch the Options Tab. The ‘Sort Messages By’ selections are displayed as in Figure 8-102.
3) Touch the Address Button. A green annunciator indicates an active selection.
4) Touch the Back Button to return to the previously selected message box.
Marking all messages as read:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > SMS Text.
2) Touch the Options Tab. The selection buttons are displayed as in Figure 8-102.
3) Touch the Mark All Read Button.
4) Touch the Back Button to return to the Inbox. All messages in the Inbox now indicate they have been opened.
Delete all messages:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > SMS Text.
2) Touch the Options Tab. The selection buttons are displayed as in Figure 8-102.
3) Touch the Delete All Messages Button. A confirmation screen is displayed as in Figure 8-103.
Figure 8-103 Confirm Deletion of Messages
4) Touch the OK Button.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
527
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
WIFI CONNECTIONS (OPTIONAL)
Wi-Fi connections are used for transferring maintenance data to the aircraft manufacturer. The system can
connect to a IEEE 802.11g compatible network provided the aircraft is on the ground and located within range
of a network. The system is capable of WEP64, WEP128,WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK encryption formats. WPA-
Enterprise and WPA2-Enterprise are not supported. Connections that require web proxies, captive portals, or
other elements that require user credentials, including a username and password or a redemption or access
code; or require action such as accepting a user agreement, are not supported.
Connecting to a Wi-Fi network:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Wi-Fi Setup.
2) A list of available Wi-Fi networks is displayed as in Figure 8-104. If necessary, scroll the displayed list of
networks to find the desired network. If a specific network is expected to be present in the list, but is not
displayed, try rescanning networks by performing the following steps:\
a) Touch the Wi-Fi Options Button.
b) Touch Rescan as seen in Figure 8-105.
Figure 8-105 Rescan NetworksFigure 8-104 Wi-Fi Networks Available for Connection
3) Touch the network to be connected. In this example, GarminGuests is selected. A confirmation screen is
displayed as in Figure 8-106.
Figure 8-107 Confirm Favorite SelectionFigure 8-106 Confirm Network Connection
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B528
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Touch OK.
5) The system now asks if it is desired to make the connected network a Favorite network, as shown in Figure 8-107.
6) Touch OK to place the network in the Favorites list, or touch Cancel to connect to the selected network without
make it a Favorite network. Networks shown in the Available networks list which have been designated as a
Favorite network are indicated by a star, as shown in Figure 8-108. Connected networks are indicated by a
green antenna symbol as seen in Figure 8-109.
Figure 8-109 Connected Network IndicationFigure 8-108 Favorite Network Indication
Disconnecting a Wi-Fi network:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Wi-Fi Setup.
2) Touch the Wi-Fi Options Button.
3) Touch Disconnect.
Making changes a Favorite network:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Wi-Fi Setup.
2) Touch the Favorites Tab to display the Favorite networks list, as in Figure 8-110.
3) Touch the network to which changes will be made. The Network Options are displayed as shown in Figure 8-111.
Figure 8-111 Network OptionsFigure 8-110 Favorite Networks List
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
529
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Touch Auto Connect, as in Figure 8-111 to enable (green annunciator) an automatic connection to this
network whenever the aircraft is on the ground and in range of the network.
5) Touch Edit to display the edit screen as in Figure 8-112.
Figure 8-112 Favorite Network Indication
6) Touch the desired parameter for editing and make selections accordingly.
7) When finished making desired changes, touch Save.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B530
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.6 SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO (OPTIONAL)
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information and activation of SiriusXM Weather products.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver provides audio
entertainment for passengers and crew. The GDL 69A can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services
at any altitude throughout the Continental United States.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE SERVICES
The SiriusXM Weather and/or SiriusXM Radio services are activated by first establishing an account with
SiriusXM Satellite Radio. The Audio Radio ID and/or Data Radio ID must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the weather and/or entertainment subscription.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses the coded radio ID to send an activation signal that, when received by the GDL
69A, allows it to play entertainment programming and display weather data.
These radio IDs is located:
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the SiriusXM Info Screen on the Touchscreen Controller (Figure 8-113)
Contact the installer if the radio ID cannot be located.
Establishing a SiriusXM Satellite Radio account:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > SiriusXM Info.
2) Note the Audio Radio ID and/or Data Radio ID as seen in Figure 8-113.
3) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services.
Figure 8-113 SiriusXM Information Display
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
531
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE
: The LOCK Button on the SiriusXM Info Screen is used to save GDL 69A activation data when the
SiriusXM services are initially set up. It is not used during normal SiriusXM Radio operation, but there
should be no adverse effects if inadvertently selected during flight.
Activating SiriusXM Satellite services on the system:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > SiriusXM Info.
2) Verify the Data Radio and/or Audio Radio show a signal strength, indicating the system is communicating with
the satellite.
3) Touch the Start Button in the Activation field (Figure 8-114).
Figure 8-114 Activating Radios
4) Touch the LOCK Button in the Activation field as seen in Figure 8-115. The system is now activated and ready
for use.
Figure 8-115 Locking Activation Settings
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B532
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
USING SIRIUSXM RADIO
The Music Screen provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
Channel List
for Selected
Category
Figure 8-116 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Controls
Select Channel
Categories
Select Channel
Categories
Select Channel
By Number
Add Current Channel
to Favorites
SELECTING CHANNELS
The Channel field on the Music Screen shows the available channels for the selected audio entertainment
category. The Now Playing field shows information for the currently active channel.
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Music to access the Music Screen as in Figure 8-116.
2) Touch the desired channel in the channel list. The selected channel is now shown in the Now Playing field.
Selecting a channel directly:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Music > Channel.
2) The numeric keypad is displayed. Enter the desired channel number.
3) Press the Enter Button. The selected channel is now shown in the Now Playing field.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
533
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
ENTERTAINMENT CATEGORIES
The Category field on the Music Screen shows the currently selected entertainment category. Categories of
audio entertainment, such as jazz, rock, talk/news, sports, etc., can be selected to list the available channels
for a type of music or other contents.
Selecting a category:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Music > Category.
2) The list of categories is displayed as shown in Figure 8-117.
Figure 8-117 Channel Categories
3) Scroll to view the available categories.
4) Touch the desired category to select. The selected category is displayed on the Category Button and the
channel list displays channels available for the selected category.
FAVORITES
Channels can be saved to a list of favorites and recalled for listening later.
Save a channel to favorites list:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Music to access the Music Screen as in Figure 8-116.
2) Select a desired channel as the ‘Now Playing’ channel.
3) Touch the Favorite Annunciator Button. The current channel is placed in the favorites list. Note, a green
annunciator indicates a favorite channel is ‘Now Playing’.
Select a favorite channel for listening:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Music > Category.
2) The list of categories is displayed as shown in Figure 8-117.
3) If necessary, scroll to view the Favorites Button.
4) Touch the Favorites Button to view the favorite channel list.
5) Touch the desired channel in the list. The channel is now displayed in the Now Playing field.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B534
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
ADJUSTING VOLUME
Entertainment audio volume is shown in the Volume field (Figure 8-118) as a percentage of full volume.
Adjusting the volume:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Music > Volume.
2) The volume adjustment slider is displayed as shown in Figure 8-118.
3) Touch and drag the slider to the right or left to adjust the volume. Drag to the right increases volume. Drag to
the left to decrease the volume.
Figure 8-118 Adjusting Volume
Muting or unmuting the volume:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Services > Music > Volume.
2) Touch the Music Annunciator Button to mute or unmute the volume. Muted volume is indicated by a gray
annunciator. Unmuted volume is indicated by a green annunciator.
3) Touch the Back Button to return to the Music Screen. When the volume is muted, ‘Muted’ is displayed in the
Volume field.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
535
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.7 SCHEDULED MESSAGES
The Scheduled Messages feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., Change oil, Switch
fuel tanks, or Altimeter-Transponder Check) on the Messages Screen of the Touchscreen Controller. Messages
can be set to display based on a specific date and time (Event), once the message timer reaches zero (One
Time), or recurrently whenever the message timer reaches zero (Periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting
automatically reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, all messages
are retained until deleted, and message timer countdown is resumed.
Entering a scheduled message:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Scheduled Messages.
2) Touch the Add Message Button as shown in Figure 8-119.
3) Touch the Message Button as shown in Figure 8-120.
Figure 8-120 Touch Message ButtonFigure 8-119 Touch Add Message
4) The keypad is displayed as in Figure 8-121. Enter the message name using the keypad. The large and small
Right Knob can also be used to enter the characters.
5) Touch the Enter Button. The message name is displayed on the Message Button.
6) Touch the Frequency Button as shown in Figure 8-122.
Figure 8-122 Touch Frequency ButtonFigure 8-121 Enter Message Name
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B536
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
7) Touch Event, One Time, or Periodic. The selection is displayed on the Frequency Button as in Figure 8-124.
Figure 8-124 Touch Time ButtonFigure 8-123 Touch One Time Button
8) Touch the Time Button as seen in Figure 8-124.
9) The numeric keypad is displayed as in Figure 8-125. Enter the time value using the keypad. If One Time or
Periodic were selected in step 7, the time is entered in a HH:MM:SS format. If Event was selected in step 7,
time is entered in a clock format (HH:MM LcL) as local time.
10) Touch the Enter Button. The time is displayed on the Time Button.
Figure 8-126 Message Figure 8-125 Enter Time
11) If Event was selected in step 7, touch the Date Button. The Date Button is subdued and disabled when One
Time or Periodic were selected in step 7.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
537
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
12) Touch the desired year, as in Figure 8-127, then the month followed by the day.
Figure 8-127 Event Date Entry
Touch Year Touch Month Touch Day
Edit a scheduled message:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Scheduled Messages.
2) Touch the name of the message to be edited. The Message Options Window is displayed as in Figure 8-129.
3) Touch the Edit Message Button.
4) Select the desired message parameter to be edited and perform the needed steps as discussed previously for
entering a scheduled message.
Figure 8-129 Select Edit Option Figure 8-128 Select Message for Editing
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B538
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Deleting a scheduled message:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Scheduled Messages.
2) Touch the name of the message to be deleted. The Message Options Window is displayed as in Figure 8-129.
3) Touch the Delete Message Button. Touch the Delete All Messages Button to delete all saved messages.
When a scheduled message is activated, the MSG Button flashes inverse video (Figure 8-130). Touching the
MSG Button on the Touchscreen Controller opens the Messages Screen (Figure 8-131) and acknowledges the
message, indicated by the MSG Button ceasing to flash. Touching the MSG Button again removes the Messages
Screen from view, and the scheduled message is deleted from the message queue.
Figure 8-130 Message Annunciation on Touchscreen Controller
Figure 8-131 Scheduled Message Example
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
539
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.8 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTS
The Electronic Document function allows viewing of electronic documents on MFD and/or PFD displays.
The system allows the display of electronic documents from two sources. These sources are Installed and User
documents.
INSTALLED DOCUMENTS
‘Installed’ Documents are typically provided by the aircraft manufacturer. These documents are stored on the
Supplemental Data Cards, along with the databases, located in the bottom SD Card slot of each PFD and the MFD.
Each Supplemental Data Card contains identical document files.
USER DOCUMENTS
‘User’ Documents are those loaded by the crew. User Documents must be in .pdf format and reside on an
SD Card no larger than 16GB. The Maximum document file size is 1.5GB. The maximum number of pages
per document is limited to 9,999. Pages with large and/or numerous images may exceed RAM memory limits,
therefore, may not be displayed correctly or not displayed at all.
An SD card must be inserted into the top card slot of each display on which it is desired to view the user
documents. Each display can only access electronic documents on the SD Cards that are inserted in that display.
User Documents can be unique to the display on which they are viewed.
SUPPORTED PDF FEATURES
User Documents must be in .pdf format. The following .pdf features are not supported. If a file contains any
of these features, the system will ignore the feature and display the document.
• Embedded files (attachments)
• Alternate images (using a different image for display and printing)
• Page labels (alternate page numbers; e.g. for i, ii, iii, iv for table of contents)
• Additional annotations, including file attachment annotation, sound annotation, movie annotation, widget
annotation, and trap network annotation.
• Digital signatures
• Javascript
• Logical structure (structuring documents into chapters, paragraphs, headings, footnotes)
• Web capture information (annotations for search engines)
• Prepress support (annotations for newspapers, etc.)
SD CARD FILE STRUCTURE FOR USER DOCUMENTS
User document files must reside on the SD card in a directory named “Documents”. The list of available User
Documents is limited to 100 documents and are shown in alphabetical order based on filename.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B540
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
VIEWING ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTS
To select a document:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Documents. The Document Viewer is now displayed as in Figure
8-132.
Figure 8-133 Document Selection Figure 8-132 Electronic Document Viewer
2) Touch the Selected Document Button.
3) Touch the Installed or User Tab to select the desired document source as seen in Figure 8-133. In this
example, Installed documents is selected.
4) Touch the desired document button. The selected document name is displayed in the Selected Document
Button, as shown in Figure 8-134. The document is displayed in the selected pane, such as the MFD as shown
in Figure 8-135.
Figure 8-135 Document Viewed on MFDFigure 8-134 Selected Document Indicated
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
541
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
To change Document Viewer options:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Documents > Options. Document Viewer Options is displayed as
in Figure 8-136.
2) Touch Document Info to view information pertaining to the document, such as files size and creation date as
seen in Figure 8-137.
Figure 8-137 Document InformationFigure 8-136 Document Viewer Options
3) Touch Fit Page to view the complete page in the selected pane (Figure 8-136).
4) Touch Fit Width to enlarge the displayed page to fill the width of the selected pane.
5) Touching the Rotate Page Buttons will rotate the displayed page 90 degrees to the right or left (depending on
button touched) within the selected pane. Each subsequent touch will rotate the page another 90 degrees.
6) Touch the Brightness Slider to adjust the brightness of the displayed page.
To browse the document:
1) After selecting the desired document, touch the Next Page and Prev Page buttons to increment and decrement
one page with each touch.
2) The Page Select Button (Figure 8-138) shows the number of pages contained in the document and the page
currently being displayed. Touch the Page Select Button (Figure 8-138) to jump to a specific page number. The
Enter Page Number screen is displayed, as in Figure 8-139.
Figure 8-139 Enter Document Page NumberFigure 8-138 Document Browsing Options
Page Select Button
Total PagesCurrent Page
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B542
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
3) Touch the Find Button to display the Document Viewer Find screen as shown in Figure 8-140.
Figure 8-141 Flight Instruments Section DisplayedFigure 8-140 Table of Contents
4) If necessary, touch the Table of Contents Tab to display the document Table of Contents (Figure 8-140).
5) Touch [+] to expand a topic. Touch [–] to return to the collapsed view of the topic.
6) Touch the desired topic to jump to that portion of the document. In this example, Flight Instruments is selected
and the Flight Instruments section is displayed (Figure 8-141).
Creating bookmarks in the document:
1) While viewing the page to bookmark, touch the Find Button on the appropriate Touchscreen Controller.
2) Touch the Bookmark Tab to display the Bookmark Window as in Figure 8-142.
Figure 8-143 Enter Bookmark NameFigure 8-142 Select Bookmark Tab
3) Touch the Bookmark Current Page Button. The Enter Bookmark Name Screen is displayed as shown in
Figure 8-143.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
543
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Touch Enter. A confirmation screen is displayed as seen in Figure 8-144.
Figure 8-145 Bookmark CreatedFigure 8-144 Bookmark Created
5) Touch OK. The newly created bookmark is displayed as in Figure 8-145.
Deleting document bookmarks:
1) With the desired document displayed, touch the Find Button (Figure 8-138) to display the Document Viewer
Find Screen.
2) Touch the Bookmark Tab to display the Bookmark Window.
3) Touch the X Button next to the bookmark to be deleted (Figure 8-145).
Figure 8-147 Bookmark DeletedFigure 8-146 Delete Bookmark
4) Touch OK on the confirmation screen as in Figure 8-146.
5) Again, touch OK.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B544
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.9 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the
system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport identifier. The
file is created automatically each time the system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the system is capable of logging for the Phenom 300 aircraft.
• Date
• Time
• GPS altitude (MSL)
• GPS altitude (WGS84 datum)
• Baro-Corrected altitude (feet)
• Baro Correction (in/Hg)
• Indicated airspeed (kts)
• Vertical speed (fpm)
• GPS vertical speed (fpm)
• OAT (degrees C)
• True airspeed (knots)
• Pitch Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Roll Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Lateral and Vertical G Force (g)
• Ground Speed (kts)
• Ground Track (degrees
magnetic)
• Latitude (degrees; geodetic;
+North)
• Longitude (degrees; geodetic;
+East)
• Magnetic Heading (degrees)
• HSI source
• Selected course
• Com1/Com2 frequency
• Nav1/Nav2 frequency
• CDI deflection
• VDI/GP/GS deflection
• Wind Direction (degrees)
• Wind Speed (knots)
• Active Waypoint Identifier
• Distance to next waypoint (nm)
• Bearing to next waypoint
(degrees)
• Magnetic variation (degrees)
• Autopilot On/Off
• AFCS roll/pitch modes
• AFCS roll/pitch commands
• GPS fix
• GPS horizontal alert limit
• GPS vertical alert limit
• SBAS GPS horizontal protection
level
• SBAS GPS vertical protection
level
• Fuel Qty (gal.)
• Fuel Flow (gph)
• Fuel Pressure (psi)
• Voltage 1 and/or 2
• Amps 1 and/or 2
• Oil Pressure (psi)
• Oil Temperature (deg. F)
• TIT (deg. F)
• Manifold Pressure (in. Hg)
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
545
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in Figure 8-148. This file can be imported
into most computer spreadsheet applications.
log_130210_104506_KIXD.csv
Local Date
YYMMDD Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)
Figure 8-148 Log File Format
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B546
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.10 CHECKLISTS
NOTE: The checklist shown in the following illustrations are examples only.
The Display Panes are able to display optional electronic checklists (supplied by the manufacturer) which
allow the pilot to quickly find the proper procedure on the ground and during each phase of flight. The system
accesses the checklists from the Supplemental Data Cards located in the bottom card slot of each GDU.
The following colors are used for checklist items:
• Light Blue - Items not selected or checked
• White - Item is selected
• Green - Item has been checked
• Gray - General notes
• Yellow - Caution notes
• Red - Warning notes
Accessing and navigating checklists:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Checklist. The checklist structure is displayed as shown in Figure 8-150.
Figure 8-150 List of ChecklistsFigure 8-149 Home Screen
2) Touch the desired checklist group tab on the left side of the screen. In Figure 8-150, Normal is selected in this
example.
3) Touch the desired checklist from those listed in the center of the screen. If necessary, scroll through the list to
see all the available checklists for the selected group. In Figure 8-150, BEFORE TAKEOFF is selected and the
checklist is displayed in the previously selected GDU Display Pane as in Figure 8-151. The first checklist item is
selected as indicated by the white text surrounded by a white box.
Figure 8-151 First Checklist Item Selected
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
547
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
4) Press the FMS Knob to check the selected checklist item. The line item turns green and a checkmark is placed
in the associated box as shown in Figure 8-152. The next line item is automatically selected for checking.
Figure 8-152 First Checklist Item Completed and Checked
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
Selecting a checked item and pressing the FMS Knob will return the item to the unchecked state.
5) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom
left of the checklist window and ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ is highlighted as in Figure 8-153. If ‘GO TO NEXT
CHECKLIST?’ is selected prior to checking all the checklist items, ‘*CHECKLIST NOT FINISHED*’ will be displayed
in yellow text.
Figure 8-153 Checklist Complete
6) Press the FMS Knob to display the next checklist in the group or choose another by touching the desired
checklist on the Touchscreen Controller.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B548
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Resetting A Specific Checklist:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Checklist.
2) Touch the desired checklist to reset. DC BUS 1 OFF is selected in Figure 8-154.
3) Touch the Checklist Options Button.
4) Touch Reset Current Checklist as seen in Figure 8-155.
Figure 8-155 Checklist OptionsFigure 8-154 Checklist Screen
Resetting All Checklists:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Checklist.
2) Touch the Checklist Options Button shown in Figure 8-154.
3) Touch Reset All Checklists as seen in Figure 8-155.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
549
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.11 ABNORMAL OPERATION
GDL 69A DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to
SiriusXM
• Ensure the SiriusXM subscription has been activated
• Check the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information for Data Link Receiver (GDL 69A) status, serial
number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the GDL 69A the status is marked with
a red X.
To check LRU status:
1) From the Home Screen, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) If necessary, touch the LRU Info Tab.
3) Scroll to display the GDL69A field as shown in Figure 8-156.
Figure 8-156 Detected Failure in Data Link Reciever
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B550
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
Message Message Location Description
CHECK ANTENNA SiriusXM Info Screen (Touchscreen Controller) Data Link Receiver antenna error;
service required
UPDATING SiriusXM Info (Touchscreen Controller) Data Link Receiver updating encryption
code
NO SIGNAL SiriusXM Info (Touchscreen Controller)
Weather Datalink Display (MFD)
Loss of signal; signal strength too low
for receiver
LOADING Music Screen (Touchscreen Controller) Acquiring channel audio or information
OFF AIR Music Screen (Touchscreen Controller) Channel not in service
--- Music Screen (Touchscreen Controller) Missing channel information
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILURE Weather Datalink Display (MFD) No communication from Data Link
Receiver within last 5 minutes
ACTIVATION REQUIRED SiriusXM Info Screen (Touchscreen Controller)
Weather Datalink Display (MFD) SiriusXM subscription is not activated
Table 8-6 GDL 69A Data Link Receiver Messages
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
551
APPENDIX A
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
CREW ALERTING SYSTEM (CAS)
NOTE: Aural alerts associated with abnormal conditions and advisories are managed through the audio
panels. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information.
When Crew Alerting System (CAS) messages are generated, the CAS Window opens to the right of the
Altimeter (on the PFDs). Up to 14 messages can be displayed; when more than 14 messages accumulate, the
CAS Softkey becomes available. Pressing the CAS Softkey displays softkeys for scrolling up and down through
the messages in the CAS Window.
CAS
Scrolling Softkey
CAS
Window
Softkey Annunciation
(Press to Acknowledge
CAS Message)
Figure A-1 CAS Display
CAS messages are grouped by criticality (warning, caution, advisory) and sorted by order of appearance (most
recent messages on top). The color of the message is based on its urgency and on required action, and the
softkey label changes to display the appropriate annunciation when a CAS message is generated.
• Warning (red) – Immediate crew awareness and action required; accompanied by an aural tone (triple chime
every 3 seconds) and flashing ‘WARNING’ softkey annunciation.
• Caution (yellow) – Immediate crew awareness and possible future corrective action required; accompanied
by an aural tone (single chime every 5 seconds) and flashing ‘CAUTION’ softkey annunciation.
• Advisory (white) – Crew awareness required and subsequent action may be required; accompanied by a
flashing ‘ADVISORY’ softkey.
The softkey annunciation flashes and the corresponding aural alert sounds until acknowledged by depressing
the softkey.
Figure A-2 Softkey Annunciations (MSG Softkey Labels)
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B552
APPENDIX A
A CAS message does not appear more than once at a given time. Warning and caution CAS messages flash
when they are generated, and continue to flash until acknowledged. Advisory CAS messages, flash for 5
seconds or until acknowledged.
Some CAS messages are differentiated as root causes of other failures and should be considered first during
the decision-making process when multiple CAS messages are displayed. These “golden” messages flash until
acknowledged and remain in inverse video after being acknowledged manually.
After the acknowledgment, a message remains displayed at the top of its respective priority group in the CAS
Window until either a newer message of the same priority appears or the condition(s) that caused the alert to
display no longer exist.
CAS messages listed in tables 3-9 through 3-12 are shown in the acknowledged state (colored text on black
backgrounds), with Caution and Advisory “golden” CAS messages shown in black text on colored backgrounds
corresponding to their alert levels.
CAS MESSAGES
NOTE:
The Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) supersedes information found in this document. Refer to the AFM
for recommended pilot actions.
WARNING MESSAGES
See the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for recommended pilot actions. Accompanied by a triple chime tone
which repeats until acknowledged.
Message Description
BAG SMK Smoke detected in baggage compartment
CAB ALTITUDE HI Cabin altitude pressure altitude high
DOOR EMER OPEN Emergency door open
DOOR PAX OPEN Passenger door open
E1 FIRE Fire in engine 1
E2 FIRE Fire in engine 2
E1 OIL LO PRES Low oil pressure in engine 1
E2 OIL LO PRES Low oil pressure in engine 2
ELEC EMERGENCY Generators offline
ELEC XFR FAIL Generators offline and electrical emergency transfer has failed
LG LEVER DISAG Landing gear position and control lever disagreement
NO TO CONFIG No takeoff configuration
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
553
APPENDIX A
CAUTION MESSAGES
See the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for recommended pilot actions. Accompanied by a single chime
tone which repeats until acknowledged.
Message Description
ADS 1 FAIL ADS 1 offline or failed
ADS 2 FAIL ADS 2 offline or failed
ADS 1 HTR FAIL Pitot heater 1 offline or heater element failed
ADS 2 HTR FAIL Pitot heater 2 offline or heater element failed
AHRS 1 FAIL AHRS 1 failure
AHRS 2 FAIL AHRS 2 failure
A-I E1 FAIL Anti-ice system failure in engine 1
A-I E2 FAIL Anti-ice system failure in engine 2
A-I LO CAPACITY Not enough thermal energy available for WHSAIS (Wing and Horizontal Stabilizer Anti-ice System) operation
A-I WINGSTB FAIL Component failure (AIV, pressure transducers, AMS Controller, other)
A-I WINGSTB INHB WHSAIS switched ON outside the icing envelope. Or, aircraft is in single bleed configuration and above the 15,000 ft.
icing envelope when WHSAIS is switched on.
A-I WINGSTB LEAK Bleed hot air leakage at WHSAIS pneumatic ducting
AMS CTRL FAIL Pneumatic sources and icing protection are not available
ANTI-SKID FAIL Anti-skid function lost; main brake still available
AP FAIL Loss of AP function
AP PITCH MISTRIM Airplane mistrimmed in pitch axis when AP is engaged
AP ROLL MISTRIM Airplane mistrimmed in roll axis when AP is engaged
AUDIO PNL 1 FAIL Audio panel 1 is offline
AUDIO PNL 2 FAIL Audio panel 2 is offline
AURAL WRN FAIL Aural warning system failure due to non-communicating LRUs
AUTO PTRIM FAIL Auto pitch trim failure; other pitch trim functions still available
BAG SMK FAIL Baggage compartment smoke detector has failed
BATT DISCHARGE Battery discharging under normal operation
BATT 1 OFF BUS Battery 1 offline
BATT 2 OFF BUS Battery 2 offline
BATT EXCEEDANCE Battery voltage has exceeded 29 VDC
BLEED 1 FAIL Bleed 1 system not under control.
BLEED 2 FAIL Bleed 2 system not under control.
BLEED 1 LEAK Bleed 1 hot air leakage at some region of the ducting
BLEED 2 LEAK Bleed 2 hot air leakage at some region of the ducting
BLEED 1 OVERPRES Pressure in bleed ducting is higher than an acceptable value chosen to not compromise ECS and Anti-ice components
integrity
BLEED 2 OVERPRES Pressure in bleed ducting is higher than an acceptable value chosen to not compromise ECS and Anti-ice components
integrity
BRK FAIL Main brake system lost
CAB DELTA-P FAIL Excessive cabin pressure differential
CLUTCH PIT FAIL Slip clutch maintenance test failed
CLUTCH ROL FAIL Slip clutch maintenance test failed
CLUTCH VNTRL FAIL Ventral slip clutch maintenance test failed
CLUTCH YAW FAIL Slip clutch maintenance test failed
CONFIG MDL FAIL Master Configuration Module failed or non-communicative
DOORBAG AFT OPEN Crew baggage door open
DOORBAG LH OPEN Forward left-hand baggage door open
DOORBAG RH OPEN Forward right-hand baggage door open
DUCT 1 OVERTEMP Duct 1 temperature over specified safe value
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B554
APPENDIX A
Message Description
DUCT 2 OVERTEMP Duct 2 temperature over specified safe value
E1 CTRL FAULT
Engine 1 responds slowly or not at all to thrust commands
E2 CTRL FAULT
Engine 2 responds slowly or not at all to thrust commands
E1 FAIL Uncommanded shutdown detected for engine 1
E2 FAIL Uncommanded shutdown detected for engine 2
E1 FIRE DET FAIL Fire detection system failure in engine 1
E2 FIRE DET FAIL Fire detection system failure in engine 2
E1 FIREX FAIL Fire extinguisher failure in engine 1
E2 FIREX FAIL Fire extinguisher failure in engine 2
E1 FUEL IMP BYP Fuel filter impending bypass condition for engine 1
E2 FUEL IMP BYP Fuel filter impending bypass condition for engine 2
E1 TLA FAIL Thrust Lever Angle failure for engine 1
E2 TLA FAIL Thrust Lever Angle failure for engine 2
E1 TT0 HTR FAIL Heater failure in engine 1
E2 TT0 HTR FAIL Heater failure in engine 2
E1 TT0 PROBE ICE FAIL Engine 1 probe frozen
E2 TT0 PROBE ICE FAIL Engine 2 probe frozen
EBAY LEAK Leak inside E-Bay
EBAY OVHT Electrical bay over temperature
ECS 1 VALVE FAIL Flow control valve monitor for ECS 1 detected improper valve operation
ECS 2 VALVE FAIL Flow control valve monitor for ECS 2 detected improper valve operation
EMER BRK LO PRES Few emergency brake functions available
EMER LT NOT ARM Emergency lights switch not in ARMED position
ENG EXCEEDANCE Limit exceeded in engine(s) during flight
ENG NO DISPATCH FADEC detected no dispatch fault condition in engine(s)
ENG NO TO DATA No takeoff data entered
FLAP FAIL Loss of flaps deployment or retraction
FUEL 1 LO LEVEL Low fuel level in tank 1
FUEL 2 LO LEVEL Low fuel level in tank 2
FUEL 1 LO PRES Fuel pressure low in engine 1 feed line
FUEL 2 LO PRES Fuel pressure low in engine 2 feed line
FUEL 1 SOV FAIL Fuel feed SOV 1 closed or unavailable
FUEL 2 SOV FAIL Fuel feed SOV 2 closed or unavailable
FUEL IMBALANCE Fuel is imbalanced between the tanks
FUEL PUMP 1 FAIL Fuel pump 1 failure
FUEL PUMP 2 FAIL Fuel pump 2 failure
FUEL XFEED FAIL Disagreement between valve command and its feedback
GEN 1 OFF BUS Generator 1 offline
GEN 2 OFF BUS Generator 2 offline
GEN OVLD Generator(s) overload
GEN START FAULT Generator start fault
GIA 1 FAIL Failure of GIA 1
GIA 2 FAIL Failure of GIA 2
GIA 1 OVHT GIA 1 over temperature
GIA 2 OVHT GIA 2 over temperature
GND SPLR FAIL Loss of ground spoilers
GTC 1 OVHT GTC 1 over temperature
GTC 2 OVHT GTC 2 over temperature
HYD HI TEMP Hydraulic temperature high
HYD LO PRES Hydraulic pressure low
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
555
APPENDIX A
Message Description
HYD SOV 1 FAIL EDP 1 Fire Shutoff valve was commanded to close, but failed to close
HYD SOV 2 FAIL EDP 2 Fire Shutoff valve was commanded to close, but failed to close
ICE CONDITION*Aircraft is flying in icing conditions
LG WOW SYS FAIL Landing gear weight-on-wheels system failure
MFD CONFIG MFD configuration error
MFD FAULT Fault with the MFD
MFD OVHT MFD over temperature
OXY LO PRES Oxygen system pressure low
PARK BRK NOT REL Parking brake not released
PAX OXY NO PRES Cabin altitude high and passenger oxygen system pressure low
PFD 1 CONFIG PFD 1 configuration error
PFD 2 CONFIG PFD 2 configuration error
PFD 1 FAULT Fault with PFD 1
PFD 2 FAULT Fault with PFD 2
PFD 1 OVHT PFD 1 over temperature
PFD 2 OVHT PFD 2 over temperature
PRESN AUTO FAIL Pressurization controller failure
PTRIM BKP FAIL Loss of backup pitch trim actuator
PTRIM NML FAIL Loss of normally-operating pitch trim actuator
PUSHER FAIL Stall Warning & Protection System pusher has failed
PUSHER OFF Stall Warning Pusher is off
RUD OVERBOOST SLRB (Spring Loaded Rudder Booster) uncommanded actuation
STBY HTR FAIL Failure of standby heater
STEEP FAIL*Steep approach mode has failed
SWPS FAIL Stall Warning & Protection System inoperative
SWPS FAULT Stall Warning & Protection System activation angles anticipated to conservative settings
SWPS UNTESTED Stall Warning & Protection System has not been tested
TCAS FAIL*Traffic & Collision Avoidance System failure. TCASII installations only.
WSHLD 1 HTR FAIL Windshield 1 heater failure
WSHLD 2 HTR FAIL Windshield 2 heater failure
YD FAIL Loss of yaw damper function
YD MISTRIM Airplane mistrimmed in yaw axis when YD is engaged
* Optional
ADVISORY MESSAGES
See the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for recommended pilot actions.
Message Description
A-I E1 FAULT Engine 1 Anti-ice system valve failed when commanded to close
A-I E2 FAULT Engine 2 Anti-ice system valve failed when commanded to close
A-I E1 ON Anti-ice system on in engine 1
A-I E2 ON Anti-ice system on in engine 2
A-I WINGSTB ARM WINGSTAB toggle switch has been armed prior to takeoff
A-I WINGSTB ON WHSAIS is operating
ADS 1 SLIP FAIL ADS 1 side-slip compensation is off
ADS 2 SLIP FAIL ADS 2 side-slip compensation is off
ADS HTR SW ON ADS Probe switch is on
AHRS 1 FAULT Fault with AHRS 1
AHRS 2 FAULT Fault with AHRS 2
AMS CTRL FAULT One pneumatic and Anti-ice controller channel is inoperative
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B556
APPENDIX A
Message Description
ATC DLK FAIL CPDLC system failure
AUDIO PNL 1 FAULT Fault with audio panel 1
AUDIO PNL 2 FAULT Fault with audio panel 2
AURAL WRN FAULT Partial loss of aural warning function
AVNX FAN FAIL Avionics fan failure
BAG SMK FAULT Two baggage compartment smoke detectors have failed
BLEED 1 OFF Bleed pressure regulator 1 and shut-off valve closed
BLEED 2 OFF Bleed pressure regulator 2 and shut-off valve closed
CLUTCH PIT PASS Pitch slip clutch maintenance test passed
CLUTCH PIT PROG Pitch slip clutch maintenance test in progress
CLUTCH ROLL PASS Roll slip clutch maintenance test passed
CLUTCH ROLL PROG Roll slip clutch maintenance test in progress
CLUTCH VNTRL PASS Ventral slip clutch maintenance test passed
CLUTCH VNTRL PROG Ventral slip clutch maintenance test in progress
CLUTCH YAW PASS Yaw slip clutch maintenance test passed
CLUTCH YAW PROG Yaw slip clutch maintenance test in progress
DC BUS 1 OFF DC bus 1 offline
DC BUS 2 OFF DC bus 2 offline
DOOR REFUEL OPEN Refueling door is open
E1 CHIP DETECTED Chip detected by engine 1 oil chip detector
E2 CHIP DETECTED Chip detected by engine 2 oil chip detector
E1 FADEC FAULT FADEC fault in engine 1
E2 FADEC FAULT FADEC fault in engine 2
E1 OIL IMP BYP Engine 1 oil filter impending bypass set
E2 OIL IMP BYP Engine 2 oil filter impending bypass set
ECS 1 OFF Flow control valve monitor detected improper valve operation
ECS 2 OFF Flow control valve monitor detected improper valve operation
ELEC SYS FAULT Electrical system fault
EMER BUS OFF Emergency bus OFF
ENG FIREX DISCH Engine fire extinguisher discharge
FLAP NOT AVAIL Flaps not available
FUEL EQUAL Fuel quantity asymmetry corrected; XFEED SOV is open
FUEL 1 FEED FAULT DC pump on due to low fuel pressure
FUEL 2 FEED FAULT DC pump on due to low fuel pressure
FUEL 1 PSW FAIL Fuel pressure switch stuck in “high” position
FUEL 2 PSW FAIL Fuel pressure switch stuck in “high” position
GEA 1 FAIL Failure of GEA 1
GEA 2 FAIL Failure of GEA 2
GEA 3 FAIL Failure of GEA 3
GPU CONNECTED Ground power unit connected to the aircraft
GSD 1 FAIL GSD 1 non-communicative
GSD 2 FAIL GSD 2 non-communicative
GTC 1 FAN FAIL Failure of GTC 1 fan
GTC 2 FAN FAIL Failure of GTC 2 fan
GTC 1 FAULT Fault with GTC 1
GTC 2 FAULT Fault with GTC 2
HSDB FAULT An LRU has stopped communicating over an HSDB
HSDB SW REV POS HSDB switch in reversionary position
HYD SYS FAULT Degradation of hydraulic system available power
ICE DET FAIL* Ice Detector failure
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
557
APPENDIX A
Message Description
MFD FAN FAIL Failure of MFD fan
NAV 1 FAIL Failure of NAV 1
NAV 2 FAIL Failure of NAV 2
OXY SW NOT AUTO Oxygen system switch in manual mode
PFD 1 FAN FAIL Failure of PFD 1 fan
PFD 2 FAN FAIL Failure of PFD 2 fan
PTRIM LO RATE Pitch trim is being actuated in low rate
PTRIM SW1 FAIL Failure of pilot pitch trim switch
PTRIM SW2 FAIL Failure of copilot pitch trim switch
RALT FAIL*Radar altitude failure
RAM AIR FAIL Ram air valve failure
RUD BOOST FAIL Loss of SLRB (Spring Loaded Rudder Booster) force assistance in case of thrust asymmetry
SHED BUS OFF Shed bus off
SPDBRK SW DISAG Speed brake switch position is in disagreement with the spoiler surfaces position
SPOILER FAULT
Ground Spoiler arm logic failed
Ground Spoiler command disagree
Spoiler position disagree
Ground Spoiler Control Valve failed
Speed brake command failed
Speed brake command inhibit failed
STEEP NOT AVAIL Steep Approach Mode is not available
SWPS ICE SPEED Stall Warning System activation angles anticipated due to icing conditions
VENTRAL RUD FAIL Ventral rudder has failed
VHF3 FAIL Failure of VHF3
XBLEED FAIL Cross bleed valve has failed closed or open
XBLEED SW OFF Cross bleed switch is in the OFF position
XPDR 1 FAIL Failure of XPDR 1
XPDR 2 FAIL Failure of XPDR 2
* Optional
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B558
APPENDIX A
COMPARATOR ANNUNCIATIONS
The Comparator monitors critical values generated by redundant sensors. If differences in the sensors exceed
a specified amount, this discrepancy is annunciated in the Comparator Window as a ‘MISCOMP’ (miscompare)
as seen in Figure A-3. If one or both of the sensed values are unavailable, it is annunciated as a ‘NO COMP’ (no
compare). The following is a list of the possible annunciations:
Figure A-3 Miscompare Annunciations (PFD) Figure A-4 No Compare Annunciations (PFD)
Annunciation Description Condition
Altitude Miscompare
Difference in altitude sensors is > 200 ft.
Indicated Airspeed
Miscompare
If both airspeed sensors detect < 35 knots, this is inhibited.
If either airspeed sensor detects > 35 knots, and the difference in sensors is > 10 knots.
If either airspeed sensor detects > 80 knots, and the difference in sensors is > 7 knots.
Heading Miscompare
Difference in heading sensors is > 6 degrees.
Pitch Miscompare
Difference in pitch sensors is > 5 degrees.
Roll Miscompare
Difference in roll sensors is > 6 degrees.
Altitude No Compare
No data from one or both altitude sensors.
Indicated Airspeed No
Compare
No data from one or both airspeed sensors.
Heading No Compare
No data from one or both heading sensors.
Pitch No Compare
No data from one or both pitch sensors.
Roll No Compare
No data from one or both roll sensors..
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
559
APPENDIX A
REVERSIONARY SENSOR ANNUNCIATIONS
Reversionary AHRS and Air Data Computer selection is annunciated in the Reversionary Sensor Window, as
shown in Figure A-5. These annunciations reflect reversionary sensors selected on one or both PFDs. Selecting
the
SENSOR
Softkey gives access to
ADC1
,
ADC2, ADC STBY
,
AHRS1
,
AHRS2, and AHRS STBY
Softkeys. These
softkeys allow manual switching of sensors. In the case of certain types of sensor failures, the system may make
some sensor selections automatically. The GPS sensor cannot be switched manually.
The
ADC STBY and AHRS STBY
Softkeys are normally dimmed and unavailable for manual selection. If the
system detects that inputs for both the #1 and #2 AHRS or both the #1 and #2 ADC are invalid, the respective
standby sensor mode is automatically selected. The softkey label is no longer dimmed, and a green annunciator
is displayed, indicating the mode is active.
Figure A-5 Reversionary Sensor Annunciations
Reversionary Sensor
Window Text Condition
BOTH ON ADC 1 Both PFDs are displaying data from the #1 Air Data Computer.
BOTH ON ADC 2 Both PFDs are displaying data from the #2 Air Data Computer.
BOTH ON ADC STBY Both PFDs are displaying data from the standby air data input.
BOTH ON AHRS 1 Both PFDs are displaying data from the #1 AHRS.
BOTH ON AHRS 2 Both PFDs are displaying data from the #2 AHRS.
BOTH ON ATT STBY Both PFDs are displaying data from the standby attitude and heading reference input.
BOTH ON GPS 1 Both PFDs are displaying data from the #1 GPS receiver.
BOTH ON GPS 2 Both PFDs are displaying data from the #2 GPS receiver.
USING ADC 1 PFD2 is displaying data from the #1 Air Data Computer.
USING ADC 2 PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 Air Data Computer.
USING ADC STBY PFD1 or PFD2 is displaying data from the standby air data input.
USING AHRS 1 PFD2 is displaying data from the #1 AHRS.
USING AHRS 2 PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 AHRS.
USING ATT STBY PFD1 or PFD2 is displaying data from the standby attitude and heading reference input.
USING GPS 1 PFD2 is displaying data from the #1 GPS.
USING GPS 2 PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 GPS.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B560
APPENDIX A
PRODIGY
®
TOUCH FLIGHT DECK 300 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
When the system issues a message, the MSG Button flashes on the Touchscreen Controllers to alert the pilot
and copilot of a new message. The buttons continue to flash until acknowledged by touching the MSG Button
on either the Touchscreen Controller. Active messages are displayed in white text. Messages that have become
inactive change to gray text. The
MSG
Button flashes if the state of a displayed alert changes or a new message
is displayed.
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a yellow ‘X’ is typically displayed on items associated with the failed
data. The following section describes various system annunciations. Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM)
for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
NOTE: Upon power-up of the system, certain windows remain invalid as the equipment begins to initialize.
All windows should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain
flagged, the system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
.
Touch to View
System Messages
Screen
Figure A-6 System Annunciations (PFD)
System
Annunciation
Yellow ‘X’
Figure A-7 System Messages Annunciation
(Touchsreen Controller) Figure A-8 System Messages Screen After MSG
Button Touched (Touchscreen Controller)
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
561
APPENDIX A
System Annunciation Comment
Attitude and Heading
Reference System is aligning.
Display system is not receiving
attitude information from the
AHRS.
AHRS calibration incomplete or
configuration module failure.
This annunciation is seen only
when the autopilot is engaged.
The annunciation indicates an
AHRS monitor has detected
an abnormal flight parameter,
possibly caused by strong
turbulence. In this case, the
situation should correct itself
within a few seconds. If there
is an actual failure, a yellow
“X” soon appears over the
Attitude Indicator.
‘GPS LOI’ Indicates Loss of
Integrity of GPS information.
GPS information is either
not present or is invalid for
navigation use. Note that
AHRS uses GPS inputs during
normal operation. AHRS
operation may be degraded
if GPS signals are not present
(see AFM).
Display system is not receiving
valid ISA information from air
data computer.
System Annunciation Comment
Display system is not receiving
airspeed input from air data
computer.
Display system is not receiving
vertical speed input from the
air data computer.
Display system is not receiving
heading input from the AHRS.
Display system is not receiving
altitude input from the air data
computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid SAT information from air
data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid TAT information from air
data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid transponder information.
Other Various Yellow X
Indications
A yellow ‘X’ through any other
display field indicates the field
is not receiving valid data.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B562
APPENDIX A
PRODIGY
®
TOUCH VOICE ALERTS
The system issues voice messages when specific system conditions are met. Other voice alerts associated with
the TAWS and traffic avoidance systems are listed in their respective discussions.
Message Priority Description
“Autopilot”
Warning
Warning – Autopilot is disengaged
Single alert for manual AP disengagement
Continuous alert for automatic AP disengagement; cancelled with AP DISC Switch
“Cabin” High cabin altitude
“Fire, Fire” Engine fire
“High Speed” Maximum operating speed exceeded
“Landing Gear” Gear up in landing condition
“No Takeoff Brake” No Takeoff Configuration due to brake status
“No Takeoff Flaps” No Takeoff Configuration due to flap status
“No Takeoff Spoilers” No Takeoff Configuration due to spoiler status
“No Takeoff Trim” No Takeoff Configuration due to trim status
“Stall, Stall” Airplane in stall condition
“Altitude”
Advisory
Aircraft has deviated ±200 feet of the selected altitude
“Minimums, minimums” The aircraft has descended below the preset barometric minimum descent altitude.
“Rudder Overboost” SLRB (Spring Loaded Rudder Booster) uncommanded actuation
“Thrust, Thrust” CSC (if available) disengaged abnormally
“Trim Trim Trim” Trim switch malfunction
“Vertical track” The aircraft is one minute from Top of Descent. Issued only when vertical navigation is
enabled.
“Aural Warning OK”
Status
Aural warning system test passes
“Aural Warning One Channel” Aural warning system test detects failure in one channel
“Flight Director” Flight director has reverted to pitch or roll default mode
“Incoming Call” Satellite telephone is receiving a call
“Message ATC” New Data Link message received from ATC
“SelCal” Incoming communication through the HF radio
“Takeoff OK” Takeoff configuration test passed
“Timer Expired” Countdown timer on the PFD has reached zero
PRODIGY
®
TOUCH FLIGHT DECK 300 SYSTEM MESSAGES
NOTE: This Section provides information regarding system message advisories that may be displayed by
the system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities
must be considered when responding to a message. Always use sound pilot judgment. The Airplane Flight
Manual (AFM) takes precedence over any conflicting guidance found in this section.
This section describes various system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU or
LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding yellow ‘X’ annunciation as
shown previously in the Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 System Annunciations section.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
563
APPENDIX A
GDU 1400W PRIMARY FLIGHT DISPLAY & MULTI FUNCTION DISPLAY
System Message Comments
XTALK ERROR
– A flight display crosstalk error
has occurred.
The MFD, PFD and GTC are not communicating with each other. The system
should be serviced.
PFD1 SERVICE
– PFD1 needs service. Return unit
for repair.
The PFD and/or MFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be
serviced.
PFD2 SERVICE
– PFD2 needs service. Return unit
for repair.
MFD1 SERVICE
– MFD1 needs service. Return
unit for repair.
PFD1 MANIFEST
– PFD 1 software mismatch,
communication halted.
The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
PFD2 MANIFEST
– PFD 2 software mismatch,
communication halted.
MFD1 MANIFEST
– MFD 1 software mismatch,
communication halted.
PFD1 CONFIG
– PFD1 config error. Config service
req’d. The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
PFD2 CONFIG
– PFD2 config error. Config service
req’d.
MFD1 CONFIG
– MFD1 config error. Config
service req’d.
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
PFD1 SOFTWARE
– PFD1 mismatch,
communication halted.
The specified GDU has different software versions installed. The system should
be serviced.
PFD2 SOFTWARE
– PFD2 mismatch,
communication halted.
MFD1 SOFTWARE
– MFD1 mismatch,
communication halted.
PFD1 COOLING
– PFD1 has poor cooling.
Reducing power usage.
The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by
dimming the display. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
PFD2 COOLING
– PFD2 has poor cooling.
Reducing power usage.
MFD1 COOLING
– MFD1 has poor cooling.
Reducing power usage.
PFD1 FAN FAIL
– PFD1 internal fan failure. Unit
needs service.
The PFD and/or MFD internal cooling fan has failed. The system should be
serviced.
PFD2 FAN FAIL
– PFD2 internal fan failure. Unit
needs service.
MFD1 FAN FAIL
– MFD1 internal fan failure. Unit
needs service.
PFD1 BKLT CAL INV
– PFD1 bklt cal lost or
mismatch. Return for repair.
The PFD and/or MFD backlight calibration cannot be found or found or is
invalid. The system should be serviced.
PFD2 BKLT CAL INV
– PFD2 bklt cal lost or
mismatch. Return for repair.
MFD1 BKLT CAL INV
– MFD1 bklt cal lost or
mismatch. Return for repair.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B564
APPENDIX A
System Message Comments
PFD1 KEYSTK
– PFD1 [key name] is stuck. A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by
pressing it several times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
PFD2 KEYSTK
– PFD2 [key name] is stuck.
MFD1 KEYSTK
– MFD1 [key name] is stuck.
CNFG MODULE
– PFD1 configuration module is
inoperative.
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The system should
be serviced.
PFD1 VOLTAGE
– PFD1 has low voltage. Reducing
power usage The PFD1 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
PFD2 VOLTAGE
– PFD2 has low voltage. Reducing
power usage The PFD2 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
MFD1 VOLTAGE
– MFD1 has low voltage.
Reducing power usage The MFD voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
PFD1
CARD1 REM
– PFD1 card 1 was removed.
Reinsert card.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified PFD. The SD
card needs to be reinserted.
PFD1
CARD2 REM
– PFD1 card 2 was removed.
Reinsert card.
PFD1 CARD3 REM
– PFD1 card 3 was removed.
Reinsert card.
PFD2
CARD1 REM
– PFD2 card 1 was removed.
Reinsert card.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified PFD. The SD
card needs to be reinserted.
PFD2
CARD2 REM
– PFD2 card 2 was removed.
Reinsert card.
PFD2 CARD3 REM
– PFD2 card 3 was removed.
Reinsert card.
MFD1
CARD1 REM
– MFD1 card 1 was removed.
Reinsert card.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the MFD. The SD card
needs to be reinserted.
MFD1
CARD2 REM
– MFD1 card 2 was removed.
Reinsert card.
MFD1 CARD3 REM
– MFD1 card 3 was removed.
Reinsert card.
PFD1
CARD1 ERR
– PFD1 card 1 is invalid.
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified PFD is invalid.
PFD1
CARD2 ERR
– PFD1 card 2 is invalid.
PFD1 CARD3 ERR
– PFD1 card 3 is invalid.
PFD2
CARD1 ERR
– PFD2 card 1 is invalid.
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified PFD is invalid.
PFD2
CARD2 ERR
– PFD2 card 2 is invalid.
PFD2 CARD3 ERR
– PFD2 card 3 is invalid.
MFD1
CARD1 ERR
– MFD1 card 1 is invalid.
The SD card in the top card slot of the MFD is invalid.
MFD1
CARD2 ERR
– MFD1 card 2 is invalid.
MFD1 CARD3 ERR
– MFD1 card 3 is invalid.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
565
APPENDIX A
DATABASE SYSTEM MESSAGES
Message Comments
MFD1 DB ERR
– MFD1 navigation database error
exists. The specified PFD or MFD detected a failure in one or more databases. Ensure
the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the
system should be serviced.
PFD1 DB ERR
– PFD1 navigation database error
exists.
PFD2 DB ERR
– PFD2 navigation database error
exists.
GTC1 DB ERR
– GTC1 database error exists. The GTC detected a failure in one or more databases. Ensure the data card is
properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
GTC2 DB ERR
– GTC2 database error exists.
DB MISMATCH
– Navigation database mismatch.
Xtalk is off.
The PFDs and MFD have different navigation database versions or regions
installed. Crossfill is off. Check the Avionics Status Screen to determine
versions or regions. Also, check the Avionics Status Screen for a database
synchronization function not completed. After synchronization is complete,
power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH
– Standby Navigation database
mismatch.
The PFDs and MFD have different standby navigation database versions or
regions installed. Check the Avionics Status Screen to determine versions or
regions. Also, check the Avionics Status Screen for a database synchronization
function not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be
turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH
– Terrain database mismatch. The PFDs and MFD have different terrain database versions or regions installed.
Check the Avionics Status Screen to determine versions or regions. Also,
check the Avionics Status Screen for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then
on.
DB MISMATCH
– Obstacle database mismatch. The PFDs and MFD have different obstacle database versions or regions
installed. Check the Avionics Status Screen to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the Avionics Status Screen for a database synchronization function
not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off,
then on.
NAV DB UPDATED
– Active navigation database
updated.
System has updated the active navigation database from the standby
navigation database.
PFD1 TERRAIN DSP
– [PFD1 Terrain awareness
display unavailable.
One of the terrain, airport terrain, or obstacle databases required for TAWS in
the specified PFD or MFD is missing or invalid.
PFD2 TERRAIN DSP
– PFD2 Terrain awareness
display unavailable.
MFD1 TERRAIN DSP
– MFD1 Terrain awareness
display unavailable.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B566
APPENDIX A
GIA 63W INTEGRATED AVIONICS UNIT SYSTEM MESSAGES
System Message Comments
GIA1 CONFIG
– GIA1 config error. Config
service req’d. The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
GIA2 CONFIG
– GIA2 config error. Config
service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG
– GIA1 audio config error.
Config service req’d. The GIA1 and/or GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The system
should be serviced.
GIA2 CONFIG
– GIA2 audio config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING
– GIA1 temperature too low.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.
GIA2 COOLING
– GIA2 temperature too low.
GIA1 COOLING
– GIA1 over temperature.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
GIA2 COOLING
– GIA2 over temperature.
GIA1 SERVICE
– GIA1 needs service. Return
the unit for repair. The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system
should be serviced.
GIA2 SERVICE
– GIA2 needs service. Return the
unit for repair.
HW MISMATCH
– GIA1 hardware mismatch,
GIA1 communication halted. A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is WAAS capable.
HW MISMATCH
– GIA hardware mismatch,
GIA2 communication halted.
GIA1 MANIFEST
– GIA1 software mismatch,
communication halted. The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
GIA2 MANIFEST
– GIA2 software mismatch,
communication halted.
GFC MANIFEST
– GFC software mismatch,
communication halted. Incorrect servo software is installed, or gain settings are incorrect.
COM1 TEMP
– COM1 over temp. Reducing
transmitter power. The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2.
The transmitter operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
COM2 TEMP
– COM2 over temp. Reducing
transmitter power.
COM1 CONFIG
– COM1 config error. Config
service req’d. The COM1 and/or COM2 configuration settings do not match backup
configuration memory. The system should be serviced.
COM2 CONFIG
– COM2 config error. Config
service req’d.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
567
APPENDIX A
System Message Comments
COM1 SERVICE
– COM1 needs service. Return
unit for repair. The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2
may still be usable. The system should be serviced when possible.
COM2 SERVICE
– COM2 needs service. Return
unit for repair.
COM1 MANIFEST
– COM1 software mismatch,
communication halted. The COM 1 and/or COM 2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
COM2 MANIFEST
– COM2 software mismatch,
communication halted.
COM1 PTT
– COM1 push-to-talk key is stuck. The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation. If the
problem persists, the system should be serviced.
COM2 PTT
– COM2 push-to-talk key is stuck.
COM1 RMT XFR
– COM1 remote transfer key
is stuck. The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
position. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem
persists, the system should be serviced.
COM2 RMT XFR
– COM2 remote transfer key
is stuck.
LOI
– GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck with other
NAVS. GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
GPS NAV LOST
– Loss of GPS navigation.
Insufficient satellites. Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellite coverage.
GPS NAV LOST
– Loss of GPS navigation.
Position error. Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
GPS NAV LOST
– Loss of GPS navigation. GPS
fail. Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
ABORT APR
– Loss of GPS navigation. Abort
approach. Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
APR DWNGRADE
– Apr downgraded. Vertical guidance generated by SBAS is unavailable. Use only LNAV minimums.
TRUE APR – True north approach. Change
HDG reference to true.
Displayed after passing the first waypoint of a true north approach when the nav
angle is set to ‘AUTO’.
RAIM UNAVAIL – RAIM is not available from
FAF to MAP waypoints.
GPS satellite coverage is insufficient to perform Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (RAIM) from the FAF to the MAP waypoints.
GPS1 SERVICE
– GPS1 needs service. Return
unit for repair. A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may
still be available. The system should be serviced.
GPS2 SERVICE
– GPS2 needs service. Return
unit for repair.
GPS1 FAIL
– GPS1 is inoperative.
A failure has been detected in GPS receiver #1 and/or GPS receiver #2. The system
should be serviced.
GPS2 FAIL
– GPS2 is inoperative.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B568
APPENDIX A
System Message Comments
NAV1 SERVICE
– NAV1 needs service. Return
unit for repair. A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may
still be available. The system should be serviced.
NAV2 SERVICE
– NAV2 needs service. Return
unit for repair.
NAV1 RMT XFR
– NAV1 remote transfer key is
stuck. The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or
“pressed”) state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the
problem persists, the system should be serviced.
NAV2 RMT XFR
– NAV2 remote transfer key is
stuck.
NAV1 MANIFEST
– NAV1 software mismatch,
communication halted. The NAV 1 and/or NAV 2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
NAV2 MANIFEST
– NAV2 software mismatch,
communication halted.
G/S1 FAIL
– G/S1 is inoperative.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The system
should be serviced.
G/S2 FAIL
– G/S2 is inoperative.
G/S1 SERVICE
– G/S1 needs service. Return
unit for repair. A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The receiver
may still be available. The system should be serviced when possible.
G/S2 SERVICE
– G/S2 needs service. Return
unit for repair.
GEA 71 ENGINE/AIRFRAME UNIT SYSTEM MESSAGES
Message Comments
GEA1 CONFIG
– GEA1 config error. Config
service req’d.
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
GEA2 CONFIG
– GEA2 config error. Config
service req’d.
The GEA2 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
GEA3 CONFIG
– GEA3 config error. Config
service req’d.
The GEA3 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
GEA1 MANIFEST
– GEA1 software mismatch,
communication halted. The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GEA2 MANIFEST
– GEA2 software mismatch,
communication halted. The #2 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GEA3 MANIFEST
– GEA3 software mismatch,
communication halted. The #3 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
569
APPENDIX A
GSD 41 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message Comments
GSD1 CONFIG
– GSD1 config error. Config
service req’d. GSD1 and the CDU have different copies of the GSD1 configuration.
GSD2 CONFIG
– GSD2 config error. Config
service req’d. GSD2 and the CDU have different copies of the GSD2 configuration.
GSD1 COOLING
– GSD1 temperature too
low. GSD1 is reporting a low temperature condition.
GSD1 COOLING
– GSD1 over temperature. GSD1 is reporting an over-temperature condition.
GSD2 COOLING
– GSD2 temperature too
low. GSD2 is reporting a low temperature condition.
GSD2 COOLING
– GSD2 over temperature. GSD2 is reporting an over-temperature condition.
GSD1 SERVICE
– GSD1 needs service. Return
unit for repair. GSD1 is reporting an internal error condition. The GSD may still be usable.
GSD2 SERVICE
– GSD2 needs service. Return
unit for repair. GSD2 is reporting an internal error condition. The GSD may still be usable.
GSD1 MANIFEST
– GSD1 software mismatch.
Communication halted. GSD1 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GSD2 MANIFEST
– GSD2 software mismatch.
Communication halted. GSD2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GMU 44 MAGNETOMETER SYSTEM MESSAGES
Message Comments
HDG FAULT
– AHRS1 magnetometer fault has
occurred.
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS
uses GPS for backup mode operation. The system should be serviced.
HDG FAULT
– AHRS2 magnetometer fault has
occurred.
A fault has occurred in the #2 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS
uses GPS for backup mode operation. The system should be serviced.
GMU1 MANIFEST
– GMU1 software
mismatch, communication halted. The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GMU2 MANIFEST
– GMU2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GRS 77 ATTITUDE AND HEADING REFERENCE SYSTEM MESSAGES
System Message Comments
AHRS1 TAS
– AHRS1 not receiving airspeed. The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The system should be
serviced.
AHRS2 TAS
– AHRS2 not receiving airspeed. The #2 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The system should be
serviced.
AHRS1 GPS
– AHRS1 using backup GPS
source.
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The
system should be serviced when possible.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B570
APPENDIX A
System Message Comments
AHRS2 GPS
– AHRS2 using backup GPS
source.
The #2 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The
system should be serviced when possible.
AHRS1 GPS
– AHRS1 not receiving any GPS
information.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The system should be serviced.
AHRS2 GPS
– AHRS2 not receiving any GPS
information.
The #2 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The system should be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS
– AHRS1 not receiving backup
GPS information. The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The system should be serviced.
AHRS2 GPS
– AHRS2 not receiving backup
GPS information. The #2 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The system should be serviced.
AHRS1 GPS
– AHRS1 operating exclusively in
no-GPS mode.
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The system should be
serviced.
AHRS2 GPS
– AHRS2 operating exclusively in
no-GPS mode.
The #2 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The system should be
serviced.
AHRS MAG DB
– AHRS magnetic model
database version mismatch. The #1 AHRS and #2 AHRS magnetic model database versions do not match.
AHRS1 SRVC
– AHRS1 Magnetic-field model
needs update.
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
AHRS2 SRVC
– AHRS2 Magnetic-field model
needs update.
The #2 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
GRS1 SERVICE
– GRS1 needs service. Return
unit for repair. The #1 AHRS should be serviced when possible.
GRS2 SERVICE
– GRS2 needs service. Return
unit for repair. The #2 AHRS should be serviced when possible.
GEO LIMITS
– AHRS1 too far north/south, no
magnetic compass. The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
annunciated as invalid.
GEO LIMITS
– AHRS2 too far north/south, no
magnetic compass.
GRS1 CONFIG
– GRS1 config error. Config
service req’d. GRS configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
GRS2 CONFIG
– GRS2 config error. Config
service req’d.
GRS1 MANIFEST
– GRS1 software mismatch,
communication halted. The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GRS2 MANIFEST
– GRS2 software mismatch,
communication halted. The #2 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GTC 570 TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLLER SYSTEM MESSAGES
System Message Comments
GTC1 CONFIG – GTC1 config error. Config
service req’d. GTC configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
GTC2 CONFIG – GTC2 config error. Config
service req’d.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
571
APPENDIX A
System Message Comments
GTC1 SERVICE – GTC1 needs service. Return
unit for repair. The GTC should be serviced..
GTC2 SERVICE – GTC2 needs service. Return
unit for repair.
GTC1 COOLING – GTC1 has poor cooling.
Reducing power usage. The GTC has insufficient cooling. If the problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
GTC2 COOLING – GTC2 has poor cooling.
Reducing power usage.
GTC1 VOLTAGE
– GTC1 has low voltage.
Reducing power usage The GTC voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
GTC2 VOLTAGE
– GTC2 has low voltage.
Reducing power usage
GTC1 FAN FAIL – GTC1 internal fan failure.
Unit needs service. The internal fan in the GTC has failed. The system should be serviced.
GTC2 FAN FAIL – GTC2 internal fan failure.
Unit needs service.
GTC1 MANIFEST
– GTC 1 software mismatch,
communication halted. The GTC has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GTC2 MANIFEST
– GTC 2 software mismatch,
communication halted.
GTC1 CARD1 ERR
– GTC1 card 1 is invalid. The internal SD card in the GTC contains invalid data. The system should be
serviced.
GTC2 CARD1 ERR
– GTC2 card 1 is invalid.
GTC1 CARD1 REM
– GTC1 card 1 was
removed. Reinsert card. The internal SD card in the GTC was removed. The system should be serviced.
GTC2 CARD1 REM
– GTC2 card 1 was
removed. Reinsert card.
GTC1 KEYSTK
– GTC1 [key name] key is stuck. A knob or joystick is stuck on the GTC bezel. Attempt to free the stuck control by
pushing or turning it several times. The system should be serviced if the problem
persists.
GTC2 KEYSTK
– GTC2 [key name] key is stuck.
GSR 56 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message Comments
GSR1 FAIL
– GSR1 has failed. A failure has been detected in GSR1. The system should be serviced.
MANIFEST
– GSR1 software mismatch,
communication halted. The GSR1 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B572
APPENDIX A
GDL 59 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Message Comments
GDL59 CONFIG
– GDL 59 config error. Config
service req’d.
GDL 59 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
GDL59 FAIL
– GDL 59 has failed. A failure has been detected in the GDL 59. The receiver is unavailable. The
system should be serviced.
GDL59 SERVICE
– GDL 59 needs service.
Return unit for repair. A failure has been detected in the GDL 59. The system should be serviced.
GDL59 RTR FAIL
– The GDL 59 router has
failed. A failure has been detected in the GDL 59 router. The system should be serviced.
REGISTER CONNEXT
– Data services are
inoperative, register w/Connext.
The GDL 59 is not registered with Connext Services, or its current registration data
has failed authentication.
GDL59 MANIFEST
– GDL59 software
mismatch, communication halted.
The GDL 59 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GDR 66 VHF DATALINK TRANSCEIVER SYSTEM MESSAGES
System Message Comments
ATC MESSAGE
– <message>. Message has been received from ATC via CPDLC.
CPDLC
– CPDLC is available. Logon successful. Data link is available for use.
CPDLC
– CPDLC connection lost. Establish new
connection. Data link connection has been lost.
CPDLC
– CPDLC facility logon failed. Logon failed. Check pertinent entries for accuracy.
CPDLC
– CPDLC data link available. Logon is
still required. The data link is ready for use, but logon to the facility has not yet taken place.
GDR TEMP
– GDR over temp. Reducing
transmitter power.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in the GDR. The
transmitter operates at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
GDR FAIL
– GDR is inoperative. A failure has been detected in the GDR. The system should be serviced.
GDR TX FAIL
– GDR transmitter is inoperative. The system should be serviced.
GDR PTT
– GDR push-to-talk key is stuck. The GDR push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or “pressed”) position. Press
the PTT switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
GDR RMT XFR
– GDR remote transfer key is
stuck.
The GDR transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position. Press the
transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
GDR SERVICE
– GDR needs service. Return unit
for repair. The GDR should be serviced when possible.
GDR CONFIG
– GDR config error. Config
service req’d.
GDR configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
GDR MANIFEST
– GDR software mismatch,
communication halted. The GDR has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GDR AUX MANIFEST
– GDR AUX software
mismatch, communication halted.
The GDR secondary processor has incorrect software installed. The system should
be serviced.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
573
APPENDIX A
GDL 69A SATELLITE DATALINK RECEIVER SYSTEM MESSAGES
System Message Comments
GDL69 CONFIG
– GDL 69 config error. Config
service req’d.
GDL 69 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
GDL69 FAIL
– GDL 69 has failed. A failure has been detected in the GDL 69. The receiver is unavailable. The system
should be serviced.
GDL69 MANIFEST
– GDL69 software
mismatch, communication halted. The GDL 69 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GWX 70 AIRBORNE COLOR WEATHER RADAR SYSTEM MESSAGES
Message Comments
GWX CONFIG
– GWX config error. Config
service req’d.
GWX configuration settings do not match those of the GDU configuration. The
system should be serviced.
GWX FAIL
– GWX is inoperative. The GDU is not recieving status packet from the GWX or the GWX is reporting a
fault. The radar system should be serviced.
GWX SERVICE
– GWX needs service. Return
unit for repair. A failure has been detected in the GWX. The GWX may still be usable.
GWX MANIFEST
– GWX software mismatch,
communication halted. The GWX has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
WX ALERT
– Possible severe weather ahead. Possible severe weather detected within +/- 10 degrees of the aircraft heading at a
range of 80 to 320 nm.
GMA 36 REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLLER SYSTEM MESSAGES
System Message Comments
GMA1 FAIL
– GMA1 is inoperative. The audio controller has detected a failure. The audio controller is unavailable. The
system should be serviced.
GMA2 FAIL
– GMA2 is inoperative.
GMA1 CONFIG
– GMA1 config error. Config
service req’d. The audio controller configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
GMA2 CONFIG
– GMA2 config error. Config
service req’d.
GMA XTALK
– GMA crosstalk error has
occurred.
The GMA Audio Controllers are not communicating with each other. The system
should be serviced.
DIG GMA1 MANIFEST
– DIG GMA 1
software mismatch, communication halted. The digital audio controller has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
DIG GMA2 MANIFEST
– DIG GMA 2
software mismatch, communication halted.
GMA1 AUDIO MANIFEST
– GMA1 audio
software mismatch, communication halted.
The audio system has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GMA2 AUDIO MANIFEST
– GMA2 audio
software mismatch, communication halted.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B574
APPENDIX A
System Message Comments
GMA1 AUX MANIFEST
– GMA 1 AUX
software mismatch, communication halted. The digital audio controller has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.
GMA2 AUX MANIFEST
– GMA 2 AUX
software mismatch, communication halted.
GMA1 SERVICE
– GMA1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
The audio controller self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio func-
tions may still be available, and the audio controller may still be usable. The system
should be serviced when possible.
GMA2 SERVICE
– GMA2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GMC 715 AFCS CONTROLLER SYSTEM MESSAGES
System Message Comments
GMC CONFIG
– GMC Config error. Config
service req’d. Error in the configuration of the GMC.
GMC FAIL
– GMC is inoperative. A failure has been detected in the GMC. The GMC is unavailable.
GMC MANIFEST
– GMC software mismatch.
Communication halted. The GMC has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GMC KEYSTK
– GMC [key name] key is stuck. A key is stuck on the GMC bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it
several times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM MESSAGES
System Message Comments
FPL WPT LOCK
– Flight plan waypoint is
locked.
Upon power-up, The system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is locked.
This occurs when an aviation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint.
The flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This can
also occur with user waypoints in flight plans that are deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database, or
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
FPL WPT MOVE
– Flight plan waypoint
moved.
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new
navigation database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint
locations.
TIMER EXPIRD
– Timer has expired. The system notifies the pilot the timer has expired.
DB CHANGE
– Database changed. Verify user
modified procedures.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually
edited. This alert is issued only after a navigation database update. Verify the user-
modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and current.
DB CHANGE
– Database changed. Verify
stored airways.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after a navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
FPL TRUNC
– Flight plan has been truncated. This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
WPT ARRIVAL
– Arriving at waypoint - [xxxx] Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
STEEP TURN
– Steep turn ahead. A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
575
APPENDIX A
System Message Comments
INSIDE ARSPC
– Inside airspace. The aircraft is inside the airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD
– Airspace ahead - less than
10 minutes.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace
within 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR
– Airspace near and ahead. Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
ARSPC NEAR
– Airspace near – less than 2
nm. Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
APR INACTV
– Approach is not active. The system notifies the pilot the loaded approach is not active. Activate approach
when required.
SLCT FREQ
– Select appropriate frequency for
approach.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate
NAV receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
SLCT NAV
– Select NAV on CDI for approach. The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
the correct NAV receiver.
UNABLE V WPT
– Can’t reach current vertical
waypoint.
The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path angle
and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next vertical
waypoint.
VNV
– Unavailable: Unsupported leg type in
flight plan.
The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the
active vertical waypoint.
VNV
– Unavailable: Excessive cross-track
error. The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
VNV
– Unavailable: Excessive track angle
error.
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
invalid.
VNV
– Unavailable: Parallel course selected. A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
BARO MISMATCH
– Correct baro mismatch
for VNAV guidance.
Altimeter setting is not the same on PFD1 and PFD2. Synchronize settings for VNAV
guidance.
NON WGS84 WPT
– Do not use GPS for
navigation to [xxxx]
The position of the selected waypoint [xxxxx] is not calculated based on the WGS84
map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed. Do not use GPS
to navigate to the selected non-WGS84 waypoint.
TRAFFIC FAIL
– Traffic device has failed. The system is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device
should be serviced.
FAILED PATH – A data path has failed. A data path connected to the GDU or the GIA has failed.
MAG VAR WARN
– Large magnetic variance.
Verify all course angles.
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may
differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
USER MAG VAR – User magnetic variation
is active. User entered magnetic variation is being used for system calculations.
SCHEDULER [#]
– <message>. Message criteria entered by the user.
SVT DISABLED – Out of available terrain
region.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of the
installed terrain database.
SVT DISABLED – Terrain DB resolution too
low.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (9
arc-second or better) is not currently installed.
TERRAIN DISABLED – Terrain Awareness DB
resolution too low.
TAWS is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (9 arc-second
or better) is not currently installed.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B576
APPENDIX A
System Message Comments
TRN AUD FAIL – Trn Awareness audio source
unavailable. TAWS is disabled because an aural alert audio source is unavailable.
TERRAIN AUD CFG – Trn Awareness audio
config error. Service req’d.
TAWS is disabled because the audio configuration is invalid. The system should be
serviced.
CHECK CRS
– Database course for LOC1 /
[LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
Selected course for LOC1 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
CHECK CRS
– Database course for LOC2 /
[LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1]
CARD 1 REM
–
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] card 1 was removed.
Reinsert card.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the PFD or MFD. The SD card
needs to be reinserted.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1]
CARD 2 REM
– Card
2 was removed. Reinsert card.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the PFD or MFD. The SD
card needs to be reinserted.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1]
CARD 1 ERR
–
[PDF1 or MFD1] card 1 is invalid. The SD card in the top card slot of the PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1]
CARD 2 ERR
–
[PFD1 or MFD1] Card 2 is invalid. The SD card in the bottom card slot of the PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1]
CARD 3 REM
– Card
3 was removed. Reinsert card.
The internal SD card was removed from the PFD or MFD. The system should be
serviced.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1]
CARD 3 ERR
–
[PDF1 or MFD1] card 3 is invalid.
The internal SD card in the PFD or MFD contains invalid data. The system should be
serviced.
DATA LOST
– Pilot stored data was lost.
Recheck settings. The system was unable to save pilot data. Verify settings.
FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
Flight Plan Import/Export Results Description
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’ A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight
plan.
‘File contained user waypoints only. User
waypoints imported successfully. No stored
flight plan data was modified.’
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. These
waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans stored in
the system have been modified.
‘No flight plan files found to import.’ The SD card contains no flight plan data.
‘Flight plan import failed.’ Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
‘Flight plan partially imported.’ Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card, however
others had errors and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in the
system.
‘File contained user waypoints only.’ The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. In
addition, one or more of these waypoints may not have imported successfully.
‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’ The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can support.
The flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
577
APPENDIX A
Flight Plan Import/Export Results Description
‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints
locked.’
The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints the system cannot find
in the navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but must be edited
within the system before it can be activated for use.
‘User waypoint database full. Not all
loaded.’
The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored user
waypoints has exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user waypoints on the
SD card have been imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not imported
are locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited within the system before it
can be activated for use.
‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’ One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to naming
conflicts with waypoints already existing in the system.
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’ The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
‘Flight plan export failed.’ The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card may
not have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed prematurely.
PILOT PROFILE IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
The following messages may be displayed when importing and exporting Pilot Profiles.
Pilot Profile Import/Export Results Description
‘No pilot profile plan files found to import.’ Displayed if the SD card does not have one or more valid pilot profile filenames.
‘Overwrite existing profile?’ Displayed if the profile name matches the name of existing profile.
‘Profile name invalid. Enter a different
profile name.’
Displayed if the profile name is invalid.
‘All available pilot profiles in use. Delete a
profile before importing another.’
Displayed if the maximum number for pilot profiles has been reached.
‘Pilot profile import failed.’ Displayed if the importing operation fails for any other reason.
‘Pilot profile import succeeded.’ Displayed if the importing operation succeeds.
‘Overwrite existing file?’ Displayed if the filename matches the name of an existing file on the SD card.
‘Pilot profile export failed.’ Displayed if the export operation fails.
‘Pilot profile export succeeded.’ Displayed if the export operation succeeds.
TAWS-A ALERTS
Annunciations appear on the PFDs and the Touchscreen Controllers. Pop-up alerts appear only on the
Touchscreen Controllers.
Alert Type
PFD/MFD
TAWS-A
Display
Annunciation
Touchscreen Controller
Pop-Up Alert Voice Message
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Warning
(RTC) “Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI) “Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance Warning
(ROC)“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B578
APPENDIX A
Alert Type
PFD/MFD
TAWS-A
Display
Annunciation
Touchscreen Controller
Pop-Up Alert Voice Message
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI) “Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR) “<whoop><whoop> Pull Up”
Excessive Closure Rate Warning (ECR) “<whoop><whoop> Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Caution
(RTC) “Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI) “Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance Caution
(ROC) “Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI) “Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Premature Descent Alert Caution (PDA) “Too Low, Terrain”
Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR) “Sink Rate”
Excessive Closure Rate Caution (ECR) “Terrain, Terrain”
Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR) “Don’t Sink”
Flight Into Terrain High Speed Caution (FIT) “Too Low, Terrain”
Flight Into Terrain Gear Caution (FIT) “Too Low, Gear”
Flight Into Terrain Flaps Caution (FIT) “Too Low, Flaps”
Flight Into Terrain Takeoff Caution (FIT) “Too Low, Terrain”
Glide Slope/Glide Path Deviation Caution (GSD)
(depends on approach type) or or “Glide Slope”
or
“Glide Path”
Altitude Voice Callout (VCO) None None “Five-Hundred”
“Four-Hundred”
“Three-Hundred”
“Two-Hundred”
“One-Hundred”
TAWS-A SYSTEM STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS
Alert Type
PFD/MFD
TAWS-A Page
Annunciation
Additional
TAWS-A Page
Annunciation
Voice Alert
TAWS System Fail, Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, invalid software configuration,
system audio fault
TAWS FAIL “TAWS System Failure”
GPWS System Fail None “GPWS System Failure”
System Test in progress TAWS TEST None
System Test pass None None “TAWS System Test OK”
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
579
APPENDIX A
Alert Type
PFD/MFD
TAWS-A Page
Annunciation
Additional
TAWS-A Page
Annunciation
Voice Alert
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database unavailable or invalid.
TAWS operating with PFD Terrain or Obstacle databases None TERRAIN DATABASE
FAILURE None
GPWS System Fail, Radar Altimeter invalid, Altitude or
Vertical Speed unavailable
None “GPWS System Failure”
No GPS position NO GPS
POSITION “TAWS Not Available”
Excessively degraded GPS signal, Out of database
coverage area None “TAWS Not Available”
Out of database coverage area None “TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” when
aircraft enters database
coverage area.
TCAS II ALERTS AND ANNUNCIATIONS
Mode PFD Mode
Annunciation
Traffic Map Pane Mode
Annunciation
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Map Displays)
TCAS II System Test In
Progress None
TEST
(‘TEST MODE’ also shown in white on top
center of pane)
Traffic Advisory and
Resolution Advisory (TA/RA) None TA/RA
Traffic Advisory Only (TA Only) TA ONLY
TCAS II Standby o Or:
*
STANDBY
(shown in white in center of pane on ground,
yellow in the air)
TCAS II Failed FAIL
* Annunciation appears in yellow while in the air.
TCAS II Modes
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation Description
NO DATA Data is not being received from the TCAS II unit
DATA FAILED Data is being received from the TCAS II unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED Incorrect data format received from the TCAS II unit
TCAS II Failure Annunciations
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B580
APPENDIX A
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation Description
RA OFF SCALE A Resolution Advisory is outside the selected display range*. Annunciation is removed when traffic
comes within the selected display range
TA OFF SCALE A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
RA X.X ± XX ↕
System cannot determine bearing of Resolution Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending).
TA X.X ± XX ↕
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending).
TRFC FAIL TCAS II unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
NO TCAS DATA Data is not being received from the TCAS II unit
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
TCAS II Traffic Status Annunciations
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
581
APPENDIX B
DATABASE MANAGEMENT
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interruption during the
database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic flight operations,
SD cards are required for database storage as well as Jeppesen navigation and ChartView database updates. Not
all SD cards are compatible with the Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300. Use only SD cards supplied by Garmin or
the aircraft manufacturer.
CAUTION: When downloading updates to the Jeppesen Navigation Database, copy the data to an SD card
other than a Garmin Supplemental Data Card. Otherwise, data corruption can occur.
NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ message will be displayed until database
synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization can be
monitored on the Avionics Status Screen on the Touchscreen Controller.
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the
power-up screen and the effective date on the Avionics Status Screen being displayed in yellow.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.
These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to FlyGarmin.com and select “Aviation Data Error Report.
JEPPESEN DATABASES
The Jeppesen navigation database is updated on a 28-day cycle. The ChartView database is updated on a
14-day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70 days of the expiration date, ChartView will
no longer function. Both of these databases are provided directly from Jeppesen.
The ChartView database should be copied to the Garmin supplied Supplemental Data Card which will reside
in the bottom card slot on the MFD. The navigation database must be installed from the Jeppesen or user
supplied SD data card. Contact Jeppesen (www.jeppesen.com) for subscription and update information.
NOTE: After the navigation database is installed, the card may be removed.
Updating the active Jeppesen navigation database (not using the Dual Navigation Database or
Automatic Database Synchronization Features):
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top card slot of the
display (PFD1, PFD2, or MFD) to be updated (label of SD card facing left).
2) Turn the system ON. A prompt is displayed in the upper left corner of the display:
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B582
APPENDIX B
Figure B-1 Standby Navigation Database Prompt
3) Press the NO Softkey to proceed to loading the active database.
4) A prompt similar to the following is displayed. Press the YES Softkey to update the active navigation database.
Figure B-2 Database Update Confirmation
5) After the update completes, the display starts in normal mode.
6) Turn the system OFF and remove the SD card from the top card slot.
7) Repeat steps 1 through 6 for the remaining displays (PFD1, PFD2, or MFD).
8) Apply power to the system and press the right most softkey to acknowledge the startup screen.
9) From the Home Screen on the Touchscreen Controller, touch Setup > Avionics Status.
10) Touch the Database Tab.
11) Touch the PFD1 Button. Check the active navigation database information to verify the database has been
updated.
12) Touch the Back Button.
13) Touch the PFD2 Button. Check the active navigation database information to verify the database has been
updated.
14) Touch the Back Button.
15) Touch the MFD1 Button. Check the active navigation database information to verify the database has been
updated.
16) Touch the Back Button.
17) Touch the GTC1 Button. Check the database information to verify databases have been updated.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
583
APPENDIX B
DUAL NAVIGATION DATABASE FEATURE
The dual navigation database feature allows each display to store an upcoming navigation database on the
bottom SD card so that the system can automatically load it to replace the active database when the new
database becomes effective (the next cycle becomes available seven days prior to its effective date).
If a navigation database loader card is inserted into the top SD card slot of a display, and an SD card is in the
bottom slot, the system will prompt the user (upon on-ground power up) as to whether the database should
be stored on the bottom SD card as the standby database. If the user responds affirmatively, the system will
copy the navigation database from the top SD card to the bottom SD card. As long as the bottom SD card
remains in the card slot, this standby navigation database will be available for the system to use as the active
database as soon as it becomes effective.
The system checks the active and standby databases upon (on-ground only) power-up. If the standby
database is current and the active database is out of date, the display will upload the standby database into the
active internal database location. Uploading the standby database to the active location takes approximately
45-55 seconds. The pilot is alerted that the update is complete by a system alert message, ‘NAV DB UPDATED’.
Loading a standby navigation database:
NOTE: After the navigation database is loaded or copied, the top SD card may be removed.
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top card slot of
the MFD.
2) Verify that an SD card is inserted in the bottom slot of each PFD and the MFD.
3) Turn the system ON. A prompt is displayed.
Figure B-3 Standby Navigation Database Prompt
4) Press the YES Softkey. The navigation database is copied to the SD card in the bottom card slot of the MFD.
5) After the navigation database files are copied to the bottom SD card, press any key to continue, as instructed.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B584
APPENDIX B
Figure B-4 Standby Navigation Database Update Complete
6) Again, press any key to continue as instructed on the display.
Figure B-5 Navigation Database Verification Prompt
7) Press the NO Softkey. The display now starts in normal mode. Since the database effective date is not yet valid, it
should not be loaded as the active database. The display now starts in normal mode. Do not remove power while
the display is starting.
Figure B-6 Active Navigation Database Prompt
8) Press the right most softkey to acknowledge the startup screen.
9) From the Home Screen on the Touchscreen Controller, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
10) Touch the Database Tab.
11) Touch the PFD1 Button. Verify the PFD1 Database screen indicates the standby navigation database is synchronizing.
When synchronization has finished, ‘Complete’ is displayed. Check the standby navigation database information
to verify database have been updated.
12) Touch the Back Button.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
585
APPENDIX B
13) Touch the PFD2 Button. Verify the PFD2 Database screen indicates the standby navigation database is synchronizing.
When synchronization has finished, ‘Complete’ is displayed. Check the standby navigation database information
to verify database have been updated.
14) Touch the Back Button.
15) Touch the MFD1 Button. Check the standby navigation database information to verify the database has been
updated.
16) Touch the Back Button.
17) Touch the GTC1 Button. Check the standby navigation database information to verify databases have been
updated.
NOTE: During the synchronization process, version differences between standby navigation databases will exist.
This will result in the system displaying a ‘DB Mismatch’ alert for the standby navigation databases. This alert will
remain until the next power cycle.
18) Turn system power OFF.
19) Remove the SD card from the top card slot of the MFD.
20) Turn system power ON.
21) Acknowledge the Power-up Display agreement by pressing the right most softkey as indicated on the display.
22) From the Home Screen on the Touchscreen Controller, touch Setup > Avionics Status.
23) Touch the Database Tab.
24) Touch the PFD1 Button. Check the standby navigation database information to verify database have been
updated.
25) Touch the Back Button.
26) Touch the PFD1 Button. Check the standby navigation database information to verify database have been
updated.
27) Touch the Back Button.
28) Touch the MFD1 Button. Check the standby navigation database information to verify the database has been
updated.
29) Touch the Back Button.
30) Touch the GTC1 Button. Check the standby navigation database information to verify databases have been
updated.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B586
APPENDIX B
AUTOMATIC DATABASE SYNCHRONIZATION FEATURE
When updating the active navigation database, the automatic database synchronization feature automatically
transfers the navigation database from a single SD Card to the internal memory of all GDUs and GTCs. When
updating all other databases (including the standby navigation database) the data is transferred from a single
SD card to the remaining SD cards on each GDU, as well as the internal memory of each GTC. After power-up,
the system compares all copies of each applicable database. If similar databases do not match, the most recent
valid database is automatically copied to each card in the system that does not already contain that database.
The following databases are checked and synchronized: Navigation, Basemap, Safetaxi, Terrain, Obstacle,
FliteCharts, ChartView, and Airport Directory.
NOTE:
The terrain database may take as long as 100 minutes to synchronize using this method. Therefore
the user may want to transfer the data using a PC, or connect the system to a ground power source while
performing the database synchronization.
The synchronization progress may be monitored on the Database Status Screen on the Touchscreen Controller
(Figure B-7). This screen shows the synchronization status of each applicable database as follows:
• ‘Sync in Progress’ with percent complete and time remaining
• ‘Sync Complete’
• ‘Sync Error’
While database synchroniztion is occurring, ‘Sync in Progress’ is displayed along with percent complete and
time remaining. When the synchronization is complete for the selected GDU or GTC Database Status Screen,
the status is listed as ‘Sync Complete’ (Figure B-8). The synchonization status is only present when a sync is
occurring or has occurred on the current power-up.
An indication of ‘Sync Complete’ still requires a power cycle before the synchronized databases will be used
by the system.
To view database status:
1) From the Home Screen on the Touchscreen Controller, touch Utilities > Setup > Avionics Status.
2) If necessary, touch the Database Tab. The Touchscreen Controller shows a list of displays on which databases reside.
3) Touch a button from the list to view database information associated with that display (MFD1, PFD1, PFD2, GTC1,
GTC2).
4) Scroll through the database information to view database status.
Figure B-7 Avionics Status Screen,
Database Information Window,
Navigation Database Sync in Progress
Synchronization
In Progress
Figure B-8 Avionics Status Screen,
Database Information Window,
Navigation Database Sync Complete
Synchronization
Complete
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
587
APPENDIX B
If an error occurs during the synchronization, ‘Sync Error’ is displayed in the synchronization status field
(Figure B-9). If synchronization completes for one GDU or GTC, but an error occurs for another, the error
message will be displayed on the Database Status Screen for the affected GDU or GTC. When an error message
is displayed, the problem must be corrected before the synchronization can be completed. A power cycle is
required to restart synchronization.
Figure B-9 Synchronization Error Message
Synchronization
Error
GARMIN DATABASES
The following databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin:
• Expanded basemap
• Terrain
• Obstacle
• SafeTaxi
• FliteCharts
• Airport Directory
(AOPA or AC-U-KWIK)
After subscribing to the desired database product, these database products will be downloaded and ultimately
stored on three Supplemental Data Cards. A Supplemental Data Card resides in the bottom card slot of each
GDU, as shown in Figure B-10.
Figure B-10 Correct Database Locations
PFD1 PFD2MFD
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B588
APPENDIX B
Databases residing on Supplemental Data Cards are not stored internally in the displays (except for the
Touchscreen Controllers), therefore, a Supplemental Data Card containing identical database versions must be
kept in the bottom card slot each GDU.
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. This database is updated periodically and has no
expiration date.
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S., and
offers detailed information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along with the names and phone numbers of thousands
of FBOs. These databases are updated every 56 days.
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a
28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
The Garmin database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation
Databases’ section of the Garmin website (fly.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded
from the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new
databases onto an existing Supplemental Data Card. Equipment required to perform the update is as follows:
• Windows-compatible PC computer (running Windows XP, Vista, or Windows 7)
• SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
• Existing Supplemental Database SD Cards (010-00474-44) from both PFDs and MFD
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
After the data has been copied to the appropriate data card, perform the following steps:
1) With system power OFF, remove the MFD database card from the bottom card slot of the MFD.
2) Update the Garmin databases on the MFD card.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
589
APPENDIX B
3) Insert the MFD database card into the bottom card slot of the MFD.
4) Apply power to the system, check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the power-up screen
(Figure B-11). When updating the terrain and FliteCharts databases, a ‘Verifying’ message may be seen. If this
message is present, wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding to step 5.
Figure B-11 Database Information on the Power-up Screen
5) From the Home Screen on the Touchscreen Controller, touch Setup > Avionics Status.
6) If necessary, touch the Database tab.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
8) Monitor the Sync Status in the Database Window. Wait for all databases to complete synching, indicated by
‘Complete’ being displayed as seen in Figure B-8.
9) Remove and reapply power to the system.
10) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
11) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
12) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show database information for each display (MFD1 DB, PFD1
DB, PFD2 DB). Verify the correct database cycle information is shown for each database for each display.
Figure B-12 Display Database Softkey
Unselected MFD1 DB Selected PFD1 DB Selected
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B590
APPENDIX B
MAGNETIC FIELD VARIATION DATABASE UPDATE
The Magnetic Field Variation Database is loaded as part of the navigation database, but is copied to, and
resides within each AHRS (GRS1 and GRS2). At startup, the system compares the MV DB within the navigation
database to that presently residing in each AHRS (GRS1 and GRS2). When a new navigation database is loaded,
the system may determine the newly loaded MV DB within the navigation database is newer than that residing
in each AHRS. In this case, the system will prompt for an update. This prompt is displayed on the Touchscreen
Controller (GTC), as shown in Figure B-13. Note, in this example, GRS1 is the first AHRS to indicate an update
is available. In actuality, this is dependent on which AHRS is the first to report status to the system. GRS2 may
be displayed before GRS1. The order is not important, only that both AHRS be updated.
Figure B-13 GRS1 Magnetic Field Variation Database Update Prompt (Touchscreen Controller)
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
591
APPENDIX B
Loading the Magnetic Field Variation Database update:
1) With the MV DB prompt displayed, as shown in Figure B-13, touch the OK Button. A progress monitor is
displayed as shown in Figure B-14.
Figure B-14 Uploading Database to GRS1
2) When the upload is complete, the prompt for the next GRS upload is displayed, as seen in Figure B-15. A
database mismatch message, as seen in Figure B-16, indicates the second GRS has not yet been updated.
Figure B-15 GRS2 Magnetic Field
Variation Database Update Prompt
Figure B-16 Database Mismatch Message is
Annunciated Before Second GRS is Updated
3) Touch the OK Button. A progress monitor for the next GRS is displayed as in step 1. When the upload is
complete, the system is ready for use.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B592
APPENDIX B
Blank Page
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
593
APPENDIX C
ACC accuracy
ACT, ACTV active, activate, Altitude
Compensated Tilt
ADC air data computer
ADF Automatic Direction Finder
ADI Attitude Direction Indicator
AF Arc to fix
AFCS Automatic Flight Control System
AFM Airplane Flight Manual
AFMS Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
AFRM airframe
AGL Above Ground Level
AHRS Attitude and Heading Reference
System
AIM Aeronautical Information Manual
AIRMET Airman’s Meteorological Information
ALRT alert
ALT altitude
ALT, ALTN alternator
AMPS amperes
ANNUNC annunciation
ANT antenna
AP autopilot
AP DISC autopilot disconnect
APR approach
APT airport, aerodrome
ARINC Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
ARSPC airspace
ARTCC Air Route Traffic Control Center
ARV arrival
AS airspeed
ASB Aviation Support Branch
ASOS Automated Surface Observing
System
ATC Air Traffic Control
ATCRBS ATC Radar Beacon System
ATIS Automatic Terminal Information
Service
ATK along-track
AUTOSEQ automatic sequence
AUX auxiliary
AWOS Automated Weather Observing
System
B ALT barometric altitude
BARO barometric setting
BATT battery
BC backcourse
Bearing The compass direction from the
present position to a destination
waypoint
BFO beat frequency oscillator
BKSP backspace
BRG bearing
C center runway
ºC degrees Celsius
CA Course to Altitude
CALC calculator
Calibrated Airspeed Indicated airspeed corrected for
installation and instrument errors.
CD Course to DME distance
CDI Course Deviation Indicator
CDU Control Display Unit
CF Course to Fix
CHT Cylinder Head Temperature
CHKLIST checklist
CHNL channel
CI Course to Intercept
CLD cloud
CLR clear
cm centimeter
CNS Communication, Navigation, &
Surveillance
CO carbon monoxide
COM communication radio
CONFIG configuration
COOL coolant
COPLT co-pilot
Course The line between two points to be
followed by the aircraft
Course to Steer The recommended direction to steer
in order to reduce course error or
stay on course. Provides the most
efficient heading to get back to the
desired course and proceed along
the flight plan
CPDLC Controller Pilot Datalink
Communications
CR Course to Radial
CRG Cockpit Reference Guide
CRNT current
Crosstrack Error The distance the aircraft is off a
desired course in either direction, left
or right
CRS course
CRS Course to Steer
CRSR cursor
GLOSSARY
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B594
APPENDIX C
CTA Control Area
CTRL control
Cumulative The total of all legs in a flight plan.
CVR Cockpit Voice Recorder
CVRG coverage
CWS control wheel steering
CYL cylinder
D ALT density altitude
DB, DBASE database
dBZ decibels ‘Z’ (radar return)
DCLTR, DECLTR declutter
DEC FUEL decrease fuel
deg degree
DEIC, DEICE de-icing
DEP departure
Desired Track The desired course between the
active “from” and “to” waypoints
DEST destination
DF Direct to Fix
DFLT default
DGRD degrade
DH decision height
Dilution of Precision A measure of GPS satellite geometry
quality on a scale of one to ten (lower
numbers equal better geometry,
where higher numbers equal poorer
geometry)
DIR direction
DIS distance
Distance The ‘great circle’ distance from the
present position to a destination
waypoint
DME Distance Measuring Equipment
DOP Dilution of Precision
DP Departure Procedure
DPRT departure
DR dead reckoning
DSBL disabled
DTK Desired Track
E empty, east
ECU Engine Control Unit
Efficiency A measure of fuel consumption,
expressed in distance per unit of fuel
EGNOS European Geostationary Navigation
Overlay Service
EGT Exhaust Gas Temperature
EIS Engine Indication System
ELEV elevation
ELEV elevator
EMERGCY emergency
EMI Electromagnetic Interference
ENDUR endurance
Endurance Flight endurance, or total possible
flight time based on available fuel on
board
ENG engine
ENGD engaged
ENR enroute
Enroute Safe Altitude The recommended minimum altitude
within ten miles left or right of the
desired course on an active flight
plan or direct-to
EPE Estimated Position Error
EPU Estimated Position Uncertainty
ERR error
ESA Enroute Safe Altitude
ESP Electronic Stability and Protection
Estimated Position Error A measure of horizontal GPS position
error derived by satellite geometry
conditions and other factors
Estimated Time of Arrival The estimated time at which the
aircraft should reach the destination
waypoint, based upon current speed
and track
Estimated Time Enroute The estimated time it takes to reach
the destination waypoint from the
present position, based upon current
ground speed
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE Estimated Time Enroute
EXPIRD expired
ºF degrees Fahrenheit
FA Course From Fix to Altitude
FAA Federal Aviation Administration
FADEC Full Authority Digital Engine Control
FAF Final Approach Fix
FAIL failure
FC Course From Fix to Distance
FCC Federal Communication Commission
FCST forecast
FD Course From Fix to DME Distance
FD flight director
FDE Fault Detection and Exclusion
FFLOW fuel flow
FIS-B Flight Information Services-
Broadcast
FISDL Flight Information Service Data Link
FL flight level
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
595
APPENDIX C
FLC Flight Level Change
FM Course From Fix to Manual
Termination
FMS Flight Management System
FOB Fuel On Board
FPL flight plan
fpm feet per minute
FREQ frequency
FRZ freezing
FSS Flight Service Station
ft foot/feet
Fuel Flow The fuel flow rate, expressed in units
of fuel per hour
Fuel On Board The total amount of usable fuel on
board the aircraft
G/S, GS glideslope
GA go-around
gal, gl gallon(s)
GBOX gearbox
GDC Garmin Air Data Computer
GDL Garmin Satellite Data Link
GDU Garmin Display Unit
GEA Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
GCS Ground Clutter Suppression
GEO geographic
GFC Garmin Flight Control
GIA Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
GLS Global Navigation Satellite Landing
System
GMA Garmin Audio Panel System
GMT Greenwich Mean Time
GMU Garmin Magnetometer Unit
GND ground
gph gallons per hour
GPS Global Positioning System
Grid MORA Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude;
one degree latitude by one degree
longitude in size and clears the
highest elevation reference point in
the grid by 1000 feet for all areas of
the grid
Groundspeed The velocity the aircraft is travelling
relative to a ground position
Ground Track
see Track
GRS Garmin Reference System
GS Ground speed
GTC Garmin Touchscreen Controller
GTX Garmin Transponder
HA Hold Terminating at Altitude
HDG heading
Heading The direction an aircraft is pointed,
based upon indications from a
magnetic compass or a properly set
directional gyro
HF Hold Terminating at Fix
HFOM Horizontal Figure of Merit
Hg mercury
HI high
HI SENS High Sensitivity
HM Hold with Manual Termination
Horizontal Figure of Merit A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s horizontal position
hPa hectopascal
HPL Horizontal Protection Level
hr hour
HSDB High-Speed Data Bus
HSI Horizontal Situation Indicator
HT heat
HUL Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hz Hertz
I Inner Marker
IAF Initial Approach Fix
IAT Indicated Air Temperature
IAU Integrated Avionics Unit
ICAO International Civil Aviation
Organization
ICS Intercom System
ID Identification/Morse Code Identifier
IDENT, IDNT identification
IF Initial Fix
IFR Instrument Flight Rules
IG Imperial gallon
ILS Instrument Landing System
IMC Instrument Meteorological
Conditions
in inch
INACTV inactive
INC FUEL increase fuel
IND indicated
Indicated Information provided by properly
calibrated and set instrumentation
on the aircraft panel
INFO information
in HG inches of mercury
INT intersection(s)
INTEG integrity (RAIM unavailable)
IrDA, IRDA Infrared Data Association
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B596
APPENDIX C
KEYSTK key stuck
kg kilogram
kHz kilohertz
km kilometer
kt knot
L left, left runway
LAT latitude
LBL label
lb pound
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LCL local
LED Light Emitting Diode
Left Over Fuel On Board The amount of fuel remaining on
board after the completion of one or
more legs of a flight plan or direct-
to
Left Over Fuel Reserve The amount of flight time remaining,
based on the amount of fuel on
board after the completion of one or
more legs of a flight plan or direct-
to, and a known consumption rate
Leg The portion of a flight plan between
two waypoints
LIFR Low Instrument Flight Rules
LNAV Lateral Navigation
LO low
LOC localizer
LOI loss of integrity (GPS)
LON longitude
LPV Localizer Performance with Vertical
guidance
LRU Line Replacement Unit
LT left
LTNG lightning
LVL level
M Middle Marker
m meter
MAG Magnetic
MAG VAR Magnetic Variation
MAHP Missed Approach Hold Point
MAN IN manifold pressure (inches Hg)
MAN SQ Manual Squelch
MAP Missed Approach Point
MASQ Master Avionics Squelch
MAX maximum
MAXSPD maximum speed (overspeed)
MDA barometric minimum descent
altitude
MET manual electric trim
METAR Meteorological Aviation Routine
MEPT manual electric pitch trim
MFD Multi Function Display
MFW Multi Function Window
MGRS Military Grid Reference System
MHz megahertz
MIC microphone
MIN minimum
Minimum Safe Altitude Uses Grid MORAs to determine a
safe altitude within ten miles of the
aircraft present position
MKR marker beacon
MOA Military Operations Area
MOV movement
mpm meters per minute
MSA Minimum Safe Altitude
MSAS Multi-functional Satellite
Augmentation System
MSG message
MSL Mean Sea Level
MT meter
mV millivolt(s)
MVFR Marginal Visual Flight Rules
N north
NAV navigation
NAVAID NAVigation AID
NDB Non-directional Beacon
NEXRAD Next Generation Radar
nm nautical mile(s)
NPT
NRST nearest
O Outer Marker
OAT Outside Air Temperature
OBS Omni Bearing Selector
OFST offset
OXY oxygen
P ALT pressure altitude
PA Passenger Address
PA Proximity Advisory
PASS passenger(s)
PC personal computer
PFD Primary Flight Display
PI Procedure Turn to Course Intercept
PIT, PTCH pitch
POSN position
PPM parts per million
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
597
APPENDIX C
P. POS Present Position
PRES, PRESS pressure
PROC procedure(s), procedure turn
psi pounds per square inch
PT Procedure Turn
PTK parallel track
PTT Push-to-Talk
PWR power
QTY quantity
R right, right runway
RAD radial
RAIM Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring
RAM random access memory
REF reference
REM remaining (fuel remaining)
REQ required
RES reserve (fuel reserve entered by
pilot)
REV reverse, revision, revise
RF Constant Radius Turn to Fix
RMI Radio Magnetic Indicator
RMT remote
RNG range
RNWY runway
ROL roll
ROM read only memory
rpm revolutions per minute
RST FUEL reset fuel
RSV reserve (fuel reserve entered by
pilot)
RT right
RVRSNRY reversionary
RX receive
S south
SA Selective Availability
SAT Static Air Temperature
SBAS Satellite-Based Augmentation
System
SCIT Storm Cell Identification and
Tracking
SD Secure Digital
sec second(s)
SEL, SLCT select
SELCAL Selective Calling
SFC surface
SIAP Standard Instrument Approach
Procedures
SID Standard Instrument Departure
SIGMET Significant Meteorological
Information
Sim simulator
SLP/SKD slip/skid
SMBL symbol
SPD speed
SPI Special Position Identification
SPKR speaker
SQ squelch
SRVC, SVC service
STAL stall
STAR Standard Terminal Arrival Route
STATS statistics
STBY standby
STD standard
STRMSCP Stormscope
SUA Special Use Airspace
SUSP suspend
SVS Synthetic Vision System
SW software
SYS system
T true
TA Traffic Advisory
TACAN Tactical Air Navigation System
TAF Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
TAS True Airspeed
TAS Traffic Advisory System
TAT Total Air Temperature
TAWS Terrain Awareness and Warning System
TCA Terminal Control Area
TCAS Traffic Collision Avoidance System
TEL telephone
TEMP temperature
TERM terminal
TF Track Between Two Fixes
TFR Temporary Flight Restriction
T HDG True Heading
TIS Traffic Information System
TIT Turbine Inlet Temperature
TKE Track Angle Error
TMA Terminal Maneuvering Area
TMR/REF Timer/Reference
TOLD Takeoff and Landing Data
Topo topographic
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B598
APPENDIX C
Track Direction of aircraft movement relative
to a ground position; also ‘Ground
Track’
Track Angle Error The angle difference between the
desired track and the current track
TRG target
TRK track
TRSA Terminal Radar Service Area
TRUNC truncated
TTL total
TURN procedure turn
TX transmit
UNAVAIL unavailable
USR user
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
UTM/UPS Universal Transverse Mercator/ Universal
Polar Stereographic Grid
V, Vspeed velocity (airspeed)
VA Heading Vector to Altitude
VAPP VOR approach
VAR variation
VD Heading Vector to DME Distance
Vdc volts, direct current
VERT vertical
Vertical Figure of Merit A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s vertical position
Vertical Speed Required The vertical speed necessary to
descend/climb from a current
position and altitude to a defined
target position and altitude, based
upon current groundspeed
VFOM Vertical Figure of Merit
VFR Visual Flight Rules
VHF Very High Frequency
VI Heading Vector to Intercept
VLOC VOR/Localizer Receiver
VM Heading Vector to Manual Termination
VMC Visual Meteorological Conditions
VNAV, VNV vertical navigation
VOL volume
VOR VHF Omni-directional Range
VORTAC very high frequency omnidirectional
range station and tactical air
navigation
VPL Vertical Protection Level
VPROF VNV profile, vertical profile
VPTH VNV path, vertical path
VR Heading Vector to Radial
VS vertical speed
VSI Vertical Speed Indicator
VSR Vertical Speed Required
VTF vector to final
W watt(s), west
WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System
WGS-84 World Geodetic System - 1984
WPT waypoint(s)
WW world wide
WX weather
XFER, XFR transfer
XPDR transponder
XTALK cross-talk
XTK cross-track
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
599
APPENDIX D
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
If a particular aspect of the Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 operational capability is not addressed by these
commonly asked questions or in the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact
information) or a Garmin-authorized dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.
WHat iS SBaS?
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal
errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances, timing, and satellite
orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite. The signal
correction is then broadcast through geostationary satellites. This correction information can then be received
by any SBAS-enabled GPS receiver.
SBAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable users to rely
on GPS for all phases of flight.
There are several SBAS systems serving different parts of the world. The Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS) is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and Hawaii. The European Geostationary
Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) offers coverage of Europe, parts of the middle east and northern Africa. The
Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation System (MSAS) covers mainly Japan and parts of northern Australia.
HoW DoeS SBaS affect aPProacH oPerationS?
Both LNAV/VNAV and LPV approaches use the accuracy of SBAS to include vertical (glide path) guidance
capability. The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved instrument approaches to
an expanded number of airports throughout the U.S.
The implementation of LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities. LPV approaches
are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the SBAS. This approach combines the LNAV/
VNAV vertical accuracy with lateral guidance similar to the typical Instrument Landing System (ILS). LPV
approaches allow lower approach minimums.
WHat iS raim anD HoW DoeS it affect aPProacH oPerationS?
RAIM is an acronym for Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring. RAIM is a GPS receiver function that
performs the following functions:
• Monitors and verifies integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
• Notifies the pilot when satellite conditions do not provide the necessary coverage to support a certain phase
of flight
• Predicts satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is
sufficient to satisfy requirements
NOTE
: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become
active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the LOI annunciation
flagging on the HSI.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B600
APPENDIX D
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is
required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.
RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
system monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A). Without
RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the pilot
must fly the missed approach procedure.
WHy migHt tHere Be no aPProacHeS availaBle for a fligHt Plan?
Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind some
VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a published
approach, the system indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.
WHat HaPPenS WHen an aPProacH iS SelecteD? can a fligHt Plan WitH an aPProacH, a DePartUre, or an
arrival Be StoreD?
When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
instrument procedure. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.
Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note the active flight plan is
erased when the system is turned off. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is
activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the system uses the waypoint
information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the
system automatically updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should an
approach, departure, or arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until the
procedure is deleted from the flight plan.
can “Slant golf” (“/g”) Be fileD USing tHe ProDigy® toUcH fligHt Deck 300?
“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired database. See
the approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for more
information.
WHat DoeS tHe oBS Softkey Do?
The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and
the system automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present
active waypoint.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
601
APPENDIX D
Normal (OBS not activated)
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints
• Manual course change on HSI not possible
• Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint
• Must be in this mode for final approach
course
OBS
• Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected
waypoint
• Manually select course to waypoint from
HSI
• Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
• Cannot be set for final approach course or
published holding patterns
WHy migHt tHe ProDigy® toUcH fligHt Deck 300 not aUtomatically SeqUence to tHe neXt WayPoint?
The system only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no ‘OBS’ or
‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the bisector of
the turn being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs
at an equal angle from each leg.
WHen DoeS tUrn anticiPation Begin?
The system smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
• A waypoint alert (‘Next DTK ###° in # seconds’ or ‘Next HDG ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10
seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.
• A flashing turn advisory (‘Turn [right/left] to ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the
turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next [DTK/HDG] to ###° now’
is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next
DTK or HDG value.
• The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate the midpoint of the turn has been crossed.
WHen DoeS tHe cDi Scale cHange?
Once a departure is activated, the system Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) full scale deflection is set to 0.3
nm. The CDI scale changes to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) then ramps up to 2.0 nm (enroute mode) at 30 nm
from the departure airport. When 31 nm from the destination, the CDI scale smoothly transition from 2.0 nm
back to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). At 2.0 nm before the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions
down further based on the type of approach activated (LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LPV). When a missed approach is
activated, the CDI is set to 0.3 nm. See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on CDI scaling.
WHy DoeS tHe HSi not reSPonD like a vor WHen oBS moDe iS active?
Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B602
APPENDIX D
HoW Do i activate a miSSeD aPProacH ProceDUre?
To comply with TSO specifications, the system does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Button is selected
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
published approach.
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), touch the PROC Button on
the Home Screen or the Active Flight Plan Screen. Touch the Activate Missed Approach Button to activate
the missed approach portion of the procedure.
after a miSSeD aPProacH, HoW can tHe Same aPProacH Be re-SelecteD? HoW can a neW aPProacH Be
activateD?
NOTE
: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point
(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The system directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.
After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt
by touching the
PROC
Button on the Home Screen, followed by the Activate Approach Button. The system
provides navigation along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that
point.
To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by touching the
PROC
Button,
then touch the Approach Button to access the Approach Selection Screen. Then touch the Approach Button.
The Touchscreen Controller displays a list of approaches as buttons. Scroll as needed and touch the desired
approach button, then touch a transition button. The Touchscreen Controller returns to the Approach Selection
Screen. To activate the selected approach, touch the Load & Activate Button.
To activate a new approach to a different airport, touch the Direct To Button to access the Direct To Screen.
Then touch the waypoint point and enter the desired airport using the keypad or large and small right knobs.
Touch the Enter Button or push the Right Knob to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the
preceding paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
603
APPENDIX E
MAP SYMBOLS
AIRPORTS
Item Symbol
Unknown Airport
Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport
Towered, Non-serviced Airport
Non-towered, Serviced Airport
Towered, Serviced Airport
Restricted (Private) Airport
Heliport
NAVAIDS
Item Symbol
Intersection
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)
NDB (non-directional radio beacon)
VOR
VOR/DME
VOR/ILS
VORTAC
TACAN
BASEMAP
Item Symbol
Interstate Highway
State Highway
US Highway
National Highway
City
State/Province Border
International Border
Road
Railroad
Latitude/Longitude
AIRSPACE BOUNDARIES
Item Symbol
ICAO Control Area
Class B Airspace
Mode C Tower Area
Warning Area
Alert Area
Caution Area
Danger Area
Prohibited Area
Restricted Area
Training Area
Unknown Area
Class C
Terminal Radar Service Area
Mode C Area
Military Operations Area (MOA)
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B604
APPENDIX E
HAZARD AVOIDANCE FEATURES
Feature Symbol
Terrain Proximity/TAWS display enabled
Traffic display enabled
NEXRAD display enabled
Cloud Top display enabled
Echo Top display enabled
XM Lightning display enabled
Cell Movement display enabled
SIGMETs/AIRMETs display enabled
METARs display enabled
City Forecast display enabled
Surface Analysis display enabled
Freezing Levels display enabled
Winds Aloft display enabled
County Warnings display enabled
Cyclone Warnings display enabled
Loss of hazard avoidance feature
(loss of GPS position)
TRAFFIC
Item Symbol
Non-threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory
Traffic Advisory, Out of Range
Traffic Advisory
MISCELLANEOUS
Item Symbol
ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency
Map Pointer (when panning)
Elevation Pointer
(on Topography Scale when panning)
Measuring Pointer
Wind Vector
Overzoom Indicator
User Waypoint
Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint
Parallel Track Waypoint
Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint
Top of Descent (TOD)
Bottom of Descent (BOD)
Navigating using Dead Reckoning
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
605
APPENDIX E
OBSTACLE DATABASE
Unlighted Obstacle Lighted Obstacle Obstacle Location
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Gray obstacle is more than 1000 ft
below aircraft altitude
Table F-1 Obstacle Colors
TAWS-A COLORS AND SYMBOLS
Figure 6-138 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-A
Figure F-2 TAWS-A Potential Impact Points
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
190-01537-00 Rev. B606
APPENDIX E
Blank Page
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
I-1
INDEX
A
AAirport Directory ---------------------------------- 587, 588
Abnormal engine operations ----------------------------- 129
Activate a Flight Plan --------------------------------------274
Active database ------------------------------------- 582, 583
Active frequency
ADF --------------------------------------------------------159
AC-U-KWIK ------------------------------------------ 587, 588
ADF
ADF mode ----------------------------------------- 159, 162
ANT mode ------------------------------------------------ 162
Volume ----------------------------------------------------159
ADF/BFO ----------------------------------------------------162
ADF frequency tuning -------------------------------------160
Advisories, CAS -------------------------------------- 555–556
AFCS status box --------------------------------------------- 62
AHRS --------------------------------------- 36, 569, 570, 574
Airborne Color Weather Radar ---------------------------373
Aircraft symbol ---------------------------------------------- 68
Air Data Computer ----------------------------------------559
Airport Directory -------------------------------------------588
Airport Hot Spots ------------------------------------------482
Airport Signs ----------------------------------- 85, 86, 87, 93
Airspace Alerts ---------------------------------------------247
Airspeed bug -----------------------------------------------442
Airspeed Indicator ------------------------------------------ 64
Airspeed Reference ------------------------62, 65, 444–445
Airspeed Reference Bug ----------------------------------- 62
Alerts
Arrival ------------------------------------------------------ 50
Audio voice ----------------------------------------------- 50
Alerts, Aircraft ----------------------------------------------552
Along Track Offset ---------------------------------- 278, 279
ALT -----------------------------------------------------------338
Altimeter --------------------------------------------62, 69–70
Altimeter barometric setting ------------------------------ 70
Altitude alerting -------------------------------------------- 101
Altitude capture -------------------------------------------- 449
Altitude constraints ---------------------------------------- 293
Altitude Hold Mode ---------------------------------------441
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT) ---------------------------------441
Altitude Reference -----------------------------------------449
ANT/BFO ----------------------------------------------------162
Antenna stabilization ------------------------------ 391, 392
Antenna tilt -------------------------------------------------387
AOPA ------------------------------------------------- 587, 588
AOPA airport directory ------------------------------------481
AOPA Airport Directory ----------------------- 503, 504, 505
Approach ---------------------------------------------------- 600
Activating ----------------------------------------- 303, 304
ILS ---------------------------------------------------------473
Loading -------------------------------------------- 271, 303
Missed ----------------------------------------------------476
Removing -------------------------------------------------304
WAAS -----------------------------------------------------474
Approach Mode, AFCS ----------------------------- 473, 474
Approach Mode (GPS, VAPP, LOC) ----------------------459
Arrival procedure ----------------- 254, 269, 325, 327, 337
Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) 1, 4, 36–37
Attitude & Heading Reference System ------------------559
Attitude indicator ----------------------------- 62, 66, 66–67
Attitude Indicator ------------------------------------------421
Audio Controller fail-safe operation --------------------188
Audio controls
SPKR ------------------------------------------------------169
Aural alerts--------------------------------------------------562
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) ----- 2, 431–480
Alerts and annunciations ----------------------- 478–479
Controls ------------------------------------------- 433–434
Example procedures ----------------------------- 464–471
Automatic squelch ----------------------------------------- 147
Automatic Thrust Reserve (ATR) ------------------ 112–113
Autopilot ---------------------------------------431, 461–463
Autopilot Disconnect --------------------------------------434
Auto-tuning ------------------------------------------------- 157
Auto Zoom -------------------------------------------------- 196
Aviation Symbols ------------------------------------ 207, 254
B
Barometric Altimeter Setting ------------------------------ 62
Barometric setting, Altimeter ------------------------------ 70
Basic Empty Weight ---------------------------------------307
Basic Operating Weight -----------------------------------307
Battery indications ---------------------------------- 111, 115
Bearing information windows ---------------------------- 63
Bearing pointer ---------------------------------------------- 77
Bearing source ---------------------------------------------- 77
C
Calibrated Airspeed ----------------------------------------312
Cargo --------------------------------------------------------308
CAS Window ------------------------------------------------- 63
Cautions, CAS --------------------------------------- 553–555
CDI --------------------------------- 300, 316, 327, 336, 340
Chart Not Available --------------------------------- 489, 498
ChartView -------------------------------------- 481, 486, 492
ChartView database --------------------------------------- 493
Checklists -------------------------------------------- 546–547
CLD TOP Softkey -------------------------------------------359
Closest Point ------------------------------------------------285
COM frequency box -------------------------------- 136, 149
COM Frequency Box ---------------------------------------- 62
COM Frequency Tuning -----------------------------------139
Command Bars --------------------------------------------- 437
Comparator -------------------------------------------------558
COM tuning failure ----------------------------------------187
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
I-2
INDEX
Controls
PFD/MFD -------------------------------------------------6–7
Control Wheel Steering (CWS) -------------------- 434, 462
Copy a Flight Plan -----------------------------------------275
Course deviation indicator (CDI) ------------------------- 62
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) -------------------- 78–82
Changing scale ------------------------------------------601
Course To Altitude -----------------------------------------306
Crew Alerting System (CAS) ----------------------- 128–132
Messages ------------------------------------------ 128–132
Cruise Speed Control (CSC) ------------------------------115
D
Data Bar fields, MFD -----------------------------------49, 50
Databases ------------------------------------------------4, 581
Database Synchronization ------------------------- 581, 586
Data entry ----------------------------------------------- 30–31
Data Link Receiver -------------------2, 481, 530, 549, 550
Datalink receiver troubleshooting -----------------------549
Data Logging ---------------------------------------- 481, 544
Day/Night views ------------------------------------- 489, 498
Day view -------------------- 489, 490, 491, 498, 499, 500
DB Mismatch ---------------------------------------- 581, 585
Dead Reckoning --------------------------------------------105
Decision Height --------------------------------------------- 63
Decision Height (DH) --------------------------------------102
Declutter, display ------------------------------------------- 106
Delete Flight Plans ----------------------------------------- 275
Density Altitude --------------------------------------------314
Departure procedure -------------------267, 281, 296, 298
Departure Time ---------------------------------------------312
Dilution of Precision (DOP) -------------------------------- 39
Direct-to -------- 248, 250, 251, 252, 289, 290, 327, 340
Display controls ------------------------------------------ 6–13
DME
HOLD mode ----------------------------------------------163
NAV1 mode ----------------------------------------------163
NAV2 mode ----------------------------------------------163
Tuning mode -------------------------------------- 159, 163
DME information -------------------------------------------- 77
Dual navigation database --------------------------------583
E
ECHO TOP Softkey -----------------------------------------358
Electrical indications -------------------------------- 115, 123
Electronic checklists ------------------- 481–482, 546, 547
Emergency frequency --------------------------------------187
Engine Airframe Unit ----------------------------------------- 1
Engine failure ----------------------------------------------- 129
Engine fire --------------------------------------------------129
Engine Indication System (EIS) -------------------- 111–118
Engine maintenance ---------------------------------------127
Engine rotation speeds ---------------------------- 111, 113
Entering Flight ID ------------------------------------------164
Entertainment audio --------------------------------------534
Entertainment inputs --------------------------------------179
Environmental Control System (ECS) ------------ 121–122
Estimated Landing Fuel ---------------------------- 309, 310
Estimated Position Error (EPE) ---------------------------- 39
Excess Fuel Weight --------------------------- 309, 310, 311
Excessive Descent Rate Alert ----------------------------- 408
F
Fan speed ---------------------------------------------------388
Field of view -----------------------------85, 89, 90, 96, 217
Field of View (SVS) ----------------------------------------- 217
Flap Indicator ---------------------------------------- 111, 118
Flight director ----------------------------------431, 435–436
Pitch modes --------------------------------------- 439–445
Roll modes ---------------------------------------- 454–456
Switching ------------------------------------------ 432, 436
Flight ID -----------------------------------------------------168
Flight instruments -------------------------------------- 61–76
Flight Level Change Mode --------------------------------444
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC) ----------------- 469, 471
Flight Path Marker ---------------------------- 85, 87, 91, 92
Flight plan
Closest point to reference -----------------------------285
Storing ----------------------------------------------------600
Flight plan data fields: ------------------------------------278
Flight plan import/export messages --------------------576
Flight timer ----------------------------------------------- 55, 56
FliteCharts® ---------------------- 481, 495, 500, 501, 502
FliteCharts expiration -------------------------------------501
FPA ---------------------------------------------------- 292, 333
FPM -------------------------------------------------------91, 92
Frequency
Nearest ---------------------------------------------------244
Frequency spacing -----------------------------------------146
Frequently asked questions -------------------------------599
Fuel
Efficiency -------------------------------------------------314
Endurance ------------------------------------------------314
Remaining ------------------------------------------------ 314
Required --------------------------------------------------314
Fuel indications ------------------------------- 111, 115, 124
Fuel on Board --------------------------------------- 309, 314
Fuel Statistics -----------------------------------------------314
Full Mode ------------------6, 7, 27, 28, 29, 30, 33, 34, 35
G
Garmin Flight Data Services ------------------------------ 481
Garmin SVT™ ----------------------------------------- 85, 481
GFC 700 -----------------------------------------------------431
Glidepath ----------------------------------------------------338
Glidepath indicator ----------------------------------------- 63
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
I-3
INDEX
Glidepath Indicator ----------------------------------------- 72
Glidepath Mode (GP) ------------------------- 450, 459, 474
Glideslope --------------------------------------------------- 338
Glideslope Indicator ---------------------------------------- 72
Glideslope Mode (GS) ------------------------------ 452, 473
Global Positioning System (GPS)
Navigation ---------------------------------------- 248–344
Receiver information -------------------------------- 38–40
Go Around Mode ------------------------------------------453
Go Around Mode (GA) ----------------------------- 476–477
GTX 33 Transponder ---------------------------------------164
H
Heading Bug ------------------------------------------------- 62
Heading indicator ------------------------------------------- 62
Heading Select Mode (HDG) ---------------------- 456, 465
HI SENS ------------------------------------------------------ 159
Horizon Heading ------------------------------ 85, 86, 87, 92
Horizontal scan -------------------------------------- 386, 387
Horizontal situation indicator (HSI) ---------------------- 62
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) ----------------- 74–84
HSI double green arrow -----------------------------------151
HSI magenta arrow ----------------------------------------151
HSI single green arrow ------------------------------------ 151
I
IDENT function ---------------------------------------------168
ID indicator -------------------------------------------------156
ILS approach ------------------------------------------------ 473
Indicated airspeed ------------------------------------------ 64
Indicated Altitude ------------------------------------------312
Inset map ---------------------------------------------------- 63
Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) ------------------------------ 1
Intersection
Information --------------------------------------- 227–228
Interstage Turbine Temperature (ITT) ------------- 111, 129
Inverting a flight plan -------------------------------------274
IOI ----------------------------------------------------- 405, 578
Iridium ------------------------------------506, 510, 511, 512
Iridium satellite network --------------------- 506, 510, 518
J
Jeppesen aviation database ------------------------------ 581
L
Landing Field Elevation (LFE) ----------------------------116
Landing gear status -------------------------------- 111, 117
Land Symbols ----------------------------------------------- 206
LNAV --------------------------------------------------------- 316
Log File ------------------------------------------------------545
LO SENS -----------------------------------------------------159
Low Altitude Annunciation -------------------------------102
Low speed data --------------------------------------------506
LPV ---------------------------------------------------- 316, 340
LPV approach -----------------------------------------------464
M
Mach number------------------------------------------------ 64
Mach number indicator ------------------------------------ 62
Magnetometer ---------------------------------------------- 37
Map Panning -----------------------------------------------198
Map symbols -----------------------------------------------603
Marker beacon ---------------------------------------------158
Marker Beacon Annunciations ---------------------------100
Measurement units, changing displayed ------------42, 45
Message advisories ---------------------563, 569, 573, 574
Metric display, Altimeter ------------------------------ 69–70
MFD Data Bar fields ------------------------------------49, 50
MFD/PFD Control Unit -------------------------------- 30–31
Minimum Anti-Ice N1 Bug ------------------- 113, 114, 126
Minimum Descent Altitude -------------------------------- 63
Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) ----------------------102
MISCOMP ---------------------------------------------------558
Missed Approach----------------- 254, 305, 316, 340, 476
Mode S ------------------------------------------------------164
Mode S Transponder
TCAS II Transponder Controls -------------------------164
TCAS II Transponder Mode Selection -----------------165
Morse code identifier --------------------------------------156
Multi Function Display (MFD)
Controls --------------------------------------------------6–7
Music 1 ------------------------------------------------------179
N
N1 gauge --------------------------------------113–114, 129
N1 Transient Limit ------------------------------------------113
N2 indications ----------------------------------------------113
National Weather Service --------------------------------- 368
NAV1 audio ------------------------------------------------- 152
NAV2 audio ------------------------------------------------- 152
NAV frequency box ----------------------------------------133
Navigation database --------------------------------------293
Navigation Map -------------------------------------------- 251
Navigation Mode, AFCS ---------------------------- 467–468
Navigation mode selection -------------------------------151
Navigation Mode (VOR, GPS, LOC, BC) ----------------457
Navigation source ------------------------------------- 78–80
Nav radio selection ----------------------------------------151
NAV Receiver Tuning --------------------------------------152
Nearest
Airports -------------------------------------------- 244–247
VOR ------------------------------------------------ 244–245
nearest airport -------------------- 225, 229, 232, 235, 239
Nearest Airport ------------- 225, 226, 229, 232, 235, 239
Minimum Runway Length ---------------------- 225, 226
Surface Matching ---------------------------------------226
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
I-4
INDEX
NEXRAD Softkey -------------------------------------------355
Night view ------------------------------------------- 489, 498
NO COMP --------------------------------------------------- 558
Non-path descent -----------------------------448, 471–472
Normal display operation ---------------------------------- 32
NOTAMs ----------------------------------------------------- 486
O
OBS Mode----------------------------------------------- 83–84
Obstacles --------------------------------------------- 565, 566
Odometer ------------------------------------------------55, 57
Oil, engine ------------------------------------------- 111, 113
Omni Bearing Selector (OBS) ---------------------- 600–601
Other Statistics -------------------------------------- 312, 314
Outside Air Temperature (OAT) --------------------------112
P
Parallel Track ----------------------------------------- 279, 281
Passenger address -----------------------------------------176
Passenger(s) ------------------------------------------------308
PA system ---------------------------------------------------176
Pathways ------------------------------86, 87, 88, 89, 90, 91
PFD mode switch ------------------------------------------- 32
Pilot and Stores Weight -----------------------------------307
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT) ------------------------------------- 440
Pitch indication ---------------------------------------------- 66
Pitch modes, flight director ------------------------ 439–445
Pitch Reference ---------------------------------------------440
Power-up, system --------------------------------------------- 4
Pressure, oil ------------------------------------------ 111, 113
Pressurization-----------------------------------------------116
Primary Flight Display (PFD)
Controls --------------------------------------------------6–7
Procedure examples, AFCS ------------------------ 464–471
R
RA ------------------------------------------------------------420
Radar altitude ----------------------------------------------103
RAIM --------------------------------------------------------- 300
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) 40–41,
599
Removing Flight Plan Items ------------------------------276
Required Vertical Speed ----------------------------------- 334
Required Vertical Speed Indicator -----------------------334
Reversionary Mode ----------------------------------- 85, 107
Reversionary sensor ---------------------------------------559
Reversionary Sensor Window ----------------------------- 63
ROC --------------------------------------------- 405, 577, 578
Roll Hold Mode (ROL) -------------------------------------455
Roll modes, flight director ------------------------- 454–457
Roll Reference ----------------------------------------------455
Runway ---------------------------------------------- 85, 93, 94
Minimum length ------------------------------------------ 45
RVSI --------------------------------------------------- 334, 335
RX Indicator-------------------------------------------------138
S
SafeTaxi® ------------------------- 481, 482, 483, 484, 485
SafeTaxi database ------------------------------------------485
Satellite Radio --------------------------------- 530, 531, 532
SBAS ---------------------------------------------------------599
Scheduler ---------------------------------------481–482, 535
SD card ------------------------------------------------------- 59
Sector scan --------------------------------------------------390
Secure Digital (SD) card ----------------------------------- 581
Selected Altitude ------ 62, 101, 443, 444, 445, 449, 464
Selected altitude bug --------------------------------------- 62
Selected Altitude Capture Mode ------------------ 441, 443
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS) ----------------446
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc ---------------------------218
Selected course ---------------------------------------------- 63
Selected Course ------------------------------------- 457, 460
Selected heading ---------------------------------------- 63, 74
Selected Heading ------------------------------------------433
Selecting a COM radio ----------------------------- 136, 149
Sensor -------------------------------------------------------559
Sequencing, automatic ------------------------------------601
Sequencing waypoints, suspend -------------------------- 84
Servos ----------------------------------------------------------- 2
Servos, AFCS ------------------------------------------------431
Simultaneous COM Operation ---------------------------178
SiriusXM
Radio ------------------------------------------------------ 346
Receiver troubleshooting ------------------------------549
SiriusXM Weather ---------------------------------------346
NEXRAD --------------------------------------------------355
XM Satellite Weather
Activating ------------------------------------------------346
SiriusXM radio entertainment ---------------------------- 179
SiriusXM radio volume ------------------------------------534
SiriusXM Satellite Radio ------------------------------------- 2
SiriusXM Weather
AIREPs ----------------------------------------------------372
Icing -------------------------------------------------------370
PIREPs-----------------------------------------------------372
Turbulence ----------------------------------------- 370, 371
Slip/Skid indicator --------------------------------------- 62, 67
Softkeys------------------------------------------------------- 63
Speaker ------------------------------------------------------169
Speed brake status --------------------------------- 111, 117
Split Mode -------------------------6, 27, 28, 32, 33, 34, 35
Standby frequency
ADF --------------------------------------------------------159
Standby Navigation Database ---------------------------583
Static air temperature (SAT) ---------------------------63, 97
Stereo headsets --------------------------------------------169
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
I-5
INDEX
Stuck microphone ------------------------------------------187
Sunrise ------------------------------------------------------- 313
Sunset -------------------------------------------------------313
SVT -----------------------------------------------------------575
SVT troubleshooting --------------------------------------- 107
Symbols, map ----------------------------------------------- 603
Synoptics --------------------------------------------- 119–126
Synthetic vision (SVT) -------------------------------------- 85
System alerting --------------------------------------------- 100
System annunciations -------------------------------------560
System ID----------------------------------------------------506
System power-up --------------------------------------------- 4
System Status Page ----------------------------------------- 52
System time -------------------------------------------------- 62
T
TA ------------------------------------------------------------420
Takeoff Mode ----------------------------------------------- 453
TAS -----------------------------------------------------------569
TAS Traffic
Non-Threat Traffic ---------------------------------------419
PA----------------------------------------------------------419
Proximity Advisory---------------------------------------419
TAWS -------------------------------------101, 418, 577, 578
TAWS-A -----------------------------------------------------578
TAWS Annunciation ---------------------------------------- 63
TAWS-B ------------------------------------------------------ 399
TCAS II Traffic
Operation -------------------------------------------------425
TCAS II Alerts --------------------------------------------420
Telephone -----------------------------------2, 481, 506, 510
Temperature, oil ------------------------------------- 111, 113
Temperature, Outside Air (OAT) --------------------------112
Terrain ------------------------------------405, 565, 577, 578
Color indications ----------------------------------------605
Terrain Awareness and Warning System ----------------399
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) ------100
Text message ---------------------------------------- 518, 523
Thrust rating ------------------------------------------------114
Timer
Flight ------------------------------------------------------- 58
Timer, PFD generic ------------------------------------------ 55
TOD --------------------------------------------------- 333, 334
Top of Descent -------------------------------------- 333, 334
Total air temperature (TAT) ----------------------------62, 97
Track ---------------------------------------------------------- 74
Track indicator -------------------------------------------62, 74
Traffic
Voice alerts -----------------------------------------------100
Traffic annunciation----------------------------------- 63, 100
Traffic symbols ----------------------------------------------- 92
Transponder code entry -----------------------------------166
Transponder data box -------------------------------------133
Transponder standby mode ------------------------------165
Transponder status box ------------------------------------ 62
Trend Vector
Turn Rate -------------------------------------------------- 76
Trend vector, airspeed -------------------------------------- 64
Trim Indicator ---------------------------------- 111, 118, 131
Trip Planning ----------------------------- 307, 312, 313, 314
Trip Statistics ----------------------------------------- 313, 314
True Airspeed -----------------------------------------------314
True airspeed (TAS) ----------------------------------------- 62
Turn anticipation -------------------------------------------601
Turn Rate Indicator -------------------------------------62, 76
TX indicator ------------------------------------------------- 138
U
Unable to display chart ---------------------------- 489, 498
Updating Jeppesen databases ---------------------------493
V
VDI ---------------------------------------------------- 334, 335
Vertical deviation ------------------------------------------448
Vertical deviation guidance ------------------------------293
Vertical Deviation Indicator ------------------------------334
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) ------------------------- 72
Vertical navigation ----------------------------------------- 293
Direct-to --------------------------------------------------291
Vertical Navigation (VNV)
Flight control -------------------------------------- 445–449
Vertical Path Tracking Mode (VPTH) -------446–447, 470
Vertical speed guidance-----------------------------------293
Vertical Speed Indicator ------------------------- 62, 63, 421
Vertical speed indicator (VSI) ----------------------------- 71
Vertical Speed Mode --------------------------------------443
VNV --------------------------------------------------- 333, 598
VNV guidance
Enabling --------------------------------------------------290
VNV indications, PFD --------------------------------------- 99
VNV Target Altitude -------------------------------- 446–449
VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV) ------------449
Voltmeter, battery ----------------------------------- 111, 115
Volume level
ADF --------------------------------------------------------159
VOR
Nearest -------------------------------------------- 244–245
VOR selection -----------------------------------------------151
VSI ------------------------------------------------------------335
Vspeeds ---------------------------------------------63, 65–66
VS TGT ------------------------------------------------------- 292
190-01537-00 Rev. B
Embraer Prodigy® Touch Flight Deck 300 Pilot’s Guide
I-6
INDEX
W
WAAS -------------------------------------316, 464, 566, 599
WAAS precision approach --------------------------------474
WATCH ------------------------------------------------------392
Waypoint
Automatic sequencing ---------------------------------601
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight -------------------392
Wi-Fi -----------------------------------------2, 481, 506, 527
Wind -------------------------------------------------- 193, 215
Wind data ---------------------------------------------------- 63
Wings level--------------------------------------------------455
Z
Zero Pitch Line ------------------------------------------87, 92
Zoom
Auto ------------------------------------------------------- 196
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200
f:913.397.8282
www.garmin.com
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411
f:503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road
Houndsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
p:44/0870.8501241
f:44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099

Navigation menu